Vision Engineering Manual (4800DR 401)

Ross Video Limited
V I S I O N
Vision
Engineering Manual
Software Issue: v18.0 MD

Vision • Engineering Manual
• Ross Part Number: 4800DR-401-18.0
• Release Date: January 20, 2015. Printed in Canada.
• Software Issue: v18.0 MD
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice or obligation.
Copyright
©2015 Ross Video Limited, Ross®, OverDrive®, and any related marks are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Ross Video Limited. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective companies. PATENTS ISSUED and PENDING. All rights reserved. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any
means, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission
of Ross Video. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, Ross
Video assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for
damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
Mac OS X is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Fedora and the Infinity design logo are trademarks of Red Hat, Inc.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be
trademarks of their respective owners.
Python and PyCon are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Python Software Foundation.
Patents
Patent numbers 4,205,346; 5,115,314; 5,280,346; 5,561,404; 7,034,886; 7,508,455; 7,602,446;
7,834,886; 7,914,332; 8,499,019 B2; 2039277; 1237518; 1127289 and other patents pending.
Send Us Your Comments

We welcome any comments you have about our documentation. Send comments to the Technical
Communications department at the following address: [email protected]
Important Regulatory and Safety Notices to Service
Personnel
Before using this product and any associated equipment, refer to the “Important Safety
Instructions” listed below to avoid personnel injury and to prevent product damage.
Product may require specific equipment, and/or installation procedures to be carried out to satisfy
certain regulatory compliance requirements. Notices have been included in this publication to call
attention to these specific requirements.
Symbol Meanings
Protective Earth — This symbol identifies a Protective Earth (PE) terminal, which is
provided for connection of the supply system’s protective earth (green or green/yellow)
conductor.
This symbol on the equipment refers you to important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions within the Product Manual Documentation. Failure to heed this information may
present a major risk of damage or injury to persons or equipment.
Warning — The symbol with the word “Warning” within the equipment manual indicates a
potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Caution — The symbol with the word “Caution” within the equipment manual indicates a
potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It
may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Warning Hazardous Voltages — This symbol is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of shock to persons.
ESD Susceptibility — This symbol is used to alert the user that an electrical or electronic
device or assembly is susceptible to damage from an ESD event.
Important Safety Instructions

Warning 1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
8. Do not install near heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized
plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades
and a third grounding prong. The third prong is provided for your safety. If the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete
outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as when the power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
14. Do not expose this apparatus to dripping or splashing, and ensure that no objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, are placed on the apparatus.
15. To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains, disconnect the power
supply cord plug from the AC receptacle.
16. The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily operable.
17. The Octane/QMD-X, MD-X, QMD, and MD (Live Production Engine) chassis is to be
rack mounted only.
Warning 18. Indoor Use: WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this
apparatus to rain or moisture.
19. The safe operation of this product requires that a protective earth connection be
provided. A grounding conductor in the equipment's supply cord provides this protective
earth. To reduce the risk of electrical shock to the operator and service personnel, this
ground conductor must be connected to an earthed ground.
20. WARNING: This apparatus, when equipped with multiple power supplies, can generate
high leakage currents. To reduce the risk of electric shock, ensure that each individual
supply cord is connected to its own separate branch circuit with an earth connection.
21. CAUTION: These service instructions are for use by qualified service personnel only.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that
contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so (Engineering
Manual only).
Caution 22. These apparatus contain Lithium batteries, which if replaced incorrectly, or with an
incorrect type, may cause an explosion. Replace only with the same type. Dispose of
used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
23. Service barriers within this product are intended to protect the operator and service
personnel from hazardous voltages. For continued safety, replace all barriers after
servicing.
24. Certain parts of this equipment still present a safety hazard with the power switch in the
OFF position. To avoid electrical shock, disconnect all A/C power cords from the
chassis' rear appliance connectors before servicing.
25. This product contains safety critical parts, which, if incorrectly replaced, may present a
risk of fire or electrical shock. Components contained within the product’s power
supplies and power supply area are not intended to be customer-serviced and should be
returned to the factory for repair.
26. To reduce the risk of fire, replacement fuses must be the same type and rating.
27. Use only power cords specified for this product and certified for the country of use.
28. The safe operation of this equipment requires that the user heed and adhere to all
installation and servicing instruction contained within the equipment’s Engineering
Manuals.
29. For applicable V-100/V-100A Touchscreen Panel power supplies, see user instructions
contained within the Product’s Engineering Manual.
30. WARNING: Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like.
31. WARNING: This product includes an “Ethernet Port” which allows this product to be
connected to a local area network (LAN). Only connect to networks that remain inside
the building. Do not connect to networks that go outside the building.
EMC Notices
United States of America

FCC Part 15
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A Digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Notice — Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Ross Video
Limited could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
CANADA
This Class “A” digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appariel numerique de la classe “A” est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
EUROPE
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
CE Directive 93/68/EEC.
INTERNATIONAL
This equipment has been tested to CISPR 22:1997 along with amendments A1:2000 and
A2:2002, and found to comply with the limits for a Class A Digital device.
Notice — This is a Class A product. In domestic environments, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user may have to take adequate measures.
General Handling Guidelines

• Careful handling, using proper ESD precautions, must be observed.
• Power down the system before PCB removal.
A Word About Static Discharge

Throughout the many procedures in this Engineering Manual, please observe all static discharge
precautions.
Caution — Avoid handling the switcher circuit boards in high static environments such as
carpeted areas, and when synthetic fiber clothing is worn. Touch the frame to dissipate static
charge before removing boards from the frame, and exercise proper grounding precautions
when working on circuit boards.
Warranty and Repair Policy
Ross Video Limited (Ross) warrants its switchers and related options, to be free from defects
under normal use and service for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of shipment. Fader handle
assemblies are warranted for the life of the product. If an item becomes defective within the
warranty period Ross will repair or replace the defective item, as determined solely by Ross.
Warranty repairs will be conducted at Ross, with all shipping FOB Ross dock. If repairs are
conducted at the customer site, reasonable out-of-pocket charges will apply. At the discretion of
Ross, and on a temporary loan basis, plug in circuit boards or other replacement parts may be
supplied free of charge while defective items undergo repair. Return packing, shipping, and
special handling costs are the responsibility of the customer.
Software upgrades for switchers may occur from time to time, and are determined by Ross Video.
The upgrades are posted on the Ross Video website, and are free of charge for the life of the
switcher.
This warranty is void if products are subjected to misuse, neglect, accident, improper installation
or application, or unauthorized modification.
In no event shall Ross Video Limited be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or
consequential damages (including loss of profit). Implied warranties, including that of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are expressly limited to the duration of this
warranty.
This warranty is TRANSFERABLE to subsequent owners, subject to Ross’ notification of
change of ownership.
Environmental Information
The equipment that you purchased required the extraction and use of natural
resources for its production. It may contain hazardous substances that could
impact health and the environment.
To avoid the potential release of those substances into the environment and to diminish the need
for the extraction of natural resources, Ross Video encourages you to use the appropriate
take-back systems. These systems will reuse or recycle most of the materials from your
end-of-life equipment in an environmentally friendly and health conscious manner.
The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol invites you to use these systems.
If you need more information on the collection, reuse, and recycling systems, please contact your
local or regional waste administration.
You can also contact Ross Video for more information on the environmental performances of our
products.
Company Address
Ross Video Limited Ross Video Incorporated
8 John Street P.O. Box 880
Iroquois, Ontario, K0E 1K0 Ogdensburg, New York
Canada USA 13669-0880
General Business Office: (+1) 613 • 652 • 4886

Fax: (+1) 613 • 652 • 4425
Technical Support: (+1) 613 • 652 • 4886
After hours emergency: (+1) 613 • 349 • 0006
E-mail (Technical Support): [email protected]
E-mail (Documentation): [email protected]
E-mail (General Information): [email protected]
Website: http://www.rossvideo.com
Contents
Contents 1
Introduction 1
About This Manual .......................................................................................................Eng 1-2
Documentation Conventions.........................................................................................Eng 1-3
Documentation Terms...................................................................................................Eng 1-4
Abbreviations................................................................................................................Eng 1-5
Related Publications .....................................................................................................Eng 1-6
A Word About Technical Support ................................................................................Eng 1-7
Switcher Basics 2
Equipment Overview ....................................................................................................Eng 2-2
Vision Control Panel ......................................................................................Eng 2-2
Vision Touchscreen Display...........................................................................Eng 2-7
Frame..............................................................................................................Eng 2-7
Control Panel Modules ............................................................................................... Eng 2-10
Control Panel CPU Module.......................................................................... Eng 2-10
Panel Module Controller Board.................................................................... Eng 2-10
Keyers Module ............................................................................................. Eng 2-10
Global Memory Module ............................................................................... Eng 2-10
Effects Memory Module............................................................................... Eng 2-10
Transition Module ........................................................................................ Eng 2-11
Positioner Module ........................................................................................ Eng 2-11
Preview Bus Module .................................................................................... Eng 2-11
Power Distribution Board............................................................................. Eng 2-11
Frame Boards .............................................................................................................. Eng 2-12
Frame CPU Board ........................................................................................ Eng 2-12
Video Input Board, 16 Input......................................................................... Eng 2-12
Video Input Board, with Crosspoint............................................................. Eng 2-12
Video Input Board, 10 Input......................................................................... Eng 2-12
Video Output Board ..................................................................................... Eng 2-12
Video Processor Board ................................................................................. Eng 2-13
Midplane....................................................................................................... Eng 2-13
Crosspoint Board .......................................................................................... Eng 2-13
Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board ................................................................... Eng 2-13
Power Supplies ............................................................................................. Eng 2-13
Communication Ports .................................................................................................Eng 2-15
Control Panel Communication Ports ............................................................ Eng 2-15
Frame Communication Ports........................................................................ Eng 2-16
Tally Ports................................................................................................................... Eng 2-18
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Contents • i

GPI I/O Port ................................................................................................................Eng 2-19
Video Routing .............................................................................................................Eng 2-20
Crosspoint Matrix .........................................................................................Eng 2-20
Video Processor ............................................................................................Eng 2-24
Squeeze & Tease...........................................................................................Eng 2-27
XFX Extra Effects ........................................................................................Eng 2-29
Video Formats.............................................................................................................Eng 2-31
Horizontal Scan Lines...................................................................................Eng 2-31
Interlaced vs. Progressive .............................................................................Eng 2-31
Progressive Segmented Frame......................................................................Eng 2-33
Frequency .....................................................................................................Eng 2-33
CPU Structure .............................................................................................................Eng 2-35
A Note About CPU Architecture ..................................................................Eng 2-36
Board Labelling...........................................................................................................Eng 2-37
Physical Installation and Cabling 3

Unpacking Your Switcher.............................................................................................Eng 3-2
Static Discharge ..............................................................................................Eng 3-2
Serial Numbers ...............................................................................................Eng 3-2
Opening and Closing the Frame Door ..........................................................................Eng 3-3
Octane/QMD/X Frame ...................................................................................Eng 3-3
MD/X Frame...................................................................................................Eng 3-4
Frame Installation..........................................................................................................Eng 3-5
Installing the Frame ........................................................................................Eng 3-5
Control Panel Installation..............................................................................................Eng 3-7
Control Panel Installation ...............................................................................Eng 3-7
Touchscreen Display Installation ...................................................................Eng 3-8
Frame to Control Panel Cabling..................................................................................Eng 3-11
Frame to Control Panel Cable Installation....................................................Eng 3-11
Keyboard and Mouse Installation .................................................................Eng 3-12
Video Input Cabling ....................................................................................................Eng 3-13
Default Input Mapping .................................................................................Eng 3-13
Video Output Cabling .................................................................................................Eng 3-15
Default Output Mapping...............................................................................Eng 3-15
Monitor Connections ....................................................................................Eng 3-16
Button Inserts ..............................................................................................................Eng 3-17
Button Insert Films .......................................................................................Eng 3-17
Installing Control Panel Button Inserts.........................................................Eng 3-17
Power Supply Connections .........................................................................................Eng 3-19
Frame Power Connection .............................................................................Eng 3-19
Control Panel Power Connection..................................................................Eng 3-19
Touchscreen Display Power Connection......................................................Eng 3-20
Power Fail Indicators ..................................................................................................Eng 3-21
Power Failure................................................................................................Eng 3-21
Initial Setup and Verification 4

Powering Up and Powering Down the Switcher...........................................................Eng 4-2
Powering Up the Switcher ..............................................................................Eng 4-2
Powering Down the Switcher .........................................................................Eng 4-3
Network Setup...............................................................................................................Eng 4-5
Frame Network Setup .....................................................................................Eng 4-5
Control Panel Network Setup .........................................................................Eng 4-6
Network Security ..........................................................................................................Eng 4-8
MultiPanel Setup ...........................................................................................................Eng 4-9
MLE Assignment............................................................................................Eng 4-9
ii • Contents Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

System Permissions ...................................................................................... Eng 4-10
Reference Connection and Setup ................................................................................ Eng 4-11
Reference Signal Connection ....................................................................... Eng 4-11
Compatible Video Formats .......................................................................... Eng 4-11
Reference Setup............................................................................................ Eng 4-13
Internal Reference ........................................................................................ Eng 4-14
Input Verification........................................................................................................ Eng 4-16
Functional Check ........................................................................................................ Eng 4-17
Removing and Installing Frame Boards ..................................................................... Eng 4-18
Frame Board Locations ................................................................................ Eng 4-18
Removing and Installing Front Frame Boards ............................................. Eng 4-21
Removing and Installing Rear Frame Boards .............................................. Eng 4-22
Resetting the Switcher ................................................................................................ Eng 4-24
Full Restart ................................................................................................... Eng 4-24
Control Panel Restart.................................................................................... Eng 4-24
Software Reset.............................................................................................. Eng 4-25
Default State .................................................................................................Eng 4-27
Using the Menu System 5

Touchscreen Interface...................................................................................................Eng 5-2
Menu System Basics.....................................................................................................Eng 5-5
Using the Punchpad........................................................................................Eng 5-7
Using the Positioner with the Menu System ..................................................Eng 5-9
Quick Navigation Buttons .......................................................................................... Eng 5-10
Menu Skins ................................................................................................................. Eng 5-12
Control Panel Mnemonics .......................................................................................... Eng 5-13
Default Mnemonic Appearance.................................................................... Eng 5-13
Control Panel Displays ............................................................................................... Eng 5-16
Using the Naming Menus ........................................................................................... Eng 5-17
Help Features .............................................................................................................. Eng 5-18
Online Manuals ............................................................................................ Eng 5-18
Pop-up Help.................................................................................................. Eng 5-18
Screen Captures .......................................................................................................... Eng 5-19
Software Upgrades and Options 6

Vision Web Interface Account .....................................................................................Eng 6-2
Software Upgrade .........................................................................................................Eng 6-3
Preparing the Switcher Before an Upgrade ....................................................Eng 6-3
Performing the Upgrade .................................................................................Eng 6-3
Rebooting the Switcher After an Upgrade .....................................................Eng 6-6
System Information Overview......................................................................................Eng 6-7
System Information Region............................................................................Eng 6-7
Storage Capacity Region ................................................................................Eng 6-8
Installed Options ...........................................................................................................Eng 6-9
Accessing the Installed Options Menus .........................................................Eng 6-9
Installing Serial Numbers ............................................................................. Eng 6-11
Installing Software Options.......................................................................... Eng 6-11
Storing and Recalling Option Codes ............................................................ Eng 6-14
Input Source Configuration and Check 7

Naming Input Sources ..................................................................................................Eng 7-2
Source Configuration Menu Overview.........................................................................Eng 7-3
Assigning Input Source Types ......................................................................................Eng 7-4
Assigning Alphas ..........................................................................................................Eng 7-6
Configuring Auto Keys.................................................................................................Eng 7-8
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Contents • iii

Non-Sync Detection ....................................................................................................Eng 7-10
Assigning Audio Channels to Input Sources ..............................................................Eng 7-12
Creating Bus Maps ......................................................................................................Eng 7-13
Editing Bus Maps .........................................................................................Eng 7-13
Shifted Crosspoint Buttons ...........................................................................Eng 7-16
Copying Bus Maps .......................................................................................Eng 7-16
Defaulting Bus Maps ....................................................................................Eng 7-17
Assigning Panel Bus Maps..........................................................................................Eng 7-19
Assigning Panel Bus Maps to Individual Buses ...........................................Eng 7-19
Assigning Panel Bus Maps to Multiple Buses..............................................Eng 7-20
Naming Bus Maps.......................................................................................................Eng 7-21
Assigning Tallies to Input Sources .............................................................................Eng 7-22
Assigning GPI Outputs to Input Sources ....................................................................Eng 7-24
Checking Keys ............................................................................................................Eng 7-25
Video Output Configuration and Check 8

Configuring Video Outputs...........................................................................................Eng 8-2
To Configure your Output BNCs ...................................................................Eng 8-2
Checking Video Outputs ...............................................................................................Eng 8-5
To Confirm the Outputs on the Output BNCs ................................................Eng 8-5
Clean Feed.....................................................................................................................Eng 8-7
To set up a Clean Feed Output .......................................................................Eng 8-7
Fade to Black.................................................................................................................Eng 8-9
MLE Tally...................................................................................................................Eng 8-10
To Set Up an MLE Tally ..............................................................................Eng 8-10
Ancillary Data .............................................................................................................Eng 8-11
To Set the Ancillary Data Parameters ..........................................................Eng 8-11
Switch on Field ...........................................................................................................Eng 8-13
To Set which Field a Transition is Performed On ........................................Eng 8-13
MultiViewer ................................................................................................................Eng 8-14
MultiViewer Assignment..............................................................................Eng 8-14
MultiViewer Layouts....................................................................................Eng 8-15
Mix/DSK .....................................................................................................................Eng 8-19
Mix/DSK Setup ............................................................................................Eng 8-20
Mix/DSK Operation......................................................................................Eng 8-20
MultiDSK ....................................................................................................................Eng 8-22
MultiDSK Setup ...........................................................................................Eng 8-23
Mix/DSK and MultiDSK ............................................................................................Eng 8-24
Mix/DSK and MultiDSK Setup....................................................................Eng 8-24
AuxKeys......................................................................................................................Eng 8-26
AuxKeys Setup .............................................................................................Eng 8-26
AuxKey Pre Mixer/Keyer.............................................................................Eng 8-28
Basic Communications Setup 9

Communications Overview...........................................................................................Eng 9-2
Device Drivers ................................................................................................Eng 9-2
Control Panel Serial Communications Ports ..................................................Eng 9-2
Frame Serial Communications Ports ..............................................................Eng 9-2
Ethernet Communications ..............................................................................Eng 9-3
Installing and Managing FlexDevice Drivers ...............................................................Eng 9-4
Installing FlexDevice Drivers.........................................................................Eng 9-4
Initializing FlexDevice Drivers ......................................................................Eng 9-5
Stopping FlexDevice Drivers .........................................................................Eng 9-5
Deleting FlexDevice Drivers ..........................................................................Eng 9-6
Setting Up Communications .........................................................................................Eng 9-7
iv • Contents Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Setting Up Serial Communications ................................................................Eng 9-7
Setting Up Ethernet Communications .......................................................... Eng 9-10
Port Expanders............................................................................................................ Eng 9-13
Port Expander Cable Pinouts........................................................................ Eng 9-13
Switcher Communications Setup ................................................................. Eng 9-15
Port Expander Programming ........................................................................ Eng 9-16
Communication Settings .............................................................................. Eng 9-18
Assigning Devices to Port Expander Ports................................................... Eng 9-18
External Panel Modules .............................................................................................. Eng 9-20
Custom Devices .......................................................................................................... Eng 9-21
Programming Custom Device Commands ................................................... Eng 9-21
Extra Options .............................................................................................................. Eng 9-25
Custom Controls 10
Custom Controls ......................................................................................................... Eng 10-2
Tips for Working with Custom Controls...................................................... Eng 10-2
Stopping Custom Controls ........................................................................... Eng 10-4
Custom Control Interfaces .......................................................................................... Eng 10-5
Custom Control Bus ..................................................................................... Eng 10-5
Custom Control Soft Shot Box..................................................................... Eng 10-5
Custom Control Shot Box Module ............................................................... Eng 10-6
Global Memory Module ............................................................................... Eng 10-6
Custom Control Banks................................................................................................ Eng 10-7
Custom Control Bank Setup......................................................................... Eng 10-7
Naming Custom Control Banks and Shortcuts............................................. Eng 10-8
Programming Control Panel Functions.....................................................................Eng 10-10
Relative Custom Controls .......................................................................... Eng 10-11
Running Multiple Custom Controls ........................................................... Eng 10-13
Programming Special Functions ...............................................................................Eng 10-15
Attaching Custom Controls to Panel Buttons ...........................................................Eng 10-25
Attaching a Custom Control to a Panel Button .......................................... Eng 10-25
Deleting Custom Control Attachment to Panel Buttons ............................ Eng 10-26
Naming Custom Controls .........................................................................................Eng 10-28
Editing Custom Controls ..........................................................................................Eng 10-29
To Edit a Custom Control .......................................................................... Eng 10-29
Managing Custom Controls ......................................................................................Eng 10-32
Deleting Custom Controls ........................................................................................Eng 10-33
Custom Control Shortcuts.........................................................................................Eng 10-34
Device Transport Commands ...................................................................................Eng 10-36
Setting up Device Transport Commands.................................................... Eng 10-36
Custom Control Variable Pause................................................................................Eng 10-37
Setting a Custom Control Variable ............................................................ Eng 10-37
Inserting a Variable Pause .......................................................................... Eng 10-37
Switcher Personality 11
Personality List ........................................................................................................... Eng 11-2
Control Panel Button Color Schemes .......................................................................Eng 11-17
General Color Usage Setup ........................................................................ Eng 11-17
Assigning a Crosspoint Color..................................................................... Eng 11-19
Selecting a Color ........................................................................................ Eng 11-19
Mnemonic Color Schemes........................................................................................Eng 11-21
Control Panel Display Brightness.............................................................................Eng 11-23
Loading Color Schemes............................................................................................Eng 11-24
Lock/Unlock Personality ..........................................................................................Eng 11-25
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Contents • v

Completing Setup 12
Aux Bus Setup.............................................................................................................Eng 12-2
Selecting Aux Buses .....................................................................................Eng 12-2
Naming Aux Buses .......................................................................................Eng 12-2
Aux Bus Router Follow ................................................................................Eng 12-3
Default MLE Map Assignment ...................................................................................Eng 12-5
Squeeze & Tease Mode...............................................................................................Eng 12-6
Key 4 Mode.................................................................................................................Eng 12-8
Standard GPI Setup ...................................................................................................Eng 12-10
GPI I/O Information ...................................................................................Eng 12-10
GPI I/O Connection ....................................................................................Eng 12-11
Setting Up GPI Inputs.................................................................................Eng 12-11
GPI Input Tallies.........................................................................................Eng 12-14
Setting Up GPI Outputs ..............................................................................Eng 12-15
Naming GPI Outputs ..................................................................................Eng 12-16
Clip Setup..................................................................................................................Eng 12-17
Programming Clips .....................................................................................Eng 12-17
Grabbing a Timecode .................................................................................Eng 12-20
Audio Channel Setup ................................................................................................Eng 12-21
Setting Up Audio Sources ..........................................................................Eng 12-21
Setting Up Audio Channels ........................................................................Eng 12-22
Setting Up Audio Groups ...........................................................................Eng 12-23
Setting Audio Channel Names....................................................................Eng 12-24
Setting Audio Fade Rate .............................................................................Eng 12-24
Not Assign Audio Channel to Audio Fader................................................Eng 12-25
Factory Default Settings............................................................................................Eng 12-27
Recalling Factory Default Settings .............................................................Eng 12-27
Preview Overlay Setup..............................................................................................Eng 12-30
Preview Overlay Font Color .......................................................................Eng 12-30
Preview Overlay Component Setup............................................................Eng 12-31
Set System Time .......................................................................................................Eng 12-37
Setting System Time Manually ..................................................................Eng 12-37
Setting System Time Automatically ...........................................................Eng 12-38
Auto Follow ..............................................................................................................Eng 12-39
Auto Follow Setup ......................................................................................Eng 12-39
Frame Over-Temperature Shutdown.........................................................................Eng 12-44
Lock/Unlock Installation...........................................................................................Eng 12-45
File and Setup Storage 13

File Storage Overview.................................................................................................Eng 13-2
Storing and Recalling Files and Setups.......................................................................Eng 13-4
Storing Registers...........................................................................................Eng 13-4
Recalling Registers .......................................................................................Eng 13-9
Managing Setups with an External Computer ..........................................................Eng 13-15
Downloading Setups to an External Computer ..........................................Eng 13-15
Uploading Setups from an External Computer...........................................Eng 13-15
Hard Drive Backup and Restore ...............................................................................Eng 13-17
To Backup the Switcher Hard Drive ..........................................................Eng 13-17
To Restore the Switcher Hard Drive ..........................................................Eng 13-18
Auxiliary Panels 14
Auxiliary Panel Overview...........................................................................................Eng 14-2
Auxiliary Control Panel ................................................................................Eng 14-2
Remote Aux Panels.......................................................................................Eng 14-3
Installing Auxiliary Panels..........................................................................................Eng 14-5
vi • Contents Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Communications Connections .................................................................................... Eng 14-6
To Connect Two Remote Aux Panels to the Switcher ................................. Eng 14-6
Remote Aux Cable Pinouts .......................................................................... Eng 14-7
Communications Setup ............................................................................................... Eng 14-8
Auxiliary Control Panel................................................................................ Eng 14-8
Remote Aux Panel........................................................................................ Eng 14-8
Auxiliary Panel GPIs ................................................................................................Eng 14-11
Auxiliary Control Panel GPIs..................................................................... Eng 14-11
Remote Aux Panel GPIs............................................................................. Eng 14-12
Setting Up CCU Joystick Control .............................................................. Eng 14-13
External Modules 15
Custom Control Shot Box Module ............................................................................. Eng 15-2
Custom Control Shot Box Module Setup..................................................... Eng 15-2
Creating Shot Box Pages .............................................................................. Eng 15-3
Naming Shot Box Pages............................................................................... Eng 15-4
Copying or Moving Shot Box Pages ............................................................ Eng 15-4
Audio Control Module................................................................................................ Eng 15-6
Audio Fader Maps ........................................................................................ Eng 15-6
SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters 16

Setting Up a Conversion Loop.................................................................................... Eng 16-2
Switcher Setup ............................................................................................................ Eng 16-5
Assigning Buses to Use SmartConversion ................................................... Eng 16-5
Locking Conversion Loops to Buses............................................................ Eng 16-6
Fade to Black Display Mode for Up/Down Converters ............................... Eng 16-7
Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics 17

Switcher Software Version ......................................................................................... Eng 17-2
Switcher Calibration ................................................................................................... Eng 17-3
Mapping a Module to a Row ...................................................................................... Eng 17-5
Mapping Multiple Modules.......................................................................... Eng 17-5
Mapping a Single Module ............................................................................ Eng 17-6
Naming an External Row ............................................................................. Eng 17-8
Fail Indicators Diagnosis ..........................................................................................Eng 17-10
Complete Status.......................................................................................... Eng 17-10
Warnings..................................................................................................... Eng 17-11
Status Components and Conditions............................................................ Eng 17-11
Communication Status and Errors ............................................................................Eng 17-14
Control Panel Communication Status ........................................................ Eng 17-14
Serial Communication Errors ..................................................................... Eng 17-14
Non-Sync Status .......................................................................................................Eng 17-16
Control Panel Diagnostic Tools................................................................................Eng 17-18
Module Tests .............................................................................................. Eng 17-18
Panel Communications Hub Tests ............................................................. Eng 17-22
Control Panel SBC Test ............................................................................. Eng 17-25
Touchscreen Tests ...................................................................................... Eng 17-26
Burn Mode.................................................................................................. Eng 17-27
Frame Diagnostic Tools............................................................................................Eng 17-28
Frame Transmit/Receive Test..................................................................... Eng 17-28
GPI Test...................................................................................................... Eng 17-28
LEDs Test................................................................................................... Eng 17-29
DIP Switch Test.......................................................................................... Eng 17-29
Graphics Buffer Test .................................................................................. Eng 17-30
VNC Viewer .............................................................................................................Eng 17-31
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Contents • vii

To Run the VNC Viewer ............................................................................Eng 17-31
Video Checksum Custom Controls...........................................................................Eng 17-32
Setting Up a Checksum Custom Control....................................................Eng 17-32
Using a Checksum Custom Control ...........................................................Eng 17-34
Communication Port Monitor ...................................................................................Eng 17-36
To Monitor a Serial Port .............................................................................Eng 17-36
Port Monitor Data Files ..............................................................................Eng 17-37
Switcher Logs............................................................................................................Eng 17-38
Collecting Logs...........................................................................................Eng 17-38
Deleting Logs..............................................................................................Eng 17-38
Cycling Logs...............................................................................................Eng 17-39
Switcher Maintenance 18
Control Panel Power Supply Failure...........................................................................Eng 18-2
Troubleshooting a Failed Power Supply.......................................................Eng 18-2
Troubleshooting a Failed Cooling Fan .........................................................Eng 18-3
Replacing a Power Supply Module ..............................................................Eng 18-4
Frame Power Supply Failure.......................................................................................Eng 18-6
Frame Fan Failure .......................................................................................................Eng 18-8
Control Panel Power Supply .....................................................................................Eng 18-10
Control Panel Power Supply Functional Components ...............................Eng 18-10
Frame Power Supply .................................................................................................Eng 18-12
Frame Power Supply Functional Components ...........................................Eng 18-12
Replacing a Frame Power Supply...............................................................Eng 18-13
Cleaning the Frame Air Filter ...................................................................................Eng 18-15
Replacing the Hard Drive..........................................................................................Eng 18-16
Replacing the Hard Drive on the 4800AR-001 Frame CPU Board............Eng 18-16
Replacing the Hard Drive on the 4800AR-002 Frame CPU Board............Eng 18-18
Replacing a Control Panel Module ...........................................................................Eng 18-21
Removing a Control Panel Module ............................................................Eng 18-21
Installing a Control Panel Module ..............................................................Eng 18-22
Upgrading PMCs ........................................................................................Eng 18-23
Dusting Mode...........................................................................................................Eng 18-25
Appendix A. Menu Trees 19

Setup and Installation Menu Trees..............................................................................Eng 19-2
Setup Menu Tree...........................................................................................Eng 19-2
Installation Menu Tree..................................................................................Eng 19-2
Source Configuration Menu Tree................................................................................Eng 19-3
Output BNC Menu Tree..............................................................................................Eng 19-4
Communications Menu Tree.......................................................................................Eng 19-5
Custom Control Bank Menu Tree ...............................................................................Eng 19-6
Custom Controls Menu Tree.......................................................................................Eng 19-7
File Storage Menu Tree...............................................................................................Eng 19-8
Disk Store Menu Tree...................................................................................Eng 19-8
Disk Recall Menu Tree .................................................................................Eng 19-8
Disk Store Individual Item Menu Tree .........................................................Eng 19-9
Disk Recall Individual Item Menu Tree .......................................................Eng 19-9
Recall Factory Menu Tree.........................................................................................Eng 19-10
Squeeze & Tease and Effects Menu Tree .................................................................Eng 19-11
Effects Menu Tree ......................................................................................Eng 19-11
Squeeze & Tease MD Position/Crop Menu Tree .......................................Eng 19-11
Squeeze & Tease MD Border Menu Tree ..................................................Eng 19-12
Squeeze & Tease MD Sequence Menu Tree ..............................................Eng 19-12
Channel Management Menu Tree ..............................................................Eng 19-12
viii • Contents Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Squeeze & Tease MD Preprocessor Menu Tree......................................... Eng 19-13
Squeeze & Tease MD Lighting Menu Tree ............................................... Eng 19-13
Squeeze & Tease WARP Menu Tree ......................................................... Eng 19-13
Appendix B. Specifications 20
Standard Components .................................................................................................Eng 20-2
General Switcher Specifications ................................................................................. Eng 20-3
Control Panel Power Supplies ...................................................................... Eng 20-3
Frame Power Supplies.................................................................................. Eng 20-4
Operating Environment Requirements ......................................................... Eng 20-5
Physical Specifications ............................................................................................... Eng 20-6
Control Panel Dimensions............................................................................ Eng 20-6
Frame Dimensions........................................................................................ Eng 20-6
Communication Specifications ...................................................................................Eng 20-8
Default Network Settings ............................................................................. Eng 20-8
Module Control Link Backbone................................................................... Eng 20-9
Frame Connector Types ............................................................................. Eng 20-12
Control Panel Connector Types.................................................................. Eng 20-13
Video Characteristics ................................................................................................Eng 20-14
Video Processing ........................................................................................ Eng 20-14
Video Formats ............................................................................................ Eng 20-14
Timing ........................................................................................................ Eng 20-15
LTC Timecode Input .................................................................................. Eng 20-15
Video Input Signal Characteristics............................................................. Eng 20-15
Video Output Signal Characteristics .......................................................... Eng 20-16
Frame Pinouts ...........................................................................................................Eng 20-17
Peripheral Ports .......................................................................................... Eng 20-17
Panel Port ................................................................................................... Eng 20-17
GPI I/O Ports .............................................................................................. Eng 20-18
LAN Ports................................................................................................... Eng 20-19
AC Power Ports .......................................................................................... Eng 20-19
Control Panel Pinouts ...............................................................................................Eng 20-21
Remote Ports .............................................................................................. Eng 20-21
External Link Ports..................................................................................... Eng 20-21
Tally Ports .................................................................................................. Eng 20-22
AC Power Ports .......................................................................................... Eng 20-23
Control Panel CPU Module Ports.............................................................................Eng 20-24
Control Panel CPU Module Functional Components ................................ Eng 20-24
Control Panel CPU Module Rear Panel ..................................................... Eng 20-25
Remote Aux Panel Pinouts .......................................................................................Eng 20-27
GPI Port ...................................................................................................... Eng 20-27
Main Port .................................................................................................... Eng 20-27
Echo Port .................................................................................................... Eng 20-28
Aux Panel Programming Mode Summary................................................................Eng 20-29
Appendix C. Worksheets 21
Video Input Worksheet ............................................................................................... Eng 21-2
Bus Map Worksheet.................................................................................................... Eng 21-6
Video Output Worksheet ............................................................................................ Eng 21-9
Communications Worksheet.....................................................................................Eng 21-11
Standard GPI I/O Input Worksheets .........................................................................Eng 21-13
Standard GPI I/O Output Worksheets ......................................................................Eng 21-14
Aux Panel GPI I/O Worksheet..................................................................................Eng 21-15
Custom Control Worksheets .....................................................................................Eng 21-18
Conversion Loop Worksheets...................................................................................Eng 21-20
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Contents • ix

Custom Device Protocol Worksheets........................................................................Eng 21-22
Appendix D. Software Licenses 22

GNU General Public License......................................................................................Eng 22-2
Lesser GNU Public License (LGPL) ..........................................................................Eng 22-4
BSD License................................................................................................................Eng 22-7
General..........................................................................................................Eng 22-7
Apache License ...........................................................................................................Eng 22-8
Expat License ............................................................................................................Eng 22-10
Imlib2 ........................................................................................................................Eng 22-11
Jiffy ...........................................................................................................................Eng 22-12
Fedora 14 - License Agreement ................................................................................Eng 22-13
PSF LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 2.7.3 ..............................................Eng 22-14
Appendix E. Custom Device Protocols 23

Custom Devices – Uses and Limitations ....................................................................Eng 23-2
Advanced Topics and Tables ......................................................................................Eng 23-3
Glossary of Terms GT
Index IX
x • Contents Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Introduction
A Word of Thanks
Congratulations on choosing the Ross Vision Multi-Definition Digital Production Switcher. You
have purchased the power and versatility of a digital Multi-Level Effects (MLE®) switcher that is
ready to take on all creative challenges in today’s competitive live production environment.
You’ll be pleased at how easily your Vision switcher fits into your overall working environment.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Introduction • Eng 1–1

About This Manual
This manual takes you through the physical installation, configuration, and setup required to
integrate your Octane/QMD-X, MD-X, QMD, or MD frame with a Vision control panel into your
facility.
If, at any time, you have a question pertaining to the installation of your Ross Vision switcher,
please contact us at the numbers listed in the front of this manual. Our technical staff are always
available for consultation, training, or service.
For information on setting up external devices to work with your Vision switcher, refer to the
Ross Video External Device Setup Sheet for your device.
Eng 1–2 • Introduction Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Documentation Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this manual:
• Navigation procedures in this manual set state the button you are to press, followed by
the menu that the button appears on. For example, the following navigation procedure
shows you how to navigate from the Main Menus to the Installation Menus. In this
case, you press More, and then Setup on the Main Menu 2-2, then you press
Installation on the Setup Menu 1-2.
› Press HOME  Setup  Installation.
• References in this manual to navigation buttons, such as HOME, UP ONE, and HOLD,
refer to the buttons on the Touchscreen Display located immediately to the left of the
Display Region that you are interacting with.
• Rear panel connectors are indicated in bold-faced upper case letters. For example:
› The AUX 1 connector is …
• Control Panel buttons are indicated in bold-faced upper case letters, using a sans-serif
font. For example:
› Press WIPE to …
• Menu names on the integral display panel are indicated in bold-faced text. For example:
› The Aux Bus Setup Menu allows you to …
• Softkey labels on the integral display are indicated in bold-faced text, using a sans-serif
font. They are not indicated by the function key below the display that you press. For
example:
› Press Accept New Name to register …
• Each module, or group of buttons, on the control panel is shown in bold-faced text. For
Example:
› Press the UNDO button in the Global Memory Module to ...
• The “Operating Tip” and “Note” boxes are used throughout this manual to provide
customers with additional useful information. For example:
Operating Tip — When the DHCP is set to On, you can use the Refresh button to poll the
server for the current network address information.
Note — If the DHCP option in On, the remaining settings are automatically configured. If the
DHCP is Off, you will have to manually enter values into all the fields.

Documentation Terms
The following terms are used throughout this guide:
• “Switcher” refers to the entire Vision Multi-Definition Production Switcher, consisting
of its electronics frame and control panel.
• “Frame” and “Electronics Frame” both refer to the Octane/QMD-X, MD-X, QMD, and
MD Multi-Definition Digital Production Switcher chassis.
• “Operator” and “User” refer to the person who uses the Vision Multi-Definition
Production Switcher.
• “Control Panel” refers to the large multi-button control panel of the Vision
Multi-Definition Production Switcher.
• “Master Panel” refers to the panel in a MultiPanel application that can control and can
be connected to external devices.
• “Satellite Panel” refers to the panels in a MultiPanel application that cannot be
connected to an external device.
• “SDI” refers to Serial Digital Video, a digital video signal that is distributed via a single
coaxial cable with BNC connectors.
• “Video System” refers to the mix of interconnected digital equipment (including the edit
controller, VTRs, DVEs, etc.) in which the Vision Multi-Definition Production Switcher
is included.
• “Storage device” refers to the hardware used to save and recall Setups, configurations
and registers of the Vision Multi-Definition Production Switcher. Examples of storage
devices are the internal hard drive and a USB flash drive.
• “Bottom MLE” refers to the lowest, or Program/Preset, MLE on each switcher. This
MLE is typically the MLE that provides the main program output of the switcher, and
includes the Downstream Keyers. On a Vision 2, for example, this would be MLE 2.
• “Half MLE” refers to the Program/Preset, MLE on the Vision x.5 MLE switchers. The
Mix/DSK option is applied to this MLE.
• “Full MLE” refers to the full featured MLEs of a switcher. On a Vision 2.5, for example,
MLEs 1 and 2 are Full MLEs, because they are fully functional, but MLE 3 is a Half
MLE.
• “Setup” refers to a group, or set, of registers that are stored together either on the
switcher, or on an external computer. Setups can be stored and recalled to quickly
configure the switcher for different productions.

Abbreviations
The following table (Table 1.1) abbreviations are used throughout the text.
Table 1.1 Abbreviations used in this Manual

Abbreviation Definition
A-D Analog-to-Digital
AUX Auxiliary
CG Character Generator
D-A Digital-to-Analog
DA Distribution Amplifier
DDR Digital Disk Recorder
DSK Downstream Keyer
DVE Digital Video Effects
DVR Digital Video Recorder
ID Identification
HD High Definition
MD Multi-definition
MLE Multi-level Effects
PGM Program Bus
PST Preset Bus
PST PATT Preset Pattern
PV Preview
RU Rack Unit
SD Standard Definition
TD Technical Director
VCR Video Cassette Recorder
VDCP Video Disk Communications Protocol
VTR Video Tape Recorder

Related Publications
All Vision switchers come with a complete set of system documentation that includes an
Operator’s Manual and an Engineering Manual.
For a complete operational overview of the Vision product line, refer to the following
publications:
• Vision Operator’s Manual, Ross Part Number: 4800DR-403
• Ross Video External Device Setup Sheets Compendium, Ross Part Number:
4800DR-404

A Word About Technical Support
At Ross Video, we take pride in the quality of our products, but if a problem does occur, help is as
close as the nearest telephone.
Our 24-Hour Hot Line service ensures you have access to technical expertise around the clock.
After-sales service and technical support are provided directly by Ross Video personnel. During
business hours (eastern standard time), technical support personnel are available by telephone.
Outside of normal business hours and on weekends, a direct emergency technical support phone
line is available. If the technical support personnel who is on call does not answer this line
immediately, a voice message can be left and the call will be returned shortly. Our Technical
support staff are available to react to any problem and to do whatever is necessary to ensure
customer satisfaction.
• Technical Support: (+1) 613-652-4886
• After Hours Emergency: (+1) 613-349-0006

Switcher Basics
In This Chapter
This chapter provides a basic introduction to the Vision switcher, including an overview of the
boards in the control panel and frame, as well as an introduction to the various ports, and video
buses.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
• Equipment Overview
• Control Panel Modules
• Frame Boards
• Communication Ports
• Tally Ports
• GPI I/O Port
• Video Routing
• Video Formats
• CPU Structure
• Board Labelling
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Basics • Eng 2–1

Equipment Overview
This section provides an overview of the control panel and frame of the Vision Live Production
Engine.
The 4-Keyer option that is available for the Octane/QMD-X and QMD frames adds two
additional keyers to each MLE of the switcher. Included with this option is a 4-Keyer, Keyers
Module for each MLE.
Vision Control Panel

The control panel of the Vision switcher provides all the basic user input of the switcher, as well
as the majority of the external device control. Depending on the Vision switcher you have, your
control panel will look like one of the following:
Vision 4 Control Panel

The Vision 4 control panels (Figure 2.1) have 4 Panel Rows, 40 Crosspoint Buttons per Bus,
40 Custom Control Buttons, a Transition Module, Memory System Module and Keyer
Module per MLE and a Positioner Module as standard.
MEMORY SYSTEM TRANSITION KEYERS
AUTO SELF MATTE KEY BORD BORD SHOW
SELECT KEY FILL MEM ON OFF ALPHA
SEL
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY
MASK
PATT KEY INV KEY MGMT PV
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
10 RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
BKGD PV
2
PRIOR LIMIT
3
CUT CUT CUT CUT
EFF
ATTRIB 4 5 6
1 RATE DISS WIPE DVE SEQ
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
TRANSITION MEMORY SYSTEM KEYERS

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
CUT CUT CUT CUT

EFF
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ ATTRIB 4 5 6 RATE
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
FRAMES ONLY RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
CUT CUT CUT CUT

EFF
ATTRIB 4 5 6 RATE DISS WIPE DVE SEQ
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
PREVIEW PREVIEW OVERLAY FADE TO BLACK FRAMES USB
11 MLE 1 MLE 2 MLE 3 MLE 4

4 SRC PV PGM
SOURCE
ID
VTR
TC
SAFE
TITLE
CENTER
5 TIME
CLOCK
MASK
PV
HIDE
OVLY
CUT FADE
6 015
TRANSITION KEYERS GLOBAL MEMORY POSITIONER

SEL
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4

SELECT
PST
PATT
KEY
CHROMA
KEY
FILL
KEY
INV
MEM
MASK
ON
FLY
KEY
OFF
CHNL
MGMT
ALPHA
KEY
PV
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
7 MLE RECALL
4 5 6
FADE MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ

CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT CUT
1
MLE
2
CLIP/CC
ATTRIB 1
82 3
RATE
EFF
RATE
1
MLE
2
HOLD
0
MLE KEYS RUN CC MLE MLE
. LINK
FRAMES 3 ONLY +/- RATE 3
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK CLEAR ENTER
KEY
RATE
MLE
4
CLEAR
Figure 2.1 Vision 4 Control Panel (4-Keyer Shown)
On the rear of the Vision 4 control panels there are 8 Remote Ports, 8 Tally Ports, 2 PS/2 Ports,
4 External Link Ports, an Ethernet Port for connecting the control panel to the frame, and a
Primary and Redundant Power Supply Port, as standard. Refer to the section
“Communication Ports” on page Eng 2-15 for more information on these communication ports.

32 Custom Control Buttons, a Transition Module, a Memory Module, and Keyer Module
per MLE, and a Positioner Module as standard.
Eng 2–2 • Switcher Basics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
10
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
2 RECALL 7 1 8 9 STORE 3
CUT CUT CUT CUT
4 5 6
EFF
ATTRIB
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ RATE
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
FRAMES ONLY RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
CUT CUT CUT CUT

4 5 6
EFF
ATTRIB
RATE DISS WIPE DVE SEQ
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
11 MLE 1 MLE 2 MLE 3

4 SRC PV PGM
SOURCE
ID
VTR
TC
SAFE
TITLE
CENTER
5 TIME
CLOCK
MASK
PV
HIDE
OVLY
CUT FADE
6 015

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
7 MLE
1
RECALL
CLIP/CC 4 85 6
FADE
RATE
MLE
1
9
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ ATTRIB HOLD
2 RATE 2
0
. LINK
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK CLEAR ENTER
KEY
RATE
MLE
4 CLEAR
On the rear of the Vision 3 control panels there are 8 Remote Ports, 6 Parallel Tally Ports, 2
PS/2 Ports, 4 External Link Ports, an Ethernet Port for connecting the control panel to the
frame, and a Primary and Redundant Power Supply Port, as standard. Refer to the section
Vision 2X Control Panel

The Vision 2X control panels (Figure 2.3) have 2 Panel Rows, 32 Crosspoint Buttons per Bus,

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
10 7 8 9
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
3
RECALL STORE
2
ATTRIB 4
1 5 6
EFF
CUT CUT CUT CUT
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
ROLL AUTO
0
EFF KEY CUT AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO
BANK ENTER CLIP TRANS
DISS RATE TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS
11 MLE 1 MLE 2
4 SRC PV PGM
SOURCE
ID
VTR
TC
SAFE
TITLE
CENTER
5 TIME
CLOCK
MASK
PV
HIDE
OVLY
CUT FADE
6
SEL

SELECT
PST
PATT
KEY
CHROMA
KEY
FILL
KEY
INV
MEM
MASK
ON
FLY
KEY
OFF
CHNL
MGMT
ALPHA
KEY
PV
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
7 MLE
1
RECALL
CLIP/CC 4
85 6
FADE
RATE
MLE
1
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
2 RATE 2
0
. LINK
ROLL AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO MLE EFF KEY MLE
CUT BANK CLEAR ENTER CLEAR
CLIP TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS 4 DISS RATE 4
Figure 2.3 Vision 2X Control Panel (4-Keyer Shown)
On the rear of the Vision 2X control panel there are 8 Remote Ports, 6 Tally Ports, 2 PS/2
Ports, 4 External Link Ports, an Ethernet Port for connecting the control panel to the frame,
and a Primary and Redundant Power Supply Port, as standard. Refer to the section

Vision 3M Control Panel
The Vision 3M control panels (Figure 2.4) have 3 Panel Rows, 24 Crosspoint Buttons per Bus,
24 Custom Control Buttons, a Transition Module, an Effects Memory Module and Keyer
Module per MLE, and a Positioner Module as standard.

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
10
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
2 RECALL 7 1 8 9 STORE 3
CUT CUT CUT CUT
4 5 6
EFF
ATTRIB
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ RATE
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
FRAMES ONLY RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
CUT CUT CUT CUT

4 5 6
EFF
ATTRIB
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
EFF
DISS
BANK 0 ENTER
KEY
RATE
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
11 MLE 1 MLE 2 MLE 3

4 SRC PV PGM
SOURCE
ID
VTR
TC
SAFE
TITLE
CENTER
5 TIME
CLOCK
MASK
PV
HIDE
OVLY
CUT FADE
6 015

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
7 MLE
1
RECALL
CLIP/CC 4 85 6
FADE
RATE
MLE
1
9
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
2 RATE 2
0
. LINK
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK CLEAR ENTER
KEY
RATE
MLE
4 CLEAR
Figure 2.4 Vision 3M Control Panel (4-Keyer Shown)
On the rear of the Vision 3M control panels there are 8 Remote Ports, 6 Parallel Tally Ports, 2

The Vision 2M control panels (Figure 2.3) have 2 Panel Rows, 24 Crosspoint Buttons per Bus,
KEYERS TRANSITION GLOBAL MEMORY

SEL
PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4
MASK
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
10 3 BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
CUT CUT CUT CUT

2 MLE
1
RECALL
CLIP/CC 4
8 5 6
FADE
RATE
MLE
1
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ ATTRIB
2 RATE 2
0
.
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK CLEAR ENTER
KEY
RATE
MLE
4
11 MLE 1 MLE 2
4 SRC PV PGM
SOURCE
ID
VTR
TC
SAFE
TITLE
CENTER
5 TIME
CLOCK
MASK
PV
HIDE
OVLY
CUT FADE
6 015
TRANSITION KEYERS POSITIONER

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
7 9
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ HOLD
LINK
FRAMES
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS CLEAR
On the rear of the Vision 2M control panel there are 8 Remote Ports, 4 Tally Ports, 2 PS/2
Ports, 4 External Link Ports, an Ethernet Port for connecting the control panel to the frame,

and a Primary and Redundant Power Supply Port, as standard. Refer to the section

16 Custom Control Buttons, a Transition Module, a Memory Module and Keyer Module per
MLE, and a Positioner Module as standard.
KEYERS TRANSITION GLOBAL MEMORY

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
10 3 BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
MLE RECALL
4 5 6
FADE MLE
CUT CUT CUT CUT

2 1 CLIP/CC RATE 1
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ

MLE
2
ATTRIB 1 82 3
EFF
RATE
MLE
2
0
.
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK CLEAR ENTER
KEY
RATE
MLE
4
11 MLE 1 MLE 2
4 SRC PV PGM
SOURCE
ID
VTR
TC
SAFE
TITLE
CENTER
5 TIME
CLOCK
MASK
PV
HIDE
OVLY
CUT FADE
6 015

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
7 9
LINK
FRAMES
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS CLEAR
On the rear of the Vision 2 control panels there are 8 Remote Ports, 4 Parallel Tally Ports, 2

The Vision 1M control panel (Figure 2.8) has 1 Panel Row, 24 Crosspoint Buttons per Bus, 24
Custom Control Buttons, a Transition Module, a Memory Module, and Keyer Module per

KEYERS GLOBAL MEMORY
PST CHROMA KEY FLY CHNL KEY

MASK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
7 4
MLE
1
RECALL
CLIP/CC
85 6
FADE
RATE
MLE
1
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
ATTRIB
2 RATE 2
0
.
3 ONLY +/- RATE 3
AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO MLE EFF KEY MLE
TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS BANK CLEAR ENTER
4 DISS RATE 4
PREVIEW OVERLAY FADE TO BLACK FRAMES USB
11 MLE
PGM
MLE
PV 4
PGM PV SRC
SOURCE
ID 5 SAFE
TITLE
CUT FADE
6 015
TRANSITION POSITIONER
SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
10
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
9
2
LINK
FRAMES
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 CLEAR
On the rear of the Vision 1M control panel there are 8 Remote Ports, 2 Parallel Tally Ports, 2

The Vision 1 control panel (Figure 2.8) has 1 Panel Row, 16 Crosspoint Buttons per Bus, 16
Custom Control Buttons, a Transition Module, a Memory Module, and Keyer Module per
KEYERS GLOBAL MEMORY


MASK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
7
4 5 6
MLE RECALL FADE MLE
1 CLIP/CC RATE 1

MLE
2
ATTRIB 1 82 3
EFF
RATE
MLE
2
0
.
3 ONLY +/- RATE 3
AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO MLE EFF KEY MLE
TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS BANK CLEAR ENTER
4 DISS RATE 4
PREVIEW OVERLAY FADE TO BLACK FRAMES USB
11 MLE
PGM
MLE
PV 4
PGM PV SRC
SOURCE
ID 5 SAFE
TITLE
CUT FADE
6 015
TRANSITION POSITIONER
SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS

BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
9
2
10 DISS WIPE DVE SEQ HOLD
LINK
FRAMES
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 CLEAR
On the rear of the Vision 1 control panel there are 8 Remote Ports, 2 Parallel Tally Ports, 2

Vision Touchscreen Display

The interactive touchscreen display (Figure 2.9) of the Vision control panel provides all of the
menu interaction for the switcher, including functions such as pattern control selection, external
device interface control, and switcher setup. Refer to the section “Touchscreen Interface” on
page Eng 5-2 for more information on using the touchscreen display.
Note — The Touchscreen Display is an option with the Vision 1, and 2 control panels. If you
do not have the Touchscreen Display, an LCD computer monitor with a DVI-D connector is
required.
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 MORE
SYSTEM FRAME EXIT ENTER PANEL
POWER FAIL FAIL DISPLAY
Figure 2.9 Vision Touchscreen Display
Frame
The frame of the Vision switcher performs all the video routing and manipulation of the switcher.
The frame consists of a chassis with a midplane into which all the frame boards are installed.
Boards are installed into both the front and the rear of the frame.
Frame Rear
The rear of the frame is where all of the Video Input and Video Output Boards are located, as
well as the communications ports on the Frame CPU Board. The rear of the MD (Figure 2.10),
QMD (Figure 2.11), and MD-X, and Octane/QMD-X (Figure 2.12) frames are shown below.
Frame
A CPU Board
B
Video
Output Board
C
Video
D
Input Boards
Figure 2.10 Rear View of Frame (MD Shown)

Frame
A CPU Board
B
Video
Output Board
C
Video
D
Input Boards
E Video Output
or Video Input
Board
Figure 2.11 Rear View of Frame (QMD Shown)
Frame
A
CPU
Board
B
E
Video
Input
F Boards
I
Video
J Output
Boards
K
Figure 2.12 Rear View of Frame (Octane/QMD-X Shown)
For More Information...

• on the rear frame boards, refer to the section “Frame Boards” on page Eng 2-12.
Frame Front
The front of the frame is where the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards, Video Processor Boards,
and, in the Octane/QMD-X, and MD-X frames, the Crosspoint Board are located. The number
and position of the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards, and Video Processor Boards depends on the
configuration and model of your frame.
The frame can be configured in a number of ways, depending on the number of MLEs, and
Squeeze & Tease DVE channels you require per MLE-pair. These requirements determine where
boards are installed in the frame. Refer to the section “Squeeze & Tease” on page Eng 2-27 for
more information on where the Video Processor and Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards are
located in the frame. The front of the Octane/QMD-X, and MD-X frame (Figure 2.13), and the
QMD, and MD frame (Figure 2.14) are shown below.

Slot 0
(Slot 1)
S
T (Slot 2)
A
T
U
S
Power Supply
FAN
FAIL (Slot 3)
(Slot 4)
Power Supply
(Slot 5)
(Slot 6)
Power Supply
(Slot 7)
MAIN
(Slot 8)
POWER
Power Supply
(Slot 9)
Figure 2.13 Front View of Frame (Octane/QMD-X and MD-X)
Power Supply
(Slot 1)
Slot 0
(Slot 2)
Power Supply
(Slot 3)
Figure 2.14 Front View of Frame (QMD/MD)

• on the front frame boards, refer to the section “Frame Boards” on page Eng 2-12.
• on installing and removing boards from the frame, refer to the section “Removing and
Installing Frame Boards” on page Eng 4-18.

Control Panel Modules
The Vision control panel consists of a number of removable modules. These modules include all
the interface buttons on the control panel, as well as the controllers inside the control panel.
Control Panel CPU Module

The Control Panel CPU Module houses the Single Board Computer (SBC) and the Panel
Communications Hub (PCH). This module performs all the command and control functions
between the different modules on the control panel and the frame.
Panel Module Controller Board

The Panel Module Controller (PMC) is installed on each control panel module and is used to
communicate with the Control Panel CPU Module. Each PMC is connected in series with the
other PMCs in the same row on the Module Control Link backbone and is identified by a link and
node address. Refer to the section “Module Control Link Backbone” on page Eng 20-9 for
more information on how the modules are connected on the Module Control Link backbone.
Keyers Module
The Keyers Modules consists of the Effects Keyer Board that supports the buttons and
mnemonic displays on the module, and a PMC that provides the communications with the
Control Panel CPU Module.
The Keyers Module comes in a 2-Keyer, 4-Keyer, and 8-Keyer configuration, and allow you to
perform all the Key type, Key modifier, and Key transitions for the assigned MLE. The 8-Keyer
configuration is only available with the MultiDSK™ option.
Global Memory Module

The Global Memory Module consists of the Global Memory Board that supports the buttons,
mnemonic displays, and module display on the module, and a PMC that provides the
communications with the Control Panel CPU Module.
The Global Memory Module allows you to store and recall memories to all MLEs at once, or to
specific MLEs. Only the Program/Preset MLE can support a Global Memory Module.
Effects Memory Module

The Effects Memory Module consists of the Effects Memory Board that supports the buttons,
mnemonic displays, and module display on the module, and a PMC that provides the
communications with the Control Panel CPU Module.
Note — The Vision 1 control panel does not support the Effects Memory Module. Instead, it
uses a single Global Memory Module.
The Effects Memory Module allows you to store and recall memories to individual MLEs. The
Program/Preset MLE does not support an Effects Memory Module.

Transition Module
The Transition Module consists of the Transition Board that supports the buttons, mnemonic
displays, module display, and fader on the module, and a PMC that provides the communications
with the Control Panel CPU Module.
The Transition Module allows you to set and perform all key and background transitions on the
assigned MLE. This includes the type of transition, as well as whether the transition is a cut,
auto-transition, or a manual transition using the fader.
Positioner Module
The Positioner Module consists of the Positioner Board that supports the buttons and positioner
on the module. The Positioner Module connects to the Preview Bus Module to communicate
with the Control Panel CPU Module.
The Positioner Module allows you to use the positioner to directly control external devices, such
as robotic cameras, or quickly alter menu values by moving the positioner in the appropriate axis.
The positioner can follow the menu system, or be locked to a specific external device, such as a
robotic camera.
Preview Bus Module

The Preview Bus, Preview Overlay, and Fade To Black Modules are all supported by the
Preview Bus Board. The Preview Bus Module supports the buttons, module display and USB
port on the modules, as follows:
• Preview Bus Module — The Preview Bus Module allows you to assign video feeds
directly to your preview monitor. These video feeds include the background and preview
of each MLE, as well as the main program output.
• Preview Overlay Module — The Preview Overlay Module allows you to turn on and
off specific elements of the preview overlay. The menu systems follows the activation of
preview overlay elements, allowing you to quickly adjust each one.
• Fade to Black Module — The Fade To Black Module allows you to cut or fade the
output of the switcher to black. A USB port is also located on this module to allow you to
connect a USB device, or a USB flash drive, for storing and recalling setups.
Power Distribution Board

The Power Distribution Board routes power between the control panel power supplies and the
individual modules on the control panel, as well as pass power supply and cooling fan status
signals to the Control Panel CPU Module.

Frame Boards
The frame uses a number of removable boards and cards to operate. This allows the quick
replacement of a board in the frame without having to power down or disassemble the frame.
Frame CPU Board

(4800AR-002)
The Frame CPU Board resides in Slot A at the rear of the frame, and is connected to the
midplane. It contains the Hard Drive, the system memory, and the main system microprocessor,
and is responsible for the high-level control functions and all Ethernet and remote serial
communication for the frame and the Ethernet connection between the frame and control panel.
The Frame CPU Board is also where the Global-Store is located.
Video Input Board, 16 Input

(4800AR-060, 4800AR-061)
The Video Input Board comes in four configurations, two with an analog reference loop
(4800AR-060A, 4800AR-061A), and two without (4800AR-060B, 4800AR-061B). All
versions have 16 multi-definition serial digital inputs, but the two with reference have 2
additional BNC for the reference connections.
Video Input Board, with Crosspoint

(4400AR-062, 4400AR-061)
Both the Video Input Boards with Crosspoint (4400AR-062, 4400AR-061), in addition to the
16 multi-definition serial digital inputs and reference loop, have a 72×72 crosspoint.
The Octane/QMD-X, and MD-X frames do not support the Video Input Board with Crosspoint,
using the Crosspoint Board instead.
Video Input Board, 10 Input

(4800AR-060, 4800AR-061)
Both the Video Input Boards with 10 Inputs (4800AR-060C, 4800AR-061C) come with 10
multi-definition serial digital inputs instead of 16, and no reference loop.
Video Output Board

(4800AR-064, 4800AR-065, 4800AR-066, 4800AR-067)
Each 4800AR-064, 4800AR-066, and 4800AR-067 board contains 16 fully configurable
multi-definition video outputs that can be used as Aux Buses, MLE Program, MLE Preview,
MLE Clean Feed, Preview Overlay, AuxKeys™, or MultiDSK™.
The 4800AR-065 boards contain 16 SDI only video outputs that can be used as MLE Program,
MLE Preview, MLE Clean Feed, or Preview Overlay.
Only BNCs E9 to E16 are available on a Video Output Board installed in Slot E of the QMD
frame.

Video Processor Board
(4800AR-040, 4800AR-041, 4800AR-043)
The Video Processor Board (4800AR-040 and 4800AR-041 only) performs all of the basic
video effects in the switcher. Functions such as the interface to the Squeeze & Tease MD Boards,
Chroma keying, patterns and wipes, and transitions are all generated on this board.
The Video Processor Board (4800AR-043 only) performs all of the video effects in the switcher,
including 2D DVE effects. Functions such as Chroma keying, patterns and wipes, and transitions
are all generated on this board.
How the Video Processor Boards are installed in the frame depends on the type of frame, and
how the frame is configured for the number of MLEs. Refer to the section “Video Processor” on
page Eng 2-24 for more information on the Video Processor Boards in the frame.
The Video Processor Board (4800AR-040 and 4800AR-041 only) provides 2 slots for the
optional XFX Extra Effect Cards. The Video Processor Board (4800AR-043 only) has the
XFX functionality built-in.
Midplane
The Midplane is a non-removable board that provides the interconnections between the switcher
frame boards, the power supplies, and the fan assembly, as well as the routing through which all
video signals, communication, and control commands pass. The board has no active components.
Crosspoint Board
(4800AR-020)
The Crosspoint Board is a 144×144 switch that can route HD as well as SD video signals. Only
one Crosspoint Board can be installed in the front of the frame.
The QMD and MD frames do not support the Crosspoint Board, using the Video Input Board
with Crosspoint instead.
Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board

(4800AR-047)
Note — The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board is not compatible with the Video Processor Board
(4800AR-043).
The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board provides 4 slots for the Squeeze & Tease MD Cards and
2 slots for the Squeeze & Tease WARP MD Cards. The board also provides local control as
well as video routing and power to these cards.
How the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards are installed in the frame depends on the type of
frame, and how the frame is configured for the number of MLEs and Squeeze & Tease DVE
channels that are required. Refer to the section “Squeeze & Tease” on page Eng 2-27 for more
information on where the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards are located in the frame.
Power Supplies
Each frame requires at least one or two power supplies, depending on the type and size of frame,
to provide enough power to operate. Additional Redundant power supplies can be installed to

allow all power supplies to operate in a load sharing mode. In this mode, if a power supply were
to fail, the remaining power supplies can provide enough power to keep the frame operating. This
allows for the hot swapping of a failed power supply without interruption to the operation of the
switcher.
The minimum number of power supplies required by each frame is listed as follows:
• Octane/QMD-X — 2 × 12 Volt, 700 Watt, Power Supply
• MD-X — 3 × 12 Volt, 500 Watt, Power Supply
• QMD — 1 × 12 Volt, 700 Watt, Power Supply
• MD — 2 × 12 Volt, 500 Watt, Power Supply
Note — If a power supply fails, the Power Fail indicator on the Touchscreen Display lights,
indicating that there is a problem with one of the power supplies.

• on fail indicators, refer to the section “Fail Indicators Diagnosis” on page Eng 17-10.
• on fame power supplies, refer to the section “Frame Power Supply” on page Eng 18-12.

Communication Ports
The Vision control panel has a number of communication ports on both the control panel and the
frame that are used to communicate with external devices, such as Character Generators, Video
Servers, and Robotic Cameras. There are also RJ-45 LAN ports on both the control panel and the
frame that are used for frame/control panel communication, switcher upgrades, and external
device control.
Control Panel Communication Ports

The majority of the communication ports for the switcher are located on the rear of the control
panel. These ports (Figure 2.15) include the serial ports for external device control, external link
ports for communication with Auxiliary Control Panels, the Touchscreen Display and other
external modules, an Ethernet Port for communication with the frame, PS/2 ports, USB ports, and
a DVI Video port.
2 4
3 5 6 7
Figure 2.15 Communication Ports on the Rear of the Vision Control Panel
1) DVI Video Port 4) Ethernet Port 7) Remote Ports

2) Mouse Port 5) USB Ports
3) Keyboard Port 6) External Panel Link Ports
1. DVI Video Port

The single DVI-D port is used to connect to the Touchscreen Display to provide the video signal
from the control panel to the display. If you do not have the Ross Touchscreen Display, a LCD
monitor with a DVI-D connector is required.
2. Mouse Port
This PS/2 port is used to connect a standard mouse to the switcher.
3. Keyboard Port
This PS/2 port is used to connect a standard keyboard to the switcher.
4. Ethernet Port
The single 8-pin RJ-45 port is used to connect to the facility network on the same subnet as the
frame. This connection provides all the communication between the control panel and the frame.
5. USB Ports
These 2 USB ports are used to connect to supported USB devices.
6. External Panel Link Ports
The 4 External Panel Link ports are used to connect with the Auxiliary Control Panels, legacy
Synergy Remote Aux Panels, and to the Touchscreen Display.

7. Remote Ports
These 8 DB9 serial ports are used to connect to most of the external devices supported by the
Vision switcher, with the exception of Editors. Remote ports support both RS-232 and RS-422
communication, in both a Straight Through and Null Modem configuration.
Frame Communication Ports

The majority of the communications ports on the frame (Figure 2.16) are used for controlling
peripheral equipment such as Editors. In addition to the Peripheral ports, there are LAN ports for
connecting to an external computer for upgrades and for external device control, a GP I/O port for
GPI and GPO triggers, a Panel port for communication with a legacy control panel, USB ports,
and a Time Code Input port.
1 2 3 4 5 6
LAN1 LAN2 PANEL

GP I/O PERIPH1 PERIPH2 PERIPH3 PERIPH4 1
CPU
LTC
2
Figure 2.16 Communication Ports on the Frame CPU Board
1) LAN Ports 3) Peripheral Ports 5) USB Ports

2) GP I/O Port 4) Panel Port 6) Time Code Input
1. LAN Ports
These 2 RJ-45 ports support standard 10/100 Base TX Ethernet communication for connection
to the Vision control panel network hub, or switch for external device control, upgrades, image
transfer, and the external backup of switcher setups. Only the LAN 1 port should be used to
connect to the Vision control panels.
2. GP I/O Port
The single DB25 GP I/O port is used to connect to a GP I/O distribution system, providing 10
pins for GPI Inputs and 10 pins for GPI Outputs to the switcher. A single pin is provided for
ground. These GPIs can be used to trigger transitions, custom controls, or recall a memory
registers on the switcher.
There are 4 additional pins on the port that are used as a power-fail relay. These normally closed
relays open in the event of a power failure, or other switcher failure that may prevent reliable
program output.
3. Peripheral Ports
These 4 DB9 serial ports are used to connect to external equipment such as Editors. Peripheral
ports support both RS-232 and RS-422 communication in a Straight Through or Null
configuration.
4. Panel Port
The single 8-pin RJ-45 Panel port is used to connect to the legacy Synergy control panel and
provides all the communication between the control panel and frame.
5. USB Ports
These 2 USB ports are used to connect to supported USB devices.
6. Time Code Input
The single Time Code Input port is used to connect to an external time reference for
synchronization.

• on connecting external equipment to a remote or peripheral port, refer to the section
“Communications Overview” on page Eng 9-2.
• on connecting to the frame, refer to the section “Frame Installation” on page Eng 3-5.
• on connecting to the control panel, refer to the section “Control Panel Installation” on
page Eng 3-7.
• on setting up communications between the control panel and frame, refer to the section
“Frame to Control Panel Cabling” on page Eng 3-11.

Tally Ports
The DB25 Tally ports (Figure 2.17) on the Vision control panels provide standard parallel
contact closure tallies for the switcher. Tallies can be assigned to any video input signal using the
menu system.
Tally Ports
Figure 2.17 Tally Ports on Rear of Vision Control Panel
The Vision control panel provides 36 tallies as standard, with 18 tallies per port (Figure 2.18).
Depending on the Vision control panel you have, extended tallies can be installed in groups of 36.
Tallies 1-18 Tallies 37-54 Tallies 73-90 Tallies 109-126
Tallies 19-36 Tallies 55-72 Tallies 91-108 Tallies 127-144
Figure 2.18 Tallies on Each Tally Port
The maximum parallel tallies supported by each control panel is as follows:

• Vision 1 — 36 maximum
• Vision 1M — 36, or 72
• Vision 2 — 36 maximum
• Vision 2M — 36, or 72
• Vision 3M — 36, 72, or 108
• Vision 2X — 36, 72, or 108
• Vision 3 — 36, 72, or 108
• Vision 4 — 36, 72, 108, or 144

• on assigning tallies to video inputs, refer to the section “Assigning Tallies to Input
Sources” on page Eng 7-22.
• on the pinouts and voltages for the Tally ports, refer to the section “Control Panel
Pinouts” on page Eng 20-21.

GPI I/O Port
The single DB25 General Purpose Interface (GPI) port on the CPU Board of the frame
(Figure 2.19) is used for GPI Input and GPI Output signals.
GP I/O Port
LAN1 LAN2 PANEL

CPU
LTC
2
10/100 10/100 USB
Figure 2.19 The GP I/O Port on the CPU Board of the Frame
There are 10 GPI Inputs that can be used to trigger transitions, custom controls, or memory
recalls on the switcher in different areas, or MLEs. Setup is done through the menu system,
allowing you to associate a GPI Input with a Function, and specify which Area, or MLE, you
want that function to be performed in. If you select custom control as the function, you must
specify the custom control you want to execute, rather than the area. GPI Inputs can also be used
to activate a tally.
There are 10 GPI Outputs that can be used to trigger events on external equipment. Like the GPI
Inputs, setup is done through the menu system, allowing you to configure the trigger type and
level for each GPI. Output GPIs are typically triggered using custom controls.

• on setting up GPI Inputs, refer to the section “Standard GPI Setup” on page Eng 12-10.
• on setting up GPI Outputs, refer to the section “Programming Special Functions” on
page Eng 10-15.
• on the pinouts and voltages of the GP I/O port, refer to the section “Frame Pinouts” on
page Eng 20-17.

Video Routing
Video routing is handled by various boards installed in the frame. The boards used to route video
through the frame depends on the type of frame you have, as follows:
• Octane/QMD-X/MD-X — The boards primarily responsible for video routing are the
Crosspoint Board, the Video Processor Board, and the Squeeze & Tease MD Carrier
Board.
• QMD/MD — The boards primarily responsible for video routing are the Video Input
Board, the Video Processor Board, and the Squeeze & Tease MD Carrier Board.
Each of these boards in the frame work together with the Midplane and the Video Output Board
to take an input video signal, manipulate it, and route it to the desired output.
Crosspoint Matrix
The crosspoint matrix allows you to route a video signal from any Input BNC to any, or all,
Output BNC. Video signals are received by the Input BNC and sent to the Crosspoint.
Depending on how the switcher is currently operating, the Crosspoint will send the video signals
to the Video Processor and Squeeze & Tease Carrier for any video manipulation that is
required. The manipulated video signals are then sent back to the Crosspoint to be routed to the
desired Video Output, and finally to the Output BNC.
Video flow through the crosspoint to the other boards in the frame depends on the frame you are
using and how it is configured.
Note — Video manipulation can only occur on video signals that are in the same video format
as the switcher is currently operating in. Non-native video formats must be converted before
they can be manipulated. Refer to the section “Setting Up a Conversion Loop” on page Eng
16-2 for more information on up/down converters.

• on the different board configurations of the frame, refer to the section “Squeeze &
Tease” on page Eng 2-27.

Octane/QMD-X Crosspoint Matrix
4
16
Video Input Board 16 Video Processor
(16 Inputs) Board
8
8 Squeeze & Tease
MD Carrier
16
Video Input Board 16 Video Processor 8
(16 Inputs) Board
8
4
16 8
Video Input Board 16 Video Processor Squeeze & Tease
(16 Inputs) Board MD Carrier
8 16
16 8
(16 Inputs) Board MD Carrier
8 16
Video Input Board 16

(16 Inputs) Crosspoint Board
144 × 144

(16 Inputs)
4
Video Output Board 16 CPU Board
(16 Outputs) Global-Store
4
Video Output Board 16

(16 Outputs)

(16 Outputs)
Figure 2.20 Video Flow Through the Crosspoint Board
(4800AR-043).
The Crosspoint Board has the following inputs:

• 96 video feeds from the Input BNCs on the Video Input Boards in Slots C through H.
• 8 video feeds from the Video Processor Board in Slot 2 (depending on configuration).
• 4 video feeds from the Global-Store on the CPU Board in Slot A.
The Crosspoint Board has the following outputs:
• 48 video feeds to the Output BNCs on the Video Output Boards in Slots I through K.
• 16 video feeds to the Video Processor Board in Slot 2 (depending on configuration).
• 4 video feeds to the Global-Store on the CPU Board in Slot A.

MD-X Crosspoint Matrix
16 8
(16 Inputs) Board MD Card
8 16
16 8
8 16

(16 Inputs)

(16 Inputs)

(16 Inputs) Crosspoint Board
144 × 144

(16 Inputs)
4
4

(16 Outputs)

(16 Outputs)
Figure 2.21 Video Flow through the Crosspoint Board

• 96 video feeds from the Input BNCs on the Video Input Boards in Slots C through H.
• 8 video feeds from the Video Processor Board in Slot 4.
• 48 video feeds to the Output BNCs on the Video Output Boards in Slots I through K.
• 16 video feeds to the Video Processor Board in Slot 4.

QMD Crosspoint Matrix
4
16
Video Input Board 16 Video Processor
(16 Inputs) Board
8
8 Squeeze & Tease
MD Card
16
Video Input Board 16 Video Processor 8
(16 Inputs) Board
8
4
Video Input Board 16 Video Input Board

(16 Input) Crosspoint Matrix
72 × 72
OR

(8 Outputs)
4
4
Figure 2.22 Video flow through the Crosspoint Matrix
(4800AR-043).

• 48 video feeds from the Input BNCs on the Video Input Boards in Slots C through E.
• 16 video feeds from the Video Processor Boards in Slots 1 and 3.
• 24 video feeds to the Output BNCs on the Video Output Boards in Slots B and E.
• 16 video feeds to the Video Processor Boards in Slots 1 and 3.
Note — If a Video Output Board is installed in Slot E, a total of 32 Input BNCs and 24
Output BNCs will be available.
MD Crosspoint Matrix
16 8
8 16

(16 Inputs)
Video Input Board
Crosspoint Matrix
72 × 72
4
4
Figure 2.23 Video Flow through the Crosspoint Matrix

• 32 video feeds from the Input BNCs on the Video Input Boards in Slots C through D.
• 16 video feeds to the Output BNCs on the Video Output Boards in Slot B.
Video Processor
The Video Processor Board (4800AR-040 and 4800AR-041) performs most of the
non-Squeeze & Tease video manipulation for the switcher. Background, Key, Alpha, DVE and
Utility signals are all sent to the Video Processor and returned as Program, Preview, Clean, and
DVE video and alpha.
The Video Processor Board (4800AR-043) performs all of the video manipulation, including 2D
DVE effects, for the switcher. Background, Key, Alpha, DVE and Utility signals are all sent to
the Video Processor and returned as Program, Preview, Clean, and DVE video and alpha.
(4800AR-043).
The number and placement of the Video Processor Boards in the frame depends on the frame you
have and how it is configured.
Octane/QMD/X Video Processor

The Octane/QMD-X, and QMD frames can support 2 MLEs with each Video Processor Board.
The placement of the Video Processor Boards depends on the number of MLEs, and Squeeze &
Tease DVE channels you require per MLE-pair. These requirements will determine where boards
are installed in the frame. Refer to the section “Squeeze & Tease” on page Eng 2-27 for more
information on where the Video Processor and Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards are located in
the frame.
The inputs and outputs for the Video Processor Board are the same, except for the MLEs they
are supporting (Figure 2.24).

MLE 1 BKGD MLE 1 PGM
MLE 1 PST MLE 1 PV
MLE 1 Key 1 Video

MLE 1 Clean Feed
MLE 1 Key 1 Alpha

MLE 1 Utility Out
MLE 1 Key 2 Video
MLE 1 Key 2 Alpha
MLE 1 Key 3 Video
MLE 1 Key 3 Alpha
MLE 1 Key 4 Video
MLE 1 Key 4 Alpha

MLE 2 BKGD
(MLE 1 & 2)
MLE 2 PGM
MLE 2 PST
MLE 2 PV
MLE 2 Key 1 Video
MLE 2 Clean Feed
MLE 2 Key 1 Alpha
MLE 2 Utility Out

MLE 2 Key 2 Video
MLE 2 Key 2 Alpha
MLE 2 Key 3 Video
MLE 2 Key 3 Alpha
MLE 2 Key 4 Video
MLE 2 Key 4 Alpha
Figure 2.24 Video flow through the Video Processor for MLEs 1 and 2
The Video Processor Board for MLE 1 and MLE 2 has the following inputs:
• 2 MLE BKGD video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 MLE PST video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 1 Video video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Key 1 Alpha video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
The Video Processor Board for MLE 1 and MLE 2 has the following outputs:
• 2 PGM video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 PV video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Clean Feed video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Utility Bus Out video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).

MD/X Video Processor
The MD-X and MD frames can support 2 MLEs with each Video Processor Board. The Video
Processor Board performs most of the non-Squeeze & Tease video manipulation for the
switcher. Background, Key, Alpha, DVE and Utility signals are all sent to the Video Processor
and returned as Program, Preview, Clean, and Aux Loopthrough.
The inputs and outputs for the Video Processor Board are the same, except for the MLEs they
are supporting (Figure 2.25).
MLE 1 PST MLE 1 PV
MLE 1 Key 1 Video MLE 1 Clean Feed
MLE 1 Key 1 Alpha
MLE 1 Key 2 Video
MLE 1 Key 2 Alpha
MLE 2 PST MLE 2 PV

(MLE 1 & 2)
MLE 2 Key 1 Video MLE 2 Clean Feed
MLE 2 Key 1 Alpha
MLE 2 Key 2 Video
MLE 2 Key 2 Alpha
Aux Loopthrough 1 Aux Loopthrough 1
Aux Loopthrough 2 Aux Loopthrough 2
Utility 1
Utility 2
Figure 2.25 Video Flow through the Video Processor
The Video Processor Board for MLE 1 and MLE 2 has the following inputs:
• 2 MLE BKGD video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 MLE PST video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Aux Loopthrough video feeds.
• 2 Utility video feeds.
The Video Processor Board for MLE 1 and MLE 2 has the following outputs:
• 2 PGM video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 PV video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Clean Feed video feeds (one for MLE 1 and one for MLE 2).
• 2 Aux Loopthrough video feed.

Squeeze & Tease
The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards support the Squeeze & Tease MD and WARP cards that
perform all of the Squeeze & Tease video manipulation for the switcher. When Squeeze & Tease
resources are required by the switcher, the desired video signals are sent from the Video
Processor Board to the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board. The video signals are then sent back
to the Video Processor Board.
(4800AR-043).
The number and placement of the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards in the frame depends on the
frame you have and how it is configured.
Octane/QMD-X Squeeze & Tease

The Video Processor Boards and Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards can be installed in the
Octane/QMD-X frame in a number of ways, depending on the number of MLEs, and Squeeze &
Tease resources you require. These configurations are as follows:
• Slots 6 - 9 — The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Boards in Slot 6 and Slot 8 of the
QMD-X frame support the Video Processor Boards in Slot 7 and Slot 9, respectively. In
this configuration, the 8 Squeeze & Tease DVE channel resources and 2 Squeeze &
Tease WARP generators provided by each Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board in Slot 6 are
dedicated to the Video Processor Board in Slot 7. Similarly, the 8 Squeeze & Tease
DVE channel resources and 2 Squeeze & Tease WARP generators provided by each
Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board in Slot 8 are dedicated to the Video Processor Board
in Slot 9 (Figure 2.27).
• Slots 2 - 4 — The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board in Slot 3 of the QMD frame
supports the Video Processor Boards in Slot 2 and Slot 4. In this configuration, the 8
Squeeze & Tease DVE channel resources, and 2 Squeeze & Tease WARP generators,
provided by the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board are split across the two Video
Processor Boards. This provides a total of 4 Squeeze & Tease DVE channel resources
and 1 Squeeze & Tease WARP generator to MLE 5 and MLE 6, supported by the Video
Processor Board in Slot 4, and 4 Squeeze & Tease DVE channel resources and 1
Squeeze & Tease WARP generator to MLE 7 and MLE 8, supported by the Video
Processor Board in Slot 2 (Figure 2.26).
MD-X Squeeze & Tease

The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board in Slot 3 supports MLE 1 and MLE 2 (Figure 2.27), and
the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board in Slot 8 supports MLE 3 and MLE 4. Both have the same
inputs and outputs, except for the MLEs they are supporting.
Note — The inputs and outputs for the Squeeze & Tease Carrier in Slot 8 are the same as
the inputs for the Squeeze & Tease Carrier in Slot 3, except that they are for MLE 3 and
MLE 4, not MLE 1 and MLE 2.

QMD Squeeze & Tease
The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board in Slot 2 of the QMD frame supports the Video Processor
Boards in Slot 1 and Slot 3. In this configuration, the 8 Squeeze & Tease DVE channel
resources, and 2 Squeeze & Tease WARP generators, provided by the Squeeze & Tease Carrier
Board are split across the two Video Processor Boards. This provides a total of 4 Squeeze &
Tease DVE channel resources and 1 Squeeze & Tease WARP generator to MLE 1 and MLE 2,
supported by the Video Processor Board in Slot 1, and 4 Squeeze & Tease DVE channel
resources and 1 Squeeze & Tease WARP generator to MLE 3 and MLE 4, supported by the
Video Processor Board in Slot 3 (Figure 2.26).
MD Squeeze & Tease

The MD frame has a single Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board (Figure 2.27) that supports the
Squeeze & Tease MD and WARP cards that perform all of the Squeeze & Tease video
manipulation for the switcher. When Squeeze & Tease resources are required by the switcher, the
desired video signals are sent from the Video Processor Board, to the Squeeze & Tease Carrier
Board. The video signals are then sent back to the Video Processor Board.
2
Squeeze & Tease MD Card
4
2
4
2
4
2
Video Processor Board Video Processor Board
(MLE 1 & 2) (MLE 3 & 4)
4
Squeeze & Tease Carrier
2
Squeeze & Tease
WARP Card
2
2
Squeeze & Tease
WARP Card
2
Figure 2.26 Video flow to and from a shared Squeeze & Tease Carrier

2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
Squeeze & Tease
WARP Card
2
2
Squeeze & Tease
WARP Card
2
Figure 2.27 Video flow to and from a dedicated Squeeze & Tease Carrier
The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board in both the shared and dedicated configuration, has the
following inputs:
• 8 video feeds to the Squeeze & Tease MD Cards (2 per card).
• 4 video feeds to the Squeeze & Tease WARP Cards (2 per card).
The Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board in both the shared and dedicated configuration, has the
following outputs:
• 16 video feeds from the Squeeze & Tease MD Cards (4 per card).
• 4 video feeds from the Squeeze & Tease WARP Cards (2 per card).
XFX Extra Effects

The XFX Extra Effects Card performs different functions, depending on the options you
purchase. Current options include a Dual Border Generator and MLE-Store.
The Dual Border Generator option provides visually dynamic border, shadow, and outline effects
to both linear MLE keyers, with either hard or soft edges. The option can also enhance Self Keys,
Chroma Keys, and Preset Pattern Keys.
The MLE-Store provides 4 channels of still images per MLE, or 2 video channels with 2 alpha
channels. Each MLE can have separate images loaded and images with embedded alpha channels
are supported by dedicating one of the MLE-Store channels to the alpha channel.
The Video Processor Board (4800AR-040 and 4800AR-041 only) supports up to 2 XFX Cards
(Figure 2.28). When XFX resources are required by the switcher, the desired video signals are
sent from the Video Processor Board, to the XFX Cards on the Video Processor Board. The
video signals are then sent back to the Video Processor Board. The Video Processor Board
(4800AR-043) has the XFX functionality built-in.

4 4
XFX Card 4 4 XFX Card
(Slot 2)
Video Processor Board (Slot 1)
4 4
Figure 2.28 Video flow to and from an XFX Card
The XFX Card has the following inputs:

• 4 video feeds.
The XFX Card has the following outputs:
• 4 MLE-Store Channels, or 2 MLE-Store Channels with 2 Alpha Channels.
• 4 video feeds from the Dual Border Generator, including 2 Video Channels and 2
Alpha Channels.

Video Formats
The Vision switcher can operate in a number of different video formats, at different frequencies in
either interlaced or progressive scan mode. When you switch between these formats, various
displays and settings automatically change to show the new information. To better understand
what is being displayed, you must first understand what the information for the different video
formats means.
The video formats that are displayed on the Vision switcher (Figure 2.29) provide three pieces of
information about the video format. This information is the number of horizontal Scan Lines,
whether the scan lines are Interlaced (i) or Progressive (p), and the Frequency that the scan lines
are drawn at.
1080i 59.94
Scan Lines Interlaced Frequency
or
Progressive
Figure 2.29 Video Formats Provide Three Pieces of Information
Horizontal Scan Lines

The number of horizontal scan lines is related to the pixel resolution of the image on screen. For
example, if you have a 720p 59.94 Hz video signal, the 720 is the number of vertical scan lines.
A video signal with 720 scan lines usually corresponds to a 1280×720 (H×V) pixel image. This
means that the image is comprised of 1280 columns of pixels and 720 rows of pixels (Figure
2.30). The reason the vertical resolution, the 720, is used to denote the video format is because of
how it is drawn on a standard television. With Cathode-Ray Tube (CRT) television monitors, the
image is created, or drawn, one pixel at a time, in rows, from the left side of the screen to the
right, to create one scan line.
1280
Scan Lines
720
Figure 2.30 A 720 video signal has 720 scan lines by 1280 vertical pixels
Since each scan line starts from a vertical pixel, there are 720 rows of pixels, or scan lines, being
drawn horizontally. The same is true of a video signal with 1080 vertical scan lines, which
corresponds to a 1920×1080 pixel image.
Interlaced vs. Progressive

In the previous section we learned that a video signal is made up of a number of horizontal scan
lines that are drawn from left to right on the screen. Although these scan lines are always drawn
from left to right, they can be drawn in either an Interlaced or Progressive pattern.

Interlaced
An Interlaced video format starts at the top of the screen and draws all the odd number scan lines
and then all the even number scan lines in sequence. This results in half the image being drawn in
one pass and the other half of the image being drawn in the second. These two passes are called
Fields, where the first pass is called Field 1 and the second pass is called Field 2. When both
Field 1 and Field 2 have been drawn, resulting in a complete image, you have a single Frame.
Field 1 Field 2
Interlaced
Frame 1 (Field 1 + Field 2)
Figure 2.31 An Interlaced Video Format Draws Field 1 and Field 2 Separately, to Create a Frame
Both Field 1 and Field 2 must be drawn to create Frame 1. If you are using field or frame
numbers as a counter, you should remember that you must double the number if you are
converting from frames to fields. For example, a 4 frame delay is equal to an 8 field delay.
Progressive
A Progressive scan video format draws each scan line in sequence, starting from the top of the
screen and working to the bottom. Unlike Interlaced, with Progressive scan the entire image is
drawn at one time, in a single pass (Figure 2.32). This means that there are no fields in a
Progressive scan image.
Progressive
Frame 1
Figure 2.32 A Progressive scan video format draws each line in sequence
Because there are no fields in a Progressive scan video signal, you cannot use it as a reference
signal for an Interlaced video signal. Because the Interlaced video format requires information
about when each field is being drawn, you must use a Progressive scan video format as reference
for a Progressive scan video signal.

Progressive Segmented Frame
A Progressive Segmented Frame video format is similar to a Progressive Scan video format, in
that both draw each scan line in sequence from the top of the screen to the bottom. Unlike the
Progressive Scan video format, the Progressive Segmented Frame video format transmits the
video signal as if it were interlaced. The odd scan lines are transmitted, followed by the even
ones. The even field are delayed one field on the transmitting end, and the odd fields are delayed
one field on the receiving end. This allows the transmission of Progressive video signals via
equipment that was designed to handle Interlaced video signals only.
Because there are no true fields in a Progressive Segmented Frame video format, you cannot use
it as a reference signal for an Interlaced video format.
Frequency
In the previous sections we learned that a video image is comprised of a number of horizontal
scan lines that are drawn in either a Progressive or Interlaced format. The length of time it takes
to draw the scan lines from the top of the screen to the bottom in a single pass is called the
Frequency, and is measured in Hertz (Hz). With a Progressive scan video format, the frequency
is the time it takes to draw the entire image. With an Interlaced video format, the frequency is the
time it takes to draw 1 field, or half, of the image (Figure 2.33).
Interlaced Progressive
Field 1 Frame 1
(1/50 sec at 50 Hz) (1/50 sec at 50 Hz)
Figure 2.33 Interlaced and Progressive video formats with the same frequency
For example, an interlaced format of 1080i 50 Hz draws 50 fields per second. Compare this to a
Progressive scan format of 720p 50 Hz which draws 50 frames per second. Notice that the
Interlaced format is actually only drawing 25 frames (Field 1 plus Field 2) per second, where the
Progressive scan format is drawing the full 50 frames per second.
Using Frame and Field Information

Frame and Field rates become very important when you are setting up custom control pauses,
transition rates or any other system that counts a period of time in frame or fields on the switcher.
Remember from the previous section that in a Progressive scan format, running at 50 Hz, the
switcher draws 50 frames per second. In an Interlaced format, also running at 50 Hz, the switcher
draws 25 frames per second.
The Vision switcher uses frames to measure transition rates and custom control pauses. The
amount of time that this represents depends on the frequency and format you are operating the
switcher in. For example, if you are operating the switcher in 1080i 59.94 Hz, the default MLE
transition rate is set at 15 frames (Figure 2.34). Since the frequency for an Interlaced format is
shown in fields, you must divide this number by 2 in order to get the number of frames per
second, 30. By comparing the transition rate (15 frames) and the video format frame frequency
(30 frame per second) you can calculate that the transition rate is ½ a second.
REG:00 Memory0
M:015 D:008 F:20
Figure 2.34 Transition Rate Information in the Global Memory System Module

If you were operating the switcher in 720p 59.94 Hz, the default MLE rate is set at 30 frames.
Since the frequency for a Progressive scan format is shown in frames, no conversion is required.
By comparing the transition rate (30 frames) and the video format frame frequency (60 frames
per second) you can calculate that the transition rate is ½ a second.
Important — When you switch reference formats, you must perform a soft reset of the
switcher in order to load the default rates for the format you have set.

• on setting up the switcher reference, refer to the section “Reference Connection and
Setup” on page Eng 4-11.
• on resetting the switcher, refer to the section “Resetting the Switcher” on page Eng
4-24.

CPU Structure
This section describes the CPU structure of the Vision switcher, in terms of which areas are
controlled by which specific microprocessors. Effectively, the CPU structure functions as a
master/slave multi-processor system, where the master processor controls high level functionality
and delegates other tasks to slave processors.
Processor distribution and functionality are as follows:
• One PowerPC CPU on the Frame CPU Board is responsible for performing high level
functions, and issuing commands to the remaining microprocessors. This processor
manages all serial channels to and from the frame, manages communications with the
control panel, and manages communications with all other peripheral devices connected
to the frame.
• The Frame Processor also controls non-MLE functions, including all Aux Bus functions
and all crosspoint switching on the Crosspoint Module. It does not control the Preview
Overlay Module, but it does issue commands to that module, in terms of what text and
graphics to display.
• One PowerPC CPU on the Video Processor Board processes high-level information
from the Frame CPU Board that pertains to the current state and specific commands
issued on each MLE. This high level information includes which functions are enabled or
disabled, and what configurations have been set up by the user on the control panel. The
Video Processor Board translates that information, and sets the required bits in the
hardware to complete the command request. Some examples of this high level
information are as follows:
› If you press WIPE in an MLE and select the circle wipe, that information goes to the
Frame CPU — which in turn tells the selected Video Processor that a circle wipe
has been requested. The Video Processor then draws the proper tables required to
make the image.
› If you pull the Fader from Program to Preset, the Frame Processor receives that
information and analyzes how it affects the high level structures within the switcher,
such as which buses are moving, what type of effect has been requested (Dissolve,
Wipe, etc.). The Frame Processor then passes the current state of a particular field
to the MLE Processor, which then writes the specific values of the effect to the
video processing circuitry.
› If you press the AUTO TRANS button, that command goes from the Control Panel
to the Frame Processor, which in turn keeps track of which state the transition is in.
Commands are then issued to the MLE Processor to perform the transition at (for
example) 4% in one field, 8% in the next field — until complete. The MLE
Processor in turn does not process the video itself, but rather issues commands to the
hardware on the MLE Board to set the mixer to the requested ratio and manipulate
the pixels accordingly.
• One PowerPC CPU on the Video Output Board is used for local control of this card. It
also provides internal ethernet access, program store, and still store images.
• One PowerPC CPU on the Squeeze & Tease MD Carrier Board governs the on-board
communication and control, as well as the communication with the midplane and the
daughter cards mounted on the board.
• The Squeeze & Tease MD Carrier board also contains a single CPU, which performs all
the mathematical calculations required for the DVE effects.
All boards in the frame also contain a micro-controller to manage upgrades, system booting, and
other housekeeping functions.

A Note About CPU Architecture
Virtually all of the lookup tables and all of the bits that are used to configure the hardware and
map the crosspoints are set every field. The switcher is in effect performing a complete memory
recall operation every single field, always guaranteeing that the control panel is set properly. In
terms of the architecture, there is no difference between a requested memory recall operation and
the way that the switcher updates the panel normally — every field.
In addition to increasing the reliability of the switcher tremendously, this functionality also allows
you to return to the exact state of the panel, should a power failure occur.

Board Labelling
Every circuit board in the Vision switcher that was manufactured by Ross Video is labelled to
identify the name of the board, the board number and the revision, or issue, number. This
identification is usually found on the outside edge of the board, next to the Ross Video logo
(Figure 2.35).
VIDEO PROCESSOR 4800AR-040 ISS 02
Figure 2.35 Circuit Board Identification
The following information is present on the circuit board:

• Ross Logo — The Ross logo identifies the board as having been designed and
manufactured by Ross Video.
• Board Name — The board name identifies the function of the board, allowing you to
quickly and easily identify the different boards in the switcher.
• Board Number — The board number is tied to the board name and the product line that
the board is from. This number identifies the board, and the function it performs.
• Revision — The revision number identifies the issue of the board.
Note — Where a white square is present in the label string, letters may be written within the
square to indicate a minor variation on the board itself.

Physical Installation and Cabling
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on unpacking, installing, and basic cabling for your Vision
switcher.
• Unpacking Your Switcher
• Opening and Closing the Frame Door
• Frame Installation
• Control Panel Installation
• Frame to Control Panel Cabling
• Video Input Cabling
• Video Output Cabling
• Button Inserts
• Power Supply Connections
• Power Fail Indicators
Warning Hazardous Voltage — This apparatus, when equipped with multiple power
supplies, can generate high leakage currents. To reduce the risk of electric shock, ensure that
each individual supply cord is connected to its own separate branch circuit with an earth
connection.
Caution — The frame door must be installed on the frame for proper cooling. Leaving the
frame door off may cause the frame to overheat, resulting in unexpected behavior or damage to
equipment.
Important — All cables must be run in accordance with good engineering practices. Ensure
that there is sufficient room for the cable and that enough slack is left in the cable run to permit
long, gentle bends. Always install cables so that they will not be subjected to physical abuse.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Physical Installation and Cabling • Eng 3–1
Unpacking Your Switcher
A Vision switcher is usually shipped in two, or more, boxes, depending on the options you
purchased with your switcher. These boxes may vary, but usually contain the following:
• Box 1 — This box contains the frame, with all the required boards installed.
• Box 2 — This box contains the control panel, touchscreen display, cables, and manuals.
Note — The Touchscreen Display is an option with the Vision 1 and 2 control panels. If you
required.
Once the boxes are unpacked, check the contents against the packing list to ensure that all items
are included. If any items are missing or damaged, contact your sales representative or Ross
Video Limited immediately.
Static Discharge
ESD Susceptibility — Static discharge can cause serious damage to sensitive

semiconductor devices. Avoid handling the switcher circuit boards in high static environments
such as carpeted areas and when synthetic fiber clothing is worn. Touch the frame to dissipate
static charge before removing boards from the frame and exercise proper grounding
precautions when working on circuit boards.
Serial Numbers
Serial numbers have been implemented to allow Ross Video to properly track which options have
been purchased by each customer. Switchers have serial numbers installed (in flash memory) at
the factory.

• on serial numbers, refer to the section “Installing Serial Numbers” on page Eng 6-11.
Eng 3–2 • Physical Installation and Cabling Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Opening and Closing the Frame Door
If you are installing hardware options, or replacing a circuit board or power supply, you must
remove and re-install the frame door.
Caution — The frame door must be installed on the frame for proper cooling. Leaving the
frame door off may cause the frame to overheat, resulting in unexpected behavior or damage to
equipment.
Octane/QMD/X Frame
The door on the Octane/QMD-X and QMD frames swings open, allowing for quick access to the
boards and cards in the frame. The door can also be completely removed for greater access into
the frame.
1. Gently pull the door latch out and rotate it to release the door. The Octane/QMD-X door
has two latches.
Top of Frame
Frame Door
Door Latch
Door Hinge
Door Swing
Direction
Figure 3.1 Frame Door Overview (QMD Shown)
2. Swing the door open, as shown (Figure 3.1).
Operating Tip — To remove the door from the frame completely, open the door to its full
extent. The door will be perpendicular to the front of the frame. Lift the door directly up to
unhook it from the hinge pins and remove the door from the frame.
MD/X Frame
Opening and Removing the Frame Door

1. Gently pull the door latch out and up, releasing the door from the top of the frame
(Figure 3.2). The door retainer prevents the door from falling.
Top of Frame
Door Retainer
Frame Door
Door Latch
Figure 3.2 Frame Door Overview (MD Shown)
2. With both hands, grasp the sides of the door, and gently lift it. Rotate the bottom towards
you until the bottom edge clears the pivoting tongue on which it rests, and the door
retainer is free of the frame top plate.
3. Move the door away from the frame, and place it on a clean, flat surface.
Installing and Closing the Frame Door

1. With both hands, grasp the sides of the frame door, and, ensuring that the door retainer is
under the top of the frame, hook the grooved bottom edge over the pivoting tongue on
the bottom front ledge of the frame (Figure 3.3).
Door Retainer Frame
Frame Door
Door, resting on pivoting tongue
Figure 3.3 Frame Door Overview (MD Shown)
2. When you are satisfied that the door is resting properly, firmly press the top of the door
until the latch pops into place and is secure.
Frame Installation
This section gives an in-depth overview on how to install the frame into your facility. For
information on the dimensions of your frame, refer to the section “Frame Dimensions” on
page Eng 20-6.
The Vision switcher has an operating temperature range of 0 to 35 degrees Celsius.
Use the following guidelines when installing the frame into your equipment rack:
• Install the frame so as to ensure maximum stability, and adequate ventilation during
operation.
• Ensure that both sides of the frame are clear, so that airflow through the frame is not
restricted in any way.
• If possible, but not required, leave a 1RU space above the frame to facilitate installation
and removal of the frame door.
• The frame should be installed in a dry, dust free, and easily accessible location.
To ensure maximum stability, the frame must be mounted to the rack using the 2 Support
Brackets that are located at the rear of the frame. These brackets are included in your
Installation Kit.
Installing the Frame
Notice — Failure to install both the Support Brackets, or Rack Mount Arms, as described
will void the warranty.
1. Remove the front door from the frame. Refer to the section “Opening and Closing the
Frame Door” on page Eng 3-3 for more information on removing and installing the
frame door.
2. Using standard rack mounting bolts (not supplied) install the frame into the rack.
3. Install the Rack Mount Arms or Support Backets as follows:
• If you have an Octane/QMD-X frame, refer to the instructions that came with your
Rack Mount Kit.
• If you have a QMD frame, use standard rack mounting bolts (not supplied) to attach
the support brackets to the Rear Panel Mounting Flange (Figure 3.4). The support
brackets are adjustable to accommodate different rack sizes.
Rear Mounting
Flange
Support
Bracket
Rack
Figure 3.4 Support Brackets on the Frame (QMD Shown)
4. Inspect all the boards in the frame to ensure that they are properly seated.
5. Inspect all power supplies installed in the frame to ensure that they are properly seated
and that the power switch is in the OFF position.
6. If you need to install or remove any of the boards or cards in the frame, refer to the
section “Removing and Installing Frame Boards” on page Eng 4-18.
7. Re-install the frame door.
Operating Tip — Even though you will be accessing the frame later in the installation
process, it is a good practice to put the frame door on when you are not working in the frame.
This protects the boards and circuits in the frame from accidental damage, and dust or debris.

• on frame specifications, refer to the section “Standard Components” on page Eng 20-2.
• on working with the frame power supplies, refer to the section “Frame Power Supply”
on page Eng 18-12.
Control Panel Installation
This section gives an in-depth overview on how to install the Vision control panel into your
facility. This includes installing the control panel into, or on, the desk, installing the Touchscreen
display into a mount, and installing any Auxiliary Control Panels.
Control Panel Installation

The Vision control panel can be installed in one of 3 ways; on top of the desk, partially inserted
into the desk, or flush with the desk. Refer to the section “Control Panel Dimensions” on page
Eng 20-6 for the specific dimensions of each Vision control panel.
Desk Top Control Panel Installation

The Vision control panel can be installed sitting on a desk (Figure 3.5). In this installation, ensure
that nothing is blocking the cooling vents at the front and rear of the control panel.
Figure 3.5 Profile of Control Panel Sitting on Desk
In-Desk Control Panel Installation

To install the Vision control panel in the desk, you will have to install the mounting brackets onto
the control panel, and ensure that the cutout in the desk is of the specified size. There must also be
enough cable clearance at the back of the cutout to allow the cables to be connected to the control
panel.
The desk must be between 0.65 and 1.7 inches thick for the Under-Desk Brackets to install
properly and secure the Vision control panel into the desk.
1. Ensure that the cutout and clearances are adequate for your control panel.
2. If the mounting brackets are not already installed, install the mounting brackets onto the
control panel (Figure 3.6) using the provided screws.
SELF AUTO MATTE KEY BORD BORD SHOW
KEY SELECT FILL MEM ON OFF ALPHA
SEL
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 PST CHROMA KEY MASK FLY CHAN KEY
PST TRANS KEY TRANS SEL SEL

BLACK PV OVER LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2
CUT CUT
4 5 6 DISS WIPE DVE SEQ
KEYS 1 2 3 MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES
EFF KEY ROLL CUT AUTO AUTO AUTO

DISS BANK 0 ENTER RATE CLIP TRANS TRANS TRANS

SEL KEY SELECT FILL MEM ON OFF ALPHA

BLACK PV OVER LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2
CUT CUT
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ 4 5 6
KEYS 1 2 3 MLE
FRAMES ONLY RATE
ROLL CUT AUTO EFF KEY AUTO AUTO

CLIP TRANS DISS BANK 0 ENTER RATE TRANS TRANS

SEL

BLACK PV OVER LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2
CUT CUT
KEYS 1 2 3 MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES

PREVIEW BUS PREVIEW OVERLAY FADE TO BLACK FRAMES USB
MLE 1 MLE 2 MLE 3 MLE 4 SRC PV PGM SOURCE VTR SAFE CENTER TIME MASK HIDE CUT FADE
ID TC TITLE CLOCK PV OVER
TRANSITION DOWNSTREAM KEYERS GLOBAL MEMORY SYSTEM POSITIONER

SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS SEL SEL SEL SEL ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
BLACK PV OVER LIMIT
1 2 3 4 MLE RECALL 4 5 6 FADE MLE
1 CLIP RATE 1
CUT CUT CUT CUT
MLE 1 2 3 EFF MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ 2 RATE 2 DEFLT
MLE KEYS +/- 0 . MLE MLE

3 ONLY RATE 3 LINK
FRAMES
ROLL CUT AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO MLE EFF KEY MLE
CLIP TRANS 4 DISS BANK DEFLT ENTER RATE 4 LOCK
TRANS TRANS TRANS TRANS
Figure 3.6 Installing the Mounting Brackets
3. Gently slide the control panel into the cutout in the desk. The control panel will drop into
the cutout from above and rest on the edge supports (Figure 3.7).
Figure 3.7 Profile of Control Panel Sitting in the Desk
4. Check the clearances around the control panel and at the back for the cables.
5. Install the Under-Desk Brackets on both sides of the control panel to secure the control
panel in the desk (Figure 3.8). There are six (6) Under-Desk Brackets for the Vision 4,
and four (4) for all other Vision control panels.
Vision 4 Only
Under-Desk Brackets
Figure 3.8 Under-Desk Brackets Installation
6. Additional screws (not provided by Ross Video) can be installed through the
Under-Desk Bracket into the desk to ensure the control panel does not move.
7. If desired, the Tie-Down Screws (4800FR-690) can be inserted up through the slots on
either side of the bottom of the control panel to prevent the panel top from being opened.
Flush Mounted Control Panel Installation

To install the Vision control panel flush into the desk, you must ensure that the cutout in the desk
is of the specified size, and that there is enough cable clearance at the back of the cutout to allow
the cables to be connected to the control panel.
1. Ensure that the cutout and clearances are adequate for your control panel.
2. Gently slide the control panel into the cutout in the desk. The control panel will drop into
the cutout from above and rest on the edge supports (Figure 3.9).
Figure 3.9 Profile of Control Panel Sitting Flush in the Desk
3. Check the clearances around the control panel and at the back for the cables.
4. If you need to secure the control panel in place, pre-drilled holes are provided in the
sides of the control panel tub for securing the control panel to the desk with screws.
Screws are not provided.
5. If desired, the Tie-Down Screws (4800FR-690) can be inserted up through the slots on
either side of the bottom of the control panel to prevent the panel top from being opened.
Touchscreen Display Installation

To install the Touchscreen Display for the Vision control panel, you must install the mounting
arm, install the touchscreen display on the mounting arm, and then connect the video and
communication cables between the control panel tub and the display.
required. Connect the LCD monitor to the DVI port on the back of the Vision control panel in
accordance with the instruction that came with the LCD monitor.
Ross Video does not provide a mounting arm with the Vision control panel. When selecting a
mounting arm, you should consider the environment that the control panel will be operating in.
For example, in a mobile or truck environment, a more rigid mounting arm is needed to secure the
Touchscreen Display.
Operating Tip — Ross Video recommends the Humanscale M7 Desk Mount Flat Panel
Monitor Arm by Media Control Co., Inc. (mcergo.com).
In order to properly complete this procedure need the following Touchscreen Display cables and
equipment:
• DVI Cable — This is a standard DVI-D cable that connects to the DVI-D port on the
control panel and the DVI-D port on the Touchscreen Display.
• Control Cable — This is a network cable with an RJ-45 connector on both ends. This
cable connects to the Aux 1 port on the control panel and the PREV port on the
• USB Cable — This is a standard USB cable that connects to the USB port on back of the
control panel and the USB port on the Touchscreen Display.
• Mounting Arm — The user supplied mounting arm must have a VESA FDMI MIS-D
75 or 100, C compliant mounting bracket to support the Touchscreen Display.
Installing the Touchscreen

1. Secure the Touchscreen Display (Figure 3.10) to the VESA FDMI MIS-D 75 or 100,
C Mounting Arm using the 4 #6 screws (#850-013R), flat washers (#960-010R), and
locking washers (#960-023R) provided with the Vision control panel Installation Kit
and position the display as desired.
VESA FDMI
Mounting Holes
PREV NEXT
VGA DVI PS1 PS2 USB
Figure 3.10 Control Panel to Touchscreen Display Cable Connections
2. Connect and secure one end of the DVI Cable to the DVI port on the back of the control
panel (Figure 3.11).
3. Connect and secure the other end of the DVI Cable to the DVI port on the touchscreen
display.
Touchscreen Display
PREV NEXT
VGA DVI PS1 PS2 USB
To Power
Supplies Vision Control Panel
Figure 3.11 Touchscreen Display Connections to the Vision Control Panel
4. Connect and secure one end of the Control Cable to the External Panel Link 1 port
on the back of the control panel.
5. Connect and secure the other end of the Control Cable to the PREV port on the
6. Connect one end of the USB Cable to a USB port on the back of the control panel. It
does not matter which port you use.
7. Connect the other end of the USB Cable to the USB port on the Touchscreen Display.

• on connecting the power supply connections, refer to the section “Power Supply
Connections” on page Eng 3-19.
• on installing a Remote Aux Panel, refer to the section “Auxiliary Panels” on page Eng
14-1.
• on control panel specifications, refer to the section “Standard Components” on
page Eng 20-2.
• on the Touchscreen Display, refer to the section “Touchscreen Interface” on page Eng
5-2.
• on the ports on the back of the control panel, refer to the section “Control Panel
Communication Ports” on page Eng 2-15.
• on the ports on the back of the frame, refer to the section “Frame Communication
Ports” on page Eng 2-16.
Frame to Control Panel Cabling
This section gives an in-depth overview of how to connect the Vision control panel to the frame.
These connections include the network connection between the control panel and the frame, and
connecting the keyboard and mouse to the control panel.
Frame to Control Panel Cable Installation

The frame and control panel connect to each other through a standard network switch. This
connection allows the control panel and frame to pass command and control information between
each other, as well as allowing the control panel to connect to external devices on the same
subnet. You can connect up to 9 control panels to the frame.
Important — Do not connect the CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) network cable to any of the External
Link ports on the back of the control panel. Doing so may damage the control panel.
1. Connect and secure one end of the CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) network cable to the LAN1
port on the CPU Board at the back of the frame. (Figure 3.12)
LAN1 LAN2 PANEL

CPU
LTC A
QMD-X LIVE PRODUCTION ENGINE

(Canada 120V~only)
100-120V~
220-240V~
2
47-63Hz 9A 650W 10/100 10/100 USB
Network Switch REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

B
C
IN
LOCK
LOOP
PS 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(Canada 120V~only)
D
IN
100-120V~
220-240V~
47-63Hz 9A 650W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
E
IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
F
IN
PS 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
G
IN
(Canada 120V~only))
100-120V~
220-240V~
47-63Hz 9A 650W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
H
IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT
PS 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT
(Canada 120V~only) J
100-120V~
220-240V~
47-63Hz 9A 650W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT
PS 4
M
MAXIMUM
RATING
1950W
QMD-X Frame
Figure 3.12 Connecting the Vision Control Panel to the Frame (QMD-X Shown)
Important — It is recommended that you use only a 10/100mbps switch to connect the Vision
control panel to the frame. Using a 10/100/1000mbps (gigabit) switch may cause switcher
instability and/or loss of communication between the control panel and the frame. Programming
a 10/100/1000mbps (gigabit) switch to 100mbps is not recommended.
2. Connect and secure the other end of the CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) network cable to your
local network (a local network switch for example). Refer to the documentation that
came with your network switch, or talk to your IT personnel, for more information on
setting up and using the switch.
3. Connect and secure a second CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) network cable to the LAN 10/100
port on the control panel. If you are connecting more than one control panel in a
MultiPanel application, start by connecting the Master Panel.
4. Connect and secure the other end of the CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) network cable to the
same local network or switch.
5. Repeat from Step (3.) for each Satellite Panel you are connecting to the switcher.

• on setting up network communication between the control panel and frame, refer to the
section “Network Setup” on page Eng 4-5.
• on MultiPanel setup, refer to the section “MultiPanel Setup” on page Eng 4-9.
Keyboard and Mouse Installation

A keyboard and a mouse can be connected to the Vision control panel to allow you to interact
with the switcher and the menus. The Vision control panel supports a mouse and keyboard
plugged into the dedicated PS/2 ports, or the USB ports.
The keyboard and mouse must be plugged into the PS/2 at startup in order to be discovered by the
control panel. Plugging the keyboard or mouse into the USB ports can be done while the control
panel is operating.
Note — The Vision control panel supports any standard 101-Key, 102-Key, or 104-Key
Enhanced Keyboards, and any standard PS/2 Mouse.
Use the following methods to install the keyboard and mouse:

• Connect a standard keyboard to the PS/2 Keyboard port at the back of the Vision control
panel (Figure 3.13).
• Connect a standard mouse to the PS/2 Mouse port at the back of the Vision control panel
(Figure 3.13).
Mouse Keyboard
Figure 3.13 Keyboard and Mouse Ports on the Vision Control Panel
This completes the method for installing the keyboard and mouse.

• on the Keyboard or Mouse ports, refer to the section “Control Panel Communication
Ports” on page Eng 2-15.
Video Input Cabling
This section discusses how to connect video signals to the Input BNCs of the Vision switcher.
Connect your input video signals to the BNCs on the Video Input Boards as required. Each input
is identified by the Slot the board is in, and the Number (1 to 16 inclusive) at the top left of the
BNC (Figure 3.14). For example, if you connect a video source to the BNC numbered 5 on the
Video Input Board in Slot C, this input will be identified as BNC C05.
The Video Input Board Slots for each frame are as follows:
• Octane/QMD-X — Slots C, D, E, F, G, and H
• MD-X — Slots C, D, E, F, G, and H
• QMD — Slots C, D, and E (Slot E supports either a Video Input Board with 16 inputs
or Video Output Board with 8 outputs.)
• MD — Slots C, and D
Operating Tip — A Video Input Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping track of
which sources have been connected to which BNCs, and how those BNCs need to be set up.
Refer to the section “Video Input Worksheet” on page Eng 21-2 for a copy of this worksheet.

• on setting up video input signals, refer to the section “Assigning Input Source Types”
on page Eng 7-4.
LAN1 LAN2 PANEL

CPU
LTC A
2
QMD LIVE PRODUCTION ENGINE

10/100 10/100 USB
PS 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 0 1
11 1
12 13
1 3 14
1 4 15
1 5 16
1 6
100-120V~ 220-240V~ 47-63Hz
9A 650W (Canada 120V~only)
OUT
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
C
IN
LOCK
LOOP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Input
PS 2
D
IN
BNCs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IN
E
MAXIMUM
RATING
1950W
Figure 3.14 Video Input Boards on the frame (QMD Shown)
Note — The Vision switcher passes all embedded audio and ancillary data signals, including
“closed captioning” that are present on the background video. The individual MLE program
outputs each have the ancillary data associated with the background video for that MLE.
Default Input Mapping

The Vision switcher is shipped with a factory default mapping for the available inputs to the
crosspoint buttons on the control panel. This allows you to verify video input signals
immediately, without having to first configure the inputs. The default mapping depends on the
control panel and number of Video Input Boards you have installed.
By default, the first button on the crosspoint bus is mapped to Black, the buttons following that
are mapped to the video inputs, starting with the upper most Video Input Board installed in the
frame. The last buttons on the bus are mapped to the four Global-Store channels, MLE Re-entries
(if installed), and Shift (Figure 3.15).
Global-Store Re-Entry
Normal Black C01 - C08 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3 Shift
Shifted Color Bkgd MLE-Store C09 - C17 Shift

1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4
Figure 3.15 Default Crosspoint Button Mapping (Vision 1 Shown)
On the Shifted crosspoint bus, the first two buttons are mapped to Color Background 1 and Color
Background 2, the next are mapped to each of the MLE-Stores (if installed), and the buttons
following that are mapped to the video inputs continuing from those on the unshifted bus. The
last button is the Shift button.
Operating Tip — If you want to verify inputs connected to not mapped to crosspoint buttons
by default, you will have to map those sources to crosspoint buttons manually.

• on restoring factory default settings, refer to the section “Resetting the Switcher” on
page Eng 4-24.
• on assigning inputs to specific crosspoint buttons, refer to the section “Creating Bus
Maps” on page Eng 7-13.
• on Global-Stores, refer to the section “Still-Store Overview” on page Ops 10-2.
• on Bus Holds, refer to the section “Editing Bus Maps” on page Eng 7-13.
Video Output Cabling
This section discusses how to connect to the Output BNCs of the frame, and which Output BNCs
to connect monitors to for verifying inputs.
Connect your output cables to the BNCs on the Video Output Boards as required. Each output is
identified by the Slot the board is in, and the Number (1 to 16 inclusive) at the top left of BNC
(Figure 3.16). For example, if you connect a cable to the BNC numbered 5 on the Video Output
Board in Slot K, this input will be identified as BNC K05.
Operating Tip — A Video Output Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping track of
which sources have been connected to which BNCs, and how those BNCs need to be set up.
Refer to the section “Video Output Worksheet” on page Eng 21-9 for a copy of this worksheet.
The Video Output Board Slots for each frame are as follows:
• Octane/QMD-X — Slots I, J, and K
• MD-X — Slots I, J, and K
• QMD — Slot B, and E (Slot E supports either a Video Input Board with 16 inputs or
Video Output Board with 8 outputs.)
• MD — Slot B

• on setting up video input signals, refer to the section “Configuring Video Outputs” on
page Eng 8-2.
LAN1 LAN2 PANEL

CPU
LTC A
2

10/100 10/100 USB
PS 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Output
100-120V~ 220-240V~ 47-63Hz
OUT
B
BNCs
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 1
11 1
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16
C
IN
LOCK
LOOP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 1
11 1
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16
PS 2
D
IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Output
OUT
E
MAXIMUM
BNCs
RATING
1950W
Figure 3.16 Video Output Boards on the Frame (QMD Shown)
Note — The Vision switcher passes all embedded audio and ancillary data signals, including
“closed captioning” that are present on the background video. The individual MLE program
outputs each have the ancillary data associated with the background video for that MLE.
Default Output Mapping

The Vision switcher is shipped with a factory default mapping for outputs. Like the input
mapping, the output mapping has the Output BNCs configured to certain outputs from the
factory. How the outputs are mapped depends on the options installed on your switcher.
The following output sources are default mapped from the factory:
• Program:
› Octane/QMD-X — The main switcher program output is mapped to K01 by
default.
› MD-X — The main switcher program output is mapped to K01 by default.
› QMD — The main switcher program output is mapped to B01 by default.
› MD — The main switcher program output is mapped to B01 by default.
• Preview:
› Octane/QMD-X — The main switcher preview output is mapped to K02 by default.
› MD-X — The main switcher preview output is mapped to K02 by default.
› QMD — The main switcher preview output is mapped to B02 by default.
› MD — The main switcher preview output is mapped to B02 by default.
Note — If you have a half MLE switcher (a Vision 2.5 QMD-X for example), or you have the
MultiDSK™ option installed, the main switcher program and preview are locked to specific
Output BNCs. Refer to the section “Mix/DSK” on page Eng 8-19 for more information on the
default mapping for the half MLE switchers.
• Aux — The Aux outputs are mapped to the remaining Output BNCs in order.
Monitor Connections
Virtually any Output BNC of the switcher can be assigned as your program or preview output;
however, if you have the Mix/DSK or MultiDSK™ options installed, these outputs are locked to
specific Output BNCs. In order to verify the functionality of the switcher and the input video
sources, connect a monitor to the Output BNC that is default mapped to.
If you are using a serial digital monitor, connection is direct. If you are using an analog monitor,
one of three D-A converters is required:
• Serial Digital to NTSC
• Serial Digital to PAL
• Serial Digital to Analog Component
For more information on the full line of Ross Video conversion equipment, contact your sales
representative or Ross Video Limited.

• on assigning output sources to individual BNCs, refer to the section “Configuring Video
Outputs” on page Eng 8-2.
• on Output BNCs that are locked on the half MLE switchers, refer to the section
“Mix/DSK” on page Eng 8-19.
• on Output BNCs that are locked with the MultiDSK option, refer to the section
“MultiDSK” on page Eng 8-22.
• on Output BNCs that are locked with the AuxKey™ option, refer to the section
“AuxKeys” on page Eng 8-26.
Button Inserts
This section discusses how to install an insert film into a button on the Vision control panel.
Installing an insert film into a button allows you to name specific crosspoint or custom control
buttons, or to replace the default button names with those of a different language.
Button Insert Films

A number of commonly used alternative insert films are provided with each Vision switcher.
These insert films will have to be cut out from the sheet with a sharp knife or razor and inserted
into the desired button.
If you would like custom inserts for your switcher, or need a replacement sheet of alternative or
default inserts, contact your Ross Video sales representative for ordering information.
Important — Using insert films that do not meet the recommended criteria may damage the
button cap and diffuser.
If you would like to create your own insert films, they must meet the following criteria:
• All inserts must be created on a 0.1575 inch (4 millimetre) polyester film.
• All inserts must be created using a screen printing process.
• All inserts must be created using an epoxy based ink.
• All inserts must be cut the dimensions indicated (Figure 3.17).
0.444" 0.468"
0.326"
Large Printable
Medium
Small Area
0.386" 0.504" 0.528"
Figure 3.17 Control Panel Button Insert Film Sizes
• The text on the insert film should fit within the white area in the center of the film
(Figure 3.17) to be visible through the cap.
• The insert films must cut with 0.020 inch (0.50 millimetre) rounded corners. This is to
allow the insert films to easily fit into the cap.
Installing Control Panel Button Inserts

1. Remove the Cap Assembly from the Switch Assembly by grasping it firmly and
pulling directly away from the control panel surface (Figure 3.18).
Cap Assembly
Switch Assembly
Figure 3.18 Removing Cap Assembly
2. Remove the Lens from the Diffuser by using your fingernail, or common end micro
screwdriver, to pry the two apart (Figure 3.19).
Lens
Diffuser
Figure 3.19 Removing Lens from Diffuser
3. Place the Insert Film into the Lens so that the readable side is facing up. The notches on
the sides of the Lens must be at the sides of the text on the Insert Film, and not on the
top or bottom (Figure 3.20).
Lens
T
Insert Film
U
C
Diffuser
Figure 3.20 Installing the Insert Film into the Cap Assembly
4. Aligning the notches on the sides of the Lens and Diffuser, press the Lens and Diffuser
together until they click together (Figure 3.20).
5. Aligning the notches on the sides of the Cap Assembly to the tabs on the side of the
Switch Assembly, press Cap Assembly down onto the Switch Assembly with a rolling
motion until they click together (Figure 3.21).
Cap Assembly
Switch Assembly
Figure 3.21 Re-Installing the Cap Assembly
Power Supply Connections
Both the Vision control panel and frame have removable power supplies that connect to mains
power to provide the operational power for the switcher. This section describes how to connect
the power supplies to the AC outlet.
Note — Refer to the section “Important Regulatory and Safety Notices to Service
Personnel”, at the beginning of this manual, for correct line cord information.
Frame Power Connection

The frame supports a number of power supplies to provide an N+1 or N+2 redundant power
option. This allows one, or two, power supplies to be removed from the frame without
interrupting the operation of the switcher. The N+2 option also allows you to power the switcher
from 2 separate circuits, so that if one circuit goes down, the two power supplies connected to the
other circuit will not be affected.
Warning Hazardous Voltage — This apparatus, when equipped with multiple power
supplies, can generate high leakage currents. To reduce the risk of electric shock, ensure that
each individual supply cord is connected to its own separate branch circuit with an earth
connection.
In order to properly complete this procedure you need the following cables:
• Power Cable — One power cable per power supply is required.
To Connect Power to the Frame

1. Ensure that all power supplies are properly installed and turned OFF. Refer to the
section “Powering Down the Switcher” on page Eng 4-3 for more information on the
location of the power switches.
2. Connect and secure a power cable into the PS1 port at the back of the frame.
3. Connect and secure a power cable into the remaining PS ports at the back of the frame.
Ensure that there is a power supply installed in each slot that you are connecting the
power cord to.
4. Connect each power cable into the appropriate AC outlet.
Note — Refer to the section “Important Regulatory and Safety Notices to Service
Personnel”, at the beginning of this manual, for correct line cord information.

• on installing a frame power supply, refer to the section “Frame Power Supply” on
page Eng 18-12.
• on the power consumption of the frame, refer to the section “Power Consumption –
Frame” on page Eng 20-4.
Control Panel Power Connection

The Vision control panel can have redundant power, providing an N+1 power source, allowing
the failure of a power supply to not interrupt the operation of the switcher.
Note — A Power Cord Retaining Clip is provided with your installation kit to prevent the
power cord from accidentally being removed from the power supply. Refer to the documentation
that came with your power cord clip for installation information.
In order to properly complete this procedure you need the following cables:
• Power Cable — One power cable per power supply is required.
To Connect Power to the Control Panel

1. Ensure that the control panel is turned OFF. Refer to the section “Powering Down the
Switcher” on page Eng 4-3 for more information on the location of the power switches.
2. Connect a power cable into each of the AC ports at the back of the control panel. If you
do not have the redundant power option, only one power supply and AC port is present.
3. Connect each power cable into the appropriate AC outlet.

• on the power consumption of the control panel, refer to the section “Power
Consumption – Control Panel” on page Eng 20-3.
Touchscreen Display Power Connection

The Touchscreen Display for the Vision control panel has an independent primary power supply,
and optional redundant power supply. These external brick power supplies plug into the PS1 and
PS2 ports on the back of the Touchscreen Display.
In order to properly complete this procedure you need the following equipment:
• Power Supply — This GlobTek® Inc., external power supply, model
TR9CE4000LLP-Y, provides power to the Touchscreen Display.
To connect power to the Touchscreen Display:

1. Connect and secure the Primary GlobTek External Power Supply to the PS1 port on
the back of the Touchscreen Display.
Caution — Always connect the External Power Supply to the Touchscreen before connecting
the AC mains power. Connecting the power supply to the AC mains power before connecting to
the Touchscreen could damage the Touchscreen.
2. If purchased, connect and secure the Secondary GlobTek External Power Supply to
the PS2 port on the back of the Touchscreen Display
3. Connect the power cables into the appropriate AC outlets.
Power Fail Indicators
At the bottom of the Touchscreen Display there are two Power Fail indicators that show the
current state of the power supplies on the control panel and the frame.
• Panel Fail — This indicator lights to show that there is a problem with the power
supplies or fans in the control panel.
• Frame Fail — This indicator lights to show that there is a problem with the power
supplies or fans in the frame. This could be a complete power failure, or the failure of a
power supply.

• on diagnosing the power fail indicators, refer to the section “Fail Indicators Diagnosis”
on page Eng 17-10.
• on replacing a frame power supply, refer to the section “Frame Power Supply” on
page Eng 18-12.
• on replacing a control panel power supply, refer to the section “Control Panel Power
Supply” on page Eng 18-10.
Power Failure
When the Vision switcher experiences a power failure, the control panel and frame react as
follows:
• Control Panel Power Loss — If the control panel loses power, the frame is unaffected
and the switcher continues to pass video. When power is restored to the control panel, the
settings of the control panel before power was lost are restored.
• Frame Power Loss — If the frame loses power, the Frame Fail indicator lights and the
splash screen is shown on the Touchscreen Display. When power is restored to the frame,
the Frame Fail indicator clears and the control panel returns to the Default State.
• Complete Power Loss — If both the control panel and the frame lose power, the
switcher returns to the Default State when power is restored.

• on the Default State of the switcher, refer to the section “Resetting the Switcher” on
page Eng 4-24.
Initial Setup and Verification
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on how to initially set up and verify the video signals for your
Vision switcher.
• Powering Up and Powering Down the Switcher
• Network Setup
• Network Security
• MultiPanel Setup
• Reference Connection and Setup
• Input Verification
• Functional Check
• Removing and Installing Frame Boards
• Resetting the Switcher

Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Initial Setup and Verification • Eng 4–1
Powering Up and Powering Down the Switcher
This section describes how to power up and power down the control panel and the frame.
Powering Up the Switcher

This procedure shows you how to properly power up the control panel and frame of your Vision
switcher.
Note — The control panel will not start up properly if there is a USB flash drive in the USB port
on the control panel. You must remove the USB flash drive from the USB port on the control
panel before powering the control panel up.
1. Lift up on the control panel lid to gain access to the control panel tub.
2. Toggle the Primary and, if installed, Secondary AC Power switches for the control
panel to ON. The power switches are located inside the control panel tub (Figure 4.1).
Power Switch Power Switch
Secondary Primary
Power Power
Supply Supply
Control Panel CPU Module

Power Switch
Figure 4.1 Power Switches Inside the Control Panel Tub
3. Press the Control Panel CPU Module Power Switch. The control panel starts to power
up.
4. Close the control panel lid.
5. Remove the door from the frame. Refer to the section “Opening and Closing the
Frame Door” on page Eng 3-3 for more information.
6. Find the Frame Power Supplies located on the right hand side, inside the frame (Figure
4.2). The yellow Standby indicator should be lit, indicating that AC power is connected
to the power supply, but the power supply is not turned on.
Eng 4–2 • Initial Setup and Verification Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Power Supply
Slot 1
Slot 2
Power Supply
Slot 3
Figure 4.2 The Frame Power Supplies are Located on the Right Side of the Frame (QMD Shown)
7. Power on the frame as follows:

• Octane/QMD-X/MD-X — Toggle the Power switch on each Power Supply to
ON. Find the Main Power switch located on the Cooling Fan Card on the left side
of the frame, and toggle it to ON.
• QMD/MD — Toggle the Power switch on each Power Supply to ON. The yellow
Standby indicator should clear and the green Power indicator is lit.
Note — If the green Power indicators on all power supplies are not lit, refer to the section
“Frame Power Supply” on page Eng 18-12 for information on diagnosing a power supply.
8. Check that the green Status indicators on the Cooling Fan Board, on the left side of the
frame, come on, indicating that all the cooling fans are operating. If the green Status
indicators do not come on, Refer to the section “Frame Fan Failure” on page Eng 18-8
for information on replacing a cooling fan.
9. Check that the blue Heartbeat indicator on the front of the boards installed in the frame
come on and start flashing. It may take a few seconds for all the boards to start up. If the
Heartbeat indicator on a board does not start up after 5 minutes, remove the board and
re-install it.
10. Install the door back on the frame.
11. On the control panel, the Main Menus is shown on the Touchscreen Display.
Powering Down the Switcher

This procedure shows you how to properly power down your Vision switcher by placing the
Frame CPU Board into a hibernation mode. In this mode, it is safe to turn off all your power
supplies.
Note — Only the Master Panel can perform a system shutdown. The System Shutdown
Menu is not accessible from the Satellite Panels.
1. Press HOME  More  System Shutdown  Shut Down. The system prompts
you to confirm the shutdown. Once confirmed, the switcher powers down.
Warning Hazardous Voltage — Even though the switcher has been shut down, the
power supplies are still active until they have been physically switched off.
2. Open the front door of the frame. Refer to the section “Opening and Closing the
3. Confirm that the System Status indicators on the left side of the frame are flashing
Green, indicating that it is safe to turn the power off.
4. Power off the frame as follows:
• Octane/QMD-X/MD-X
› Locate the Main Power switch on the Cooling Fan Carrier on the left side of
the frame and toggle it to OFF.
› Toggle the Power switch on each Power Supply to OFF.
• QMD/MD
› Locate the Power Supplies on the right side of the frame and toggle the
Power switch on each one to OFF.
5. Wait about 6 seconds for the system to discharge any residual power. The Status
indicators will go out.
panel to OFF. The power switches are located inside the control panel tub (Figure 4.1).
8. Close the control panel lid.

• on using the menu system of the switcher, refer to the section “Menu System Basics” on
page Eng 5-5.
• on the control panel power supplies, refer to the section “Control Panel Power Supply”
on page Eng 18-10.
• on the frame power supplies, refer to the section “Frame Power Supply” on page Eng
18-12.
Network Setup
This section provides instructions for configuring the network setup for your Vision switcher,
including the frame and control panel. This allows proper communication between the control
panel(s) and the frame, as well as any Ethernet based external devices on the same sub-network.
Software upgrades can also be performed over a network by connecting to the web interface of
the frame.
If the frame is using the default network settings, the control panel will automatically detect the
frame on power up. No network setup is required. Once connected, you can change the network
settings of each Vision control panel. You must restart the switcher each time you want to apply
different network settings.
You can connect up to nine (9) Vision control panels to a single MD/X or Octane/QMD/X frame.
In either a single panel or MultiPanel configuration, you must configure a Master Panel. Once the
Master Panel is configured, up to eight (8) Satellite Panels can be configured.
Important — Contact your IT department before connecting the control panel or frame to
your facility network to ensure that there are no conflicts. They will provide you with the network
information for the frame and control panels (Table 4.1). Refer to the section “Default Network
Settings” on page Eng 20-8 for the factory default network address and settings of the switcher.
Table 4.1 Frame and Panel Network Information

Frame IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway
LAN 1 . . . . . . . . .
LAN 2 (optional) . . . . . . . . .
Panel ID
Master Panel . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Panel #1 . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Panel #2 . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Panel #3 . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Panel #4 . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Panel #5 . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Panel #6 . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Panel #7 . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Panel #8 . . . . . . . . .
Frame Network Setup

From the frame Web Interface, you set up the IP Addresses of the frame, as well as selecting the
IP Addresses of all the control panels that can access the frame (Table 4.1). The LAN 1 port is
used to connect the Vision control panels to the frame. The LAN 2 port can be used to connect
external devices to the frame, or to a graphics suite for the uploading of stills.
1. On your computer, open your Web Browser and, in the address bar, enter the IP address
of your frame and press Enter. The QMD/X Web Interface Splash Screen is displayed.
2. Enter your username and password as follows when the Login Dialog Box appears. The
default Name is user and Password is password.
3. Click Other...  Network to display the Network Page. This page allows you to
change the network configuration of the frame network ports, as well as enter the current
IP Address of the Master Panel, and Satellite Panels.
Network Setup Page

4. Enter the network setup information for the LAN 1 port on the frame as follows:
• Enter the new Frame IP address in the IP Address field for LAN 1.
• Enter the new Frame network mask in the Network Mask field for LAN 1.
• Enter the new Frame gateway in the Gateway field.
Operating Tip — To activate the LAN 2 port, enter an IP Address and Network Mask for
LAN 2. The Gateway is common for both the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports.
5. Enter the IP address for the Master Panel, and each Satellite Panel, you are connecting to
the frame as follows:
• Enter the Master Panel IP address in the IP Address Master Panel field. This does
not change the IP address of the Master Panel. To set the IP address of a control
panel, you must set it from the panel.
• Enter the Satellite Panel IP addresses in the IP Address Satellite X field for each
Satellite Panel you want to use with the frame. The satellite number is the Panel ID
that is set on the Satellite Panel.
6. Press Change and Reboot to restart the switcher and apply the new settings.
Next, you must set up the control panels with the corresponding IP address, and Panel ID.
Control Panel Network Setup

To configure the network settings of the Master Panel and Satellite Panels, you must have the IP
Address for both the frame that you want to connect to, and each of the control panels (Table
4.1). If you are not connecting any Satellite Panels to your switcher, only configure the Master
Panel.
You must perform the following procedure on each control panel.
1. Ensure that the control panel and frame are connected to the same subnet.
2. Place the control panel into diagnostic mode by pressing HOME three (3) times quickly.
3. Press HOME  Setup  More  Network Setup.
Network Setup Menu

4. Enter the IP address of the LAN 1 port on the frame in the IP Address field using the
keyboard or the keypad on the Global Memory Module.
5. Enter the network setup information for the control panel as follows:
• Enter the new Panel IP address in IP Address field using the keyboard or the
keypad on the Global Memory Module.
• Enter the new Panel subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field using the keyboard, or
the keypad on the Global Memory Module.
• Enter the new Panel gateway in the Gateway field using the keyboard, or the
keypad on the Global Memory Module.
6. Use the Panel ID knob to select the Panel ID that corresponds to the IP Address you set
from the Network Page from the QMD/X Web Interface.
Operating Tip — If you want to cancel the changes you have made to the network
information, press Revert To Current on the Network Setup Menu to revert to the last saved
network settings.
7. Press Save to store the new network setup information.

8. Press Yes to reboot the panel and apply the new network settings.
9. Repeat this procedure for each control panel you are connecting to the frame.

• on powering up or down the switcher, refer to the section “Powering Up and Powering
Down the Switcher” on page Eng 4-2.
• on setting the DIP switch to default the IP address of the frame, refer to the section
“Frame CPU Board DIP Switch” on page Eng 20-8.
Network Security
The Vision switcher uses a standard ethernet connection for communication between the control
panel and the frame, as well as between some external devices and the switcher. Any time your
switcher is connected to a public network, it is important to follow certain precautions to ensure
that your switcher is not vulnerable. These precautions are as follows:
• Limit Access — Anyone who can access your network could also have access to your
sensitive data and equipment. Limit network access by keeping your production
equipment on a separate network segment or use a firewall. Contact your IT department
for more information about how your network is set up.
• Change Default Passwords — Change the Web Interface password for your switcher.
Refer to the section “Vision Web Interface Account” on page Eng 6-2 for more
information.
• Disable Unused Services — The Vision switcher provides access to a number of default
services as listed below. These services can be disabled by Ross Video Technical
Support if required for added security.
› Web Server — This service is used for the Web Interface.
› WebDAV — This service is used to transfer images and animations to the switcher
for use with the internal Still-Stores.
› Telnet Server — This service is used for diagnostic and maintenance purposes.
MultiPanel Setup
To set up a MultiPanel system you must configure the network settings on each of the control
panels and frame, assign MLEs to each of the control panels, assign system permissions, and then
set up the video outputs for each of your Program MLEs.
Refer to the section “Network Setup” on page Eng 4-5 for information on setting the network
configuration for a MultiPanel system.
MLE Assignment
The MLE assignment sets which MLEs a specific control panel has access to, and can control.
The highest number MLE assigned to a control panel is the program MLE for that control panel.
This MLE is tallied for the control panel. The highest number MLE assigned to a control panel in
the entire switcher is the Program MLE for the switcher. This is the MLE that has the MultiDSK,
Half MLE, and Preview Overlay options.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  MultiPanel.
MultiPanel Configuration Menu

2. Select the Master Panel, or Satellite X panel, that you want to set the MLE
assignment for.
3. Next to MLE Permissions, select the MLEs that you want to assign to the control
panel. The control panels that an MLE is assigned to are shown on the MLE button. The
Master Panel is shown as MP, and Satellite Panels are shown as P#.
4. Next to Virtual Program MLE, select the MLE that you want to use as the Program
MLE for the control panel.
Note — The MLE that has the MultiDSK, Half MLE, and Preview Overlay options is indicated
with Pgm MLE (full MLE), Pgm Mix (MixDSK), Pgm Multi (MultiDSK), or Mix Multi (Mix/DSK
and MultiDSK).
5. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Confirmation Screen.

6. Accept or reject the changes you have made as follows:
• Press Confirm to accept the changes and reset all Remote, Peripheral, and Net
ports.
• Press Confirm w/o Reset to accept the changes without resetting all Remote,
Peripheral, and Net ports. Only use this if told to do so by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Press Cancel to exit the menus safely, without making any changes. The system
returns to the previously stored settings.
Next, you must set up the Video Output BNCs for the Program MLEs. The Program output, and
Preview output, for the switcher is locked to the highest MLE assigned in the system. If you are
using different Program MLEs for different control panels, you must assign an output BNC to the
MLE X Program and MLE X Preview for that MLE, where X is the number of your MLE.
Refer to the section “Configuring Video Outputs” on page Eng 8-2 for information on assigning
the MLE Program and MLE Preview to an output BNC.
System Permissions
Each Satellite Panel can be granted permission to view and change the installation settings on the
switcher.
Operating Tip — Only one control panel can be accessing the Installation Menus at any
one time. To see which control panel is currently in the menu, and to force that control panel out
of the menu, press HOME  Setup  More More  Inst. Menu Status. Press Force
Inst Menu Change to force the other control panel out of the Installation Menu.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  MultiPanel  System

Permissions.
System Permissions Menu

2. Toggle the button for a Satellite panel on to grant system permissions to that control
panel.
Reference Connection and Setup
The Flexible Reference system in the Vision switcher allows you to use an Interlaced video
format as the reference to operate the switcher in a video format of the same frequency. Choosing
a progressive video format as a reference limits you to operating the switcher only in that same
video format and frequency. For example, if you have a 1080i 59.94 Hz input reference you can
operate the switcher in 720p 59.94 Hz, but not 1080i 50 Hz. However, if you have a 720p
59.94 Hz input reference, you can only operate the switcher in 720p 59.94 Hz. If you need to
change frequencies, you can have multiple input references and switch between them as needed.
Reference Signal Connection

The Vision switcher accepts either an analog Tri-Level Sync or Composite reference signal
connected to the reference loop BNCs on one of the Video Input Boards on the switcher.
Note — If the reference loop is not connected, the loop BNC should be terminated with a
75ohm termination.
Connect the reference signal to one of the REF connectors on the Video Input Board. If an
additional reference is needed, a second Video Input Board with reference must be used.
Reference Connectors
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IN
LOCK
LOOP
Figure 4.3 Reference Connections on the Video Input Board
Operating Tip — Always use a stable signal that is low in jitter, and that preferably
originates from a reliable analog test signal generator.

• on reference signal characteristics, refer to the section “Video Characteristics” on
page Eng 20-14.
Compatible Video Formats

Depending on the input reference format you use, you will only be able to operate the switcher in
certain formats (Table 4.2). References to 1080p 59.94Hz (A) and 1080p 50Hz (A) refer to 1080p
Level A only.
Note — The 1080p 59.94Hz, 1080p 50, and 1080p 29.97Hz video formats are not supported
by some older frame boards. If any of these boards are present in the frame, a warning
message is shown on the Main Menu and the board(s) is listed on the Status Menu.
Table 4.2 Compatible Video Formats
Input Reference Usable Format
• 480i
• 480i 16:9
• 720p 59.94Hz*
480i
• 1080i 59.94Hz*
• 1080p 29.97Hz
• 1080p 59.94Hz (A)
• 576i
• 576i 16:9
576i • 720p 50Hz*
• 1080i 50Hz*
• 1080p 50Hz (A)
720p 59.94Hz • 720p 59.94Hz
720p 50Hz • 720p 50Hz
• 480i
• 480i 16:9
• 720p 59.94Hz
1080i 59.94Hz
• 1080i 59.94Hz
• 1080p 29.97Hz
• 1080p 59.94Hz (A)
• 576i
• 576i 16:9
1080i 50Hz • 720p 50
• 1080i 50Hz
• 1080p 50Hz (A)
1080p 24Hz • 1080p 24Hz
1080pSF 24Hz • 1080pSF 24Hz
1080pSF 23.98Hz • 1080pSF 23.98Hz
1080p 29.97Hz • 1080p 29.97
*Important — It is not recommended that you operate the switcher in these video formats
when you are using a composite sync (480i or 576i) reference signal.
The Vision switcher allows you to use any interlaced video format to operate the switcher in any
format of the same frequency; however, the use of 480i or 576i (Composite Sync) reference
signals for High Definition (720p or 1080i) video modes is not recommended. Using a
composite sync reference signal for High Definition video modes results in excessive jitter on the
video output of the switcher, falling outside the range specified by SMPTE-292M. This may
result in downstream equipment being unable to properly receive these signals.
The use of composite sync reference formats is recommended for Standard Definition video
modes only, and provides stable outputs with jitter performance in compliance with
SMPTE-259M specifications.
Reference Setup
Depending on the input reference, and the MLE options purchased, you can select a number of
HD or SD video formats for the switcher to operate in. This is the native video format that all
video manipulation is performed in by the switcher.
The current input reference format (Reference mode) and video format (Video mode) that the
switcher is operating in are shown on the Main Menu. If the current input reference format is not
present or locked, the Reference mode text appears red.
If you have the MLE SD option installed on one or more MLEs, those MLEs will only be able to
operate in SD video formats; 480i, 576i, 480i 16:9, and 576i 16:9. The MLE MD options supports
all video formats.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Reference.
Reference Menu
2. Use the Input Board knob select the Video Input Board you have connected the
reference to.
Note — Video Input Boards that are not installed, or do not have a reference input, appear
gray and cannot be used as a reference input.
3. Use the Ref Format knob to select the reference format of the input reference.
4. Use the Video Format knob to select the video format you want the switcher to operate
in. The list of available formats will vary, depending on the format of the input reference
that you selected above and the MLE MD or MLE SD option that is installed.
5. Reset the video format of all Input BNCs to the video format of the switcher as follows:
• Press Reset Input Formats to have the switcher set all Input BNCs to the same
video format that the switcher is currently operating in.
6. Reset the video format of all Output BNCs to the currently selected video format as
follows:
• Use the Video Format knob to select the video format that you want to set all
Output BNCs to.
Note — When you reset all Output BNCs to the selected video format, this will include any Aux
Buses that are being used for SmartConversion. Refer to the section “Setting Up a Conversion
Loop” on page Eng 16-2 for more information.
• Press Reset Output Formats to have the switcher set all Output BNCs to the
currently selected video format. You are asked to confirm the change.
ports.
Support.
Important — When you switch reference formats, you must perform a soft reset (ALL+ALL)
in order to load the default Keyer, MLE, and dissolve rates for the format you have set.
Internal Reference
The Vision switcher can generate an internal reference signal that can be used for any internally
generated video signal. For example, you can use matte color, Global-Store images, or
MLE-Store images with the internally generated reference signal to test the functionality of the
switcher during initial setup.
Important — The internally generated reference signal cannot be used with external video
signals. The switcher will not be able to synchronize the external video signals without an
external reference.
The switcher can generate the following internal reference signals:

• 1080i 59.94
• 1080i 50
• 1080pSF 24
• 1080pSF 23.98
• 1080p 24
Refer to the section “Compatible Video Formats” on page Eng 4-11 for a list of video formats
that the switcher can operate in using these internal reference formats.
To Set an Internal Reference

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Reference.
2. Toggle Reference to select an Internal and External reference.
• Int — Select this option to use the internally generated reference signal.
• Ext — Select this option to use an external reference signal.
ports.
Support.
• on working with different video formats, refer to the section “Video Formats” on
page Eng 2-31.
• on reference signal specifications, refer to the section “Video Characteristics” on
page Eng 20-14.
Input Verification
The Vision switcher displays the currently assigned source for each crosspoint button on the
mnemonic display above the button. For internally generated sources, such as Black or
Global-Stores, the name describes the source, BLCK for example. For external video sources, the
default name is the BNC that the crosspoint button is assigned to. For example, button 2 on the
control panel is assigned to Input 001. The name In 001 is displayed above button 2.
Operating Tip — Verification of video sources is best done on the Program (PGM) Bus of
the bottom MLE. This is the bus that is fed directly out of the Program BNC. This procedure
assumes that all crosspoint selections are made on this bus.
1. The initial state, or reset state, of the switcher is to have Black selected on all buses.
Black should be displayed on the monitor.
2. Select crosspoint button 2 on the PGM Bus. The name In 001 should be shown in the
mnemonic display above the button.
3. Refer to your Input Worksheet and confirm that the source you have connected to In
001 is what is being displayed on the monitor.
• If the video signal displayed on the monitor is not what you have recorded on the
Input Worksheet for In 001, double-check the connections to the BNC to ensure
that sources have not been mislabelled.
4. Repeat Steps (2.) and (3.) for each crosspoint button on the PGM Bus that is mapped to
a BNC. The last 4 crosspoint buttons are mapped to internal sources.
5. Select Global-Store 1 on the PGM Bus. The name GS 1 is shown in the mnemonic
display above the button and the Global-Store Menu is shown on the Touchscreen
Display. Repeat this for the remaining global-store channels.
6. Press and hold the SHIFT button. The mnemonics change, indicating the sources that
are mapped to the crosspoint buttons on the shifted bus.
7. Select Color BKGD 1 on the PGM Bus. The name BKGD 1 is shown in the
mnemonic display above the button and the Matte Selection Menu is shown on the
touchscreen display.
8. Repeat Steps (2.) and (3.) for each crosspoint button on the shifted bus that is mapped to
a BNC.
To verify sources that are not mapped to crosspoint buttons, you must map those sources to
buttons and verify them that way.

• on connecting monitors to your Output BNC, refer to the section “Monitor
Connections” on page Eng 3-16.
• on setting up Input BNCs, refer to the section “Assigning Input Source Types” on
page Eng 7-4.
• on loading Global-Store stills, refer to the section “Loading Stills” on page Ops 10-3.
Functional Check
All Ross Video products undergo thorough quality control and testing before shipment. The
following functional check ensures that no damage has occurred during transit, and that all boards
are correctly installed.
To perform the functional check, a monitor must be connected to at least one of the outputs. Refer
to the section “Monitor Connections” on page Eng 3-16 for information on how to connect a
temporarily monitor for the verification of sources.
Operating Tip — Verification of video sources is best done on the Program (PGM) Bus of
the highest number MLE. This procedure assumes that all crosspoint selections are made on
this bus.
1. Perform a full software reset. Refer to the section “Resetting the Switcher” on page
Eng 4-24 for more information on performing a software reset.
2. Select a crosspoint button on the PGM Bus. This video source appears on the Program
monitor.
3. Select a different crosspoint button on the PST Bus. This video source appears on the
Preview monitor.
4. In the Transition Module for that MLE, select Dissolve (DISS) as the transition type.
5. While watching the Program monitor, move the Fader in the MLE Transition Module
from one limit to the other. The video on the Program monitor dissolves to the video
source you selected on the PST Bus and the selected crosspoint buttons on each bus will
switch, indicating that the new source is currently selected on the PGM Bus.
6. In the Transition Module for that MLE, select Wipe (WIPE) as the transition type.
7. While watching the Program monitor, move the Fader in the MLE Transition Module
from one limit to the other. The video on the Program monitor wipes to the video source
you selected on the PST Bus and the selected crosspoint buttons on each bus switch,
indicating that the new source is currently selected on the PGM Bus.
8. While watching the Program monitor, select different crosspoint buttons on the PGM
Bus, ensuring that the cuts are taking place.
9. If your control panel has multiple MLEs, re-enter one MLE into the PGM/PST MLE by
pressing the re-entry button on the crosspoint bus. Refer to the section “Default Input
Mapping” on page Eng 3-13 for more information on the location of the re-entry
buttons.
If you experienced problems with this test, ensure that the buttons and faders are working
properly, or check that the reference connections for the switcher are properly set up.

• on diagnosing problems with faders, or buttons refer to the section “Control Panel
Diagnostic Tools” on page Eng 17-18.
• on checking the reference settings, refer to the section “Reference Connection and
Setup” on page Eng 4-11.
Removing and Installing Frame Boards
The frame comes standard with all the circuit boards already installed. If daughter cards or boards
need to be installed, or replaced, you will have to either remove and install, or install the new
boards into the frame.
When a new board is installed, the switcher checks the current version of software on the board
and tries to upgrade it to the current version of the switcher. If the software on the board is the
same as the software on the switcher, there is no change. If the board has a software version that is
different than the version on the switcher, the switcher will upgrade the board to the same version
as the switcher. For this reason it is important that you upgrade your switcher to the latest version
of Vision software prior to installing a new board into the frame.
If you are installing one of the following options, refer to the documentation that came with your
hardware for detailed instructions on this option:
• Squeeze & Tease MD
• Squeeze & Tease WARP
• XFX Board (Dual Border Generator and MLE-Store)

• on upgrading the switcher, refer to the section “Software Upgrade” on page Eng 6-3.
• on removing or installing a control panel module, refer to the section “Replacing a
Control Panel Module” on page Eng 18-21.
Frame Board Locations

The number and position of the boards in the frame depends on the number of MLEs, Squeeze &
Tease resources, video inputs and outputs you require. These boards must be installed in the
proper slots in order to ensure proper switcher operation.
Front Frame Boards

The front of the frame is where most of the video processing boards are located. The location and
number of boards that are installed in the frame depends on the number of MLEs, and Squeeze &
Tease DVE channels you require per MLE-pair. Refer to the following table (Table 4.3), and the
illustrations of the Octane/QMD-X/MD-X (Figure 4.4) and QMD/MD (Figure 4.5) frames for
information on which slot each front frame board should be installed in.
Table 4.3 Front Frame Boards
Slot Octane/QMD-X MD-X QMD MD
Slot 0 Fan Boarda Fan Board Fan Board Fan Board
Slot 1 (MLE 1&2 or
(All MLEs)
MultiViewer 4&3)
Squeeze & Tease Carrier Squeeze & Tease Carrier
Slot 2 (MLE 7&8b or (All MLEs) (All MLEs)
MultiViewer 2&1)
Squeeze & Tease Carrier Video Processor Board

Slot 3 (MLE 3&4 or
(MLE 5,6,7,8)c (MLE 1&2)
MultiViewer 2&1)
Slot 4 (MLE 5&6b or (MLE 1&2)
MultiViewer 4&3)
Slot 5 Crosspoint Board Crosspoint Board
Slot 6
(MLE 3&4)c
Slot 7 (MLE 3&4b or
MultiViewer 6&5)
Squeeze & Tease Carrier Squeeze & Tease Carrier
Slot 8
(MLE 1&2)c (MLE 3&4)
Slot 9 (MLE 1&2b or (MLE 3&4)
MultiViewer 8&7)
a. Iss.3 or higher only
b. Iss.1, Rev.P or higher only
c. WARP Cards of Iss.1, Rev.D or higher only
Slot 0
(Slot 1)
S
T (Slot 2)
A
T
U
S
Power Supply
FAN
FAIL (Slot 3)
(Slot 4)
Power Supply
(Slot 5)
(Slot 6)
Power Supply
(Slot 7)
MAIN
(Slot 8)
POWER
Power Supply
(Slot 9)
Figure 4.4 Board Slots in the Front of the Frame (Octane/QMD-X/MD-X)
Power Supply
(Slot 1)
Slot 0
(Slot 2)
Power Supply
(Slot 3)
Figure 4.5 Board Slots in the Front of the Frame (QMD/MD)
Rear Frame Boards

The rear of the frame is where input and output BNCs boards are located. The number of boards
that are installed in the frame depends on the number of inputs and outputs you require. Refer to
the following table (Table 4.4), and the illustrations of the QMD-X/MD-X (Figure 4.6) and
QMD/MD (Figure 4.7) frames for information on which slot each rear frame board should be
installed in.
Table 4.4 Rear Frame Boards

Slot Octane/QMD-X MD-X QMD MD
Slot A Frame CPU Board Frame CPU Board Frame CPU Board Frame CPU Board
Slot B Video Output Board* Video Output Board*
Video Input with Video Input with
Slot C Video Input Board Video Input Board
CrossPoint Board CrossPoint Board
Slot D Video Input Board Video Input Board Video Input Board Video Input Board
Video Input Board or
Slot E Video Input Board Video Input Board
Video Output Boarda
Slot F Video Input Board Video Input Board
Slot G Video Input Board Video Input Board
Slot H Video Input Board Video Input Board
Slot I Video Output Board Video Output Board
Slot J Video Output Board Video Output Board
Slot K Video Output Board* Video Output Board*
Slot L
Slot M
a. Only output BNCs E9 through E16 are available on a Video Output Board installed in Slot E of the QMD
frame.
* Only a Multi-Definition Video Output Board (4800AR-064, 066, or 067) can be installed in this slot to
support the MultiDSK, Mix/DSK, or AuxKeys features.
Slot A A
Slot B B
Slot C C
Slot D D
Slot E E
Slot F F
Slot G G
Slot H H
Slot I I
Slot I J
Slot K K
Slot L L
Slot M M
Figure 4.6 Board Slots in the Rear of the Frame (Octane/QMD-X/MD-X)
Slot A A
Slot B B
Slot C C
Slot D D
Slot E E
Figure 4.7 Board Slots in the Rear of the Frame (QMD/MD)
Removing and Installing Front Frame Boards

The circuit boards at the front of the frame manipulate and route video from the Video Input
Boards at the rear of the frame to the Video Output Board. These boards can be removed and
replaced as needed by removing the front door of the frame and sliding the desired boards out.
Warning Hazardous Voltage — Hazardous voltages are present in the frame as long as
any of the power supplies are connected to the AC power.
Removing a Front Frame Board

1. Back up any switcher setup configurations you have. Refer to the section “Storing and
Recalling Files and Setups” on page Eng 13-4 for more information on storing switcher
setups.
2. Open the front frame door from the frame. Refer to the section “Opening and Closing
the Frame Door” on page Eng 3-3 for more information.
3. Locate the board you want to remove from the frame. Refer to the section “Frame
Board Locations” on page Eng 4-18 for information on where each board is located.
4. If a tie wrap has been used to secure the extractor tabs on the sides of the board, remove
the tie wrap.
5. Locate the two locking tabs at either side of the board you want to remove.
Important — If you remove a board that is providing a resource that is being used on-air, that
resource will no longer be available when that board is removed.
6. Grasp both locking tabs and rotate them towards you and out towards the outer sides of
the frame. This unseats the board from the midplane.
7. Gently slide the board out of the frame and place it on a clean, flat, static-free surface.
8. Install the frame door when you are done removing boards from the frame.
Installing a Front Frame Board

1. With the frame door removed, locate the slot into which you will be installing the circuit
board. Refer to the section “Removing a Front Frame Board” on page Eng 4-21 to
ensure proper configuration.
2. Inspect the Power Connector Blades on the edge of the board (Figure 4.8) to ensure
that they are not bent or damaged.
Power Connector Blades
Figure 4.8 Power Connector Blade Inspection
Important — If the blades in the power connectors are bent or damaged, contact Ross Video
Technical Support. Do not attempt to install a damaged board.
3. Align the board with the guide rails and push the board into the slot. When the board
stops sliding freely, push firmly to seat the board, and secure it with the ejector tabs.
Important — If there is significant resistance when seating the board, remove the board from
the frame and inspect the connectors for bent pins or other damage to the connectors.
4. The switcher upgrades the board you have installed, if required.

5. Locate the two small holes on the front edge of the board, near the extractor tabs. If you
wish, you can further secure the board by threading tie wraps through these holes and
fastening them around the extractor tabs.
6. Close the frame door when you are done installing boards into the frame.
Removing and Installing Rear Frame Boards

The circuit boards at the rear of the frame include the Frame CPU Board, Video Input Boards,
and Video Output Boards. With the exception of the Video Input Board that is providing the
reference signal for the switcher, and the Frame CPU Board, each of these boards can be
removed and replaced during operation.
Removing a Rear Frame Board
1. Locate the board you want to remove from the frame. Refer to the section “Frame
Board Locations” on page Eng 4-18 for information on where each board is located.
2. Label and remove any cables connected to the board so that they can be properly
connected again.
3. Unscrew the Locking Screws located at either end of the rear panel of the board you
want to remove (Figure 4.9).
Locking Locking
Screw Screw
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IN
LOCK
LOOP
Figure 4.9 Locking Screws on Rear Frame Board
4. Gently slide the board out of the frame and place it on a clean, flat, static-free surface.
Installing a Rear Frame Board

1. Locate the slot for the board you want to install in the frame.
2. Inspect the Power Connector Blades on your board (Figure 4.10) to ensure that they
are not bent or damaged.
Power Connector Blades
Figure 4.10 Power Connector Blade Inspection
Important — If the blades in the power connectors are bent or damaged, contact Ross Video
Technical Support. Do not attempt to install a damaged board.
3. Align the new board with the guide rails and slide the board into the frame until the
board stops sliding freely.
4. Unscrew the Locking Screws located at either end of the rear panel of the board, or
blank spacer, above or below the new board you are installing.
5. Pull the board you just unscrewed the Locking Screws from out of the frame about 1/4”
(6mm).
6. Push firmly and evenly on each side of the new board to seat it.
Important — DO NOT use the Locking Screws to seat or force the board into the slot. If you
have trouble seating the new board, contact Ross Video Technical Support.
7. Seat the board above or below the new board, and screw in the Locking Screws on both
boards.
8. The switcher upgrades the new board you have installed, if required.
9. Reconnect the cables to the board.
Resetting the Switcher
If required, the Vision switcher can be reset from the control panel, returning the switcher to the
default state. This can be either a full restart of the switcher, or just the control panel, or a reset of
the software.
• Full Restart — The Full Restart affects hardware and software simultaneously,
physically powering down the switcher and powering it back up again. This is not the
same as powering the switcher off and back on again.
• Control Panel Restart — The Control Panel Restart restarts the only the control panel,
and does not affect the frame.
• Software Reset — A Software Reset affects software only, returning the switcher to the
default state.
Note — The control panel will not start up properly if there is a USB flash drive in the USB port
on the control panel. You must remove the USB flash drive from the USB port on the control
panel before powering the control panel up.
Full Restart
This function performs both a hardware and a software reset simultaneously. Switcher memory
registers, personality registers, installation registers, and custom control registers are not affected
by the reset, but all other switcher parameters (for example, the current state of the panel) are
reset. BLACK is selected on all buses.
Note — Only the Master Panel can perform a full restart. The System Shutdown Menu is not
accessible from the Satellite Panels.
1. Press HOME  More  System Shutdown.
System Shutdown Menu

2. Press Restart.
3. The system prompts you to confirm the restart. Once confirmed, the frame powers down
and boots up again.
Control Panel Restart

This function performs a restart of the Vision control panel. The frame is not affected by the
restart of the control panel.
Note — Only the Master Panel can perform a panel restart. The System Shutdown Menu is
not accessible from the Satellite Panels.
1. Press HOME  More  System Shutdown.
System Shutdown Menu

2. Press Restart Panel.
3. The system prompts you to confirm the restart. Once confirmed, the control panel
powers down and boots up again.
Software Reset
The software reset function can be performed from either the Global Memory Module or any
individual Effects Memory Module on the control panel. Both methods are described below.
Resetting from the Global Memory Module

From the Global Memory Module you can reset either all of the MLEs assigned by your control
panel at once, or each one individually.
Use one of the following methods to reset MLEs from the Global Memory Module:
• All MLEs — To reset all MLEs, press and hold both the ALL button in the Recall area
and the ALL button in the Store areas (Figure 4.11). Only the MLEs assigned to the
control panel are reset.
GLOBAL MEMORY
Reset All ALL UNDO 7 8 9 +4 ALL Reset All
4 5 6
MLE RECALL FADE MLE
1 CLIP RATE 1
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
ATTRIB
2 RATE 2
0
MLE KEYS MLE MLE
+/- .
3 ONLY RATE 3
MLE EFF KEY MLE

BANK CLEAR ENTER
4 DISS RATE 4
Figure 4.11 Press to Reset All MLEs at Once
• Individual MLEs (1-4) — To reset MLEs 1-4 individually, press and hold both the MLE
# button in the Recall and the MLE # button in the Store areas (Figure 4.12). Where the
# is the number of the MLE you want to reset. For example, to reset MLE 1, you would
press and hold the MLE 1 buttons. You can only reset MLEs that are assigned to your
control panel.
• Individual MLEs (5-8) — To reset MLEs 5-8 individually, toggle +4 on and press and
hold both the MLE # button in the Recall and the MLE # button in the Store areas
(Figure 4.12). Where the # is the number of the MLE you want to reset. For example, to
reset MLE 5, you would toggle +4 on, and press and hold the MLE 1 buttons. You can
only reset MLEs that are assigned to your control panel.
Note — You cannot reset an individual MLE from the 1-4 MLE and the 5-8 MLE at the same
time.
GLOBAL MEMORY
ALL UNDO 7 8 9 +4 ALL
MLE 1 Reset MLE 1 Reset

4 5 6
MLE RECALL FADE MLE
1 CLIP RATE 1
MLE 5 Reset (+4) MLE 5 Reset (+4)
1 2 3
MLE EFF MLE
ATTRIB
2 RATE 2
0
MLE KEYS MLE MLE
+/- .
3 ONLY RATE 3
MLE 4 Reset MLE EFF KEY MLE MLE 4 Reset
BANK CLEAR ENTER
4 DISS RATE 4
MLE 8 Rest (+4) MLE 8 Rest (+4)
Figure 4.12 Press to Reset an Individual MLE
This completes the method for resetting an individual MLE, or all MLEs, from the Global
Memory System Module.
Resetting from an Individual MLE

From each individual Effects Memory Module you can reset the MLE individually.
Use the following method to reset an MLE from the Effects Memory Module:
• Press and hold both the Recall and Store buttons in the Effects Memory Module
(Figure 4.13).
EFFECTS MEMORY
Reset MLE RECALL 7 8 9 STORE Reset MLE
4 5 6
EFF
ATTRIB
RATE
1 2 3
KEYS MLE
ONLY RATE
0
EFF KEY
BANK ENTER
DISS RATE
Figure 4.13 Press to Reset an individual MLE
This completes the method for resetting an individual MLE from the Effects Memory Module.
Resetting From the Positioner Module
You can also reset the Crosspoint Group individually from the Positioner Module. This allows
you to reset an MLE or an Aux bus, depending on what is assigned to the Crosspoint Group.
1. Press and hold the SEL button on the Crosspoint Group that you want to reset. Refer to
the section “Panel Row” on page Ops 4-5 for more information on the Crosspoint
Group.
2. Press the CLEAR button on the Positioner Module. The Crosspoint Group will return
to the default state.
Default State
When you reset an MLE, Aux Bus, the entire switcher, or perform a complete restart, the switcher
returns to the default state.
Note — If you reset only an individual MLE, only that MLE is returned to the default state. The
rest of the MLEs will remain unaffected.
The default state consists of the following:

• The first crosspoint button (Black by default) is selected on the Key, Background, and
Preset buses.
• All Keys are taken off-air.
• In the Preview Bus Module, the PV button is selected.
• In the Transition Modules, Background (BKGD) is selected as included in the next
transition, and Dissolve (DISS) is selected as the transition type.
Note — All transition rates shown are for an Interlaced video format operating at 59.94 Hz. The
switcher automatically calculates the transition rate, based on the video format it is operating in.
• In the Effects Memory Module, the following memories and rates are set:
› REG:00 — Memory register 00 is preset
› Memory0 — Memory register 00 was last recalled
› MLE:015 — MLE transition rate is 15 frames
› Key:008 — Key transition rate is 8 frames
• In the Global Memory Module, the following memories and rates are set:
› REG:00 — Memory register 00 is preset
› Memory0 — Memory register 00 was last recalled
› M:015 — MLE transition rate is 15 frames
› D:008 — DSK transition rate is 8 frames
› F:20 — DSK fade-to-black transition rate is 20 frames
• Auto Select is selected as the Key type in each Keyer.
• The Key 4 Mode is set to External.
Using the Menu System
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on using the menu system, and adjusting and using the
Touchscreen Display of the Vision switcher.
• Touchscreen Interface
• Menu System Basics
• Quick Navigation Buttons
• Menu Skins
• Control Panel Mnemonics
• Control Panel Displays
• Using the Naming Menus
• Help Features
• Screen Captures
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Using the Menu System • Eng 5–1
Touchscreen Interface
Each large Vision switcher comes with an adjustable touchscreen display (Figure 5.1) that is used
to interface with the menu system of the switcher. As you operate the switcher, the menu system
follows what you are doing, displaying the appropriate menu. For example, if you select a
crosspoint that has been assigned to a robotic camera that is controlled from the switcher, the
Camera Head Control Menu for that camera is displayed. Similarly, if you fly a key, the
Squeeze & Tease Position/Crop Menu is displayed.
do not have the Touchscreen Display, an LCD monitor with a DVI-D connector is required.
HOME
UP
ONE
4
HOLD
1 3 2
HOME
UP 5
ONE
HOLD
7 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 MORE 1
SYSTEM FRAME MENU - + SELECT PANEL
8 10 6 12 11 9
Figure 5.1 Touchscreen Display for the Vision Switcher
1) Control Buttons 5) Lower Display Region 9) Display Power Button

2) Control Knobs 6) Function Buttons 10) Frame Fail Indicator
3) Quick Navigation Buttons 7) Quick Navigation MORE Button 11) Panel Fail Indicator
4) Upper Display Region 8) System Power Button 12) Touchscreen Adjustment Buttons
1. Control Buttons
To the left of the upper and lower displays there are three buttons that allow you to navigate the
menu system in the adjacent display. These buttons are as follows:
• HOME — Press this button to display the Main Menus. Pressing the HOME button next
to a display region shows the Main Menu 1-2 in that display region. The other display
region remains the same.
• UP ONE — Press this button to take the display region next to the button up one level in
the menu tree. For example, if you navigate to the Disk Menu and press UP ONE, you
will return to the Main Menus. Pressing the UP ONE button next to a display region
shows the menus from the next level up the menu tree in that display region.
• HOLD — Press this button to lock the displays to the current menus. Pressing the HOLD
button locks the upper display region to the current menu. The lower display region
remains unlocked. It is still be possible to go down levels of the menu tree, but you are
not able to go up past the level at which you pressed the HOLD button.
Eng 5–2 • Using the Menu System Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• MORE — This button lights to indicate when it can be used to navigate to additional
pages of the current menu in the display region next to it. Pressing the MORE button next
to a display region shows the next page of the menu in that display region. A soft More
button is also present on the display.
2. Control Knobs
Next to upper and lower display regions there are three knobs that allow you to make menu
selection on the adjacent display. Each knob adjusts the menu item that is next to it.
If the Punchpad functionality is available for a menu item, pressing the knob next to a menu item
jumps the value to the nearest 10. If you double-press the knob, the value is defaulted.
Operating Tip — If you are using a mouse with the switcher, you can hover the mouse over
the knob and use the scroll wheel to make adjustments.
3. Quick Navigation Buttons

The Quick Navigation Buttons allow you to navigate to commonly used menus with a single
button press. Refer to the section “Quick Navigation Buttons” on page Eng 5-10 for more
information. Additional Quick Navigation Buttons can be accessed by using the Quick
Navigation More Button.
4. Upper Display Region
The Upper Display Region is one of the two areas on the touchscreen that contains a menu.
When you use the Online Help, the text is shown in the upper display region.
5. Lower Display Region
The Lower Display Region is one of the two areas on the touchscreen that contains a menu.
6. Function Buttons
The 6 Function Buttons allow you to select items on the Lower Display Region directly above
the physical buttons. Selections on the lower display region are made using either the function
buttons, or by using the touchscreen directly.
7. Quick Navigation More Button
The Quick Navigation More Button allow you to cycle through all the sets of Quick Navigation
Buttons that are programmed on the switcher.
8. System Power Button
The System Power button allows you to quickly shut down the switcher without having to
navigate through the menus. When pressed, you are taken to the System Shutdown Menu. When
the switcher is powered on, the button is lit.
9. Touchscreen Display Power Button
This button turns the touchscreen display on or off. The touchscreen display must be on in order
to view and interact with the menu system on the switcher.
10. Frame Fail Indicator
The Frame Fail Indicator lights if there is a problem with one of the power supplies or cooling
fans in the frame. Refer to the section “Fail Indicators Diagnosis” on page Eng 17-10 for more
information.
11. Panel Fail Indicator
The Panel Fail Indicator will light if there is a problem with one of the power supplies in the
control panel. Refer to the section “Fail Indicators Diagnosis” on page Eng 17-10 for more
information.
12. Touchscreen Adjustment Buttons
The Touchcreen Adjustment Buttons allow you to adjust the characteristics, such as brightness
and contrast, of the touchscreen display.
Menu System Basics
The menu system on the Vision switcher allows you to set up the switcher, interface with external
equipment, set up and perform complex shots or sequences, and record and edit custom controls.
The menu system is set up with a branching architecture, with the Main Menus as the starting
point of all menus. This is the menu that is displayed when you press the HOME button next to a
display region. Pressing the HOME button next to a display region shows the Main Menu 1-2 in
that display region. The other display region remains the same. If you do not have the
Touchscreen Display, you must use the Home Quick Navigation button to navigate to the Main
Menu 1-2.
From the Main Menus you can move down the tree by selecting one of the other menus in the
Navigation Area, or you can move laterally to additional pages of the menu by pressing the
More button. Pressing the More button on a display region displays the Main Menu 2-2 in that
display region. The other display region remains the same.
You can tell when there are additional pages to a particular menu by the title of the menu, whether
it is page 1-3 or 3-3, and whether the More button is lit or not. If the More button is not grayed
out, it indicates that there are additional pages to the current menu that are not displayed.
The touchscreen allows you to show two independent menus at once. By default, the lower region
is the main auto-follow menu for the switcher, and the upper region is a user mountable menu.
For example, you can mount the Global-Store Menu on the upper region and use the bottom
region for normal operation (Figure 5.2). This allows you to manage the Global-Store Menu
without having to navigate to the menu every time.
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
Figure 5.2 Menus
Every menu on the switcher has the same layout, with a Menu Title, Main Area, Selection
Area, and Navigation Area (Figure 5.3).
2 1 3 4
HOME
5
UP
ONE
HOLD
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
Figure 5.3 Functional Areas of the Menu System
1) Back and Forward Buttons 4) Swap Buttons 7) Navigation Areas

2) Menu Titles 5) Selection Areas
3) Copy Down and Copy Up Buttons 6) Main Areas
1. Back and Forward Buttons

These buttons allow you to move back and forth between menus you have already navigated to,
much like the Forward and Back button on your internet browser. For example, pressing the
Back button takes you to the last menu that was displayed in that display region. If you press the
Forward button, you navigate back to the original menu.
2. Menu Titles
The menu title gives you both the title of the current menu, as well as the current page and total
number of pages of the menu. For example, Main Menu 1-2 is the first page of the Main Menu,
and Main Menu 2-2 is the second, and last, page of the Main Menu.
3. Copy Down and Copy Up Buttons
These buttons allow you to copy the currently displayed menu from one display region to the
other.
4. Swap Buttons
These buttons allow you to swap the menus currently displayed between the upper and lower
display regions. The menu in the upper display region is displayed in the lower, and the menu in
the lower display region is displayed in the upper.
5. Selection Areas
The selection area of the menu can contain up to three items that are adjusted using the Selection
Knobs adjacent to the display. These knobs are where the majority of the selection on the menu
system are made. In some cases, these items can be adjusted using the positioner.
If the Punchpad functionality is available for a menu item, pressing the knob next to a menu item
jumps the value to the nearest 10. If you double-press the knob, the value is defaulted.
If you hover the mouse pointer over a knob value, the scroll wheel on the mouse can be used to
adjust the knob value. The scroll wheel acts as if you are turning the knob.
6. Main Areas
The main area of the menu is where the bulk of the information is displayed. This includes
helpful tips about using the menu, or information on the current state of the switcher. For
example, on the Main Menu 1-2 the main area provides the software version, whether the control
panel is a Master Panel or Satellite Panel, the video format that the switcher is currently operating
in, the input reference format, and the status of the Remote Enables and Video Correctors.
7. Navigation Areas
The navigation area of the menu contains up to six items that can be either a navigation button to
another menu, a toggle for a feature, or display a sub-menu that changes the items in the
Selection Area.
• Navigation Buttons have a down pointing arrow next to the name, indicating that if you
select this item you are taken to another menu.
• Toggle Buttons have a highlighted item beneath the title, indicating what is currently
active. This can be an On versus Off, or one feature versus another. Turning a feature on
may also activate different option for the same menu.
• Option Buttons will change the items currently available in the Selection Area, and the
Main Area. For example, selecting items in the Navigation Area of the
Communications Menu does not take you to another menu, but changes the items in the
Selection Area.
Using the Punchpad

When you select specific installation and operational menus, Punchpad Icons ( ) appear next to
the Selection Knobs (Figure 5.4), indicating that you can press the button next to the Selection
Knobs to use the Punchpad to enter values.
Figure 5.4 The Punchpad can be used to make selections on the menu system
When the punchpad icon is present, you can press the button next to the Selection Knob to
display the Punchpad (Figure 5.5). The Punchpad remains on screen until you close it or you
navigate away from the menu. Selecting another option on the menu, or pressing More does not
close the Punchpad.
5 1
2
4 3
Figure 5.5 Functional Regions of the Punchpad
1) New Value Field 3) Knob Selection 5) Default and Close Buttons

2) Keypad 4) Copy/Paste Buttons
1. New Value Field

This field shows the new value for the selected knob. Values can be entered into the Punchpad
using the keypad on the Punchpad, a keyboard, or the keypad on the Global Memory Module.
Global Memory Number Entry must be turned on to use the keypad to enter values. Refer to the
section “Personality List” on page Eng 11-2 for information on the Global Memory Number
Entry feature.
New values must be within the range for the selected knob. If the new value is outside the range
for the knob the closest valid value is entered instead. For example, if the knob goes from 0.0%
to 100.0%, and you enter -0.1% or 109.0%, the value enter for the knob will be 0.0% or
100.0% respectively.
2. Keypad
The keypad allows you to enter new values for the selected knob. The value appears in the New
Value Field. Press ENTER on the keypad to use the new value, or CLR to clear the new value
without changing the current knob value.
You can close the Punchpad by pressing ENTER again without entering another value.
3. Knob Selection
The items in the knob selection area represent the knobs on the menu and their current values.
The highlighted item represents the knob that the Punchpad is currently assigned to.
Only items that can use the Punchpad to enter values appear in the knob selection area.
4. Copy/Paste Buttons
The copy and paste buttons allow you to copy a single, or all, the values for the current knobs and
paste them to other knobs. Knob values can be copied between knobs on the same menu, or on
different menus, as long as the values are in the same format. A decimal value, such as 25.5%,
cannot be pasted into a field that requires a whole number, such as 2 Frames.
To copy a specific knob value, select the knob you want to copy and press Copy. The value
appears in the Mem: field.
To copy all knob values, press Copy All. The values for each knob appear in the Mem 1:,
Mem 2:, and Mem 3: fields.
5. Default and Close Buttons
The Default button resets the currently selected knob to the default value. All other knob values
remain unchanged. This is the same functionality as double-pressing the knob.
The Close Window button closes the Punchpad.
Using the Positioner with the Menu System
When you select specific installation and operational menus, Positioner Icons appear next to the
knobs (Figure 5.6) on the lower display region, indicating that moving the positioner in that axis
adjusts the selection for that knob. Typically, two or three icons are shown, depending upon the
selected menu and function.
When these icons appear, you can adjust the selected function or parameter either with the
Selection Knobs or with the Positioner.
Figure 5.6 The Positioner can be used to make selection on the menu system
• When the left-right positioner icon ( ) appears, you can move the Positioner left and
right to make adjustments to this value.
• When the up-down positioner icon ( ) appears, you can move the Positioner up and
down to make adjustments to this value.
• When the circular positioner icon ( ) appears, you can twist the Positioner knob
clockwise and counter-clockwise to make adjustments to this value.

• on using the positioner, refer to the section “Using the Positioner” on page Ops 4-37.
Quick Navigation Buttons
The Quick Navigation buttons (Figure 5.7) allow you to control the display region next to the
buttons, or navigate to commonly used menus with a single button press. The additional Quick
Navigation buttons are displayed by pressing the Next button. Refer to the section
“Touchscreen Interface” on page Eng 5-2 for more information on the buttons on the
The Quick Navigation buttons display the menu in the lower display region.
Quick Navigation Buttons
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
Figure 5.7 Quick Navigation Buttons
The default settings for these buttons are as follows:
First Tab
• Home — The Home button displays the Main Menu 1-2 on the adjacent display region.
• UP One — The Up One button displays the menu up one level in the menu tree.
• Hold — The Hold button locks the adjacent display region to the current menu.
• Next — The Next button toggles between the first and second tab of Quick Navigation
Buttons.
Second Tab
• Install — The Install button displays the Installation Menus.
• Pers — The Pers button displays the Personality Menu.
• Scheme — The Color Scheme button displays the Color Scheme Menus. From these
menus, you can set the color of the buttons on the control panel, as well as the skin used
for the menus.
• Diags — The Diag button displays the Panel Diagnostics Menu.
• Help — The Help button displays the welcome screen for the Online Help. If you have
already accessed the online help, this button will display the help at the same page that it
was last viewed. If you hold the Help button, and press another button on the control
panel, you can view specific help information on that button, or group of buttons. Refer
to the section “Help Features” on page Eng 5-18 for more information on using the help.
• Aux Bus — The Aux Bus button displays the Aux Bus Outputs Menus.
• DVE — The DVE button displays the S&T MD Main Menu. From this menu you can
access any of the Squeeze & Tease Menus.
• CustCtrl — The Custom Control button displays the Custom Control ShotBox
Menus. From these menus you can run any custom control on the switcher.
Menu Skins
The appearance of the menus, including colors and icons, can be customized by using one of the
skins provided with your Vision switcher.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  Color Scheme  More  More
 Select Skin.
Select Monitor Skin Menu

2. Use the Monitor Skin knob (the middle knob) on the Select Monitor Skin Menu to
select the skin that you want to use.
3. Press Select This Skin on the Select Monitor Skin Menu to load the selected theme.

• on editing or loading color schemes for your switcher, refer to the section “Control
Panel Button Color Schemes” on page Eng 11-17.
Control Panel Mnemonics
The Vision control panel uses mnemonics (Figure 5.8) to indicate the sources or functions that
are assigned to buttons. For MLE crosspoint buses, and the custom control bus, the mnemonics
indicate the sources that are assigned to each button. For the Keyers, the mnemonics indicate
whether a key is on-air, and the current source that is selected for that key.
Crosspoint and custom control button mnemonics can be adjusted for color, font size, and
brightness, either globally, or on an individual basis.
KEYERS TRANSITION GLOBAL MEMORY SYSTEM

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS ALL UNDO 7 ALL
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
4
MLE RECALL MLE
1 CLIP 1
CUT CUT CUT CUT

1
MLE MLE
2 2
MLE KEYS MLE

+/-
FRAMES 3 ONLY 3
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK
MLE
4
MLE 1 MLE 2 SRC PV PGM

SOURCE
ID
VTR
TC
SAFE
TITLE
CENTER
TIME
CLOCK
MASK
PV
HIDE
OVER
CUT FADE
015

BORD SHOW
OFF ALPHA
SEL
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 CHNL KEY

MGMT PV
7 8
SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
LINK
FRAMES
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS CLEAR
Figure 5.8 Mnemonics on the Vision 2 (4-Keyer Shown)
Note — The names that are shown on the mnemonics are those that are assigned to the
sources or the custom controls. Function names, such as Global-Store, cannot be changed.
Mnemonics can be adjusted in a number of ways to meet the needs of your environment. These
can be global adjustments, such as the contrast, brightness or the default appearance, or they can
be specific, allowing you to adjust each crosspoint and custom control mnemonic individually
when you name it.
Default Mnemonic Appearance

You can adjust the font size, background color and whether or not the displays will show the
shifted crosspoint names for the mnemonics. These setting are the default settings that are used by
the switcher for all the mnemonics. You can override individual mnemonics when you name
BNCs or custom controls. These mnemonics are no longer effected by the default settings.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  Standard Mnemonics.
Standard Mnemonics Assignment Menu

2. Set the size of the font used in the mnemonic displays as follows:
• Use the Font knob to select the size of the font used. You can select between the
following:
Note — If names have more than the maximum number of characters per line, the last
characters are dropped.
› Small — Select this option to use a small black font on a

color background in the mnemonics. This size allows you to
use 6 characters per line, with 2 lines.
› Small Invert — Select this option to use a small color font
on a black background in the mnemonics. This size allows
you to use 6 characters per line, with 2 lines.
› Medium — Select this option to use a medium black font
on a color background in the mnemonics. This size allows
you to use 4 characters per line, with 2 lines.
› Medium Invert — Select this option to use a medium
color font on a black background in the mnemonics. This size
allows you to use 4 characters per line, with 2 lines.
› None — Select this option to have no text appear in the
mnemonic displays.
3. Set the color of the background or text as follows:
• Use the Color knob to select the color you want to assign to the background or text.
You can select between the following:
Note — If you are using an inverted font the color is applied to the text, otherwise it is applied
to the background.
› Green — Select this option to use green as the display color.

› Yellow — Select this option to use yellow as the display color.
› Orange — Select this option to use orange as the display color.
› None — Select this option to not use a color for the display.
4. Set the shifted crosspoint display mode for the mnemonics as follows:
Operating Tip — The lower label always shows the name of the input that is considered
active. Therefore, the name of the unshifted crosspoint is on the lower label until you press
down on the shift key; then the shifted crosspoint becomes the lower label.
• Use the Xpt Mode knob to select the display mode you want to use. You can select
between the following:
› 1 Name — Select this option to show only the names of the
crosspoints for the selected bus.
› 2 Names — Select this option to show the names of the
crosspoints for the selected bus and the names of crosspoints
when the bus is in Shift mode.
Note — The size of the font is overridden to Small or Small Invert to allow both names to be
shown. Names over 6 characters long drop the last characters to allow the name to fit.
› The example to the left shows the 2 Names feature with the
font set to invert.

• on setting mnemonic color schemes, refer to the section “Mnemonic Color Schemes” on
page Eng 11-21.
Control Panel Displays
The Vision control panel uses small displays (Figure 5.9) to provide you with information on the
current state of the switcher, or modules on the switcher. Control Panel Displays are located in
each MLE bus, Memory Module, and Positioner Module.
KEYERS TRANSITION GLOBAL MEMORY SYSTEM

SEL
MASK
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL

PST TRANS KEY TRANS ALL UNDO 7 ALL
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
4
MLE RECALL MLE
1 CLIP 1
CUT CUT CUT CUT

1
MLE MLE
2 2
MLE KEYS MLE

+/-
FRAMES 3 ONLY 3
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 MLE
4
EFF
DISS
BANK
MLE
4
MLE 1 MLE 2 SRC PV PGM

SOURCE
ID
VTR
TC
SAFE
TITLE
CENTER
TIME
CLOCK
MASK
PV
HIDE
OVER
CUT FADE
015

BORD SHOW
OFF ALPHA
SEL
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 CHNL KEY

MGMT PV
7 8
SEL SEL
PST TRANS KEY TRANS
BKGD PV PRIOR LIMIT
LINK
FRAMES
ROLL
CLIP
CUT
AUTO
TRANS 015 AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS
AUTO
TRANS CLEAR
Figure 5.9 Displays on the Vision 2 (4-Keyer Shown)
The Control Panel Displays can be adjusted in a number of ways to meet the needs of your
environment. These adjustments include brightness, contrast, and overall appearance.

• on setting the brightness of the displays, refer to the section “Control Panel Display
Brightness” on page Eng 11-23.
Using the Naming Menus
The Naming Menus allow you to enter, or change, the name of video sources, custom control,
memories and various other elements on the switcher.
BNC Names Menu

1. Use the BACKSPACE button to clear the current name from the New Name field.
Operating Tip — If you want to use one of the preset names on the switcher, press Preset
Names to display Preset Names Menu. You can then use the knob to highlight the name you
want to use and press Select. The new name is shown in the New Name field.
2. Use the letters on the menu, or the keyboard, to enter the name into the New Name field.
3. Use the Font knob to select the font size you want to use. Along with size, you can also
select whether you want to name to be displayed as inverted, or reverse color.
4. Use the Color knob to select the color you want to use for the mnemonic.
Operating Tip — If you want the name on the mnemonic to start at a different position, use
the Next Mnem Start Pos and Prev Mnem Start Pos buttons to select how much of the name
is displayed.
5. Press Accept New Name to save the mnemonic settings for the name.
If you do not like the new name, you can change it back to the factory default by pressing
Default.
Help Features
The Vision switcher provides a complete set of online manuals and a function-specific help
system that can be viewed on the Touchscreen Display. In addition to this, an extensive pop-up
system is provided to help you quickly and easily diagnose operational problems that may occur.
Online Manuals
A complete set of the Vision Manuals are provided on the switcher and can be viewed on the
1. Press Manuals on the Quick Navigation Bar on the Touchscreen Display. The online
manuals (Figure 5.10) are displayed in the Upper Display Region.
Figure 5.10 Online Manuals
2. Press the Manuals button again to close the help.
Operating Tip — To save a copy of the manuals in PDF format to a USB drive, insert a USB
drive into the USB port on the Vision control panel and press HOME  More  Help  Copy
Manuals To USB.
Pop-up Help
The Pop-up Help feature is designed to alert you when an illegal function is attempted. When the
illegal button, or combination of buttons, is pressed, the Pop-up Help window is displayed. This
window provides a brief explanation of why the operation cannot be performed, and a reference
number that can be used when contacting Ross Technical support.
Example of Pop-up Help
Screen Captures
The Vision switcher allows you to take screen captures of the current state of the active menu.
Screen captures are stored to your removable USB flash drive.
1. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port on the Vision control panel.
2. Navigate to the menu you want to capture. The switcher will only capture the active, or
last used, menu.
3. Take a screen capture as follows:
• Press and hold the Store ALL button on the Global Memory Module.
• Press the FADE RATE button on the Global Memory Module.
4. The control panel beeps and the file is stored to the USB flash drive.
Software Upgrades and Options
In This Chapter
This chapter provides instructions for upgrading system software, as well as verifying and
installing various software options.
• Vision Web Interface Account
• Software Upgrade
• System Information Overview
• Installed Options
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Software Upgrades and Options • Eng 6–1
Vision Web Interface Account
A software upgrade is performed using the QMD/X Web Interface. The QMD/X Web Interface
allows you to view the status of the boards, cards and modules installed on the switcher and
perform upgrades of the software and hardware packages. Since most of the boards are
hot-swappable, it is necessary to constantly monitor which boards, cards and modules are
installed, and make sure that their software and hardware versions are current and compatible
with the rest of the system. In order to use the QMD/X Web Interface, you will have to setup an
account to access the frame from the local sub-net.
The current versions of Internet Explorer, Mozilla, and Netscape are supported. If you have any
problems, contact Ross Video Technical Support.
of your frame and press Enter. The QMD/X Web Interface Splash Screen is
displayed.
3. Click Other...  Admin to display the Admin Page. This page allows you to change
the username and password for the frame.
Admin Page
4. Change the username and password for the QMD/X Web Interface account as follows:
Note — Usernames and Passwords can only contain numbers, letters, dashes, underscores
and periods; all other characters are invalid.
• Enter the new name for the account in the New Username field. This is the name
that is used when logging on.
• Enter the password for the new account in the New password field. This is the
password that is used when logging on.
• Re-enter the same password in the Confirm password field.
• Click Apply Changes to change the username and password. The next time you
access the QMD/X Web Interface, you must use this username and password.
Eng 6–2 • Software Upgrades and Options Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Software Upgrade
The software upgrade procedure allows you to upload a software upgrade package to the switcher
from an external computer that is on the same sub-network as the switcher. Once uploaded, the
switcher extracts the upgrade information and sends it to the boards, cards, and modules on the
switcher that require upgrading. Since most of the boards are hot-swappable, it is necessary to
constantly monitor which boards are plugged in, and make sure that their software and hardware
versions are current and compatible with the rest of the system.
Important — Because the software upgrade process automatically returns the switcher to
default values, it is important that you back up all switcher registers to the hard drive or USB
flash drive at this point. Refer to the section “Storing and Recalling Files and Setups” on page
Eng 13-4 for more information on storing your switcher Setups onto the hard drive or USB flash
drive.
Before you can perform the upgrade, you must perform a hard reboot of the switcher to ensure
that all components are in a known state. This reboot includes both the control panel and the
frame, and must be performed both before and after the upgrade.
Important — If you are upgrading to Vision from Synergy, you must upgrade to version
6.0MD or 6.1MD with Synergy before you can upgrade to version 7.1MD or higher with Vision.
Preparing the Switcher Before an Upgrade

Recalling the factory default settings before the upgrade ensures that all the boards, cards, and
modules on the switcher are in a known state, and are ready to accept an upgrade. However, the
factory default procedure also resets the reference format. You must set the reference back to the input
reference that is connected to the switcher, and reboot the switcher before starting the upgrade.
1. Perform a recall of all factory default settings. Refer to the section “Recalling Factory
Default Settings” on page Eng 12-27 for information on performing a factory default.
2. Power down all Satellite Panels before the upgrade.
3. Set the reference format back to the input reference that is connected to the switcher.
Refer to the section “Reference Setup” on page Eng 4-13 for information on reference
setup.
4. Shut down the switcher. Refer to the section “Powering Down the Switcher” on page
Eng 4-3 for information on shutting down the switcher.
5. Wait at least 6 seconds for the System Status Indicators to go out.
6. Power up the switcher. Refer to the section “Powering Up the Switcher” on page Eng
4-2 for information on powering up the switcher.
Ensure that the switcher is fully powered up before attempting to perform the upgrade.
Performing the Upgrade

Depending on the number of boards, cards and modules in the switcher, and the current version of
software on them, it will take between 15 and 40 minutes to complete the upgrade.
Note — After the Factory Default is performed, the Bus Maps and Output BNC settings have
been changed to the default settings. Ensure that you can find a source button that is assigned
to a valid input, and that you have a monitor connected to a default Aux Bus output of your
switcher. You will need to verify that the switcher is passing video properly after the upgrade.
To upgrade the switcher core, you must log into the QMD/X Web Interface and upload the new
software package.
Important — Ensure that the switcher is fully powered up before attempting the upgrade.
When the switcher is fully powered up it is able to pass video normally.
displayed.
Operating Tip — The System Information Page shows a list of all the upgradable
components on the boards, cards, and modules installed in the control panel and frame. Refer
to the section “System Information Overview” on page Eng 6-7 for more information on this
page.
3. Click Upgrade to display the Upgrade Page. The Upgrade Page lists all the previous
upgrade packages that were stored on the hard drive of the frame.
Important — Consult a Ross Video Technical Support representative before attempting to

revert to a previous version of software. Reverting to a previous version of software may disable
certain features or processes that were not present in that previous version of software and
cause switcher Setups to not be recalled properly.
4. Revert to a previous software version as follows:

• Select the software upgrade package that you want to install. The name Vision
appears in the Additional File column for upgrade packages that include the Vision
control panel software upgrade package.
• Select Vision as the Panel type.
• Click Upgrade selected version to install the software version on the switcher.
• Wait while the switcher installs the software version. This may take a few minutes.
• When the selected software version has been installed, the System Information
Page is displayed.
• Proceed to Step (6.) to complete the procedure.
5. Upload and install a new upgrade package as follows:
• Enter a name for the upgrade package in the New_Name field. This must be unique
and descriptive enough to allow you to easily identify it at a later point. Upgrade
package names can only include numbers, letters, and underscores or dashes.
Spaces and other symbols are not allowed.
• Click Browse. A file selection dialog box is displayed.
• Locate the upgrade package file you want to upload to the switcher on your
computer. The file is named mdx-<version>-<build>.tgz.
• Click Open/Choose to select the file. The file path and name appears in the Select
File to Upload field.
• Click Upgrade Selected Version. The upgrade package is uploaded to the
switcher and verified. The panel file is then requested.
• Click Browse. A file selection dialog box is displayed.
• Locate the Vision upgrade package file you want to upload to the switcher on your
computer. The file is named vision-<version>-<build>.tgz.
• Click Open/Choose to select the file. The file path and name will appear in the
Select File to Upload field. If the switcher is unable to verify that the file is an
upgrade package, an error message is displayed.
Note — The Check if there are additional Ross supplied files to upload after this one
should only be selected if you are advised to upload an additional file by Ross Video Technical
Support.
• Click Add This File to add the selected file to the software upgrade package.
• Wait while the switcher installs the software version. This may take a few minutes.
• When the software version has been installed, the Additional Files Page is
displayed.
Note — If you receive a warning that the upgrade has failed because the flash is full (Rsync
failed, is flash full?), check the remaining Application Flash in the Storage Capacity section
of the System Info page. If the remaining capacity is less than 2M, you must delete a number of
FlexDevice drivers to free up space for the upgrade. You can re-install the FlexDevice drivers
after the upgrade. Once you have freed up the required space, try the upgrade again.
6. Click Reboot Now to perform a soft restart of the switcher. This cycles the logs on the
switcher and propagates the upgrade to all the boards, cards and modules on the
switcher.
Important — If a message asking you to Reboot the control panel appears on the menus of
the Touchscreen display, click Cancel. You will be rebooting the entire switcher in a later step.
7. Allow the switcher to propagate the upgrade to all the boards and cards installed in the
frame by waiting at least 20 minutes before proceeding to the next step.
8. Wait for the System Information Page to be displayed.
• Periodically reload/refresh the System Information Page until all the items listed have
Done as their Status.
• Verify that the switcher is passing video properly by selecting different crosspoints. This
ensures that the upgrade has completed. If the switcher is not passing video properly, check
the System Information Page again to ensure all items are done.
9. If the message “The software versions of the panel and frame do not match”
is shown, you need to upgrade your panel.
• Press HOME  More  System Shutdown  Upgrade Panel.
10. If the message “PMCs need to be upgraded; please go to Panel Modules
menu” is shown, you need to upgrade your PMCs.
• Press HOME  Setup  More  Panel Modules  Upgrade PMCs.
Rebooting the Switcher After an Upgrade
Rebooting the switcher after the upgrade ensures that all the boards, cards, and modules on the
switcher are properly upgraded and initialized. If a board, card or module was not properly
upgraded, the switcher attempts to upgrade and initialize it again with the reboot.
Caution — If the switcher has not finished propagating the upgrade before you proceed to
shut-down the switcher, you may damage the switcher.
Eng 4-3 for information on shutting down the switcher.
2. Wait at least 6 seconds for the System Status Indicators to go out.
3. Power up the switcher. Refer to the section “Powering Up the Switcher” on page Eng
4-2 for information on powering up the switcher.
4. Power on each Satellite Panel, in order, to upgrade it. Ensure that a Satellite Panel is upgraded
properly before powering on the next one.
Note — If the message “The software versions of the panel and frame do not match” is
shown, you need to upgrade your panel. Press HOME  More  System Shutdown
 Upgrade Panel.
You have now completed the upgrade procedure and should now recall any Switcher Setups you
stored before the upgrade. Refer to the section “Storing and Recalling Files and Setups” on
page Eng 13-4 for more information on recalling Setups.
System Information Overview
The System Information Page of the QMD/X Web Interface provides an overview of all the
boards, cards, and modules in the frame and control panel of the switcher, as well as their current
status. An overview of the current storage capacity of the switcher is also provided.
System Information Page
Note — The information listed on this page is specific to your switcher and the boards, cards,
and modules you have installed, and may not appear as shown.
The System Information Page is divided into two regions, the System Information Region and
the Storage Capacity Region.
System Information Region

This region provides a list of all the functional components on the boards, cards, and modules in
the control panel and frame of the switcher. Components are identified by the board, card or
module they are located on, the component on that board, card or module, and the slot the board,
card or module is located in. For each of these components, the current version of software that is
running on the component, the date of the software build and the current status of the component,
is displayed. A more detailed description of each of these columns is provided as follows:
• Component — This column identifies every board, card, or module on the control
panel or frame of the switcher, as well as all satellite control panels, that has a functional
component on it that can be upgraded by the normal upgrade procedure.
• Function — This column identifies the function component on the board, card or
module installed in the switcher. These functional components can be chips, processors,
or applications/processes running on the boards, cards or modules.
• Slot — This column identifies the slot on the front or rear of the frame that a particular
board is installed in. For cards, this column identifies the board that the card is installed
on. Numeric slots (1, 2, 3) are located at the front of the frame, and alphabetic slots (A, B,
C) are located at the rear of the frame.
• Version — This column specifies the current software version and build number that is
running on the component. If a component is running a different software version than
the other components on the switcher, this may indicate a problem with that component.
• Date — This column specifies the date of the software that is running on the component.
This is not the date that the software was upgraded, but the date that the software upgrade
was created by Ross Video. This date, along with the version number, helps a Ross Video
Technical Support person correctly identify the software you are running.
• Status — This column specifies the status of the component upgrade. The possible
status for a component is as follows:
› Pending — The component requires upgrading and is in the queue to be upgraded.
› In Progress — The component is being upgraded.
› No Status — The component has not reported a status. The component could be
rebooting, or there is a failure. If this message remains on for an extended period of
time, contact Ross Video Technical Support.
› Failed — The component is reporting a failure to upgrade. Contact Ross Video
Technical Support.
› Done — The component has been upgraded successfully.
Storage Capacity Region

This region provides a list of all the storage both used and available on the switcher. This includes
the hard drive located on the Frame CPU Board, as well as the flash memory located on the
other boards and cards on the switcher. A more detailed description of each of these columns is
provided as follows:
• Device — This column identifies the storage device that is being used.
• Total Size — This column specifies the total amount of storage, used and unused, on the
storage device, measured in Megabytes and Gigabytes.
• Current Usage — This column specifies the amount of storage that is currently being
used for each storage device.
• Remaining Capacity — This column specifies the amount of storage that is remaining
for each storage device.
• Percent Used — This column specifies the percentage of total size that is currently
being used for each storage device.
Note — If the message Hard disk log contains errors! is displayed, contact Ross Video
Technical Support for information on diagnosing this warning.
Installed Options
Several menus are available that allow you to verify all of the standard and optional boards and
software present in your Vision switcher. The menus also display the serial number, allow you to
install additional software options, and store and recall option codes.

• on installing control panel modules, refer to the section “Replacing a Control Panel
Module” on page Eng 18-21.
Accessing the Installed Options Menus

The following procedures enable you to navigate through the various installed options menus on
the Vision switcher. The menus are provided for information only — no action can be taken. Use
the information provided in the following menus to verify which options are currently installed
on your frame and panel boards.
Note — You cannot view, install, or manage software options from a Satellite Panel. Only the
Master Panel has the Installed Options Menu 2-2, and the Software Options, Enter Serial
Number, and Add Options buttons.
Installed Options Menu

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installed Options  Software Options.
Software Options — Installed Options Menu 1-2

2. Use any knob to scroll the list of options.
• The Option column lists all the options that are available to be installed on the
switcher.
• The Enabled column indicates whether that particular option has been installed
(enabled) or not.
Panel Boards Menu

The Panel Boards Menu lists specifications of the Control Panel CPU Module, the current
Vision OS (Operating System) version, and the status of the power supplies in the control panel.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installed Options  Panel Boards.
Panel Boards — Installed Options Menu 1-2

• The Board column lists all the boards installed in the control panel, and their
current status, as well as any USB devices connected to the panel.
Frame Boards Menu

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installed Options  Frame Boards.
Frame Boards — Installed Options Menu 1-2

• The Slot column lists each slot on the frame. The slots at the back of the frame are
identified with letters, and the slots at the front of the frame are identified with
numbers.
• The Board column lists each circuit board by name, including any daughter cards
that may be installed on that board.
• The HWRev column lists the hardware revision number of each board and card in
the frame.
• The SWRev column lists the revision number of the software that is currently
installed on each board or card in the frame.
• The BuildInfo column lists the build, or software compile, date of the software that
is currently installed on each board or card in the frame.
Installing Serial Numbers
If the label “0000000” appears at the top of the Installed Options Menus, a serial number is
required.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installed Options  Enter Serial Number.
Enter Serial Number Menu
Note — The Encrypt Code is a random number that is generated each time the switcher is
powered up. The purpose of the Encrypt Code is to prevent unauthorized installation of software
options. The code remains valid until the switcher is powered down or reset. The next time the
switcher is powered up, a new Encrypt Code is generated.
2. Call Ross Video Technical Support at the number listed on the menu.
3. Call Ross Video Technical Support to obtain a serial number for your switcher. Have the
following information ready when you contact Ross Video Technical Support:
• Your Name.
• The Name of the Facility that the switcher is installed in.
• The Ross Encrypt Code that is listed on the menu.
4. You are given a numeric code by the Technical Support representative.
5. Enter the code using the keypad in the Global Memory Module.
6. Press ENTER on the keypad, or press Finished on the Enter Serial Number Menu.
Installing Software Options

Use the following procedure to activate your software options (after entering a new serial
number) or to install a new software option that you have just purchased:
1. Press HOME Setup  Installed Options  Software Options.
Software Options — Installed Options Menu

2. Use the middle knob to scroll the list of options. The following options are listed:
• Audio Server Control — This option allows you to control an audio server from
the Vision switcher.
• AuxKeys — The AuxKeys™ option allows you to control an Aux Mixer/Keyer
from the Aux Bus. Refer to the section “AuxKeys” on page Eng 8-26 to learn how
to set up your AuxKeys option.
• Character Generator — This option allows you to control a Character Generator
from the Vision switcher.
• DVE Send and Remote CTRL — This option allows you to control an external
DVE from the Vision switcher.
• Editor Interface — This option allows you to use an external editor to control your
Vision switcher.
• Extra Half MLE — This option allows you to control the bottom Program/Preset
MLE on a half MLE switcher. For example, a Vision 2.5 switcher. When you add an
MLE to the switcher, the default settings are applied to it, including Bus Maps.
• Large Audio Mixer — This option allows you to control a large audio mixer from
• MD DVE Option — This option allows you to use Squeeze & Tease MD with all
the video formats that the switcher supports.
• MLE X MD Option — This option allows you to control MLE X on your Vision
switcher in both High Definition and Standard Definition video formats; where X is
the number of the MLE. When you add an MLE to the switcher, the default settings
are applied to it, including Bus Maps.
• MLE X SD Option — This option allows you to control MLE X on your Vision
switcher in Standard Definition video formats only; where X is the number of the
MLE. When you add an MLE to the switcher, the default settings are applied to it,
including Bus Maps.
• Monitor Wall — This option allows you to control a Monitor Wall from the Vision
switcher.
• MultiDSK — This option allows you to add additional Downstream Keyers for
your Program/Preset MLE. Refer to the section “MultiDSK” on page Eng 8-22 for
information on how to set up your MultiDSK option.
• MultiViewer X — This option allows you to add a MultiViewer to the switcher,
where X is the number of the MultiViewer option.
• Peripheral Bus II — This option allows you to control a device using the Pbus
interface protocol from the Vision switcher.
• Proc Amps — This option allows you to control Processing Amplifiers for every
input on the switcher.
• RGB Color Corrector — This option allows you to control a floating input-based
color corrector.
• Robotic System — This option allows you to control a robotic camera from the
Vision switcher.
• Router — This option allows you to control a router from the Vision switcher.
• SD DVE Option — This option allows you to use Squeeze & Tease MD with
standard definition video formats.
• Serial Tally — This option allows you to control a device using the serial tally
protocol from the Vision switcher.
• Small Audio Mixer — This option allows you to control a small audio mixer from
• SmartConversion — This option allows you to create a conversion loop with an
external Up/Down converter and have the Vision switcher automatically route the
video to the converter and back. Refer to the section “SmartConversion and
Up/Down Converters” on page Eng 16-1 for information on how to set up a
conversion loop.
• Still Store (Aprisa) — This option allows you to control an external Still Store
from the Vision switcher.
• Video Server Control — This option allows you to control a video server from the
Vision switcher.
• VTR Remote Control — This option allows you to control a VTR from the Vision
switcher.
3. Press Add Option to display the Enter Option Number Menu.
Enter Option Number Menu

4. Call Ross Video Technical Support to obtain the software option code for the option you
want to install. Have the following information ready when you contact Ross Video
Technical Support:
• Your Name.
• The Name of the Facility that the switcher is installed in.
• The Serial Number of the switcher you want to install the option on.
• The Name of the Options you want to install on the switcher.
5. You are given a 5-digit numeric code by Ross Video Technical Support. Temporary
option codes are only valid for 72 hours, or until the switcher is powered down.
Operating Tip — Store your serial number and option codes in a safe place for future
reference.
6. Enter the option code using the keypad in the Global Memory Module.
Important — You must enter all 5 characters, including any leading zeros. Failure to do so
may prevent the option from being installed properly.
7. Press ENTER on the keypad, or press Finished on the Enter Serial Number Menu.
The Installed Options Menu now indicates the options you have just installed.
Storing and Recalling Option Codes

The following procedures allow you to store and recall your option codes to a storage device.
Note — Only the Master Panel can store and recall option codes to either the hard drive or
USB flash drive.
Storing Option Codes

1. Press HOME  Disk.
2. Select the storage device that you want to store your files to as follows:
• Use the Disk Type knob to select the storage device you want to store your files
on. You can choose between the following:
› Hard Drive — Select this option to store the option codes to the hard drive.
› USB — Select this option to store the files to a USB flash drive inserted in the
USB port on the control panel.
3. Press HOME  Setup  Installed Options  More.
Installed Options Menu 2-2

4. Press Backup Codes To USB/Backup Option Codes to store all of your option
codes.
Important — The Delete Selected SW Option and Delete All SW Options commands allow
you to delete selected, or all, installed software options. Do not attempt to delete your options
unless instructed to by Ross Video Technical Support. Ensure that you have stored your option
codes before attempting to delete the options.
Recalling Option Codes
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installed Options  More.
2. Press Recall Option Codes to recall all of your option codes.
Input Source Configuration and
Check
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on configuring and checking the video signals on the input
sources of the switcher.
• Naming Input Sources
• Source Configuration Menu Overview
• Assigning Input Source Types
• Assigning Alphas
• Configuring Auto Keys
• Non-Sync Detection
• Assigning Audio Channels to Input Sources
• Creating Bus Maps
• Assigning Panel Bus Maps
• Assigning Tallies to Input Sources
• Assigning GPI Outputs to Input Sources
• Checking Keys
Operating Tip — A Video Input Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping track of
which inputs have been connected to the BNCs. Refer to the section “Video Input Worksheet”
on page Eng 21-2 for a copy of this worksheet.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Input Source Configuration and Check • Eng 7–1
Naming Input Sources
Each video input source to the switcher can be given a specific name that is displayed on the
mnemonic for that source. The mnemonics can be further customized for color and font size on an
individual basis.
You can assign a source to a UMD Input address to provide the mnemonic names. If an input
source is assigned to a UMD Input address, any input source name you enter is replaced with the
UMD Input name for all the mnemonics and menus.
Note — If you do not have the mnemonics option installed, or want to use button insert, refer to
the section “Button Inserts” on page Eng 3-17 for more information on installing button inserts.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Source Config  Source Names.
Source Names Menu
Operating Tip — Refer to the section “Using the Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17 for
more information on using the Source Names Menu to enter a name, or set up the mnemonics
for the crosspoint button.
2. Use the Source knob to select the input source you want to name. The default input
source numbers correspond to physical BNCs on the rear of the frame.
3. Enter the new name you want to use in the New Name field.
4. Press Accept New Name to assign the name to the source.
ports.
Support.

• on connecting video signals to Input BNCs, refer to the section “Video Input Cabling”
on page Eng 3-13.
• on setting up individual mnemonics for an Input BNC, refer to the section “Using the
Naming Menus” on page Eng 5-17.
Eng 7–2 • Input Source Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Source Configuration Menu Overview
Source Configuration Menu 1-3

The Source Configuration Menus provide information to assist you in configuring each of the
input sources. This information is contained in the status box in the center of the menu and
provides the following:
• Source — This field indicates the currently selected input source. The input source is
identified by the name that it was given, or the default name.
• Type — This field indicates the type that the input source is configured as. This field
identifies input sources as being connected to a device that is controlled by the switcher,
such as a Robotic Camera, or that the source is an Alpha.
• Tallies — This field indicates the tally number that is assigned to the input source.
• Auto Key — This field indicates whether the current input source is set up for an Auto
Select Key or not. If the current input source is set up for an Auto Select Key, this field
identifies the Alpha or Video (fill) input source, depending on whether the current input
source is the Alpha or Video (fill).
• Video Mode — This field indicates the video format the current input source is set to. If
the video format of the current input source is different that the format the switcher is
operating in, a video format conversion may be required.
• Physical BNC — This field indicates the physical input BNC on the back of the
switcher that the input source is assigned to. For example, the identification number C01
indicates it is the first BNC on the Video Input Board installed in Slot C.
Assigning Input Source Types
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Source Config  Input Type.
Source Configuration Menu 1-3

2. Use the Input knob to select the input source that you want to configure.
3. Use the Physical BNC knob to select the physical BNC that you want to assign the
input source to. Physical BNCs that appear gray are on Video Inputs Boards that are not
installed.
4. In the Input Type area, select how you want the input source configured. Input types are
assigned to the input sources, and not the physical BNC. You can choose between the
following:
Important — All input sources must be assigned to Video or Alpha unless the device
connected to that input source is controlled by the switcher.
• Off — Select this option to turn the input source off. Selecting Off removes the
input source from other menus.
• DVE — Select this option when a DVE Video (fill) signal is assigned to the selected
input source. You must have the DVE Send and Remote Control Software
Option in order to control the DVE you are assigning to the selected input source.
Contact your Ross Video Representative for more information on purchasing this
option.
• VTR — Select this option when a VTR or Video Server, or Audio Server is
connected to the selected input source. You must have the VTR Remote Control
Software Option in order to control the VTR you are assigning to the selected input
source. You may also need the additional Video Server Control Software Option
or Audio Server Control Software, depending on the device you are connecting.
Contact your Ross Video representative for information on purchasing these
options.
• Alpha — Select this option when an alpha, or key, signal is connected to the
selected input source. Devices such as Character Generators, Graphics (Paint)
Systems, and Still Stores typically provide unique alpha signals.
• Router — Select this option when a routing switcher output is connected to the
selected input source. You must have the Routing Switcher Interface Software
Option in order to control the Router you are assigning to the selected input source.
Contact your Ross Video representative for information on purchasing this option.
• Still Store — Select this option when an external Still-Store is connected to the
selected input source. You must have the External Still Store Software Option in
order to control the external Still-Store you are assigning to the selected input
source. Contact your Ross Video representative for information on purchasing this
option.
• Robotic Camera — Select this option when a robotic camera controller is
connected to the selected input source. You must have the Robotic Camera System
Interface Software Option in order to control the Robotic Camera you are
assigning to the selected input source. Contact your Ross Video representative for
information on purchasing this option.
• Char Gen — Select this option when a Character Generator is connected to the
selected input source. You must have the Character Generator Interface
Software Option installed in order to control the Character Generator you are
assigning to the selected input source. Contact your Ross Video representative for
information on purchasing this option.
• Video — This is the default option. Use this option unless the input is an alpha, or a
device listed above.
5. Use the Video Format knob to select the format of the input video of the selected input
source.
Note — Assigning a Video Format to an Input that is different than the native video format
that the switcher is operating in, can only be used for passing non-native video formats out an
Aux Bus unless you have SmartConversion installed. Refer to the section “Setting Up a
Conversion Loop” on page Eng 16-2 for information on SmartConversion.

ports.
Support.
Assigning Alphas
The Alpha, or Key, video signal is the component of an Auto Key, or Auto Select Key, that cuts
the hole in the background video signal for the Video, or fill, component. This section discusses
how to assign a video input as an alpha.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Source Config  Input Type.
2. Use the Input knob to select the input source you want to assign as a Key Alpha.
3. In the Input Type area, select Alpha.
Operating Tip — When you select Alpha as the Type, the Auto Key item in the Status Box
changes to Alpha, indicating whether the new alpha is Shaped or Unshaped.
4. Use the Video Format knob to select the format of the input video of the selected input
source.
Note — Assigning a Video Format to an Input that is different than the native video format
that the switcher is operating in, can only be used for passing non-native video formats out an
Aux Bus unless the SmartConversion™ option is used. Refer to the section
“SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters” on page Eng 16-1 for more information.
5. Press Alpha.
Alpha Setup — Source Configuration Menu 1-3

6. Define the alpha as shaped or unshaped as follows:
• Use the Alpha knob to select the input source you want to configure.
• Use the Mode knob to select the desired Key Alpha mode. You can choose between
the following:
Note — Select Unshaped if you are unsure about which mode to use. Unshaped allows the
switcher to match the alpha and fill signals that the source device (such as a CG or still-store) is
generating. Refer to the Operation Manual of your device for details on its specific fill and alpha
output signals.
› Unshaped — Select this option to have the switcher perform a multiplicative

key. With an Unshaped Key, the Key Alpha cuts a hole based on the gradient
values of the alpha. Shades of gray are translated into transparency levels,
giving the key a soft edge. Unshaped Key alphas can also be considered true
linear alphas. Key alphas are set to unshaped by default.
› Shaped — Select this option to have the switcher perform an additive key.
With Shaped Keys, the Key Alpha cuts a hole based on the monochrome value
of the alpha. Shades of gray are translated into either white or black, giving the
key a hard edge. Shaped Key alphas are sometimes used with Character
Generators to cut very precise holes for the fill.
ports.
Support.
Configuring Auto Keys
Auto Keys allow you to associate the Alpha (key) and Video (fill) signals of an Auto Select Key
so that the key is automatically configured when you select the crosspoint. This association
simplifies the keying process on the switcher for outputs from Character Generators or External
Still Stores, that generate separate Key and Video signals. When you select a key input source on
the crosspoint buses, the alpha and fill are automatically selected.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Source Config  Auto Key Setup.
Auto Key Setup — Source Configuration Menu 1-3
Operating Tip — You can associate one Global-Store, or MLE-Store, channel as the alpha
for another Global-Store, or MLE-Store, channel. This means that if you load a still that has
alpha information in the file, the switcher uses the associated channel to load the alpha still.
Only Global-Store and Global-Store, or MLE-Store and MLE-Store, channels can be used in the
auto-key.
2. Use the Source knob to select the input source that you want to use as the Fill for the
Auto Key. You can choose between the following:
Operating Tip — If you are setting up an MLE re-entry for MLE Layer Mode, select the MLE
as the Source (for key fill), and the MLE Clean Feed as the Alpha (for key alpha). When you
re-enter this MLE into a keyer on another MLE, the MLE and Clean Feed are used as the key
video/alpha pair for an auto select key.
• MLE X — Select this option to select the program output of an MLE as the fill,
where “X” represents the number of the MLE.
• STIL X — Select this option to select the output of a Global-Store channel as the
fill, where “X” represents the number of the channel.
• MLE ST X — Select this option to select the output of an MLE-Store channel as the
fill, where “X” represents the number of the channel.
• MLEXCLNY — Select this option to assign CleanFeed 1 or 2 from an MLE as the
fill, where “X” represents the number of the MLE, and “Y” the number of the Clean
Feed. This is commonly used when the Clean Feed output is set to Layer mode, or
to provide an MLE-Store on a Clean Feed output.
• BNC — Select this option to select a video source as the fill.
3. Use the Alpha knob to select the input source that you want to use as the Key Alpha for
the Auto Key. You can choose between the following:
• BLACK — Select this option for video sources with no associated alpha. This is the
default setting.
• STIL X — Select this option to assign Global-Store channel to the video source as
the alpha, where “X” represents the number of the channel.
• MLE ST X — Select this option to assign MLE-Store channel to the video source
as the alpha, where “X” represents the number of the channel.
• MLEXCLNY — Select this option to assign CleanFeed 1 or 2 from an MLE to the
input source as the alpha, where “X” represents the number of the MLE, and “Y” the
number of the Clean Feed. This is commonly used when the Clean Feed output is
set to Layer mode.
• BNC — Select this option to assign an input source as the alpha.
Note — The change is not applied until the key is un-selected and re-selected, or the key type
is changed.
ports.
Support.
Non-Sync Detection
The Non-Sync Detect feature allows you to disable the detection and reporting of
non-synchronized video signals. Non-synchronised video signals are either not properly timed, or
use a different reference format than the one the switcher is operating in.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Source Config  More  More N/S
Detect.
N/S Detect — Source Configuration Menu 3-3

2. Use the N/S Detection knob to select how you want to apply the non-sync detection.
You can choose between the following:
Note — The N/S Control selection is applied across all physical BNCs. Selecting All On or All
Off for any physical BNC is applied to all physical BNCs.
• Individual — Select this option to turn the Non-Sync Detection feature On or Off
for individual physical BNCs.
• All On — Select this option to have all non-synchronized video signals detected.
• All Off — Select this option to not have any non-synchronized video signals
detected.
3. Turn the Non-Sync Detection feature On and Off for individual physical BNCs as
follows:
• Use the N/S Control knob to select Individual.
• Use the Physical BNC knob to select the physical BNC that you want to set the
Non-Sync Detection feature for.
• Use the N/S Detect knob to toggle this feature On or Off.
› OFF — Select this option to not have non-synchronized video signals
detected for the selected physical BNC.
› ON — Select this option to have non-synchronized video signals detected for
the selected physical BNC. If a non-synchronized video signal is selected on
the crosspoint bus, the crosspoint button flashes, indicating that the video
signal is mis-timed.
ports.
Support.

• on the non-sync indicators, refer to the section “Non-Sync Status” on page Eng 17-16.
Assigning Audio Channels to Input Sources
Audio channels are assigned to input sources to follow the video signal on and off-air during
transitions. This Audio-Follow-Video (AFV) process is the normal interaction of an Audio Mixer
and the Vision switcher. You can alter this normal AFV operation at any time by applying an
Audio Override.
You can assign up to 2 audio sources to each input source. Each audio source can be a channel, or
a group of channels.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Source Config  Audio.
Audio Setup — Source Configuration Menu 1-3

2. Assign audio channels, or groups, to your Input BNCs as follows:
Note — The total number of audio channels that you have available to assign to the input
sources depends on the Audio Mixer Interface option you have, and the number of audio
channels your Audio Mixer supports.
• Use the Input knob to select the input source that you want to assign an audio
channel to for audio follow video operation. When this input source it taken on-air,
the Audio Mixer will bring up the selected audio channels.
Note — If you have programmed Audio Assign Custom Controls, the Audio Channel knobs
on the Audio Menu will display the custom control that you assigned the channel to.
• Use the Audio 1 knob to select an audio channel, or group, that you want to assign
to the selected input source.
• Use the Audio 2 knob to select another audio channel, or group, that you want to
assign to the selected input source.
ports.
Support.
Your configured Audio Mixer channels will now follow crosspoint transitions for normal AFV
operation.
Creating Bus Maps
The Vision switcher allows you to map any input source to any crosspoint button on the control
panel using a Bus Map. There are 16 editable Bus Maps available, and a single fixed, default,
Bus Map, all of which can be applied to all, or select MLEs as either the primary Bus Map, or as
a shifted set of input sources for a bus.
In a MultiPanel configuration, all control panels share the same Bus Maps, but which Bus Maps
are assigned to each MLE is specific to the panel. For example, on Satellite Panel 1 you can
assign Bus Map 5 to MLE 3. On Satellite Panel 4 you can also assign Bus Map 1 to MLE 3, as
long as both panels have MLE 3 assigned to them.
Each editable Bus Map must be assigned input sources for each crosspoint button on the bus, and
then assigned to the MLE, or bus, that you want to use it on.
Operating Tip — Use the Bus Map Worksheet to help identify the input source that you
want to assign to the crosspoint buttons for each Bus Map. Refer to the section “Bus Map
Worksheet” on page Eng 21-6 for a copy of this worksheet.
Editing Bus Maps

Bus Maps define the input source that is assigned to each crosspoint button on a bus.
Operating Tip — Unless the Bus Map you are editing is assigned to a panel row on the
switcher, you will not see the changes you are making.
1. Press HOME  Setup  More  Bus Maps  Edit.
Edit Bus Maps Menu
Operating Tip — You can edit a bus map for a control panel of a different size than the
current one by pressing Select Panel Type and selecting the size of panel. Press Accept to
return to the Edit Bus Maps Menu.
2. Use the Map knob to select the Bus Map you want to edit. The default Bus Map cannot
be edited.
3. Select the button on the shift level that you want to assign a input source to. Use the
middle knob to scroll the list. The button lights on the program bus of all panel rows.
Operating Tip — Press Insert to insert a input source at the selected button and shift the
remaining input sources to the right. Press Delete to remove an input source at the selected
button and shift the remaining input sources to the left. Press Clear to remove the input source
from the selected button and not shift the remaining input sources. None is selected for the
cleared buttons and the last button when an input source is removed using the Delete.
4. Use the Source knob to select the input source that you want to assign to the selected
crosspoint button. You can choose between the following:
Note — Input sources that are assigned to OFF do not appear in the list. If you want to assign
these sources to a crosspoint button, you must assign them to a type.
• NONE — Select this option to assign no input source to the selected crosspoint
button. When pressed, the button lights, but does not stay lit.
• BKGD 1 — Select this option to assign Color Background 1 to the selected
crosspoint button. When selected on the crosspoint bus, the Mattes Selection Menu
for Background Generator 1 is displayed.
• BKGD 2 — Select this option to assign Color Background 2 to the selected
crosspoint button. When selected on the crosspoint bus, the Mattes Selection Menu
for Background Generator 2 is displayed.
• BLCK — Select this option to assign Black to the selected crosspoint button.
Important — You cannot select a crosspoint button assigned to MLE # on that MLE. For
example, you cannot select a crosspoint button assigned to MLE 2 on MLE 2, as this causes a
feedback loop.
• MLE X — Select this option to assign the Program output of an MLE to the selected
crosspoint button, where “X” represents the number of the MLE. This allows you to
re-enter an MLE into another MLE.
Operating Tip — By default, the MLE re-entry buttons are already mapped to crosspoint
buttons. Refer to the section “Default Input Mapping” on page Eng 3-13 for more information
on which button the MLE re-entries are default mapped to.
• SHFT X — Select this option to assign the “Shift” function to the selected
crosspoint button, where “X” refers to the shift level. You must assign a shift button
for each level to the No Shift row to be able to access that shift level. Refer to the
section “Shifted Crosspoint Buttons” on page Eng 7-16 for more information on
using the SHIFT button.
• STIL X — Select this option to assign a Global-Store channel to the selected
crosspoint button, where “X” represents the number of the channel.
• MLE-ST X — Select this option to assign an MLE-Store channel to the selected
crosspoint button, where “X” represents the number of the channel.
• MLEXCLN Y — Select this option to assign a Clean Feed output from an MLE to
the selected crosspoint button, where “X” represents the number of the MLE and
“X” represents the number of the Clean Feed.
Important — On an x.5 MLE switcher, the MLE Clean Feed is not supported. Only the
dedicated Output BNCs for the Mix/DSK option can provide a dedicated Clean Feed for the
bottom, Program/Preset, MLE.
• MLE X PVW — Select this option to assign the Preview output from an MLE to
the selected crosspoint button, where “X” represents the number of the MLE.
• PVW OVL — Select this option to assign the main Preview output with Overlay to
the selected crosspoint button.
Important — Selecting the Preview with Overlay on the Preset Bus of the bottom MLE
causes a feedback loop. This feedback loop does not apply if you have the Mix/DSK or
MultiDSK option installed.
• Key Cut — Select this option to assign an AuxKey Cut to the selected crosspoint
button. The Key Cut allows you to perform a cut of the AuxKey keyer on the
selected Aux Bus.
• KeyTrans — Select this option to assign an AuxKey Transition to the selected
crosspoint button. The Key Trans allows you to perform a transition of the AuxKey
keyer on the selected Aux Bus. Refer to the section “AuxKey Setup” on page Ops
7-28 for information on setting the AuxKey transition rate.
• BKGDCUT — Select this option to assign an AuxKey Background Cut to the
selected crosspoint button. The BKGDCUT allows you to perform a cut of the
AuxKey background on the selected Aux Bus.
• BKGDTRNS — Select this option to assign an AuxKey Background Transition to
the selected crosspoint button. The BKGDTRANS allows you to perform a
transition of the AuxKey background on the selected Aux Bus. Refer to the section
“AuxKey Setup” on page Ops 7-28 for information on setting the AuxKey
transition rate.
• K+B CUT — Select this option to assign an AuxKey Background and Key Cut to
the selected crosspoint button. The K+B CUT allows you to perform a cut of the
AuxKey background and keyer on the selected Aux Bus.
• K+B TRNS — Select this option to assign an AuxKey Background and Key
Transition to the selected crosspoint button. The K+B TRNS allows you to perform
a transition of the AuxKey background and keyer on the selected Aux Bus. Refer to
the section “AuxKey Setup” on page Ops 7-28 for information on setting the
AuxKey transition rate.
• Bus Hold — Select this option to assign a Bus Hold to the selected crosspoint
button. The Bus Hold allows you to have the currently selected source, on the bus
that you select the Bus Hold for, not change when a memory recall is performed.
This is the same as holding the crosspoint button when performing a memory recall.
On an Aux Bus, the Bus Hold toggles the Aux Bus Lock on and off.
• MVX — Select this option to assign the output of a MultiViewer to the selected
crosspoint button, where “X” represents the number of the MultiViewer.
• In XXX — Select the desired input source to assign it to the selected crosspoint
button, where “XXX” represents the input designation.
5. Select and assign each of your external inputs. Remember that inputs assigned as Off on
the Source Configuration Menu are filtered from this list.
Operating Tip — You can use the Assign Maps button on the Edit Bus Maps Menu to
navigate to the Assign Bus Maps Menu directly. A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you
to confirm your changes.
6. Press HOME to display the Bus Map Change Confirmation Screen.

• Press Confirm to accept the changes.
Bus Map Tips

Use the following tips and tricks when editing or creating a bus map:
• You can map an input source to more than one crosspoint.
• Associate your primary input sources first, followed by your shifted input sources.
• To save a button, you can assign Global-Store channel 2 to the shifted button of
Global-Store channel 1.
• You do not need to assign alpha signals to crosspoint buttons. These signals are used
automatically when you select the Video crosspoint of the Auto Key.
• A different Bus Map can be assigned to the same MLE from each control panel.
Shifted Crosspoint Buttons

The Shift button assignments, and shifted buses, are all stored in the same Bus Map. Up to 8 Shift
functions can be assigned to a single bus map.
The SHIFT button only shifts the crosspoint bus that the button is pressed on. All other buses
remain unchanged.
1. Press and hold a SHIFT button on the crosspoint bus you want to access the shifted
crosspoint on. If the Shift Lock feature is on, you can double-press the SHIFT button
instead of holding it.
Note — If Shift Lock is active on an MLE, the mnemonics for that MLE switch to a two-line
format.
2. Press the Crosspoint button you want to select.

3. Release both buttons.
4. Both the Crosspoint button and SHIFT buttons remain lit. If you press another
Crosspoint button, an unshifted crosspoint and the SHIFT button will not be lit.

• on Shift Locking, refer to the section “Personality List” on page Eng 11-2.
Copying Bus Maps

You can copy a bus map from one bus map location to another. This allows you to organize or
group your bus maps together.
1. Press HOME  Setup  More  Bus Maps  Copy Map.
Copy Bus Maps Menu

2. Use the Copy From knob to select the bus map location you want to copy from.
3. Use the Copy To knob to select the bus map location you want to copy to. Any bus map
information in this location will be lost.
4. Press Copy Map to copy the bus map information from the one location to the other.
Defaulting Bus Maps

You can reset a single, or all 16 user-defined bus maps on the switcher. This returns the bus map
to the default input source assignments.
1. Press HOME  Setup  More  Bus Maps  More.
Bus Maps Menu

2. Default a single bus map as follows:
• Use the Map knob to select the Bus Map you want to default.
• Press Default Map to display the Default Bus Maps Warning Screen.
› Press Confirm to accept the changes.
› Press Cancel to not accept the changes. The switcher returns to the previously
stored settings.
3. Default all bus maps as follows:
• Press Default ALL Maps to display the Default ALL Bus Maps Warning
Screen.
› Press Confirm to accept the changes.
› Press Cancel to not accept the changes. The switcher returns to the previously
stored settings.

• on connecting video signals to Input BNCs, refer to the section “Video Input Cabling”
on page Eng 3-13.
• on default crosspoint mapping, refer to the section “Default Input Mapping” on
page Eng 3-13.
Assigning Panel Bus Maps
Bus Maps can be assigned to the program/preset, key, or utility buses of each MLE, or to each
Aux Bus. Bus Maps can be assigned to individual buses, MLEs, Aux Buses, or to the entire panel.
Bus Map assignment are control panel specific and do not affect the Bus Map assignments on
other control panels.
Bus Map assignments are stored in the switcher personality register.
Important — The OverDrive® Production Control System requires that all buses on your
switcher are assigned to the same bus map. OverDrive does not support different bus maps on
different buses.
Assigning Panel Bus Maps to Individual Buses

Each bus on the Vision control panel is set to the default Bus Map from the factory. To change
what Bus Map is assigned to a bus on your control panel, you must first select the bus you want to
assign the new map to and then select the new map. Buses assigned to the same MLE on another
control panel are unaffected by bus map assignments.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  Bus Maps  Assign Bus Map
 Individual Buses.
Assign Individual Setup — Assign Panel Bus Maps Menu

2. Use the Bus knob to select the MLE and Bus that you want to assign a bus map to.
Buses that are not available, or present, on your control panel appear gray, but are still
selectable. You can choose between the following:
• MLEX Pgm/Pst — Select this option to assign a bus map to the Program and
Preset buses of the selected MLE, where “X” represents the MLE you are selecting.
• MLEX Key Y — Select this option to assign a bus map to the Key bus of the
selected MLE, where “X” represents the MLE and “Y” the Keyer.
• MLEX Utility — Select this option to assign a bus map to the Utility bus of the
selected MLE, where “X” represents the MLE you are selecting.
• MultiDSK Y — Select this option to assign a bus map to the MultiDSK Key bus,
where “Y” represents the keyer.
• Bank X Aux Y — Select this option to assign a bus map to the selected Aux Bus,
where “X” represents the Bank and “Y” the Aux you are selecting.
• RmtAuxPnl LX — Select this option to assign a bus map to the Remote Aux
Panel(s) connected to the External Link Port X, where “X” is the number of the
External Link Port. External Link Port 1 is used for the Touchscreen Display.
• RmtAuxPnl PX — Select this option to assign a bus map to the Remote Aux
Panel(s) connected to the Peripheral Port X, where “X” is the number of the
Peripheral Port.
• Extern Row X — Select this option to assign a bus map to the Auxiliary Control
Panel assigned to the External Row X, where “X” is the number of the External
row that the Auxiliary Control Panel is assigned to.
3. Use the Map knob to select the bus map that you want to assign to the selected bus.
4. Press Perform Assign to assign the selected bus map to the bus.
Assigning Panel Bus Maps to Multiple Buses

Each bus on the Vision control panel is set to the default bus map from the factory. To change
what bus map is assigned to the entire control panel, or just the MLEs or Aux Buses on the
control panel, you must select the component that you want to assign the new bus map to, and
then select the new map. Buses assigned to the same MLEs, or Aux Buses, on another control
panel are unaffected by bus map assignments.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  Bus Maps  Assign Bus Map.
Operating Tip — If all the buses on your control panel are not assigned to the same bus
map, the Map knob on the Assign Panel Bus Map Menu will initially be set to Different.
2. Assign a bus map to all buses on the control panel as follows:

• Press Entire Panel.
Assign to Entire Control Panel — Assign Bus Maps Menu

• Use the Map knob to select the bus map you want to assign to the buses.
3. Assign a bus map to all MLEs assigned to the control panel as follows:
• Press All MLE Buses.
4. Assign a bus map to all aux buses on the control panel as follows:
• Press All Aux Buses.
5. Press Perform Assign to assign the selected bus map to the buses.
Naming Bus Maps
Each Bus Map can be given a specific name that is displayed on the menus when working with
bus maps.
1. Press HOME  Setup  More  Bus Maps.
2. Use the Map knob to select the Bus Map you want to change the name for.
3. Press Rename Map.
Rename Map Menu
more information on using the Rename Map Menu to enter a name, or set up the mnemonics
for the crosspoint button.
Operating Tip — You should consult your Bus Map Worksheet and use that as a guide for
configuring the Input BNCs. Refer to the section “Bus Map Worksheet” on page Eng 21-6 for a
copy of this worksheet.
5. Press Accept New Name to assign the name to the Bus Map.
Assigning Tallies to Input Sources
Each Vision control panel includes at least 36 configurable tally relays, each of which can be
assigned to any input source. The Extended Tallies options, if available, provide an additional 36
tallies (allowing for a total of 144 on a Vision 4).
Input sources are assigned to tallies so that only one input source can be assigned to a tally, but
the same input source can be assigned to multiple tallies.
In a MultiPanel configuration, if you want the Program MLE of a panel to tally, and it is not the
highest numbered MLE, then you must set that MLE to tally on that panel. Tallies are control
panel specific.
Operating Tip — Use the Tally Number column in the Video Input Worksheet to help
identify the tally connections that need to be made. Refer to the section “Video Input
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Source Config  Tally.
Tally — Source Configuration Menu 1-3

2. Use the Tally knob to select the tally that you want to associate an input source to. This
tells the switcher logic to close the selected relay circuit when the associated input
source forms part of the switcher output (as set by the selection made with the Mode
knob).
3. Use the Source knob to select the input source to associate with the tally relay. If you
do not want to associate an input source with the tally, select NONE. By default, all
input sources are assigned to tallies in ascending order. For example, Tally 1 is
associated with BNC C01, Tally 2 is associated with BNC C02.
Note — You can only assign a tally relay to one input, but can assign multiple tallies to the
same input source.
Operating Tip — For wiring convenience, it is recommended that you make your tally
associations on a 1:1 basis (i.e. Input C11 assigned to Tally 11).
• Use the Mode knob to select the type of tally to assign to the input source. You can
choose between the following:
› On Air — Select this option to have the selected input source tally when it is
on-air.
› Preview — Select this option to have the selected input source tally when it is
on preview (part of the next transition). Whether the input source is on
preview depends on how the Preview Bus Module is set.
› AuxNme(#:#) — Select the Aux Bus 1:1 through 4:8 that you want to tally
when the selected input source is selected on that Aux Bus.
ports.
Support.

• on the tally ports, refer to the section “Tally Ports” on page Eng 2-18.
• on the Preview Bus Module, refer to the section “Video Preview” on page Ops 4-15.
Assigning GPI Outputs to Input Sources
Each GPI Output on the switcher can be assigned to an input source with a preroll time. When
Roll Clip is active on the Transition Module, and an input source with an assigned GPI Output is
taken on-air, the GPI output is triggered immediately, but the transition is delayed for the Preroll
time.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Source Config  More  More
 GPIOs.
GPI Outputs — Source Configuration Menu 3-3

2. Use the Input knob to select the input source that you want to assign a GPI Output to.
Note — You can only assign one GPI output to an input source at a time, but you can assign
multiple input sources to the same GPI output.
3. Use the GPI Outputs knob to select the GPI output that you want to assign to the
selected input source.
4. Use the Preroll knob to select the amount of time between the GPI Output trigger, and
the transition, when the Roll Clip button is active in the Transition Module.
ports.
Support.

• on the GPI I/O ports, refer to the section “GPI I/O Port” on page Eng 2-19.
Checking Keys
After you have set up your Auto Keys you should test them to ensure that they display properly.
This allows you to verify that each alpha-fill combination is working correctly, and generating a
proper Linear Key.
1. Select an input source on the Background (BKGD) Bus of the highest number MLE.
This is the background that you place the Auto Select key over.
2. Press the Key 1 select (SEL) button to assign the Keyers Module and Key Bus to
Key 1 (Figure 7.1).
Operating Tip — If you are unfamiliar with how to use the Keyers, refer to the section
“Keyers Module” on page Ops 7-2.
KEYERS

MASK
1 2 3 4
SEL SEL SEL SEL
CUT CUT CUT CUT
AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO

Figure 7.1 Keyers Module with Keyer 1 Selected (4-Keyer Shown)
3. Press the Auto Select button on the Keyers Module to display the key as an Auto
Select Key.
4. Select an Auto Key input source on the Key Bus of the MLE. This is the Key that you
placed over the Background.
Operating Tip — If you select a crosspoint button that is set up to control an external device,
the device control menu for that device is displayed. Press the crosspoint button again to
display the Auto Key Setup Menu.
5. Select the Key 1 button in the MLE Transition Module of the bottom MLE. This
includes the keyer in the next transition. The key appears on the Preview monitor and
the Auto Key Setup Menu is displayed.
Auto Key Setup Menu
6. Visually check the appearance of the Auto Key on the preview monitor. Check for the
following:
• The assigned Alpha input signal should be properly cutting the hole in the
background.
• The selected Video (fill) input signal should be properly filling the hole.
• The edges of the key should be clean.
7. If the Auto Key does not display correctly, ensure that the proper MLE and Key is being
shown, and that the proper Video (fill) and Alpha are selected. Check for the following:
• The correct MLE and Keyer are shown. If the incorrect MLE or Key is shown,
ensure that you have selected Key 1 on the bottom PGM/PST MLE.
• The correct Key Video (fill) source name and Input BNC are shown. If the Key
Video is incorrect, ensure that the desired source has been selected, or that it has
been properly assigned to the crosspoint button.
• The correct Key Alpha source name and Input BNC are shown. If the Key Alpha
is incorrect, ensure that the Auto Key has been properly set up.
• The correct Key Attributes are shown. If the Key Attributes are incorrect, ensure
that the Auto Key has been properly set up for Shaped or Unshaped, Clip, Gain, and
Transparency.
8. If the Auto Key has the correct input sources, but still does not display correctly, ensure
that the key is properly set up for Shaped or Unshaped. Check for the following:
• If the Auto Key has been set up for Unshaped, but the alpha signal is actually
Shaped, you will see black edges around the key.
• If the Auto Key has been set up for Shaped, but the alpha signal is actually
Unshaped, you will see jagged edges and no gradation.
9. If the Auto Key is set up properly, but the edges or shadows of the key, do not display
properly, adjust the Clip and Gain. Adjust the Clip and Gain as follows:
• Select the SEL button for Key 1. This ensures that the Key Attribute buttons are
assigned to Key 1.
• Toggle the KEY MEM button in the Keyer Module to Off (not lit) to allow you to
override the Clip and Gain settings of the Auto Key.
Clip and Gain Enabled — Auto Key Setup Menu

• Use the Clip and Gain knobs on the Auto Key Setup Menu to adjust the
appearance of the Auto Key.
• Press and hold the AUTO SELECT button and press the KEY MEM button to save
the new Clip and Gain setting for the Auto Key. The Locked labels re-appear and
the Clip and Gain controls are locked at the new settings. The Auto Key uses these
settings each time the selected Auto Key is used.
• on connecting video inputs, refer to the section “Video Input Cabling” on page Eng
3-13.
• on checking video inputs, refer to the section “Input Verification” on page Eng 4-16.
• on keying, refer to the section “Keying” on page Ops 7-1.
• on checking the Non-Sync status of an input selected on a bus, refer to the section
“Non-Sync Status” on page Eng 17-16.
Video Output Configuration and
Check
In This Chapter
This chapter provides instructions for configuring and checking the video signals on the Output
BNCs of the Vision switcher. As you follow each procedure, you are, in effect, building a
database that is used by the switcher to provide the desired names, sources, key and fill
associations, and overall switcher functionality.
• Configuring Video Outputs
• Checking Video Outputs
• Clean Feed
• Fade to Black
• MLE Tally
• Ancillary Data
• Switch on Field
• MultiViewer
• Mix/DSK
• MultiDSK
• Mix/DSK and MultiDSK
• AuxKeys
Operating Tip — A Video Output Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping track of
which outputs have been assigned to the BNCs. Refer to the section “Video Output
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Video Output Configuration and Check • Eng 8–1
Configuring Video Outputs
The frame has a number of output BNCs that can be set up as either MLE Program, MLE
Preview, MLE Clean Feed, Preview with Overlay, an Aux output or an AuxKey. The
configuration of your facility will depend largely on how many Video Output Boards are
installed, and which options have been purchased.
The number of Output BNC your switcher has depends on the number of Video Output Boards
you have installed in the frame.
This section describes how to assign Output BNCs to the output signals of the switcher, such as
MLE Program.
Please note the following when configuring video outputs:
• If you have the Mix/DSK, MultiDSK™ or AuxKeys™ options installed, certain Output
BNCs are locked to specific outputs. In some cases, only these Output BNCs can be used
for the output of this option.
• If you are setting up the Program output for a control panel that does not have the highest
number MLE assigned to it, you must use the MLE X PGM.
• The number of Clean Feed outputs for an MLE (MLE X ClnFd), or the main Clean Feed
outputs (Clean Feed), depends on the Key 4 Mode that the MLE is set to. For the main
Clean Feed output, it depends on the Key 4 Mode settings for the PGM/PST MLE.
• If you are using Aux Buses to pass non-native video format signals through the switcher,
Output BNC C03 and C04 on the QMD/MD frames cannot be used. Output BNC C03
and C04 cannot pass video that is of a format other than what the switcher is operating in.
To Configure your Output BNCs

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Output  Output BNCs.
Output BNC — Output Menu 1-2

2. Use the Output knob to select a BNC to assign a type to.
3. Use the Source Group knob to jump to the type of sources on the Source knob list.
4. Use the Source knob to select the video source (Table 8.1) that you want to assign to
the Output BNC.
5. Press HOME to display the Installation Change Screen.
6. Accept or reject these changes as follows:
ports.
Eng 8–2 • Video Output Configuration and Check Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Support.
This completes the procedure for setting your Output BNC types.
Table 8.1 Video Sources
Source Group Source Source Description
Select this option to have the main Program output, the output of the
highest number MLE, routed to the selected Output BNC. The Program
Program
MLE with the MultiDSK, Half MLE, and Preview Overlay options is
the highest number MLE assigned to a control panel in the system.
Select this option to have the main Preview output, the preview of the
System Outputs Preview
highest number MLE, routed to the selected Output BNC.
Select this option to have the main Preview output with Preview
PRV w/ OVL
Overlay output routed to the selected Output BNC.
Select this option to have the main Preview output without Preview
PRV w/o OVL
Overlay output routed to the selected Output BNC.
Select this option to have the Program output of the selected MLE
MLE X PGM routed to the selected Output BNC, where “X” represents the MLE you
are selecting.
Select this option to have the Preview output of the selected MLE
MLE X PRV
routed to the selected Output BNC.
MLE Outputs
Select this option to have the Look Ahead Preview output of the
MLE X LkAhd
selected MLE routed to the selected Output BNC.
Select this option to have the Clean Feed 1 or Clean Feed 2 output of
MLE X ClnFd1(2) the selected MLE routed to the selected Output BNC where “X”
represents the MLE you are selecting.
Select this option to have the main Clean Feed 1 or Clean Feed 2
Clean Feeds Clean Feed 1(2)
output routed to the selected Output BNC.
Select this option to have the output of a MultiViewer routed to the
MultiViewers MVXY selected Output BNC, where “X” is the number of the MultiViewer, and
“Y” is the head on that MultiViewer.
Select this option to assign the output of the selected Global-Store to the
Global Stores GlobalStore X selected Output BNC, where “X” represents the Global-Store channel
you are selecting.
Select this option to have the Program output of the active Aux Bus
routed to the selected Output BNC. When you assign an Aux Bus to a
Aux Monitor Aux Monitor Crosspoint Group, or panel row, the output of that Aux Bus is routed to
the Aux Monitor output. This does not apply to the Aux Bus selected by
an Auxiliary Control Panel.
Select this option to have the source selected on the Aux Bus routed to
Aux Bus
Aux Bus Follows the Output BNC. You can select between Bank1, Aux1 through Bank6,
Outputs 1:1 - 6:8
Aux8.
Select this option to have an input source routed directly to an Output
Inputs In XXX
BNC, where “X” is the number of the Input BNC.
Table 8.1 Video Sources
Source Group Source Source Description
Select this option to have the source selected on the Program Bus of
MLE X PGM
the MLE routed to the Output BNC, where “X” represents the MLE.
Select this option to have the source selected on the Preview Bus of the
MLE X PST
MLE routed to the Output BNC, where “X” represents the MLE.
Select this option to have the video of the source selected on the Key
MLE X KEYY Bus of the MLE routed to the Output BNC, where “X” represents the
MLE Bus Follows
MLE and “Y” the Key.
Select this option to have the alpha of the source selected on the Key
MLE X
Bus of the MLE routed to the Output BNC, where “X” represents the
KEYYAlpha
MLE and “Y” the Key.
Select this option to have the source selected on the Utility Bus of the
MLE X Util1(2)
MLE routed to the Output BNC, where “X” represents the MLE.
Select this option to have the video of the source selected on the
MultiDSKYV MultiDSK Key routed to the Output BNC, where “Y” represents the
Keyer.
MultiDSK Follows
Select this option to have the alpha of the source selected on the
MultiDSKYA MultiDSK Key routed to the Output BNC, where “Y” represents the
Keyer.
These items are fixed to the outputs of the AuxKey assigned to the
Aux Mix Output (fixed)
selected Output BNCs.
These items are fixed to the outputs of the Mix/DSK and/or
MixMulti Outputs (fixed)
MultiDSKs.

• on default output mapping, or video output cabling, refer to the section “Video Output
Cabling” on page Eng 3-15.
• on activating and configuring the MultiDSK option, refer to the section “MultiDSK” on
page Eng 8-22.
• on setting up an AuxKey, refer to the section “AuxKeys” on page Eng 8-26.
• on activating and configuring the Mix/DSK option, refer to the section “Mix/DSK” on
page Eng 8-19.
• on Key 4 Mode, refer to the section “Key 4 Mode” on page Eng 12-8.
• on setting up a MultiViewer, refer to the section “MultiViewer” on page Eng 8-14.
Checking Video Outputs
Nearly every Output BNC of the Vision switcher can be assigned to any output source, allowing
you to assign multiple outputs to a single output signal. After the cable connections to the Output
BNCs are completed, and the output signals are assigned to the BNCs, you can check that the
proper output signal is being fed out of each Output BNC.
To confirm which output signal is being sent to which Output BNC, use the Aux Bus Outputs
Menu 2-2 in conjunction with the Output BNC Verification table (Table 8.2).
Operating Tip — The Aux Bus Outputs Menu 1-2 lists the selected outputs for all the Aux
Buses on the switcher.
To Confirm the Outputs on the Output BNCs

1. Press HOME  More  Effects  More  More  More  Aux Bus  More.
Aux Bus Outputs Menu 2-2

2. Press the button corresponding to the Output BNC range that you want to check. The
video signal for each of the Output BNC in the selected range is shown on the menu.
This completes the procedure for confirming the outputs on the Output BNCs.
Table 8.2 Output BNC Verification

To Verify This Output Do This...
Select different crosspoint buttons on the PGM Bus. Depending on the number of MLEs
Program
you have, you may have to assign the Program MLE to a Panel Row on your panel.
Select different crosspoint buttons on the PV Bus. Depending on the number of MLEs
Preview without Overlay
you have, you may have to assign the Preview MLE to a Panel Row on your panel.
Select Source ID and Safe Title in the Preview Overlay Module to place these
Preview with Overlay elements on the Preview Monitor. Perform the same test as outlined in the Preview
without Overlay section.
On the half MLE switchers (2.5 MLE for example), or switchers with the MultiDSK™
option installed, the Clean Feed is fixed to specific BNCs. A monitor must be connected
to these BNC to test the output. Refer to the section “Configuring Video Outputs” on
Clean Feed page Eng 8-2 for more information.
Refer to the section “Clean Feed” on page Eng 8-7 for more information on the Clean
Feed.
Table 8.2 Output BNC Verification
To Verify This Output Do This...
Select different crosspoint buttons on the PGM Bus of MLE 1. Repeat for each MLE
MLE PGM
installed on your switcher.
Select different crosspoint buttons on the PV Bus of MLE 1. Repeat for each MLE
MLE PV
installed on your switcher.
Put all Keys on-air with a different source and select each of the Clean Feed positions in
MLE Clean Feed turn. As you go from Before Keys to Between Keys X&Y, you will see the keys appear
on-air. Repeat for each MLE installed on your switcher.
Select different crosspoint buttons on the PGM Bus of MLE 1. Re-enter MLE 1 onto the
MLE LkAhd PGM/PST MLE. Select different crosspoints buttons on the PV Bus of MLE 1. Repeat
for each MLE installed on your switcher.
Connect an monitor to the Output BNC that the MultiViewer is assigned to and load a
MVa layout into the MultiViewer. Refer to the section “MultiViewer” on page Eng 8-14 for
more information on setting up a MultiViewer.
BankX, AuxY (X:Y)b Use the MLE SEL Button Menu to assign the Key Bus of an MLE to Bank X, Aux Y.
a. The MultiViewer option must be installed in order to be able to test this output.
b. Where X represents the number of the Bank, and Y the number of the Aux Bus you want to check.
Clean Feed
The FlexiClean™ feature allows you to create a secondary program output that is taken from a
different location in the video layering for the selected MLE. The Clean Feed for each MLE can
be configured to take the video signal before any of the keys (Figure 8.1). This does not include
the specific Clean Feed outputs provided by the MultiDSK™ or Mix/DSK options.
Important — If you have a 4-Keyer MLE, the Clean Feeds that are available to that MLE
depend on the Key 4 Mode that you have set up. Always check your Key 4 Mode before using
the Clean Feed output in your production. If the active Key 4 Mode does not support one or both
Clean Feeds, alternate video will be fed out of the Clean Feed output BNCs.
Program
BKGD Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4
Out
Before Before Before Before

Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4
Figure 8.1 Clean Feed can be taken from before or between the keys (4-Keyer Shown)
Note — If you set up a Clean Feed for the Program/Preset MLE with MultiDSK or Mix/DSK
active, only the before Key 1 output is shown, even if before Key 2 is selected.
To set up a Clean Feed Output

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Output  Clean Feed.
Clean Feed Setup — Output Menu 1-2

2. Use the MLE knob to select the MLE from which the Clean Feed originates.
3. Use the CleanFeed knob to select the Clean Feed output you want to set up.
4. Use the Mode knob to select the video source for the Clean Feed. You can choose
• BeforeKey 1-4 — Select this option to have the Clean Feed output pulled after the
program/preset bus of the MLE, but before the keys are added (Figure 8.1).
• AfterKey 4 — Select this option to have the Clean Feed output pulled after all the
keys. This will be the same and the program output for the MLE.
• Layer — Select this option to have the combined key alphas of the MLE used as
the video source for the Clean Feed. This allows you to use the key alphas from one
MLE on another MLE, as an alpha for an auto select key for example.
Operating Tip — If you set up an Auto Select key with an MLE program and the Clean Feed
in Layer mode for that MLE, you can re-enter an MLE as an Auto Select key on another MLE.
You must have all the keyers selected as part of the next transition on the MLE that the keys are
set up on.
• MLEStore 1-4 — Select this option to have an MLE-Store used as the video
source for the Clean Feed. This allows you to select the output of an MLE-Store
from one MLE on another MLE.
• ChromaKey1Map — Select this option to have the chroma key color map or
alpha for the first chroma key on the MLE used as the video source for the Clean
Feed. The first chroma key on the MLE is the first (lowest number) key on the MLE
that is configured as a chroma key.
• ChromaKey2Map — Select this option to have the chroma key color map or
alpha for the second chroma key on the MLE used as the video source for the Clean
Feed. The second chroma key on the MLE is the second key on the MLE that is
configured as a chroma key.
ports.
Support.

• on the Program Bus Clean Feeds for the half MLE switcher, the Mix/DSK options, refer
to the section “Mix/DSK” on page Eng 8-19.
• on the Program Bus Clean Feeds for the MultiDSK option, refer to the section
“MultiDSK” on page Eng 8-22.
• on setting up an Output BNC for Clean Feed, refer to the section “Configuring Video
• on default output mapping, or video output cabling, refer to the section “Video Output
Cabling” on page Eng 3-15.
• on video layering, refer to the section “Video Layering” on page Ops 4-3.
• on Key 4 modes, refer to the section “Key 4 Mode” on page Eng 12-8.
• on setting up an Auto Key, refer to the section “Configuring Auto Keys” on page Eng
7-8.
Fade to Black
Fade to Black allows you to have one or all MLEs fade to black with a single button press.
Pressing the button again returns the outputs of the MLEs from black to their previous state.
In an MultiPanel configuration, the fade to black only affects the MLEs that are assigned to the
control panel that the fade to black is performed on, and that fade to black is turned on for. Each
control panel has a unique fade to black rate, but which MLEs that fade to black is turned on for is
common across all control panels.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Output  Fade To Black.
Fade To Black Menu

2. Toggle the desired MLEs On or Off, as required. Setting an MLE to Off will not fade
the MLE to black when the transition is performed. MLEs that are not installed still
show up on the menu. If a MultiViewer is active, the MLE it replaces is grayed out.
ports.
Support.

• on using Fade to Black, refer to the section “Fade to Black” on page Ops 4-36.
MLE Tally
The MLE Tally feature allows you to force a selected MLE to always function as if it is on air,
regardless of whether or not it is re-entered on the Program/Preset Bus. For example, you may
want to send the output of MLE 1 to an external device, such as a VTR, while the Program/Preset
bus is on-air. In this configuration, you may want both MLE 1 and the Program/Preset Bus to be
tallied. To achieve this, the MLE Tally feature must be used.
In a MultiPanel configuration, the highest number MLE assigned to each panel is tallied as the
Program MLE (Always).
To Set Up an MLE Tally

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Output  More  MLE Tally.
MLE Tally Setup — Output Menu 2-2

2. Use the MLE knob to select the MLE for which you want to assign a tally function.
3. Use the Tally knob to select the desired tally function. You can choose between the
following:
• Always — Select this option to tally the selected MLE regardless of what is
selected on the highest number MLE. The crosspoint selection will always be lit
red, and all sources selected on the MLE will tally accordingly.
• On Air — Select this option when you want an MLE to be tallied only when it is
selected on the highest number MLE.
ports.
Support.
Ancillary Data
The Ancillary Data setup allows you to select which lines in the vertical and horizontal blanking
area (Figure 8.2) can be stripped or passed, as well which line the video image starts on. This
allows you to protect and pass information such as embedded audio, or closed captioning, with
the video signal.
Field and Frame line numbers depend on the video format the switcher is operating in. If the
switcher is operating in a Progressive Scan video format, no even or odd information is displayed.
Horizontal Blanking
Line 0 (even) / Line 263 (odd)
Vertical Blanking
Video Image Start
Video Image
Figure 8.2 Vertical and Horizontal Blanking Area — 480i
Ancillary data parameters are set independently for each video format. Changing video formats
recalls the last saved parameters for the selected video format.
To Set the Ancillary Data Parameters

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Output  More  Ancillary Data.
Ancillary Data Setup — Output Menu 2-2

2. Use the Field (Line) knob to select a particular line across the field, or the entire
horizontal blanking region, that you want to adjust the Pass or Strip setting for.
3. Use the Pass/Strip knob to select either Pass or Strip.
• Pass — Select this option to have any information in the selected lines, or the
entire horizontal blanking region, remain in with the video signal. Use this setting if
there is embedded audio.
• Strip — Select this option to have any information in the selected lines, or the
entire horizontal blanking region, stripped from the video signal.
4. Select the field, or line, that the video image starts on as follows:
• Use the Image Starts knob to select the lines that are the first line of Active Video.
If closed captioning is present in the video signal, set the Image Start to the line after
the closed captioning line.
Operating Tip — Press Default Anc Data on the Output Menu 2-2 to restore the ancillary
data setting to their default values for the current video format.

ports.
Support.
Switch on Field
The Switch On feature allows you to set on which field the switcher will perform a transition in
an Interlaced video format. This option is not available if the switcher is operating in a
Progressive Scan video format.
To Set which Field a Transition is Performed On

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Output  More.
2. Toggle Switch on to F1 or F2 to select which field a transition is performed on.
• F1 — Select Field 1 (Odd Field) to have transitions performed after odd field of
the source video is drawn. This is the default setting.
• F2 — Select Field 2 (Even Field) to have transitions performed after the even field
of the source video is drawn.
ports.
Support.
MultiViewer
The MultiViewer™ allows you to view ten video sources from a single output BNC, or have the
MultiViewer output routed to an Aux Bus. Any video source on the switcher, including Program,
Preview, Media-Store channels, and MLE re-entries, can be assigned to any box on the
MultiViewer. All the boxes on the MultiViewer include mnemonic source names and red and
green tallies.
Note — MultiViewer cannot output a 1080p video format. If the switcher is operating in this
video format, the MultiViewer feature will output 1080i.
Source 1 Source 2
Source 3 Source 4 Source 5 Source 6
Source 7 Source 8 Source 9 Source 10
Figure 8.3 MultiViewer Layout Example
MultiViewer Assignment
The MultiViewer options allow you to assign up to two MultiViewers to each Video Processor
Board. The resources provided by a Video Processor Board can be assigned to either an MLE or a
MultiViewer. The other MLE/MultiViewer on the Video Processor Board is unaffected.
Note — When an MLE is assigned as a MultiViewer, or back to an MLE, the Video Processor
Board providing the MLE must reboot for the change to take effect.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Video Processor.
Video Processor Config Menu

2. Press the MLE X/MLE Y button for the Video Processor Board that you want to assign a
MultiViewer to.
3. Press the MultiViewer X button for the MLE that you want to assign as a MultiViewer.
ports. All Video Processor Board that changes were made on will reboot.
Support. All Video Processor Board that changes were made on will reboot.
MultiViewer Layouts
Each MultiViewer is assigned a layout that specifies how the boxes are arranged and what source
is assigned to each box in the layout. The size and number of boxes in the layout depends on the
layout that is selected.
Assigning a Layout to a MultiViewer

1. Press HOME  Setup  More  MultiViewer.
MultiViewer Layout Assign Menu

2. Select the Layout XX that you want to assign to a MultiViewer.
3. Select the MultiViewer X that you want to assign a layout to, where X is the number of
the MultiViewer.
Editing a MultiViewer Layout

2. Select the Layout XX that you want to edit.
3. Press Layout Editor  Sources.
Sources — MultiViewer Layout Editor Menu

4. Select the MultiViewer Source that you want to assign a video source to. These sources
are then available to be assigned to boxes on the MultiViewer layout.
5. Use the Source Group knob to jump to the type of sources on the Source knob list.
6. Use the Source knob to select the video source that you want to assign to sources list.
Note — Some internal video sources cannot be routed to the MultiViewer directly (using the
MLE Bus Follows for example). When this occurs the video is replaced with a “Source Not
Supported By MultiViewer” message.
7. Press Grid.
Grid — MultiViewer Layout Editor Menu

8. Use the MultiViewer knob to select the head on the MultiViewer that you want to use.
9. Use the Grid knob to select the arrangement of the boxes that you want to use.
10. Select the box that you want to assign a video source to.
11. Use the Source List knob to select the video source that you want to assign to the box.
12. Configure what is shown on the MultiViewer for the selected box as follows:
• Label — Toggle this button on to show a source label on the box.
• Border — Toggle this button on to show the white border around the box.
• 4:3/16:9 Marker — Toggle this button on to show a 4:3 safe area markers on the
box.
• Follow Name — Toggle this button on to show the mnemonic source names for
the video shown in the box. Toggle it off to show the name of the bus, BNC, or
internally generated source that the video comes from.
• Red Tally — Toggle this button on to show red tallies.
• Green Tally — Toggle this button on to show green tallies.
13. Adjust the transparency of the background behind the source label as follows:
• Press Transparency.
• Use the Transparency knob to adjust the transparency of the source label
background.
Operating Tip — If you don’t want to save your current changes, you can navigate away
from the menu or press Cancel Changes.
14. Press Save Changes to save the changes to the edited layout.
Naming a Layout

2. Select the Layout XX that you want to name.
3. Press Layout Editor  Layout Name.
Change Layout Name Menu
more information on using the Change Layout Name Menu to enter a name.
4. Enter the new name for the layout in the New Name field.
5. Press Accept New Name on the Change Layout Name Menu to store the new name.

• on assigning a MultiViewer to an output BNC, refer to the section “Configuring Video
Mix/DSK
The Mix/DSK option provides a mixer and two (Mix2K) or four (Mix4K) keyers for the bottom
(Program/Preset) MLE in a half MLE switcher. This option must be installed in order to use the
Program/Preset MLE on a half MLE switcher, such as a 2.5 QMD-X.
The Mix/DSK feature can only be activated if a Multi-Definition Video Output Board is installed
in the following slot of your frame:
• Octane/QMD-X — Slot K
• MD-X — Slot K
• QMD — Slot B
• MD — Slot B
Note — If you also have the MultiDSK option, the assignment of the BNCs on the Video Output
Board is different. Refer to the section “Mix/DSK and MultiDSK” on page Eng 8-24 for more
information.
The Mix/DSK option assigns and locks certain BNCs on the Video Output Board to the main
switcher output video signals (Table 8.3).
Table 8.3 Mix/DSK Output BNC Assignment

Octane/QMD-X MD-X QMD MD
BNC Slot K Slot K Slot B Slot B
Mix2K Mix4K Mix2K Mix4K Mix2K Mix4K Mix2K Mix4K
Output #01 Program Program Program Program Program Program Program Program
Output #03 Preview Preview Preview Preview Preview Preview Preview Preview
Mix Mix Mix Mix Mix Mix Mix Mix
Output #05
Clean 1 Clean 1 Clean 1 Clean 1 Clean 1 Clean 1 Clean 1 Clean 1
Mix Mix Mix Mix Mix Mix Mix Mix
Output #06
n/a Mix n/a Mix n/a Mix n/a Mix
Output #07
Clean 3 Clean 3 Clean 3 Clean 3
n/a Mix n/a Mix n/a Mix n/a Mix
Output #08
Output #09 n/a Program n/a Program n/a Program n/a Program
Operating Tip — Output #07 in a Mix2K system is automatically set to Preview with Overlay
when you set up a Mix/DSK. This can be changed later.
Mix/DSK Setup
Setting up the Mix/DSK option activates the Program/Preset MLE on your half MLE switcher,
and assign the Output BNC as indicated. The Mix/DSK software option must be installed in order
to activate it.
Note — Turning this option Off for your half MLE switcher will prevent you from using your
Program/Preset MLE. Turning this feature On for a full MLE switcher reverts your full
Program/Preset MLE to a half MLE.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Output  Mix/DSK MultiDSK.
Mix/DKS Setup — Output Menu 1-2

2. Use the Mix/Multi knob to turn the Mix/DSK feature on:
• Mix2K — Select this option to activate the half MLE with 2 keyers.
• Mix4K — Select this option to activate the half MLE with 4 keyers.
ports.
Support.
Mix/DSK Operation
The Mix/DSK option provides a limited Mixer and Keyers to the Program/Preset MLE of your
switcher. For the operation of the Program/Preset MLE on a half MLE switcher, the following
restrictions apply:
• You can perform Cuts and Dissolves, but not Wipes, DVE or SEQ effects.
• You can perform Auto Select Keys and Self Keys, but not Chroma Keys or Preset
Pattern Keys.
• You can perform Key Invert effects, but not Mask, Matte Fill or Wash effects.
• The Clean Feeds are locked to before each key (Figure 8.4).
BKGD/ Mix/DSK Mix/DSK Mix/DSK Mix/DSK
PGM
PST KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4
MIX CLEAN 4
MIX CLEAN 3
MIX CLEAN 2
MIX CLEAN 1
Figure 8.4 Clean Feed for Mix/DSK (Mix4K Shown)

• on performing a factory recall, refer to the section “Factory Default Settings” on
page Eng 12-27.
• on using the Mix/DSK MLE, refer to the section “Panel Row” on page Ops 4-5.
• on using Clean Feed outputs, refer to the section “Clean Feed” on page Eng 8-7.
MultiDSK
The MultiDSK™ option provides two (Multi2K) or four (Multi4K) additional Downstream
Keyers for your Program/Preset MLE (highest number MLE). The MD/X switchers can only
support the Multi2K option.
The MultiDSK feature can only be activated if a Multi-Definition Video Output Board is installed
in the following slot in your frame:
• Octane/QMD-X — Slot K
• MD-X — Slot K
• QMD — Slot B
• MD — Slot B
Note — If you also have the Mix/DSK option, the assignment of the BNCs on the Video Output
Board is different. Refer to the section “Mix/DSK and MultiDSK” on page Eng 8-24 for more
information.
The MultiDSK option assigns and locks certain BNCs on the Video Output Board to the main
switcher output video signals (Table 8.4).
Table 8.4 MultiDSK Output BNC Assignment

BNC Slot K Slot K Slot B Slot B
Multi2K Multi4K Multi2K Multi4K Multi2K Multi4K Multi2K Multi4K
Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi
Output #05
Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi
Output #06
n/a Multi n/a Multi n/a Multi n/a Multi
Output #07
n/a Multi n/a Multi n/a Multi n/a Multi
Output #08
The Clean Feeds for the MultiDSK option are locked to before each key (Figure 8.5).
PGM/ MultiDSK MultiDSK MultiDSK MultiDSK

KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 PGM
MULTI CLEAN 8
MULTI CLEAN 7
MULTI CLEAN 6
MULTI CLEAN 5
CLEAN 2
CLEAN 1
Figure 8.5 Clean Feed for MultiDSK (Multi4K Shown)
MultiDSK Setup
Setting up the MultiDSK option adds additional Downstream Keyers to the Program/Preset MLE,
and assigns the Output BNC as indicated. The MultiDSK software option must be installed in
order to activate it.
MultiDSK Setup — Output Menu 1-2

2. Use the Mix/Multi knob on the Output Menu 1-2 to turn the MultiDSK feature on:
• Multi2K — Select this option to activate the MultiDSK with 2 keyers.
• Multi4K — Select this option to activate the MultiDSK with 4 keyers.
ports.
Support.

• on using the MultiDSK, refer to the section “MultiDSK Operation” on page Ops 7-26.
Mix/DSK and MultiDSK
If you have the MultiDSK option installed on your half MLE switcher, certain Output BNCs are
assigned and locked to the main switcher output video signals (Table 8.5).
Table 8.5 Mix/DSK and MultiDSK Output BNC Assignment

BNC
Slot K Slot K Slot B Slot B
Output #01 Program Program Program Program
Output #03 Preview Preview Preview Preview
Output #04 Preview Preview Preview Preview
Output #05 Mix Clean 1 Mix Clean 1 Mix Clean 1 Mix Clean 1
Output #06 Mix Clean 2 Mix Clean 2 Mix Clean 2 Mix Clean 2
Output #07 Multi Clean 3 Multi Clean 3 Multi Clean 3 Multi Clean 3
Output #08 Multi Clean 4 Multi Clean 4 Multi Clean 4 Multi Clean 4
The Clean Feeds for the Mix/DSK and MultiDSK options are locked to before each key (Figure
8.5).
BKGD/ Mix/DSK Mix/DSK MultiDSK MultiDSK

PGM
MULTI CLEAN 4
MULTI CLEAN 3
MIX CLEAN 2
MIX CLEAN 1
Figure 8.6 Clean Feed for Mix/DSK and MultiDSK
Mix/DSK and MultiDSK Setup

Setting up the Mix/DSK and MultiDSK options add a limited Mixer and Keyers to the
Program/Preset MLE of your switcher with additional Downstream Keyers, and assigns the
Output BNC as indicated.
Mix/DSK and MultiDSK Setup — Output Menu 1-2

2. Use the Mix/Multi knob to select Mix2K+Multi2K.
ports.
Support.

• on the restrictions of the Mix/DSK option, refer to the section “Mix/DSK Operation” on
page Eng 8-20.
• on using the MultiDSK, refer to the section “MultiDSK Keys” on page Ops 7-26.
AuxKeys
The AuxKeys™ option can be used as either an A/B Mixer (Mix between two Aux Buses) or a
Mixer/Keyer (Mix and Auto Select Key). Switcher outputs are assigned to AuxKeys in groups of
four. Mix or Key operations can be previewed and Clean Feed is also available, similar to a
standard MLE.
Important — AuxKeys cannot be used to pass or manipulate non-native video format

signals. If you are using an Aux Bus as a video pass-through for a non-native video format
signal, you cannot apply AuxKeys to that Aux Bus.
The AuxKeys option allows you to assign and lock certain BNCs on the Video Output Board to
the main switcher outputs. The BNCs on each Video Output Board are separated into groups of 4.
Assigning one of these groups to either Aux Keys or Aux Mix/Keys locks the first few BNCs in
that group, depending on which option you select.
The AuxKey feature can only be activated on a Multi-Definition Video Output Board.
An example of possible Output BNC assignments are as follows:
Aux Mixer Example

• Output #K09 — This output is locked to Aux Program.
• Output #K10 — This output is locked to Aux Preview.
Aux Mix/Keyer Example

• Output #K11 — This output is locked to Aux Preview.
• Output #K12 — This output is locked to Aux Clean Feed.
AuxKeys Setup
Setting up the AuxKey option adds an Aux Mixer, or Aux Mixer/Keyer to the selected Aux Bus,
and assign the Output BNCs as indicated. The AuxKey software option must be installed in order
to activate it.
Note — The AuxKeys outputs are only available to the Output BNCs that you assign them to
and cannot be routed to the main switcher output internally. Refer to the section “AuxKey Pre
Mixer/Keyer” on page Eng 8-28 for information on re-entering an AuxKey externally to the
switcher.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Output  Output Boards.
Output Boards — Output Menu 1-2

2. Activate the AuxKeys option as follows:
• Use the Output Group knob to select the group of 4 BNCs that you want to assign
to the Aux Mixer or Aux Mixer/Keyer. Output BNCs on Video Output Boards that
are not installed on the frame appear gray.
• Use the Configuration knob to select the AuxKey configuration you want. You
can choose between the following:
› Outputs — Select this option to assign the selected output group as standard
outputs. This frees up the output group to allow you to assign standard
switcher outputs to all the BNCs in the group.
› Aux Mix — Select this option to assign the selected output group as an Aux
Mixer. This will allow you to perform Background dissolves in the aux bus.
› Aux Mix/Key — Select this option to assign the selected output group as an
Aux Mixer/Keyer. This allows you to perform Background and Key 1
dissolves in the aux bus.
› Aux Mix/Pre — Select this option to assign the selected output group as an
Aux Mixer/Keyer that is re-entered into the switcher. This allows you to
perform Background and Key 1 dissolves in the aux bus and have them
properly timed to be available as a source for the rest of the switcher.
3. Press AuxKey Configure.
AuxKey Configure — Output Menu 1-2

• Use the Aux Keyer knob to select the AuxKey that you want to set up.
• Use the Bus knob to select the bus that you want to assign to an output. You can
› Background — Select this option to have the video signal selected on the
Background bus of the AuxKey fed out the selected Aux Bus.
› Preset — Select this option to have the video signal selected on the Preset
bus of the AuxKey fed out the selected Aux Bus.
› Key — Select this option to have the video signal selected on the Keyer bus of
the AuxKey fed out the selected Aux Bus.
• Use the Aux Bus knob to select the Aux Bus output that you want to assign to the
selected output. The sources selected on the corresponding bus is fed out of the
selected Aux Bus, and does interfere with the dedicated AuxKey output.
Operating Tip — If you select different sources on an Aux Bus assigned to the Background,
Preset, or Key Bus of the AuxKey, the new source is selected on the corresponding bus of the
AuxKey, without having to assign the Crosspoint Group to an AuxKey.

ports.
Support.
AuxKey Pre Mixer/Keyer

This section describes how to cable and set up an AuxKey Pre Mixer/Keyer. This allows you to
assign an Aux Mixer/Keyer that is re-entered into the switcher. The Vision switcher automatically
handles any timing issues.
Important — The Pre Mixer/Keyer option can only correct the timing for a single pass through
the switcher. Do not attempt to re-enter AuxKeys as sources on an AuxKey that you intend to
re-enter on an MLE. For example, AuxKey Pre Mixer/Keyer 1 is re-entered into AuxKey Pre
Mixer/Keyer 2 that is re-entered into MLE 1.
An AuxKey Pre Mixer/Keyer is re-entered into the switcher by physically connecting a BNC
cable from the dedicated output BNCs of the AuxKey, to the available input BNCs (Figure 8.7).
For example, if the AuxKey Pre Mixer/Keyer is assigned to output group #K09-K12, the BNC
cables are connected from those output BNCs to 3 input BNCs. When the input BNCs are
selected on the crosspoint bus, the properly timed output of the AuxKey is shown.
LAN1 LAN2
PERIPH1 1
CPU
LTC A
2

10/100 10/100 USB
PS 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 11
1 12 13
3 14
1 15 16
100-120V~ 220-240V~ 47-63Hz

OUT
B
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 11
1 12
1 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16
C
IN
LOCK
LOOP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 11
1 12
1 13
13 14 15
15 16
16
PS 2
D
IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 11
1 12 13
3 14
1 15 16
E
IN
MAXIMUM
RATING
1950W
Figure 8.7 AuxKey Mix/Pre output re-entered into available input BNCs (QMD Shown)

• on setting up an Aux Bus, refer to the section “Aux Bus Setup” on page Eng 12-2.
• on setting up an Aux Panel, refer to the section “Auxiliary Panels” on page Eng 14-1.
• on selecting sources, refer to the section “Panel Row” on page Ops 4-5.
Basic Communications Setup
In This Chapter
This chapter provides general information on installing and initializing FlexDevice™ drivers, and
setting up communication with peripheral equipment. For complete information on setting up a
specific class of device, refer to the Ross Video External Device Setup Sheet for your particular
device.
• Communications Overview
• Installing and Managing FlexDevice Drivers
• Setting Up Communications
• Port Expanders
• External Panel Modules
• Custom Devices
• Extra Options
Operating Tip — A Communications Port Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping

track of which peripheral devices have been connected to which communications ports. Refer to
the section “Communications Worksheet” on page Eng 21-11 for a copy of this worksheet.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Basic Communications Setup • Eng 9–1
Communications Overview
The Vision switcher can interface with a number of peripheral devices, such as video servers,
audio mixers, routers, character generators, and robotic cameras. These devices interface with the
switcher using either serial or ethernet communication. Devices that use serial communication
and can be connected to either the control panel or the frame. Ethernet devices must be connected
to the same network as the switcher.
Device Drivers
Devices are connected to the switcher using either the built-in device drivers or individual
FlexDevice™ drivers. Refer to the Ross Video External Device Setup Sheet for your device for
information on which interface must be used with your device.
Note — Do not mix different drivers (built-in and FlexDevice driver, or different versions of
FlexDevice or built-in drivers) when connecting to the same device. Doing so may cause
unexpected control errors.
Individual FlexDevice drivers are uploaded to the switcher using the QMD/X Web Interface.
Once a driver has been uploaded to the switcher, an instance of that driver is initialized and
assigned to the port that the device is connected to. A single instance of a FlexDevice driver
controls a single device. If you are connecting multiple devices of the same type to the switcher,
you must activate multiple instances of that driver.

• on installing a FlexDevice driver, refer to the section “Installing and Managing
FlexDevice Drivers” on page Eng 9-4.
Control Panel Serial Communications Ports

Peripheral equipment connected to the control panel, using a serial transmission standard, use the
8 Remote ports located on the back of the Master Panel (Figure 9.1). These ports are set up for
communication with the device from the control panel using the menu system on the switcher.
Figure 9.1 Vision 4 Control Panel — Serial Communications (Remote) Ports
Frame Serial Communications Ports

Peripheral equipment connected to the frame, using a serial transmission standard, use the 4
Peripheral ports located on the CPU Board at the back of the frame (Figure 9.2). These ports are
set up for communication with the device from the control panel using the menu system.
Eng 9–2 • Basic Communications Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Peripheral Ports
LAN1 LAN2 PANEL

CPU
LTC
2
10/100 10/100 USB
Figure 9.2 Frame — Communication Ports
Ethernet Communications
The following section presents a brief overview of the ethernet connection process. The exact
steps taken in connecting your peripheral equipment and the Vision switcher via an ethernet
network depends on the network topology of your facility.
1. Connect the device to the same subnet as your Vision switcher or to a network that has a
route to the network your switcher is on. Make a note of the IP Address and Port
Number of your device as this information is required when configuring the
communication settings on your Vision switcher.
• Network topologies vary greatly between facilities. Contact your IT Department for
assistance in connecting your device to the appropriate network at your location.
• Refer to the documentation that came with your device for instructions on
connecting it to your network.
2. Configure the ethernet settings on your device to communicate with the Vision switcher.

• on the pinouts of the Remote ports, refer to the section “Control Panel Pinouts” on
page Eng 20-21.
• on the pinouts of the Peripheral ports, refer to the section “Frame Pinouts” on page Eng
20-17.
Installing and Managing FlexDevice Drivers
FlexDevice drivers are individually installed onto the switcher using the QMD/X Web Interface.
Once the driver has been installed onto the switcher, you must initialize an instance of the
FlexDevice driver for each device you want to control from the switcher.
Note — Not all external devices are currently supported by FlexDevice drivers. Refer to the
Ross Video External Device Setup Sheet for your device for information on whether there is a
FlexDevice driver for your device.
Installing FlexDevice Drivers

displayed.
3. Click Other...  FlexDevices to display the FlexDevices Page. The FlexDevices
Page lists all the FlexDevice drivers that are installed on the switcher, their version, and
status. If a driver is not compatible with the current version of switcher software, the
status will be Obsolete (OBSOL) or Unsupported (UNSUPP)(Table 9.1).
FlexDevice Page
Table 9.1 FlexDevice Driver Status
Status Description
OK The driver is fully compatible with the switcher software.
OBSOL The driver is outdated and a new driver should be downloaded.
The driver has not been tested with the current version of switcher
UNSUPP
software. Please contact Ross Video Technical Support.
4. Click Browse. A file selection dialog box is displayed.

5. Locate the FlexDevice driver file you want to upload to the switcher on your computer.
The file is named <device>-<version>.tar.gz.
6. Click Open/Choose to select the file. The file path and name appears in the
FlexDevice Driver to Upload field.
7. Click Install Driver to upload and install the selected driver to the switcher.
Next, you must initialize an instance of the driver to be able to assign it to a port.
Initializing FlexDevice Drivers
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Com Setup  More  Flex Devices.
Start Driver — FlexDevices Menu

2. Press Start Driver.
3. Use the Interface knob to select the control panel or frame that you want to initialize
the FlexDevice driver on. For example, if you want to control the device from a serial
port on the back of the Master Vision control panel, you must select Panel0.
4. Use the Type knob to select the type, or class, of driver you want to initialize.
5. Use the Driver knob to select the driver that you want to initialize an instance of. If the
driver you want to initialize does not appear on the menu, ensure that the driver has been
installed.
6. Press Accept to initialize an instance of the selected FlexDevice driver. You must
initialize a separate instance of a driver for each device you want to control from the
switcher.
With an instance of the driver initialized, you must set the driver up for the port you have the
device connected to. Refer to the section “Setting Up Communications” on page Eng 9-7 for
information on setting up communications.
Stopping FlexDevice Drivers

Before you can stop a FlexDevice driver, the instance of the driver that you want to stop cannot
be assigned to a port.
Stop Driver — FlexDevices Menu
2. Press Stop Driver.
3. Use the Interface knob to select the control panel or frame that the FlexDevice driver
you want to stop is running on.
4. Use the Type knob to select the type of driver you want to stop.
5. Use the Driver knob to select the driver that you want to stop an instance of.
6. Press Accept to stop the selected instance of the FlexDevice driver.
Deleting FlexDevice Drivers

Before you can delete a FlexDevice driver, all instances of that driver must be stopped.
Delete Driver — FlexDevices Menu

2. Press Delete Driver.
3. Use the Interface knob to select the control Panel0.
4. Use the Type knob to select the type of driver you want to delete.
5. Use the Driver knob to select the driver that you want to delete.
6. Press Accept to delete the selected FlexDevice driver.
Setting Up Communications
External device communication is set up from the Communications Menu. This menu allows
you to initialize an instance of a FlexDevice driver, select the communications port that a device
is connected, or assigned to, the type of device it is, the transmission standard that is used, and the
communications protocol.
For specific information on setting up a particular external device with the Vision switcher, refer
to the Ross Video External Device Setup Sheet for your device.
Setting Up Serial Communications
Note — The status column on the Communications Menu indicates the current compatibility
status of each driver installed on the switcher. If a driver is listed as Obsolete or Unsupported,
download a new driver from the Ross Video web site. If a driver is listed as Missing or Broken,
contact Ross Video Technical Support.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Com Setup  Type.
Device Type — Communications Menu 1-2

2. Assign a device to a communications port as follows:
• Use the Com Port knob to select the communications port that you are connecting
the device to. You can choose between the following:
› REMOTE (R1-R8) — Select this option if you are connecting a device to a
Remote port on the back of a Vision control panel.
Note — Only the Remote ports on the back of the Master Panel can be used to connect to
external devices at this time.
› ExtLnk (L2-L4) — Select this option if you are connecting a device to an

External Link port on the back of a Vision control panel.
› PERIPH (P1-P4) — Select this option if you are connecting a device to a
Peripheral port on the back of the frame.
• Use the Device knob to select the device you are connecting to the select port. If
the device you are connecting to the switcher uses a FlexDevice driver, the device
type is proceeded by Flex. For example, FlexCAM for Robotic Cameras.
3. Press Select Device.
Device Selection — Communications Menu 1-2
4. Select the driver you want to assign to the communications port as follows:
• Use the Device knob to select the FlexDevice driver, or communications protocol,
you are using. If a message stating that the FlexDevice driver is missing or damaged
is displayed, you must re-install the driver.
Note — If you are connecting a VTR or Video Server, use the VTR Preroll knob on the
Communications Menu 1-2 to select the pre-roll interval, in frames, for your specific Video
Server.
5. Press Com Type.
Com Type — Communications Menu 1-2

6. Select the type of communication that is used to communicate with your device as
follows:
• Use the Type knob to select the type of communications for the selected
communications port. You can choose between the following:
› RS-232 — Select this option if your device is connected to a remote port or
peripheral port and uses the RS-232 (TIA/EIA-232) transmission standard.
› RS-422 — Select this option if your device is connected to a remote port or
peripheral port and uses the RS-422 (TIA/EIA-422) transmission standard.
› RS-422 Null — Select this option if your device is connected to a remote port
or peripheral port and uses the RS-422 (TIA/EIA-422) transmission standard.
This option changes the signals on the pinouts of the port for use with a null
modem cable.
7. Press Com Settings.
Com Settings (Serial) — Communications Menu 1-2
8. Set the communications protocols for the serial device as follows:
• Use the Baud knob to select the baud rate for communicating with your device.
• Use the Parity knob to select the parity for communicating with your device.
Operating Tip — If you are creating a custom device protocol, refer to the section “Custom
Devices” on page Eng 9-21 for information on creating the protocol.
9. Press Extra Options. Some classes of devices support extra options that must be set.
Refer to the Ross Video External Device Setup Sheet for your particular device for more
information.
Note — If you are setting up a Monitor Wall, you must set the IP Address and Port Number of
the Monitor Wall device. If you are not setting up a Monitor Wall, proceed to Step (12.).
10. Press More  Mon Wall Setting.
Monitor Wall Settings — Communications Menu 2-2

11. Select the IP address of the monitor wall device you want to control as follows:
• Use the Monitor Wall knob to select the specific monitor wall connected to the
dispatcher computer that you want to control.
• In the IP Address field, enter the IP Address of the specific monitor wall you want
to control from the selected communications port.
• In the Port Number field, enter the port number of the monitor wall you want to
control.
ports.
Support.
Setting Up Ethernet Communications
Note — The status column on the Communications Menu indicates the current compatibility
status of each driver installed on the switcher. If a driver is listed as Obsolete or Unsupported,
download a new driver from the Ross Video web site. If a driver is listed as Missing or Broken,
contact Ross Video Technical Support.

2. Assign a device to a communications port as follows:
• Use the Com Port knob to select the communications port that you are connecting
the device to. You can choose between the following:
› REMOTE (R1-R8) — Select this option if you are assigning a device to a
Remote port on the back of a Vision control panel.
Note — Only the Remote ports on the back of the Master Panel can be used to connect to
external devices at this time.
› PERIPH (P1-P4) — Select this option if you are assigning a device to a

Peripheral port on the back of the frame.
› NET (N1-N8) — Select this option if you are assigning a device to the
switcher through a network port.
• Use the Device knob to select the device you are assigning to the select port. If the
device you are connecting to the switcher uses a FlexDevice driver, the device type
is proceeded by Flex. For example, FlexCAM for Robotic Cameras.
Device Selection — Communications Menu 1-2
4. Select the driver you want to assign to the communications port as follows:
• Use the Device knob to select the FlexDevice driver, or communications protocol
you are using.
Note — If you are connecting a VTR or Video Server, use the VTR Preroll knob on the
Communications Menu 1-2 to select the pre-roll interval, in frames, for your specific Video
Server.
5. Press Com Type.

6. Select the type of communication that is used to communicate with your device as
follows:
• Use the Type knob to select the type of communications for the selected
communications port. You can choose between the following:
› Network UDP — Select this option if your device is connected to the
switcher through a network and uses the UDP/IP transmission standard.
› Network TCP — Select this option if your device is connected to the
switcher through a network and uses the TCP/IP transmission standard.
Com Settings (Ethernet) — Communications Menu 1-2
8. Use the Client/Server knob to select whether the switcher should act as a client or
server. Enter the port settings as follows:
• Client — Select this option if the switcher should act as the client when
communicating with the device. Enter the settings for the switcher as follows:
› In the Remote IP Address field, enter the IP address of the external device.
› In the Remote Port field, enter the port on the external device that the
switcher must connect to.
• Server — Select this option if the switcher should act as the server when
› In the Local IP Address list, select the IP address of the switcher that you
want to use to connect with the external device.
› In the Local Port field, enter the port on the switcher that the external device
must connect to.
Note — Do not change the Local Port value unless instructed to do so by Ross Video
Technical Support.

ports.
Support.
Port Expanders
Port Expanders allow you to increase the number of external devices that can be connected to the
switcher. Port Expanders can be connected to one of the remote ports on the back of a Vision
control panel, or connected as an ethernet device, depending on the Port Expander you have.
The Vision switcher supports communications with a number of Port Expanders. The following
devices are currently supported by your Vision switcher (Table 9.2).
Table 9.2 Supported Port Expanders

Protocol
Port Expander Com Software Option
(Device)
RS-422 Four Port Buffered Smart Switch RS-422 BSS4 n/a
(RS422BSS4)
Net Expander Network TCP NetExp n/a
Comtrol® DeviceMaster® Network TCP n/a n/a
Port Expander Cable Pinouts

Use the information in this section to connect the Interface Cable from the Vision switcher to the
Port Expander. If you are connecting an ethernet device (Network TCP/UDP) no interface cable
is required.
For ethernet devices, the pinouts of the serial ports on the device are provided.

• on connecting an ethernet device to the Vision switcher, refer to the section “Ethernet
Communications” on page Eng 9-3.
BSS4 Serial Port Expander

The Vision switcher connects to the BSS4 Serial Port Expander via the Remote ports on the
Vision control panel and the Master Port on the BSS4.
Cable connections on the following table (Table 9.3) refer only to those between the Vision
switcher and the BSS4 Serial Port Expander. Other cable connections present on the BSS4 Serial
Port Expander can be found in the BSS4 Serial Port Expander documentation.
Table 9.3 Vision -to- BSS4 Serial Port Expander Wiring Chart
Vision Switcher BSS4 Serial Port Expander
Remote Port Signal Master Port Signal
1
2 RxA (Rx-)  2 TxA (Tx-)
3 TxB (Tx+)  3 RxB (Rx+)
4 Ground
5 Ground  5 Ground
6
7 RxB (Rx+)  7 TxB (Tx+)
8 TxA (Tx-)  8 RxA (Rx-)
9
NetExp Port Expander

The Net Expander is a virtual port expander that allows you to simulate Remote ports on the
Vision control panel that can be assigned to Ethernet devices. No cable connections are required.
Comtrol DeviceMaster
The Comtrol® DeviceMaster® allows you to connect a number of serial devices to the switcher
through a single ethernet connection. Serial devices connect to the DeviceMaster using a RS-232
or RS-422 connection, and then the DeviceMaster connects to the switcher using a single ethernet
connection. Individual devices are identified by a port number on the DeviceMaster.
The DeviceMaster must be on the same subnet as the switcher to ensure proper functionality.
Note — If you are using a Cisco Systems® brand router, or switch, to connect the Comtrol
DeviceMaster to the switcher, you must disable the BPDU Guard on the Cisco Systems® brand
router or switch to ensure proper communications
The Comtrol DeviceMaster uses a different pinout than the Remote Ports on the Vision control
panel, and supports both the RS-232 (TIA/EIA-232) and RS-422 (TIA/EIA-422) transmission
standards (Table 9.4).
Table 9.4 Comtrol DeviceMaster Port Pinouts (Male)

Pin RS-232 RS-422
1 CD n/c
2 Rx RxA (Rx-)
3 Tx TxA (Tx-)
4 DTR n/c
5 Ground n/c
6 DSR n/c
7 RTS TxB (Tx+)
8 CTS RxB (Rx+)
9 RI n/c
Switcher Communications Setup
The Vision switcher needs to be set up with the communications port that the Port Expander is on,
as well as the type, transmission standard, and the protocols for the communications between the
Port Expander and switcher.
If you are using a Comtrol DeviceMaster, use the Net Expander to create the ports on the
DeviceMaster. If you are setting up a DeviceMaster that has more than 4 ports, you must set up
additional Net Expanders. Each Net Expander creates 4 ports.
Type — Communications Menu 1-2

2. Use the Com Port knob to select the communications port that you are connecting the
Port Expander to.
• BSS4 — Select the Remote port on the back of the control panel that you connected
the BSS4 to.
• NetExp — Select the port that you want to assign the Net Expander ports to. The
expanded ports can be used directly from the switcher, or on the Comtrol
DeviceMaster.
3. Use the Device knob to select Expander.
Select Device — Communications Menu 1-2

5. Assign the port expander to the Expander communications port as follows:
• Use the Device knob to select the Port Expander you want to use. You can choose
between from the following:
› BSS4 — Select this option to assign a BSS4 Serial Port Expander to the
selected port.
› NetExp — Select this option to assign a Net Expander to the selected port.
6. Press Com Type.

7. Select the type of serial communication that will be used to communicate with the Port
Expander as follows:
• Use the Type knob to select the type of communications for the selected port. Refer
to the section “Communication Settings” on page Eng 9-18 for the specific
settings for your Port Expander.
Com Settings — Communications Menu 1-2

9. Set the communications settings for the Port Expander as follows:
• Use the Baud knob to select the baud rate for the Port Expander. Refer to the
section “Communication Settings” on page Eng 9-18 for the specific settings for
your Port Expander.
• Use the Parity knob to select the parity for the Port Expander.
10. Press HOME to display the Confirm Changes Screen.
11. Press Confirm to accept the changes you have made to the communications set up of
the switcher. If you are setting up a BSS4, a screen is displayed prompting you to
program the BSS4 Serial Port Expander
If you are setting up a BSS4 or a Comtrol DeviceMaster, next you must program the expander.
Port Expander Programming

Some Port Expanders must be programmed to be able to communicate with the devices and the
switcher.
BSS4 Programming
Once the switcher has been set up to communicate with the BSS4, you need to program the BSS4.
The Vision switcher will start the programming after you confirm the installation change.
1. Press Continue to start programming the BSS4.
Note — If you press Cancel, a warning message is displayed and you will have to perform the
set up of the BSS4 again.
2. Move the SET UP SWITCH on the BSS4 to PROG (Figure 9.3).

SET UP SWITCH
5V --- 100mA PROG. NORM.
Figure 9.3 BSS4 Serial Port Expander — Set Up Switch
3. Disconnect the BSS4 Power Supply from the BSS4 to cycle the power Off.
4. Reconnect the BSS4 Power Supply to the BSS4 to cycle the power On.
5. Press Continue on the Vision control panel. A screen will be displayed informing you
that the BSS4 Serial Port Expander has been successfully programmed.
Note — If you get an error message stating that the BSS4 could not be programmed, you
should confirm your settings and try to program the BSS4 again.
6. Move the SET UP SWITCH on the BSS4 to NORM.

7. Disconnect the BSS4 Power Supply from the BSS4 to cycle the power Off.
8. Reconnect the BSS4 Power Supply to the BSS4 to cycle the power On.
9. Press Continue on the Vision control panel.
Comtrol DeviceMaster Programming

Once the Net Expander ports have been created, you must set up Comtrol DeviceMaster. Refer to
the documentation that came with the DeviceMaster for information on using the Comtrol®
PortVision® software to set up the DeviceMaster.
Use the following information to set up your DeviceMaster:
• You must use a Static IP address for the DeviceMaster. You need to enter this address into
the switcher so that it can connect to the DeviceMaster.
• You must set up each serial port on the DeviceMaster for the device you are connecting to
it. Ensure the following is set up on the Comtrol PortVision software:
› Serial Configuration — Use the Transmission Standard, Baud, Parity, Data Bits,
and Stop Bits information provided by Ross Video.
› TCP Connection Configuration — For each serial port on the DeviceMaster,
ensure that Enable and Listen are checked and enter a port number for the serial port.
Ross Video suggests that you start numbering the ports at 1001. Leave all other
setting at their default values.
Note — If you are connecting a device using the RAP protocol to the DeviceMaster, you must
have Listen unchecked and enter the IP address of the Master Panel in the Connect To: field,
as well as the Local IP Port in the To Port: field. The Local Port is found on the
Communications Menu.
› UDP Connection Configuration — For each serial port on the DeviceMaster,
ensure that Enable Serial to Ethernet, Enable Ethernet to Serial, and Enable Ethernet
Receive from any IP address are unchecked. Leave all other setting at their default
values.
Communication Settings
In order to have the Vision switcher communicate with a Port Expander, the Port Expander and
the switcher must be set up to communicate with each other.
Use the following communications settings (Table 9.5) when connecting your Port Expander to
the Vision switcher. Refer to your Port Expander documentation for additional information on
setting up your Port Expander.
Table 9.5 Port Expander Communications Settings

Trans Baud Data Stop Com
Device Parity
Standard Rate Bits Bits Protocol
RS-422 Four Port RS-422 38400 None 8 1 Native
Buffered Smart Switch (TIA/EIA-422)
Net Expander Network TCP n/a n/a n/a n/a Ethernet
Comtrol DeviceMaster Network TCP n/a n/a n/a n/a Ethernet
Assigning Devices to Port Expander Ports

You will now notice that there are four new serial ports on the Communications Menu. These
ports are labelled A, B, C and D, corresponding to the Slave Ports on the Port Expander, and will
start with the number of the serial port that the Port Expander is connected to.
For example, if the BSS4 is connected to Remote 1 port on the control panel, then the four
Extended Remote Ports will be Remote 1A, Remote 1B, Remote 1C, and Remote 1D.
Please note the following about each Port Expander:
• BSS4 — The BSS4 only supports the RS-422 transmission standard. Any device using
the RS-232 transmission standard requires a RS-422 to RS-232 converter. Refer to the
documentation for your device to ensure you are using the correct type of serial
communications.
• NetExp — The NetExp allows you create virtual serial ports that can be assigned to
ethernet based external devices. For example, if you are controlling four channels on an
ethernet controlled Character Generator, you can assign each channel to a NetExp port,
and only consume a single Remote port.
• Comtrol DeviceMaster — The DeviceMaster uses the virtual serial ports of the NetExp
to assign serial devices to the serial ports on the DeviceMaster. When you set up a device
on one of the virtual serial ports, you must assign it to the IP address of the DeviceMaster
and the port number that you assigned to the serial port on the DeviceMaster. The IP
address and port number are set up on the DeviceMaster using the Comtrol®
PortVision® software that came with the DeviceMaster.
Assigning Devices to DeviceMaster Net Expander Ports

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Com Setup.
2. Select one of the virtual serial ports and set up the device as normal. The Com Type
must be set to Network TCP.
3. Press More  Device Network.
IP Settings — Communications Menu 1-2

4. Use the Client/Server knob to select whether the switcher should act as a client or
server. Enter the port settings as follows:
• Client — Select this option if the switcher should act as the client when
› In the Remote IP Address field, enter the IP address of the external device.
› In the Remote Port field, enter the port on the external device that the
switcher must connect to.
• Server — Select this option if the switcher should act as the server when
› In the Local IP Address list, select the IP address of the switcher that you
want to use to connect with the external device.
› In the Local Port field, enter the port on the switcher that the external device
must connect to.
Note — Do not change the Local Port value unless instructed to do so by Ross Video
Technical Support.

ports.
Support.
External Panel Modules
External Vision panel modules, such as the SideBox, must be set up on the external link port that
it is connected to.
For information on cabling your external panel module to the Vision control panel, refer to the
documentation that came with your external panel module.

2. Assign an External Link port to the external panel module as follows:
• Use the Com Port knob to select the communications port on the Vision switcher
that is connected to the external panel module.
• Use the Device knob to select Ext Module. If the OverDrive Production Control
System is set up with the switcher, you cannot assign ExtLnk 2 to Ext Module.
ports.
Support.
Next you must map the module to a panel row on the Vision control panel.

• on assigning modules to a panel row, refer to the section “Mapping a Module to a Row”
on page Eng 17-5.
• on how GPIs are assigned by panel row, refer to the section “Auxiliary Control Panel
GPIs” on page Eng 14-11.
Custom Devices
The Custom Device setup feature allows you to program serial command protocols for
controlling external devices not otherwise supported by the Vision switcher. Custom Devices are
also useful in testing currently unsupported commands to external devices, as well as other
communications testing.
Custom Device Protocols are supported for the following device classes:
• VTRs
• Video Servers
• Audio Server
Important — The option for the external device you want to program a custom device
protocol for must be purchased and installed before you can use the custom device protocol.
Note — Refer to the specific chapter on the device you are using for information on setting up
communications for the custom device.
Custom Device commands allow you to select the signals that the switcher will send to the
custom device when you select a command on the switcher.
The supported custom device commands are as follows:
• Seek Timecode
• Rewind
• Frame Reverse
• Play Reverse
• Pause
• Stop
• Play
• Frame Advance
• Fast Forward
• Record
• Diagnostic 1
• Diagnostic 2
• Diagnostic 3
Programming Custom Device Commands

The CUSTOM0 and CUSTOM1 protocols can be programmed for a number of commands that
the switcher will send to the custom device. Refer to the documentation that came with your
custom device for information on the input signals that the device requires to perform the desired
command.
Note — Custom Device protocols support only one-way communication. The switcher does
not record, or act upon, signals being returned from the custom device.
Operating Tip — For more information on the use and limitations of the custom device
protocol, refer to the section “Custom Devices – Uses and Limitations” on page Eng 23-2.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Com Setup  Custom Devices.

2. Use the Custom knob to select the custom device protocol (CUSTOM0 or
CUSTOM1) that you want to program.
3. Press Modify.
Custom Devices Modify Menu

4. Use the Command Tag knob to select the command you want to set up. You can chose
• SEEK TIMECODE — This command applies to VTRs, video servers and audio
servers, and is run from the VTR Remote Menu and custom controls. When
executed, the command sends the VTR Clip Time as a packed BCD of the form
HHMMSSFF.
• REWIND — This command applies to VTRs, video servers and audio servers and
is run from the VTR Remote Menu and custom controls.
• FRAME REVERSE — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio
servers and is run from the VTR Remote Menu and custom controls.
• PAUSE — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio servers, and is
run from the VTR Remote Menu and custom controls.
• STOP — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio servers, and is
• PLAY — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio servers, and is
Note — The PLAY command requires the Roll Clip feature (ROLL CLP) in order to tie the
command to a transition.
• FRAME ADVANCE — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio
servers, and is run from the VTR Remote Menu and custom controls.
• FAST FORWARD — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio
servers, and is run from the VTR Remote Menu and custom controls.
• RECORD — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio servers,
and is run from the VTR Remote Menu and custom controls.
Note — The FADER POSITION command is not currently supported by the Vision QMD/X or
MD/X switcher.
• DIAGNOSTIC 1 — This command applies to VTRs, video servers, and audio
servers, and is run from custom controls only.
Operating Tip — You can use the Clear Command button to erase all the entries you have
made for the selected command.
5. Insert a byte into the signal for the selected command as follows:
• Press Insert Line to insert a line, or byte, to the command signal.
Coding a Byte — Custom Devices Modify Menu

• Use the Set Nibble knob to select the Hexidecimal value you want to insert in the
first nibble of the byte.
• Press Toggle Nibble to select the second nibble of the byte.
• Use the Set Nibble knob to select the Hexidecimal value you want to insert in the
second nibble of the byte.
6. Press Insert Line to add additional bytes to the command. Each byte is coded in the
same way.
Operating Tip — You can use the Choose Line knob on the Custom Device Modify Menu
to select the different bytes for editing.
7. Insert a packed Command Flag as follows:

• Use the Choose Line knob to select the byte you want to place the command flag
in.
• Press Toggle Special.
Toggle Special Setup — Custom Devices Modify Menu
• Use the Command Flag knob to select the command flag you want to insert. You
› [Break On] — This command flag forces the output to data low.
Note — For RS-232 communication, data low is a positive voltage.
› [Break Off] — This command releases the Break On command, allowing the
output to go off of data low.
› [Checksum] — This command inserts an 8-bit additive checksum byte.
Note — The Posn X, Posn Y, and Posn Z command flags are not currently supported by the
Vision switcher.
› [Param...] — The Parameter command allows you to insert special

parameters into the signal. This command is to be used in conjunction with the
Special Options Menu. Refer to the section “Advanced Topics and Tables”
on page Eng 23-3 for a description of the available commands.
ports.
Support.

• on the uses and limitations of the custom device protocol, refer to the section “Custom
Devices – Uses and Limitations” on page Eng 23-2.
• on the settings available for the protocols, refer to the section “Advanced Topics and
Tables” on page Eng 23-3.
Extra Options
The Communications Menu allows you to set up an external device to operate with the Vision
switcher. This section (Table 9.6) describes each of the extra options on the Communications
Menu.
Not all devices support all extra options. For information on a specific device, refer to the Ross
Video External Device Setup Sheet for your device.
Table 9.6 Extra Option Settings

Audio Mixer Options Values
The Channel Label option allows you to select where the switcher gets the names for audio
channels. You can choose between the following:
• Switcher — Use the name stored on the switcher
Channel Label • Channel ID — Use the channel ID from the audio mixer
• User Label — Use the user assigned channel name from the audio mixer
• Fixed Label — Use the input channel number from the audio mixer
• InheritedLabel — Use the source signal name from the audio mixer
The Converter option allows you to select the MIDI to Serial converter that you are using to
connect to the audio mixer. You can choose between the following:
Converter
• MIDIator — MIDIator™ Systems MS-124W
• SMC — Ross GearLite SMC-9901
The Frequency option allows you to select the length of time, in fields, that the switcher will
Freq
wait between polling the audio mixer for status information.
The Max Channels option allows you to select the maximum number of channels installed
Max Channels
on your audio mixer.
The Mixers option allows you to select the number of audio mixers you are connecting
Mixers together and controlling from the same communications port. You can connect up to two
audio mixers together to a single serial communications port.
The OD Master option allows you to select the master level on the audio mixer that the
OD Master
switcher, and the OverDrive Production Control System, should be controlling.
The PGM Output option allows you select the master level control the switcher is assigned
PGM Output
to.
The Post-Fade Delay option allows you to set the length of time, in fields, after a fader is set
Post-Fade Delay
from the switcher that the switcher ignores movements of that fader from the audio mixer.
The Version option allows you to select the version number of the audio mixer you are
Version
connecting to the selected communications port.
Audio Server
Options
The Bus Address option allows you to select the Remote Control Address that the audio
Bus Address
server is set to.
Automation Options
The Clip Lists option allows you to select whether the switcher updates/retrieves the clip list
data from the video servers when Automation is enabled.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher not update/retrieve clip lists from video
Clip Lists
servers when Automation is enabled.
• No — Select this option to have the switcher update/retrieve clip lists from video servers
when Automation is enabled.
CG Options
The Back-to-Back option allows the switcher to preload the second CG page if OverDrive
has back-to-back CG pages in a rundown.
• No — Select this option to have the switcher pause to load the second CG page in a
BackToBack
back-to-back CG rundown from OverDrive.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher preload the second CG page in a
back-to-back CG rundown from OverDrive.
The Display Mode option allows you to select how the CG takes a template to the program
channel when the Take command is issued. You can choose between the following:
• On Trigger — Select this option to have the template remain hidden until the Play
Display Mode
command is sent.
• Immediately — Select this option to have the template taken on-air as soon as the Take
command is issued.
The Play Time option allows you to select the maximum duration for playing an animation,
PlayTime
in seconds.
The Show on Preview option allows you to have a CG page shown on the preview of the CG
when it is prepped by OverDrive.
• No — Select this option to have the switcher take CG pages directly to air when the take
Show On PV command is received, and not show the page on preview when it is prepped.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher tell the CG to show the page on preview
when the page is prepped by OverDrive. The page is taken to program when the take
command is received from OverDrive.
The Software Version option allows you to select the version of software being used on your
CG. You can choose between the following:
• Before 3.0 — Select this option for XPression version 3.0, or earlier.
• Before 5.0 — Select this option if your CG uses .ins or .icg files.
Software Ver • 3.0 or later — Select this option for XPression version 3.0, or later.
• 5.0 or later — Select this option if your CG uses .scribe or .scribelist files.
• XML type — Select this option if your CG uses .xml files.
• Non-Pro — Select this option for all non-professional versions of the character generator.
• Pro — Select this option for all professional versions of the character generator.
The Timeout option allows you to set the length of time that the switcher will wait for a
Timeout
response from a CG before reporting communication lost.
Editor Options
The Bus Mapping option allows you to select either the original GVG4000 bus mapping, or
the current bus map of the switcher.
Bus Mapping • Normal — Select this option to use the original GVG4000 bus mapping.
• Simple — Select this option to use a direct one-to-one mapping to the current bus map of
the switcher.
Editor Options
The Custom Control MLE option allows you to select whether memory recalls on a
particular MLE perform a custom control rather than recalling the memory. The specific
custom control that is run is based on the memory that is being recalled. Memories 1-19
correspond to Bank 1, Custom Controls 1-20; memories 20-39 correspond to Bank 2,
Custom Controls 1-20; and so on. You can choose between the following:
• Any — Select this option to have memory recalls for any MLE run a custom control
rather than recall a memory.
CustCtrl MLE • Pgm-Pst — Select this option to have memory recalls for the Main Program MLE run a
custom control rather than recall a memory.
• MLE1 — Select this option to have memory recalls MLE 1 run a custom control rather
than recall a memory.
The Editor Type option allows you to select the type of editor you are connecting to the
Editor Type
selected communications port.
The Pattern option allows you to select how you want to access wipe patterns. You can
• Pattern # — Select this option to use the wipe pattern numbers to select the wipe on the
Pattern
editor.
• Wipe Bttn — Select this option to use the wipe button numbers to select the wipe on the
editor.
The Use Break option allows you to select whether the switcher must receive a break
command before going into Active Mode. You can choose between the following:
• Yes — Select this option to enable the switcher to go into Active Mode once a Break and
Use Break
an Address is received.
• No — Select this option to enable the switcher to go into Active Mode but the editor sends
commands and messages without Breaks.
Pbus Options
The Query Cmd option allows you to select the type of query commands supported by the
Pbus device. You can choose between the following:
• Relaxed — Select this option to be able to control all devices connected to the Pbus
device whether they respond to the query command or not.
Query Cmd
• Strict — Select this option to be able to control only devices connected to the Pbus device
that respond to query commands.
• Silent — Select this option to be able to control all devices connected to the Pbus device,
without using query commands. The switcher does not sent query commands.
Robotic Camera
Options
The Command Delay option allows you to select the length of time, in 16ms increments,
CmdDelay
that the switcher waits between sending commands to the camera.
Focus Speed The Focus Speed option allows you to select the maximum focus speed.
The Iris Control option allows you to select what you want to control the iris of the camera.
Iris Control
• Lens — Select this option to have the iris controlled by the lens of the camera.
• Camera — Select this option to have the iris controlled by the camera controller.
Robotic Camera
Options
Iris Speed The Iris Speed option allows you to set the speed at which the iris opens and closes.
The Iris Mode option allows you to select how the iris opening is changed. You can choose
• Velocity — Select this option to have the iris opening changed by the velocity at which
Iris Mode
the iris ring is turned. Use this option unless the camera is controlling the iris itself.
• Incremental — Select this option to have the iris opening changed incrementally by a
value. Use this option only if the camera is controlling the iris itself.
The Iris Res option allows you to select the number of bits in the camera control signal.
Iris Res Different camera head controllers use different numbers of bits. Choose the value that gives
you a 100% display when the iris is fully open.
The Lens Type option allows you to select the type of lens that is being used on the camera.
Lens Type
• Rainbow — Select this option if the camera uses a Rainbow-CCTV Lens.
• Fujinon — Select this option if the camera uses a Fujinon/Canon Telecon Lens.
The Master Pedestal option allows you to add (Yes) or remove (No) the Pedestal (Black)
Master Ped
button from the Camera Head Control Menu.
The Pan/Tilt Damping option allows you to select the amount of damping you want on pan
Pan/Tilt Damping
and tilt movements. The higher the value, the more damping is applied.
The Pan/Tilt Speed option allows you to select the maximum pan and tilt speed. The higher
Pan/Tilt Speed
the value, the faster the pan and tilt speed.
The Panel ID option allows you to select a unique ID that the camera uses to identify the
Panel ID
Vision switcher.
The Protocol option allows you to select the protocol that is used by the positioner on your
camera controller. You can choose between the following:
• Level 0 — Select this option to disable joystick/positioner control.
Protocol • Level 1 — Select this option to enable Pan, Tilt, Zoom, and Focus control.
• Level 3 — Select this option to enable Pan, Tilt, Zoom, Focus, Iris, Mped (Black Level)
and Elevation control.
• Level 4 — Select this option to enable all for controls of Level 3, plus Shot Store.
The RclTime option allows you to select the amount of time that the switcher allows for a
RclTime
camera to recall a shot.
The Poll option allows you to select which camera is polled. You can choose between the
following:
Poll • Selected — Select this option to have only the currently selected camera polled. Only
use this option if instructed to do so by Ross Video Technical Support.
• All — Select this option to have all cameras polled.
The Select Delay option allows you select the length of time, in fields, that the switcher will
Select Delay
wait after selecting a camera.
The SerialSwitch option allows you to select the type of serial switch you are using to
connect to your camera. You can choose between the following:
• STS-12 — Select this option to assign an STS-12 Serial Control Transfer Switch to the
SerialSwitch selected port.
• CP-RMR-S — Select this option to assign a CP-RMR-S Serial Receiver to the selected
port.
• DS-4 — Select this option to assign a DS-4 Device Server to the selected port.
Robotic Camera
Options
ShotOffset The ShotOffset option allows you to select whether shots are indexed based on 0 or 1.
Zoom Speed The Zoom Speed option allows you to select the maximum zoom speed.
The Z Speed option allows you to select the speed that height or elevation changes are
Z Speed
performed.
Router Options
Base The Base option allows you to select whether the router starts counting crosspoints at 0 or 1.
The Level Base option allows you to select whether the router starts counting levels at 0 or
Level Base
1.
The Num Level option allows you to select the number of levels that the router is using.
Num Levels This sets the number of levels that the router switches when the input source from the router
is set to All levels.
The Src & Dest Base option allows you to select whether the router starts counting source
Src & Dest Base
and destinations at 0 or 1.
The Xpts option allows you to select the number of crosspoints that are available on the
Xpts
router.
Serial Tally Options
The At Black option allows you to set the at black action for the tally interface. You can
select between the following:
• All Off — Select this option to have the switcher report that nothing is on-air when the
At Black
switcher is as black.
• Active On — Select this option to have the switcher not report anything different when
the switcher is at black.
The Data Txfr option allows you to set the message size protocol for the tally device. You
Data Txfr
can select Minimal, Normal, or Complete.
The Rate option allows you to select the rate, in fields, between update messages sent by the
Rate
switcher to the tally device.
The Slot 1 option allows you to select the MLE that you want to assign to the first MLE Slot
Slot 1
on the tally device.
The Slot 2 option allows you to select the MLE that you want to assign to the second MLE
Slot 2
Slot on the tally device.
The Slot 3 option allows you to select the MLE that you want to assign to the third MLE
Slot 3
Slot on the tally device.
The Slot PGM option allows you to select the MLE that you want to assign to the Program
Slot PGM
MLE Slot on the tally device.
The Source Name option allows you to set the input name that the switcher passes to the
tally device. You can choose between the following:
Source Name • Router Src — Select this option to use the router source names that are being passed
through the switcher from a router.
• Source Name — Select this option to use the input source name.
Start The Start option allows you to select None or Init as the start message for the tally device.
Video Server
Options
The Clip List option allows you to associate a Video Server with either Clip List A or Clip
List B, or use the Floating list. Clip List A and Clip List B are cached for fast access when
Clip List
the associated Video Server is selected. Each Clip List can only be associated with one
physical device.
The Cmd Queuing option allows you to select whether the switcher must receive replies for
every command sent to the Video Server. You can choose between the following:
• Strict — Select this option to have the switcher require a confirmation message from the
Cmd Queuing Video Server for each command. The switcher will re-send a command (as set by the Send
Tries value) until it receives a confirmation message from the Video Server.
• Relaxed — Select this option to have the switcher not require a confirmation message
from the Video Server for each command.
The Cue & Pause option sets whether the switcher sends a pause command immediately
after a cue command. This allows you to have the video server cue a clip and advance it so
that you can preview the first frame of the clip.
Cue & Pause • No — Select this option to not have the switcher send the pause command immediately
after the cue command.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher send the pause command immediately after
the cue command.
The Eject Clip option sets whether the video server ejects the current clip before it cues the
next clip.
• No — Select this option to not have the video server eject a clip before it cues the next
Eject Clip
clip.
• Yes — Select this option to have the video server eject a clip before it cues the next clip.
This will often default the video output to black.
The ExtendedChar option allows you to set whether the switcher allows non-printing
characters for clip IDs. You can choose between the following:
ExtendedChar
• No — Select this option to have the switcher replace non-printing characters with spaces.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher use the extended character set.
The LoopMinLength option allows you to set the minimum length of a clip, in seconds, that
LoopMinLength
can be looped. The minimum length is three (3) seconds.
The LoopRecueTime option allows you to set the amount of time, in frames, before the end
LoopRecueTime
of a clip that the switcher sends a loop command.
The MediaIDLength option allows you to select the maximum character length of the clip
IDs displayed on the VTR Clips, Inpoint/Outpoint, and Remote Control Menus. You can
MediaIDLength choose between the following:
• Short IDs — Select this option if your device uses an ID length of up to 8 characters.
• Long IDs — Select this option if your device uses an ID length of up to 32 characters.
The Panel option allows you to select the control panel, in a MultiPanel system, that the
Panel
device is connected to.
The Playback Mode option allows you to set the playback mode that your Video Server is
using. You can choose between the following:
• PB — Select this option if your device does not go to Electronic-to-Electronic (EE) mode.
Playback Mode • PB/EE — Select this option if your device does go to EE mode. If you select this option,
you enable the serial device to automatically go into PB/EE mode. If a stop command is
issued, the device enters EE mode. If a pause command is issued, the device stays in
Playback mode.
Video Server
Options
The Play with Alpha option allows you to have the switcher play both the video and alpha
channels from a video server. Both the video and alpha input sources must have the video
server assigned to them, and must be set up as an auto key to associate the video with the
alpha.
Play w/Alpha • No — Select this option to not have the associated alpha video channel played on the
video server when the video channel is played.
• Yes — Select this option to have both the video and alpha channels played on the video
server at the same time. The switcher does not check the status of the video server
channels before sending the play command in this mode.
The Port Cmds option allows you to set whether your Video Server supports the Open Port,
Select Port, and Close Port commands. You can choose between the following:
Port Cmds
• No — Select this option if your device does not support port commands.
• Yes — Select this option if your device does support port commands.
The Record Time option allows you to set the maximum number of minutes that the Video
Record Time
Server will record for when it received the Record custom control command.
The Send Tries option allows you to specify the number of times that the switcher will try to
Send Tries send the same command to the Video Server if the switcher has not received a confirmation
response.
The Status Interval option allows you to specify amount of time that the switcher waits
StatusInterval
between status check requests of the video server.
The Status Tries option allows you to specify the number of times that the switcher will send
Status Tries
a status check request to a video server without getting a ready response.
The TargetMachine option allows you to select the video server that you are assigning to the
TargetMachine
The TimeOut option allows you to select the length of time, in fields, that the switcher will
TimeOut
wait for a reply from the Video Server before trying to send a command again.
VTR Options
The Decode NAKs (Not Acknowledgement) option allows you to have the switcher decode
the NAK messages sent from the VTR to the switcher. The NAK messages must be decoded
for the switcher to act on them. You can choose between the following:
Decode NAKs • No — Select this option to have the switcher not decode the NAK messages. Only select
this option if you are encountering problems using the Play command with your device or
as advised by Ross Video Technical Support.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher decode the NAK messages.
The NPlayRetries option allows you to set the number of times the switcher attempts to send
NPlayRetries
a Play command to the VTR.
The Request Timecode option allows you have the switcher request timecode information
from the VTR. The timecode information can then be displayed on the Remote Control
Menu, as well as the preview overlay.
Request TC • No — Select this option to have the switcher not request timecode information.
• Yes — Select this option to have the switcher request timecode information. If the
timecode information is returned from the VTR, it is displayed on the Remote Control
Menu and preview overlay.
The TargetMachine option allows you to select the video server that you are assigning to the
TargetMachine
VTR Options
The Wait nFields option allows you to set the length of time the switcher waits before
Wait nFields
assuming that a Play command failed, or was not received by the VTR.
Custom Controls
In This Chapter
This chapter provides general information on setting up and naming custom control banks, as
well as programming, naming, and editing custom control buttons.
• Custom Controls
• Custom Control Interfaces
• Custom Control Banks
• Programming Control Panel Functions
• Programming Special Functions
• Attaching Custom Controls to Panel Buttons
• Naming Custom Controls
• Editing Custom Controls
• Managing Custom Controls
• Deleting Custom Controls
• Custom Control Shortcuts
• Device Transport Commands
• Custom Control Variable Pause
Operating Tip — A Custom Control Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping track
of which custom control have been programmed. Refer to the section “Custom Control
Worksheets” on page Eng 21-18 for a copy of this worksheet.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Custom Controls • Eng 10–1

Custom Controls
Once programmed, a custom control can be played back by pressing a button. The custom control
can be as simple as triggering an output GPI pulse, or as complex as recalling a specific memory
register, performing a switcher transition, and flying a group of Keys.
Custom Control functions can be broken down into the following groups:
• Custom Control Banks — Up to 48 custom control buttons can be set up as Bank
buttons. Each bank can contain a complete set of custom controls. When you select, or
press, a custom control Bank button, all the non-Bank custom control buttons switch to
the custom controls that were recorded in that Bank.
• Control Panel Functions — A custom control can be programmed to play back a series
of control panel button presses. Menu selections, however, cannot be recorded.
• VTR Functions — A custom control can be programmed to send specific commands,
such as play, cue or rewind, to a VTR or Video Server. The targeted server or VTR must
be installed before you are able to record a custom control for it.
• DVE Functions — A custom control button can be programmed to send specific
commands, such as play effect, frame advance or stop, to the Primary External DVE. The
DVE functions do not apply to the Internal Squeeze & Tease DVE.
• Time Clock Functions — A custom control can be programmed to start, stop, or reset
the preview overlay clock.
• Pbus Functions — A custom control can be programmed to send commands to a Pbus
device.
• Special Functions — A custom control can be programmed with a number of special
functions, such as fire GPIs, goto Menus, and pause a custom control. Refer to the section
“Programming Special Functions” on page Eng 10-15 for more information on special
functions.
• Monitor Wall Functions — A custom control can be programmed to load a monitor wall
layout, assign channels, and modify text on a monitor wall. The targeted monitor wall
must be installed before you are able to record a custom control for it.
• Audio Server Functions — A custom control can be programmed to send specific
commands, such as play, cue or rewind, to an Audio Server. The targeted server must be
installed before you are able to record a custom control for it.
Note — When recording a memory recall in a custom control, it may be necessary to add a
pause of between 1-10 frames after the memory recall.
Tips for Working with Custom Controls

A control panel custom control allows you to automate a series of button presses into a single
macro. There are, however, a number of things that you must keep in mind when creating or
running a custom control in order to produce the desired effect.
• Including an All+All reset in a custom control with other events may result in unexpected
results. If you need to have an All+All reset in a custom control, it should be either the
only or last event in the custom control.
• Certain custom control functions can be assigned to shortcut buttons, allowing quick
access to these functions from control panel buttons. Refer to the section “Custom
Control Shortcuts” on page Eng 10-34 for more information on custom control
shortcuts.
Eng 10–2 • Custom Controls Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

• If you are including a memory recall in the custom control, you must ensure the Auto
Recall settings are the same as when the memory was stored. This ensures a consistent
output.
• For non crosspoint buttons, a custom control only records that a specific button was
pressed, and does not record the state that the button was in. For example, if you press the
TIME CLOCK button on the Preview Overlay module while recording a custom
control, the custom control will only record that the button was pressed. If you run the
custom control immediately after recording it, TIME CLOCK is turned off.
• A custom control records the specific bus map source that is mapped to the crosspoint
button that is selected, and not the specific crosspoint button. This allows a custom
control created with one bus map to be run with a different bus map, as long as the same
bus map source exists in the different bus map.
• To program a custom control that will recall a memory and then perform a transition, you
must recall the memory on the MLE you want to perform the transition on, then use the
Cut or Auto Trans buttons to perform the transition. A custom control cannot record
the movement of a fader.
• A custom control will not automatically compensate for the time a memory recall or
transition will require to complete. In these cases, you must insert a custom control pause
after the event that requires time to complete.
• You can insert a Custom Control Hold command into a custom control that will hold the
custom control at a specific point until the continue command is received. The custom
control is continued by either pressing the custom control button again, or by a GPI Input
trigger.
• You can create a Looping Custom Control by inserting a Loop CC event into the
custom control.
• You can insert a Run Custom Control command into a custom control that will
automatically run another custom control. If the Multiple Custom Control feature is
active, both custom controls can run at the same time. If the Multiple Custom Control
feature is turned off, inserting a Run Custom Control command ends the recording, and
playing, of the first custom control. Refer to the section “Running Multiple Custom
Controls” on page Eng 10-13 for information on running multiple custom controls. If a
custom control starts multiple custom controls, you must stop each one individually, or
use the Stop Other Custom Control command.
• You can run multiple custom controls at the same time by pressing the corresponding
custom control button. If a custom control is already running, pressing the button again
will stop it.
• You can insert a Select Memory Bank command into a custom control that will select
different memory bank(s) when the custom control is run. To insert the Select Memory
Bank command into a custom control, select the memory bank(s) you want to select as
you are recording the custom control. A custom control can have multiple Select
Memory Banks. If you only press the BANK button, the next successive Bank is
recorded, depending on what Memory Bank Cycle is set to. Refer to the section
“Personality List” on page Eng 11-2 for more information on Memory Bank Cycle.
• You can create a custom control that will affect an MLE that is not assigned to your
control panel by creating the custom control on a control panel that does have the MLE
assigned to it.
• A custom control that selects a source on an MLE will select the correct source when a
different bus map is used, only if the original bus map still exists on the switcher.
• If you include a button in a custom control that has another custom control attached to it,
the command to run the second custom control is ignored when the initial custom control
is run. This does not apply to actual custom control buttons.

• When you are recording a custom control, the message “CC RECORDING” is shown on
the Main Menu.
• The size of the selected custom control is shown next to the name, in the Selected field on
the left of the menu (xx/yy bytes) on the Custom Control Menu. The first number (xx)
is the size of the macro, and the second is the size of all the macros in the selected bank
(yy).
• You can use a custom control to navigate to a specific menu either by using the Go To
Menu event, or by navigating to the menu when recording the custom control. Not all
menus support this feature.
Stopping Custom Controls

If you have created a long or looping custom control, there are a number of ways that you can
stop it.
• Press the custom control button for the custom control you want to stop. This applies only
to the custom control assigned to that button.
• Press and hold the Stop CC button and press the custom control button for the custom
control you want to stop. You must assign the Stop CC function to a bank button.
• Double-press the Stop CC button to stop all running custom controls. You must assign
the Stop CC function to a bank button.
• Run an empty custom control (a custom control that has no events).
• Insert the Stop Other Custom Control command into a custom control.

• on storing custom controls, refer to the section “Storing and Recalling Files and
Setups” on page Eng 13-4.
• on programming custom control buttons, refer to the section “Programming Control
Panel Functions” on page Eng 10-10.
• on creating a custom control bank, refer to the section “Custom Control Bank Setup”
on page Eng 10-7.
• on Video Checksum custom controls, refer to the section “Video Checksum Custom
Controls” on page Eng 17-32.

Custom Control Interfaces
Each switcher supports up to 48 banks of 48 custom controls. These custom controls can be
accessed either from the Custom Control Bus, the Soft Shot Box Menu, or from the optional
Custom Control Shot Box Module.
Custom Control Bus

The custom control bus on the Vision switchers is located just above the Program/Preset MLE
(Figure 10.1), and has the same number of number of buttons as a crosspoint group.
MEMORY SYSTEM TRANSITION

BORD BORD SHOW
ON OFF ALPHA
SEL
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 FLY CHAN KEY

KEY MGMT PV
PREVIEW PREVIEW FADE TO BLACK FRAMES USB
SOURCE HIDE
MLE 1 MLE 2 SRC PV PGM CUT FADE
OVER
ALL
MLE
1
MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ 2 CLEAR
MLE
3 LINK
FRAMES
ROLL AUTO AUTO MLE

CUT LOCK
CLIP TRANS TRANS 4
Figure 10.1 Vision 2X Custom Control Bus
Custom Control Soft Shot Box

The Custom Control Soft Shot Box allows you access to all 48 custom controls that can be
programmed per Custom Control Bank on the Touchscreen Display. From the menu, you select
the Bank you want to use and the Custom Control on that Bank that you want to run.
The Custom Control mnemonic names and colors are shown on the buttons.
• Press HOME  More  Effects  More  CC Soft Shot Box.
Custom Control Soft Shot Box Menu

If you are recording, or inserting into, a custom control, all of the custom control buttons on the
Custom Control Soft Shot Box Menu appear gray, except for the button for the custom control
being recorded. A red Record icon is shown on the custom control that is being recorded, or
inserted into. Pressing that button will stop the recording.

Custom Control Shot Box Module
The Custom Control Shot Box Module (Figure 10.2) allows you to map custom controls from
various banks to any of the 28 buttons on the Shot Box Module.
CUSTOM CONTROL SHOT BOX
Figure 10.2 Shot Box Module

• on the Custom Control Shot Box Module, refer to the section “Custom Control Shot
Box Module” on page Eng 15-2.
• on setting up Shot Box Pages, refer to the section “Creating Shot Box Pages” on
page Eng 15-3.
Global Memory Module

You can run a custom control from the Global Memory module. This option is only available if
the CC Global Recall personality option is turned on.
Keep the following in mind when running custom controls from the Global Memory Module:
• The “>” symbol indicates what you are entering, the bank or custom.
• Press the BANK button to reset the selected bank and custom to 01.
To Run a Custom Control From the Global Memory Module

1. Press RECALL CLIP/CC. If you have an older control panel, the button may be
labelled RECALL CLIP.
2. Use the keypad to enter the 2-digit number of the bank that you want to run the custom
control on.
3. Press ENTER to select the bank.
4. Use the keypad to enter the 2-digit number of the custom control you want to run.
5. Press ENTER to select the custom control. The RUN CC +/- button will light to
indicate a valid custom control.
6. Press RUN CC +/- to run the custom control. The buttons turns red when the custom is
running.

• on the CC Global Recall personality option, refer to the section “Personality List” on
page Eng 11-2.

Custom Control Banks
Before programming the actual custom controls themselves, you must determine whether or not
you want to enable custom control banks. Custom Control Banks allow you to group custom
controls together, separate from custom controls on other banks. Up to 48 custom control banks
can be created. Each bank is assigned to a custom control button, similar to how a custom control
is recorded to a custom control button. When you select different Banks, the remaining custom
control buttons switch to the custom controls that were recorded to the selected bank.
Three types of banks are available; Normal, Audio, and Transport:
• Normal — Normal banks are for storing normal custom controls dealing with typical
switcher video functions such as recalling memories and performing a transition.
• Audio — Audio banks are used when custom controls are created for use when the
switcher is in Audio Custom Control mode, and remotely operates an audio mixing
board through the PGM and PST bus crosspoints.
• Transport — Transport banks are used for device transport commands. Normal custom
controls cannot be assigned to a Transport bank.
Operating Tip — You can save the number of buttons you assign to Bank buttons by using
the Bank shortcut. Refer to the section “Custom Control Shortcuts” on page Eng 10-34 for
more information.
Custom Control Bank Setup

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Custom Controls.
Custom Controls Menu

2. Assign a custom control bank type as follows:
• Use the Bank/Function knob to select the bank you want to enable. For
information on assigning functions to bank buttons, refer to the section “Custom
Control Shortcuts” on page Eng 10-34.
• Use the Button knob to select the custom control button that you want to assign as
the bank. The custom control button you have selected lights up on the control
panel.
Operating Tip — Select NONE if you want to disable a bank that you have previously set
up. This does not delete the custom controls on that bank. Assigning that bank to a button
again, allows the custom controls on that bank to be accessible again.

• Use the Type knob to select the custom control bank type you want to create. You
› Audio — Select this option for custom controls that communicate with
external audio mixers.
› Normal — Select this option for custom controls that perform any function
except communicating with external audio mixers.
› Transport — Select this option for device transport commands. Normal
custom controls cannot be assigned to a Transport bank.
ports.
Support.
Once you have created all the custom control banks you need, you should name them.

• on device transport commands, refer to the section “Device Transport Commands” on
page Eng 10-36.
• on assigning functions to bank buttons, refer to the section “Custom Control Shortcuts”
on page Eng 10-34.
Naming Custom Control Banks and Shortcuts

The name you apply to a custom control bank or shortcut appears on the menus, the mnemonic
above the custom control button, and the buttons on the Shot Box Menu. This allows you to easily
distinguish between different custom control banks or shortcuts, and between banks and custom
controls.
Operating Tip — You can revert the name of a bank or shortcut to the default at any time by
pressing Default on the Bank Names Menu. This will not default any custom mnemonic
settings.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Custom Controls  Modify

Name.
Bank/Function Names Menu

2. Name a custom control bank or shortcut as follows:
• Use the Bank/Function knob to select the custom control bank or shortcut you
want to name.
more information on using the Bank/Function Names Menu to enter a name, or set up the
mnemonics for the custom control button.
• Enter the new name for the custom control bank or shortcut in the New Name field.
The name can be no more than 13 characters in length.
3. Press Accept New Name to store the new name and mnemonic settings.
ports.
Support.

Programming Control Panel Functions
This section provides information on programming standard control panel functions, such as
crosspoint selection and other button presses. Refer to the section “Programming Special
Functions” on page Eng 10-15 for information on programming special functions.
If you are creating a custom control that contains re-entered MLEs and intend to use the custom
control on different switchers, or you are creating a custom control for use with an OverDrive®
Production Control System, you should create a Relative Custom Control. Refer to the section
“Relative Custom Controls” on page Eng 10-11 for more information.
In a MultiPanel configuration, custom controls only record actions for the MLEs that are assigned
to the control panel that the custom control is being recorded on. If that custom control is run on a
different control panel, with different MLEs assigned to it, the custom control still performs
actions on the MLEs that were assigned to the original control panel.
Note — Entering the Custom Control Menu stops all custom controls that were started from
that control panel, but does not affect running custom controls that were started from other
control panels. You can still start a custom control from another control panel.
Operating Tip — You can record a custom control to a Bank button, however, you will not be
able to run that custom control directly from the control panel.
1. Press HOME  Custom Controls. If the Custom Control button is grayed out, the
Custom Control Menu is being displayed on another panel connected to the system.
Custom Controls Menu 1-2

2. Select the custom control button you want to record to as follows:
• Use the Bank knob to select the bank that you want to record the custom control
on.
• Use the Button knob to select the custom control button you want to record to.
Important — Custom Control buttons with an  or an @ next to them have already been
programmed. For information on editing this custom control, refer to the section “Editing
Custom Controls” on page Eng 10-29.
3. Press Start Recording. The custom control button that is being recorded to starts to
flash, indicating that a custom control is being recorded to that custom control button.

Note — If you do not want to save the custom control you just recorded, or you do not want to
record a custom control, press Cancel Recording.
Recording — Custom Controls Menu 1-2

4. Press the buttons on the control panel that you want to have recorded in the custom
control. Refer to the section “Tips for Working with Custom Controls” on page Eng
10-2 for more information on what types of actions can be recorded into a control panel
custom control.
5. Press Finish Recording to finish recording to the custom control. The custom control
button will stop flashing. The size of the custom control you just created is shown next
to the name, in the Selected field on the left of the menu (xx/yy bytes). The first
number (xx) is the size of the macro, and the second is the size of all the macros in the
selected bank (yy).

• on the setting the Multiple Custom Control option, refer to the section “Personality List”
on page Eng 11-2.
Relative Custom Controls

Relative Custom Controls store the MLE re-entry position so that they can be taken on-air from
any MLE that is re-entered on the PGM/PST MLE. For example, if you have MLE 2 re-entered
into MLE 3 (Figure 10.3), of a Vision 2.5, and record a standard custom control event for MLE
2, that custom control event will only run on MLE 2. The standard custom control will only
record that the buttons on MLE 2 were pressed, and does not record that the MLE was re-entered
into MLE 3.
MLE 2
MLE 3 On-Air
Figure 10.3 MLE 2 Re-entered into MLE 3, the Program/Preset MLE
If you record the same events as a relative custom control, you could recall the button presses
made on MLE 2 on MLE 1 (Figure 10.4), if MLE 1 is re-entered into MLE 3.

MLE 1
MLE 3 On-Air
Figure 10.4 MLE 1 Re-entered into MLE 3, the Program/Preset MLE
Note — Relative Custom Controls can only be properly recorded and run on upper MLEs that
are re-entered onto the PGM/PST MLE. If the MLE is not re-entered, you will not be able to
properly record or run a relative custom control. Instead, the relative custom control will act like
a normal custom control when run.
Relative custom controls are not MLE specific, as normal custom controls, but instead are
re-entry specific. This means that the re-entry order, or levels that the relative custom control was
recorded on, do not need to be the same in order to run that custom control. For example, if we
again record a relative custom control on MLE 2, which is re-entered into MLE 3 (Figure 10.3),
we can run that relative custom control with more or fewer MLEs. If we have MLE 1 re-entered
into MLE 2 and MLE 2 re-entered into MLE 3 (Figure 10.5), the relative custom control is run
on MLE 1.
MLE 1
MLE 2
MLE 3 On-Air
Figure 10.5 MLE 1 Re-entered into MLE 2, Re-entered into MLE 3, the Program/Preset MLE
Important — If you record a relative custom control across multiple re-entered MLEs, at least
the same number of MLEs must be re-entered in order to run the entire custom control. For
example, if a relative custom control that uses 2 MLEs is run on a one MLE switcher, the actions
to be run on the second MLE are ignored.
If we have no MLEs re-entered (Figure 10.6), the relative custom control is run on MLE 3.
MLE 3 On-Air
Figure 10.6 MLE 3, the Program/Preset MLE with no Re-entry
You can run the same relative custom control on multiple control panels at the same time.
However, a relative custom control can only be stopped from the control panel that it was started
on. The same relative custom control is treated as an independent custom on each control panel.
Programming Relative Custom Controls

1. Set up your MLE re-entry configuration to record the relative custom control at the
re-entry level you want. Refer to the section “Re-entry” on page Ops 4-13 for more
information on MLE re-entry.
Custom Control Menu is active on another panel connected to the system.

on.
Important — Custom Control buttons with an  or an @ next to them have already been
programmed. For information on editing this custom control, refer to the section “Editing
Custom Controls” on page Eng 10-29.
4. Press Start Relative Recording. The custom control button that is being recorded to
starts to flash, indicating that a custom control is being recorded to that custom control
button.
5. Press the buttons on the control panel that you want to have recorded in the custom
control. Refer to the section “Tips for Working with Custom Controls” on page Eng
10-2 for more information on what types of actions can be recorded into a control panel
custom control.
6. Press Finish Recording to finish recording to the custom control. The custom control
button stops flashing.
Running Multiple Custom Controls

The Multiple Custom Controls feature allows you to have a single custom control start multiple
other custom controls, or you can manually start multiple custom controls using the
corresponding custom control buttons. A maximum of 10 custom controls can be running at the
same time. All the custom controls will continue to play out until they reach the end, or loop
(Figure 10.7).
Important — The switcher does not track custom controls that are started as part of another
custom control. Running multiple custom controls that start the same custom control, or editing
a custom control that is run by another custom control, could produce unexpected results. Only
Relative custom controls can have multiple instances of the same custom control running at the
same time.
Operating Tip — You can insert a Stop Other Custom Controls command that will stop all
other running custom controls, except the one that is currently running.

Custom
Control #2
Run Custom
Control Command
Custom
Control #1
Manually Start
Custom Control
Custom
Control #3
Figure 10.7 Multiple Custom Controls Feature On
If the Multiple Custom Controls feature is turned off, a Run Custom Control command ends the
current custom control. Pressing another custom control button also stops the first custom control
and starts the second (Figure 10.8).
Custom
Control #2
Run Custom
Control Command
Custom
Control #1
Manually Start
Custom Control
Custom
Control #3
Figure 10.8 Multiple Custom Controls Feature Off
You must have the multiple custom controls feature enabled from the Personality Menu to be able
to run multiple custom controls.

• on programming special custom control commands, refer to the section “Programming
Special Functions” on page Eng 10-15.
• on naming a custom control, refer to the section “Naming Custom Controls” on
page Eng 10-28.
• on setting the Multiple Custom Control feature, refer to the section “Personality List” on
page Eng 11-2.

Programming Special Functions
Special functions allow you to include events not associated with a button press into a custom
control, such as a Time Clock function. A special function can be inserted into any existing
custom control, or used when creating a new custom control.
Note — Entering the Custom Control Menu stops all custom controls that were started from
that control panel, but does not affect running custom controls that were started from other
control panels.
2. Select the custom control you want to record to.
3. Press Start Recording  Insert Special.
Insert Special Menus

4. Select the Device or Input that you want to apply the command to.
5. Select the command you want to insert into the custom control. Refer to the following
table (Table 10.1) for a list of available commands for your device.
6. Press Insert to insert the selected command into the custom control.
7. Press HOME.
8. Press Custom Controls.
9. Press Finish Recording, or the flashing custom control button, to finish recording to
the selected custom control. The custom control button stops flashing.
Table 10.1 Insert Special Custom Control Commands

Class Commands Sub-Menu Description
External Devices
Audio Fader The Assign Fader custom control allows you to assign a different audio
channel to an audio fader.
1. Use the Fader knob to select the audio fader you want to assign an audio
Audio Fader Assign Fader
channel to.
2. Use the Audio Src knob to select the audio channel you want to assign to
the audio channel.
The Reset Fader custom control allows you to reset the audio fader channel
Reset Fader
assignments back to the default setting of the audio fader map.

The Set AFV Level custom control allows you to set a new audio level for the
Set AFV Lvl audio channel assigned to an audio fader. This new level is then used for all
audio follow video transitions.
Special The AFV Off custom control turns off normal Audio Follow Video (AFV)
functionality. Audio channel assigned to video sources will not automatically
Audio Mixer AFV Off be taken on-air with the video source. Audio channel can still be taken on-air
manually. The AFV Off functionality remains active until the AFV On
custom control is run.
The AFV On custom control returns the switcher to normal Audio Follow
AFV On
Video (AFV) functionality, after the AFV Off custom control was run.
The AFV Hold custom control allows you to have audio channel assigned to
AFV Hold video sources automatically taken on-air with the video source, but are
unchanged when the video source is taken off-air.
The Assign Audio custom control has two roles when working with audio. In
normal mode, it allows you to access the levels for the audio channel or group
Assign Audio you have assigned to that button. In audio override mode, it allows you to
perform audio only transition and override the normal audio follow video
operation.
The Audio All Off custom control allows you to fade all audio channels on
either the program or preset bus off. This can be useful for quickly removing
Audio All Off
all audio from either bus, or taking all audio channels off-air after you have
performed an Audio Memory Recall.
The Audio Channel Off custom control allows you to turn an audio channel,
or group, off. This can be useful if you want to take an audio channel, or
group, off-air at once. You can use the Audio Channel Off for either the
Audio CH Off program or preset buses.
You can include a number of Audio Channel Off events in a single custom
control, allowing you to turn multiple audio channels, or groups, off for either
the Program or Preset buses.
The Audio Channel On custom control allows you to turn an audio channel,
or group, on at the level it was last on at, or leave it unchanged as the channel
is already on-air. This can be useful if you want to take an audio channel, or
group, on-air at once. You can use the Audio Channel On for either the
Audio CH On program or preset buses.
You can include a number of Audio Channel On events in a single custom
control, allowing you to turn multiple audio channels, or groups, on for either
the program or preset buses. Unlike the Audio Memory function, the Reset
Audio will return the switcher to audio follow video operation.
The Audio Memory custom control allows you to recall a memory that has
been stored on the Audio Mixer. This can be used to take a number of audio
Audio Memory channels on-air at different levels all at once. Refer to the documentation that
came with your Audio Mixer for more information on storing audio
memories.
The Audio Mute Off custom control allows you to un-mute an audio channel,
Aud Mute Off
or group. This is the same as pressing mute on the Audio Mixer.
The Audio Mute On custom control allows you to mute an audio channel, or
Aud Mute On
group. This is the same as pressing mute on the Audio Mixer.

The PGM Audio Level/Duration custom control allows you to override the
levels for audio channels on the Program bus over a number of fields. If the
audio channel is already on-air, you can change the level or take it off-air, if
the channel is off, you can take the channel on-air as an override. PGM
Audio Level custom controls differ from Audio Channel On custom
controls in that you select the level that you want the audio channel to be set
to, and the length of time you want to change in level to occur over. When
run, the custom control will alter the level of the channel over the selected
duration, even if it is on-air.
PGM Aud Lv Dur 1. Use the Group knob to select the channel or group you want to create the
custom control for.
2. Press Level, and use the Level knob to select the audio level you want to
take the selected channels to.
3. Press Duration, and use the Fields knob to select the length of time, in
frames, that you want it to take to change the audio level.
You can include a number of PGM Audio Level events in a single custom
control, allowing you to alter multiple audio channels, or groups, at the same
time.
The PST Audio Level custom control allows you to override the levels for
audio channels on the preset bus. If the audio channel is already on-air, you
can change the level or take it off-air, if the channel is off, you can take the
channel on-air as an override. PST Audio Level custom controls differ from
Audio Channel On custom controls in that you select the level that you want
the audio channel to be set to. When run, the custom control will alter the
PST Audio Lvl level of the channel, even if it is on-air. Audio CH On will only take the
channel on-air if it is off and will not change the level. This could be useful
when you want to alter the levels of a number of channels, or groups, at the
same time.
You can include a number of PST Audio Level events in a single custom
control, allowing you to alter multiple audio channels, or groups, at the same
time.
The Reset Audio custom control allows you to return to the normal audio
follow video mode and remove all currently selected overrides. This can be
Reset Audio
performed for either the program or the preset bus. You must set up two
custom controls if you want to perform both independently.
Insert Audio The Go To Cut custom control allows you to have the Audio Server cue to a
Audio Server Go To Cut
Server selected cut or track. You must select the clip
The Pause custom control allows you to have the Audio Server go into pause
Pause
mode.
The Play custom control allows you to have the Audio Server go into play
Play
mode, or 1× forward
Stop The Stop custom control allows you to have the Audio Server stop.
The Execute Macro custom control allows you to have a custom control on
the switcher trigger a macro on a character generator. Enter the macro
command you want to run in the Macro Name field (up to 62 characters). For
example, to open and execute a macro on a Chyron, enter
Character “Lyric.Open<name>”. Additional commands can be sent to the CG by
Execute Macro Insert CG
Generator inserting another Execute Macro custom control.
Note: You must insert a pause between execute macro commands in a custom
control to ensure that there is enough time for each event to be processed
properly.
The GPI custom control allows you to trigger a GPI input on the CG. Use the
GPI
keypad on the Global Memory Module to select the GPI you want to trigger.
The Load custom control allows you to load a page or template into the
Character Generator Program channel. Use the keypad on the Global
Load To PGM
Memory Module to select the template and layer you want. Press Change
Template to enter a new template, and Layer to enter a new layer.

The Load custom control allows you to load a page or template into the
Character Generator Preview channel. Use the keypad on the Global Memory
Load To PV Module to select the template and layer you want. Press Change Template
to enter a new template. Press Layer On and use the Layer knob to enter a
new layer.
Play The Play custom control allows you to play an animation.
The Read custom control allows you to load a page or template into the
Character Generator Preview channel. Use the keypad on the Global Memory
Read
Module to select the template and layer you want. Press Change Template
to enter a new template, and Layer to enter a new layer.
The Resume custom control allows you to resume playing an animation that
Resume was paused. Use the keypad on the Global Memory Module to select the layer
you want. Press Layer On and use the Layer knob to enter a new layer.
The Sequence Next custom control allows you to select the previous effect in
Seq Next
the sequence.
The Sequence Previous custom control allows you to select the next effect in
Seq Prev
the sequence.
The Sequence Take custom control allows you to take the current effect in the
Seq Take
sequence on-air.
The Set folder custom control allows you to set the default folder for pages or
Set Folder
templates.
The Take custom control allows you to play the next effect that is cued up on
the Character Generator. The next effect will be on the preview (PV) of the
Take
Character Generator and will be taken to the program (PGM) of the Character
Generator with this custom control.
The Take Out custom control allows you to clear all graphics from the
Take Out specified channel. Press Layer On and use the Layer knob to enter a new
layer.
Insert DVE The Frame Advance custom control advances the DVE effect forward by one
DVE Frame Advance
frame.
The Frame Reverse custom control allows you to reverse the DVE effect
Frame Reverse
backwards by one frame.
The Go To End custom control allows you to cue the DVE to the end of its
Go To End
effect.
Go To Start The Go To Start custom control cues the DVE to the start of its effect.
The Key Frame Adv custom control allows you to cue the DVE effect to the
Key Frame Adv
next Keyframe boundary.
The Key Frame Rev custom control allows you to cue the DVE effect to the
Key Frame Rev
previous Keyframe boundary.
Pause The Pause custom control allows you to pause the DVE effect.
Play The Play custom control plays the DVE effect forward.
Play Rev The Play Rev custom control allows you to play the DVE effect in reverse.
The Recall custom control allows you to recall a selected DVE effect (from 1
Recall
to 99).
The Rewind custom control allows you to rewind the DVE effect (simulates a
Rewind
shuttle reverse).
Stop The Stop custom control allows you to top the DVE effect.
Special The Reset GPI custom control allows you to reset the state of an output GPI
GPI Reset GPI connection. This can be used to return an output GPI to a known state if there
is a problem.

The Simulate GPI custom control allows you to manually trigger a GPI input
Simulate GPI on the switcher using a custom control. The switcher reacts as if a trigger was
received on the selected input GPI.
The Trigger GPI command allows you to trigger a pre-selected output GPI
Trigger GPI
using a custom control.
Insert Monitor The Assign Channel custom control allows you to program a custom control
Monitor Wall Assign Chan Wall Control to assign a specific input channel to a particular monitor on the Monitor Wall.
Each monitor in a layout requires an input channel for the video it displays.
The Modify Dynamic Text custom control allows you to program a custom
control to assign specific, pre-defined, Dynamic text to a particular text
address on a Monitor Wall layout. The text address will have to be assigned to
a template for a custom control to be able to change the text.
Modify Text There are two types of text labels used on a Monitor Wall: Static and
Dynamic. Static text labels are set during the creation of the Monitor Wall
setup and can only be modified using the tools provided with the Monitor
Wall. Dynamic text labels can be modified at any time from the Vision
switcher.
The Layout custom control allows you to program a custom control to load a
Load Layout specific layout on a Monitor Wall. A Monitor Wall can have several different
layouts created, each with a variety of monitors and inputs.
The Act MLE Trans custom control allows you to have all MLEs that are
Automation: Act contributing to the program output of the switcher, except for the program
OverDrive® MLE Trans
Special
MLE, to be transitioned according to the settings in the MLE Transition
Module.
The Keys Off Air custom control allows you to have all the on-air keys, on all
Automation: Keys
MLEs that are contributing to the program output of the switcher, dissolved
Off Air
off-air. MultiDSK keys are not affected by this custom control.
OverDrive: Take & The Take & Prepare Next custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to take
Prep to current shot on-air and prepare the next shot in the rundown.
OverDrive: Prep The Prepare Next custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to prepare the
Next next shot in the rundown.
OverDrive: Prep The Prepare Previous custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to prepare
Prev the previous shot in the rundown.
The Prepared CC custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to run one of
OverDrive: Prep CC the prepared CC buttons on rundown control. The buttons are numbered 1-6.
• Use the CC knob to select the custom control you want to run.
The On-Air CC custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to run one of the
OverDrive: On-Air on-air CC buttons on rundown control. The buttons are numbered 1-6.
CC
• Use the CC knob to select the custom control you want to run.
The Transition custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to activate a

OverDrive: particular button on rundown control. The buttons are numbered 1-4.
Transition
• Use the Trans knob to select transition rate.
The Rundown custom control allows you to tell OverDrive to run a selected
OverDrive: event in a rundown.
Rundown
• Use the Cmd knob to select the command.
Insert Pbus The Recall custom control allows you to have the Pbus device recall a
Pbus Recall memory from the selected register when the custom control is run. You can
choose between 0 and 4095.
The Store custom control allows you to have the Pbus device store a memory
Store to the selected register when the custom control is run. You can choose
between 0 and 4095.

The Trigger custom control allows you to have a trigger value sent to the
Trigger selected port on the Pbus device when the custom control is run. You can
choose between 0 and 15.
The Recall Shot custom control allows you to recall a shot on a particular
Robotic Insert Robotic robotic camera with a specific duration for the recall to be performed. When
Recall Shot
Camera Camera Control programming this custom control, you are recalling a specific camera on a
remote port by selecting its input source, or input name.
The Resave Last custom control allows you to overwrite the last prepared
shot or recalled move with the current position of the camera. For a move,
Resave Last
only the prepared position is overwritten. You must re-prepare the move
before you can execute it.
The Prepare Move custom control allows you to prepare a camera move on a
Prepare Move
particular camera. Use the Shot knob to select the move you want to prepare.
The Execute Move custom control allows you to execute a prepared camera
Execute Move move on a particular camera. Use the Shot knob to select the move you want
to execute. The move must be prepared before it can be executed.
The Cam All Stop custom control allows you to quickly stop all robotic
Cam All Stop camera operations. Use this command to stop all motion of a robotic camera
with a single command.
The Deselect Cam custom control allows you to deselect the robotic camera
that was last selected. When a camera is selected by the switcher, that camera
Deselect Cam
remains selected until another camera is selected, or the Deselect Cam
custom control is run.
The Grab Positioner custom control allows you to select which camera is
assigned to the positioner by cycling through all the cameras selected on
Grab Positioner preview, one at a time. Each time the custom control is run, the positioner
assignment will jump to the next camera that will go on-air with the next
transition.
Insert RossTalk The SeqIn custom control allows you to load a template to air on a specific
Cmd layer to the output channel selected in the template. The Sequencer focus
moves to this item.
RossTalk SeqIn Take ID — Press Take ID and use the Take ID knob to select the take id for
the template you want to load.
Layer — Press Layer ID and use the Layer ID knob to select the layer you
want to use.
The Take custom control allows you to load a template to air in a specific
frame-buffer and on a specific layer.
Take ID — Press Take ID and use the Take ID knob to select the take id for
Take
want to use.
Frame-Buffer — Press Buffer ID and use the Buffer ID knob to select the
frame-buffer you want to use.
The SeqOut custom control allows you to take a template off-air.

SeqOut Take ID — Press Take ID and use the Take ID knob to select the take id for
the template you want to take off-air.
The ClearFB custom control allows you to clear a specific frame-buffer.

ClearFB Frame-Buffer — Use the Buffer ID knob to select the frame-buffer you
want to use.

The ClearLayerFB custom control allows you to clear a specific layer in a
specific frame-buffer.
ClearLayerFB
want to use.
The Resume custom control allows you to resume a specific layer in a

specific frame-buffer.
Resume
want to use.
ClearAllFB The ClearAllFB custom control allows you to clear all frame-buffers.
The Read custom control allows you to take the current selection in the
Read
Sequencer to air.
The Next custom control allows you to take the current selection in the
Next
Sequencer to air and advance the current selection to the next item in the list.
The Up custom control allows you to move the current selection in the
Up
Sequencer to the item above in the list.
The Down custom control allows you to move the current selection in the
Down
Sequencer to the item below in the list.
The Focus custom control allows you to set the Sequencer focus to a specific
template.
Focus
Take ID — Press Take ID and use the Take ID knob to select the take id for
The GPI custom control allows you to trigger a simulated GPI.
GPI
GPI — Use the GPI knob to select the GPI that you want to use.
The TypeInCmd custom control allows you to enter a manual RossTalk

TypeInCmd
command into a custom control.
Insert Router The Fire Router Salvo custom control allows to fire a salvo on the router. You
Control will have to program your salvos on the router itself in order to be able to fire
Router Fire Salvo
them. Refer to your router documentation for information on storing a salvo
on your particular router.
The Take XPT custom control allows to you change the source and
Take XPT
destination on the router with a single custom control.
Video Server/ Insert VTR The Fast Forward custom control allows you to have the VTR go into full fast
Fast Forward
VTR forward mode.
The Frame Advance custom control allows you to have the VTR move (jog)
Frame Advance
the video one frame forward.
The Frame Reverse custom control allows you to have the VTR move (jog)
Frame Reverse
the video one frame reverse.
Select this command to have the VTR cue to a selected clip. When you select
Go To Clip Go To Clip, the Clip knob appears, allowing you to select the number (00-99)
for the clip you want to cue up.
The In Flag Reset custom control allows you to turn the Entry In mode on the
In Flag Reset VTR off. When the Entry In mode is off, the VTR will rewind the preroll time
when Preroll command is issued.
The In Recall custom control allows you to turn the Entry In mode on the
VTR on. When the Entry In mode is on, the VTR will go to the in-entry point
In Recall that has previously been set on the VTR, minus the preroll, when the Preroll
command is issued. The in-entry point is set from the VTR, and not from the
switcher.

Pause The Pause custom control allows you to have the VTR to into pause mode.
The Play custom control allows you to play a video clip (with alpha if the
Play option is set for the device). The switcher will confirm the status of the video
server, and then send the play command.
The Play Loop Off custom control allows you to have a currently looping clip
Play Loop Off
stop playing the next time it reaches the end.
The Play Loop On custom control allows you to have the currently cued and
Play Loop On
playing clip loop back to the beginning when it finished playing.
The Play no Stat custom control allows you to play a video clip (with alpha if
Play no Stat the option is set for the device). The switcher does not confirm the status of
the video server, but immediately sends the play command.
The Preroll custom control allows you to have the VTR go to the predefined
in-entry, minus a set preroll time, when In Recall is active. When In Recall is
Preroll not active, the VTR will rewind the pre-roll time from the current point. The
in-entry point and preroll time are set from the VTR, and not from the
switcher.
The Record custom control allows you to have the VTR go into record mode.
You must use the Stop custom control to stop the recording. It is a good
Record
practice to create a Stop custom control before creating the Record custom
control so that you can stop the recording.
The Rewind custom control allows you to have the VTR go into full fast
Rewind
rewind mode.
The Standby Off custom control allows you to take the VTR out of standby
mode. When not in standby mode, the heads of the VTR are removed from
Standby Off the tape, showing noise or black on the video output.
This command will only work if the VTR is stopped.
The Standby On custom control allows you to put the VTR in standby mode.
In standby mode, the heads of the VTR are engaged, showing video on the
Standby On
video output. The VTR automatically goes into this mode when the Play,
Rewind, Fast Forward, or Pause commands are issued.
The Stop custom control allows you to have the VTR perform a stop and
Stop
eject. This command stops the selected channel, and unloads the clip.
Internal Devices and Commands

Time Clock The Count Down custom control allows you to have the custom control start
Time Clock Count Down the time clock counting down from a preset time to 0. The preset starting time
is set using either the Reset custom control, or from the Time Clock Menu.
The Count Up custom control allows you to have the custom control start the
Count Up
time clock counting up from 0.
The Count Down/Up custom control allows you to have the custom control
Count Down/Up start the time clock counting down from a preset time to 0, and then back.
This will continue until the Reset or Stop command is given.
The Reset custom control allows you to have the custom control reset the
Reset time clock to the time selected using the Reset Time knob on the Insert
Time Clock Menu.
The Stop custom control allows you to have the custom control stop the time
Stop
clock.
Special The Go To Menu command allows you to use a custom control to navigate to
Menus Go To Menu a particular menu. This allows you to quickly jump between frequently used
menus without having to navigate through the menu system.
Special The Cut Keys custom control allows you create a custom control that will cut
Transitions Cut Keys
keys on or off on a particular MLE, or for the MultiDSK Keyers.

The Transition Keys custom control allows you create a custom control that
Trans Keys will transition keys on or off on a particular MLE, or for the MultiDSK
Keyers.
Special The Safe Title custom control allows you to create a custom control that will
Safe Title Safe Title
recall a specific safe title configuration on the preview overlay.
Special The Hold CC custom control allows you place a command in a custom
control that will stop a custom control where the hold is placed in the custom
Custom control. To continue the custom control, you must press the custom control
Hold CC button again, or use a GPI trigger.
Control
The mnemonic for the custom control shows Held when the custom control
is at hold.
The Hold for Group custom control allows you to place a command in a
custom control that will stop a custom control where the hold is placed in the
custom control. The custom control will hold until the Run Held Group
custom control event is triggered for the group that the Hold For Group
command was assigned to. For example, if you insert the Hold For Group A
Hold For Group command into two custom controls and Hold For Group B into another two
custom controls, the Run Held Group A event will only resume the first two
(group A) custom control. The remaining two (group B) custom controls will
remain holding until the Run Held Group B event is triggered.
The mnemonic for the custom control shows HldFor Run when the custom
control is at hold.
The Hold for Run custom control allows you to place a command in a custom
control that will stop a custom control where the hold is placed in the custom
control. The custom control will hold until the Run All Held CCs custom
Hold For Run control event is triggered.
The mnemonic for the custom control shows HldFor Run when the custom
control is at hold.
The Loop CC custom control allows you to have a custom control run
Loop CC continuously until you stop it, or a Stop Custom Control command is
executed from another custom control.
The Notify End CC custom control is for internal use only. Only use this
Notify End CC
custom control if instructed to do so by Ross Video Technical Support.
The Pause CC custom control allows you to place a command in a custom

control that will stop a custom control where the pause is placed in the
Pause CC
custom control. The length of time that the custom control is paused is set
when the pause event is inserted into the custom control.
The Run Held custom control allows you to resume all of the custom controls
Run Held that are at hold from a Hold or Hold For Run event. Custom controls that are
at hold from a Hold For Group event are unaffected.
The Run Held Group custom control allows you to resume all of the custom
controls that are at hold from the Hold For Group event for the same group.
Only the custom controls that used the Hold For Group event, and are of the
same group, resume. For example, if you insert the Hold For Group A
Run Held Group
command into two custom controls and Hold For Group B into another two
custom controls, the Run Held Group A event will only resume the first two
(group A) custom control. The remaining two (group B) custom controls will
remain holding until the Run Held Group B event is triggered.
The Stop Held X custom control allows you to stop all of the custom controls
that are at hold from the Hold For Group event for the same group. Only the
custom controls that used the Hold For Group event, and are of the same
group, stop. For example, if you insert the Hold For Group A command into
Stop Held X
two custom controls and Hold For Group B into another two custom controls,
the Stop Held Group A event will only stop the first two (group A) custom
control. The remaining two (group B) custom controls will remain holding
until the Stop or Resume Held Group B event is triggered.

The Stop Other CC custom control allows you place a command in a custom
control that will stop all other running custom controls, except the one the
Stop Other CC
command is in. This can be used to stop other looping custom controls at a
specific point.
The Variable Pause CC custom control allows you to place a command in a
custom control that will stop a custom control where the pause is placed in
the custom control. The length of time that the custom control is paused is set
V Pause CC as the result of the Pause Equation.
Refer to the section “Custom Control Variable Pause” on page Eng 10-37
for information on setting a pause variable.
Special The Run Sequence custom control allows you to have a custom control run a
sequence on the selected MLE and Keyer. This allows you to run a dissolve
or wipe and still run a sequence in the same MLE. The sequence you want to
run must be loaded before running the custom control.
Sequences Run Sequence
If you are using a Relative Custom Control, you must select the PGM/PST
MLE as the MLE to run the sequence on.
You do not need to have SEQ selected on the Transition Module.
Video Insert Video Refer to the section “Video Checksum Custom Controls” on page Eng
n/a Checksum
Checksums 17-32 for more information on using this diagnostic tool.

Attaching Custom Controls to Panel Buttons
The Attach Custom Control feature allows you to attach a custom control to any button on the
control panel or auxiliary control panel mapped to an internal panel row. This does not include the
buttons on the touchscreen display, custom control bus, or Shotbox.
Custom controls are attached to the physical button on the MLE, and not the function of the
button. This means that if a custom control is attached to a crosspoint button, changing the bus
map, or using the shifted bus, does not affect the custom control attachment to the original button.
For example, if you attach a custom control to a crosspoint button on MLE 1, the custom control
runs if you press that button, or Shift and that button. If you assign the MLE to a different panel
row, the custom control attachment follows the MLE to the new panel row.
If you include a button in a custom control that has another custom control attached to it, the
command to run the second, attached, custom control is ignored when the initial custom control is
run. This does not apply to actual custom control buttons.
Note — The CC/Macro Attachments personality option must be set to on for custom controls
attached to control panel buttons to be executed when that button is pressed.
Attaching a Custom Control to a Panel Button

Custom controls are attached either after (Post-Attach), before (Pre-Attach), or instead-of
(Replace) the function of the button.
Important — When you attach a custom control to a panel button, the association is with the
custom control button, and not the custom control. If you change which custom control is
assigned to the custom control button, that change is also applied to the attachment.
1. Press HOME  Custom Controls  More  Attach Macros.
Attach Custom Controls Menu

2. Select the button on the Vision control panel or local Auxiliary Control Panel that you
want to attach a custom control to. Only Auxiliary Control Panels that are mapped to
internal panel rows can have custom controls attached to the buttons.
Operating Tip — Toggle Show Attach on the Attach Custom Controls Menu to On to
show the control panel button that you are attaching the custom control to.
3. Select the custom control that you want to attach to the selected button as follows:

• Use the Bank knob to select the custom control bank that you want to select the
custom control from.
• Use the Macro knob to select the custom control that you want to attach.
4. Use the Attachment Type knob to select how the custom control is attached to the
button as follows:
• Post-Attach — Select this option to attach the custom control after the normal
action of the button. When the control panel button is pressed, the normal function
of the button is executed, followed by the custom control. For example, if the action
of the button is an auto transition, the switcher will start the transition and then
execute the custom control. Note that the switcher does not wait for the transition to
complete before executing the custom control
• Pre-Attach — Select this option to attach the custom control before the normal
action of the button. When the control panel button is pressed, the custom control is
run, followed by the normal function of the button. The switcher does not wait for
the custom control to complete before executing the normal function of the button.
• Replace — Select this option to attach the custom control instead of the normal
action of the button. When the control panel button is pressed, the custom control is
run. The normal function of the button is not executed.
5. Press Attach.
Operating Tip — If you attach a custom control to a crosspoint button on the keyer bus, the
Show CC’s on Key Bus personality option allows you to have the name of the custom control
shown on the mnemonic for that button.

• on CC/Macro Attachment, refer to the section “Personality List” on page Eng 11-2.
• on Show CC’s on Key Bus, refer to the section “Personality List” on page Eng 11-2.
Deleting Custom Control Attachment to Panel Buttons

1. Press HOME  Custom Controls  More  Attach Macros.
2. Toggle Show List to On.
Show List — Attach Custom Controls Menu
Operating Tip — You can delete all the attachments of custom controls to control panel
buttons by pressing Delete All Attachments on the Attach Custom Controls Menu.

3. Use the Scroll list with Knob 3 knob to select the custom control attachment that you
want to remove.
4. Press Delete Attachment.

Naming Custom Controls
When a custom control has been programmed, it can be named. This name appears on the menus,
the mnemonics, and the Shot Box buttons for the custom controls. This is useful when working
with multiple custom control banks. As you switch banks, the mnemonics display the names for
the custom controls on the selected bank.
1. Press HOME  Custom Controls.
2. Select the custom control button you want to name.
Note — If the custom control that you want to change the name for is already running, the
Modify Name button is gray, and you cannot modify the name until the custom control has
stopped.
3. Press Modify Name.
Custom Control Name Menu
more information on using the Custom Control Name Menu to enter a name, or set up the
mnemonics for the custom control button.
4. Enter the new name for the custom control bank in the New Name field. The name can
be no more than 8 characters in length.

Editing Custom Controls
Once a custom control has been created, you can go back and edit that custom control by inserting
or removing events. Editing a custom control also allows you to view the sequence of events that
were added, and then insert pauses, holds, or special functions or commands, where they are
needed.
You cannot edit a custom control if the custom control is running on another panel connected to
the system.
If a custom control contains pauses or holds, a timeline is shown, indicating the duration of the
custom control, and at which points different events will occur.
Edit Custom Control Menu

The rest of the menu provides additional information on the currently selected event and the total
duration of the custom control. This information is provided as follows:
• Event — The event field indicates the currently selected event, and the total number of
events in the custom control.
• Duration — The duration field indicates the total time (seconds:fields) for the custom
control to play out.
• Event Information — The event information is located at the bottom center of the menu
and provides information on the MLE, key, or memory that is being used in the selected
event. If more than one MLE is involved in the event, then the number for the lowest
number MLE is displayed.
Important — You can only edit a custom control on the same panel it was recorded on, or a
panel with the exact same settings, including MLE assignments and bus maps.
To Edit a Custom Control

2. Select the custom control you want to edit.
3. Press Edit/View. If you have selected a transport custom control, you can only view the
events in the custom.
Note — If you are editing a Relative Custom Control, <relative> appears next to the Bank and
Button identification, and the relative MLE level (R LVL) is displayed instead of the MLE
number.

Edit Custom Controls Menu
Operating Tip — You can test a single event in a custom control by selecting the event you
want to test and pressing Run Single Event. You can use this feature to step through a custom
control to check for errors. Similarly, the Run From Here function allows you to run the custom
control from the currently selected event to the end.
4. Modify an event as follows:

• Use the Event knob to select the event that you want to edit.
• Press Modify Event.
Modify Event Menu

• Modify the event in the same way it was originally inserted.
• Press Accept to save your changes. The Edit Custom Control Menu is displayed.
5. Insert a control panel button event as follows:
• Use the Event knob to select the location in the custom control that you want to
insert the event. The new event is inserted before the selected event.
• Press Insert Event.

Inserting — Edit Custom Control Menu
• Press the buttons on the control panel that you want to record to the custom control.
Refer to the section “Programming Control Panel Functions” on page Eng 10-10
for more information on inserting control panel events.
• Press Finish Inserting to save your changes. The Edit Custom Control Menu is
displayed.
6. Insert a special function event as follows:
• Use the Event knob to select the location in the custom control that you want to
insert the event. The new event is inserted before the selected event.
• Press Insert Event.
• Press Insert Special.
• Insert the special events that you want to record to the custom control. Refer to the
section “Programming Special Functions” on page Eng 10-15 for more
information on inserting special events.
• Press UP ONE to display the Custom Controls Menus.
• Press Finish Inserting to save your changes. The Edit Custom Control Menu is
displayed.
7. Delete an event as follows:
• Use the Event knob to select the event you want to delete.
• Press Delete Event to delete the selected event.

Managing Custom Controls
When a custom control has been programmed, the commands in that custom control can be
copied, moved, or swapped with other custom controls on the switcher. This allows you to
duplicate custom controls on different banks, or re-organize the custom controls.
You cannot copy, move, or swap a custom control if the custom control is running on another
panel connected to the system.
Important — When you attach a custom control to a panel button, the association is with the
custom control button, and not the custom control. If you change which custom control is
assigned to the custom control button, that change is also applied to the attachment.
1. Press HOME  Custom Controls  Copy/Move Macros.

2. Press Source.
3. Select the source custom control as follows:
• Use the Bank knob to select the bank that the custom control you want to manage is
on.
• Use the Button knob to select the custom control you want to copy, move, or swap.
4. Press Destination.
Destination — Manage Custom Controls Menu

5. Select the destination custom control as follows:
• Use the Bank knob to select the bank that the custom control you want to manage is
on.
• Use the Button knob to select the custom control you want to paste or swap the
custom control to.
6. Copy, Move, or Swap a custom control as follows:
• Press Copy to copy the source custom control to the destination. Both custom
controls will contain the same commands.
• Press Move to move the source custom control to the destination. The commands in
the source custom control are moved to the destination. The source custom control
will be empty after the move.
• Press Swap to swap the source custom control and the destination.

Deleting Custom Controls
Once a custom control have been created, you can delete the entire custom control from the
Custom Controls Menu.
You cannot delete a custom control if the custom control is running on another panel connected to
the system.
2. Select the custom control button you want to delete as follows:
• Use the Bank knob to the select the bank that the custom control you want to delete
is on.
• Use the Button knob to select the custom control you want to delete. Only custom
controls that have been programmed can be deleted.
3. Press Delete Macro. The Delete Custom Control Confirmation Screen is displayed.
Delete Custom Control Confirmation Screen

• Press Confirm to delete the custom control.
• Press Cancel to cancel deleting the custom control.

Custom Control Shortcuts
Shortcuts for common custom control commands can be mapped to custom control panel buttons.
This allows you to perform tasks, such as recording and saving a custom control, right from the
control panel, without having to use the menu system.
Important — Custom Control Shortcuts require the mnemonics option for the custom control
bus be installed.
Note — The Custom Control Shortcuts do not support the CC Soft Shot Box, the Custom
Control Shot Box, or the Auxiliary Control Panels.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Custom Controls.
Custom Controls Menu

2. Use the Bank/Function knob to select the shortcut you want to assign to a button.
• Record — Select this option to create a custom control shortcut that allows you to
record a custom control without using the menu system. To record a custom control
using the shortcut, press and hold the Record button and select the custom control
you want to record to. Both buttons flash red while recording. Press the Record
(Cancel) button again to cancel the recording, or the custom control button you are
recording to (Save), to save the recording.
• Pause(Hold) — Select this option to create a custom control shortcut that allows
you to insert a pause or hold into a custom control you are recording, without using
the menu system. To insert a pause or hold into a custom control using the shortcut,
press and hold the Pause button. A series of durations, in fields, are shown on the
mnemonics for the custom control bus, as well as Hold, Hold for Run, and Hold
for Run A-Z. Press the custom control button below the event to insert that pause or
hold into the custom control. The Hold for Run A-Z buttons can only show as many
groups as there are available custom control buttons on the bus.
• Bank — Select this option to create a custom control shortcut that allows you to
select any custom control bank without assigning each bank to a custom control
button. Press and hold the Bank button and all the other custom control buttons
change to bank select buttons. Select the bank you want and release both buttons.
• Run Held — Select this option to create a custom control shortcut that allows you
to resume all of the custom controls that are at hold from a Hold or Hold For Run
event. Custom controls that are at hold from a Hold For Group event are
unaffected.
• Run Held X — Select this option to create a custom control shortcut that allows
you to resume a group of held custom controls that are at hold from the Hold For

Run X event. Press and hold the Run Held X button and all the other custom
control buttons change to group select buttons. Select the group of custom controls
that you want to resume.
• Run A-Z — Select this option to create a custom control shortcut that allows you to
resume a specific group of held custom controls held by the Hold For Group
custom control event. For example, press the Run A button to resume all the
custom controls held in group A.
• Stop CC — Select this option to create a custom control shortcut that allows you to
stop a, or all, running custom controls. The Stop CC command cannot stop a custom
control that is at hold.
› Stop 1 CC — Press and hold the Stop CC button and press the custom
control button for the custom control you want to stop.
› Stop All CCs — Double-Press the Stop CC button.
• Stop Held X — Select this option to create a custom control shortcut that allows
you to stop a group of held custom controls that are at hold from the Hold For Run
X event. Press and hold the Stop Held X button and all the other custom control
buttons change to group select buttons. Select the group of custom controls that you
want to stop.
3. Use the Button knob to select the custom control button that you want to assign as the
shortcut. The custom control button you have selected lights up on the control panel.
ports.
Support.
Operating Tip — You can change the name of a custom control shortcut the same as you
change the bank name. Refer to the section “Naming Custom Control Banks and Shortcuts”
on page Eng 10-8 for more informaiton.

Device Transport Commands
The Device Transport Commands allow you to use custom control buttons to send transport
commands, such as play, stop, rewind, and pause, to a device using the Betacam protocol.
Transport command buttons are tallied for the status of the device.
Transport commands are set up for a single device connected to an input source. If you need to
control multiple devices, you must set up additional custom controls for each device.
Setting up Device Transport Commands

Device transport commands can only be added to a Transport custom control bank.
Custom Control Menu is being displayed on another panel connected to the system.
2. Use the Bank knob to select the Transport bank you want to program the transport
command to.

3. Use the Button knob to select the custom control button you want to record to.
4. Press Assign Button.
5. Press VTR.
6. Use the Input knob to select the VTR that you want to assign the transport command to.
This is the VTR that the custom control will send the commands to.
7. Use the Function knob to select the command you want to assign to the button.
8. Press Insert to insert the command into the custom control. Only a single command can
be programmed into the custom control.
Operating Tip — You can view the contents of a transport custom control by selecting the
custom control button and pressing the View button on the Custom Controls Menu 1-2.

Custom Control Variable Pause
The Custom Control Variable Pause allows you to place a command in a custom control that will
stop, or pause, a custom control where the pause is placed in the custom control. The length of
time that the custom control is paused is set as the result of the Pause Equation.
Variable pauses are commonly used to insert pauses into custom controls to compensate for
satellite uplink latency. For example, you can use a variable in all your custom controls where
you need to sync with a satellite feed. You can then adjust that variable for changes in latency, and
all your custom controls that use that variable are updated.
Setting a Custom Control Variable

1. Press HOME  Custom Controls  More  Set Variables.
Set Variables Menu
Operating Tip — Press Reset All on the Set Variables Menu to set all the variable to the
default value (0).
2. Use the Variable knob to select the variable that you want to set a value for. If you
change the value of a variable, all equations that use that variable will be changed.
3. Use the Frames and Seconds knobs to select the length of time that you want to the
variable set to. The number of frames for each second depends on the video format the
switcher is operating in.
Inserting a Variable Pause

2. Select the custom control you want to record to.
3. Press Start Recording  Insert Special  Special.
4. Use the Function knob to select V Pause CC.

Set Variables Menu
5. In the Enter Pause Eq’n field, enter the equation you want to calculate the length of the
variable pause. The equation can be any combination of variables that are added (+),
subtracted (-) or multiplied (*) together. Negative numbers, division, and spaces are not
supported. Side-by-side variables are multiplied together (AB=A×B).
6. Press Insert to insert the variable pause.

Switcher Personality
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on finalizing the setup of the personality settings of your
switcher, as well as the color schemes use for the control panel.
• Personality List
• Control Panel Button Color Schemes
• Mnemonic Color Schemes
• Control Panel Display Brightness
• Loading Color Schemes
• Lock/Unlock Personality
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Personality • Eng 11–1

Personality List
There are a number of settings for how the switcher will react to different situations, or how
switcher elements appear to the operator. All these settings are grouped together into the Switcher
Personality. These settings include double press rates, memory bank cycling, and sleep time,
among others.
This section covers the items on the Personality Scroll List only.
Note — Personality settings that can be set for an individual control panel must be set from the
control panel, or panel id, you want them to apply to.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality.
Personality Menu 1-2

2. Use the Option knob to select the option you want to set. Refer to the following table
(Table 11.1) for a list of options and values.
3. Use the Value knob to select the value you want to set for the selected option.

• on 3D Pattern Button Assign, refer to the section “DVE Wipe Pattern Button
Assignment” on page Ops 14-13.
• on Standard Mnemonics, refer to the section “Default Mnemonic Appearance” on
page Eng 5-13.
• on Assign Bus Maps, refer to the section “Assigning Panel Bus Maps” on page Eng
7-19.
• on Color Scheme, refer to the section “Control Panel Button Color Schemes” on
page Eng 11-17.
• on MLE Maps, refer to the section “Default MLE Map Assignment” on page Eng
12-5.
• on Preview Font Colors, refer to the section “Preview Overlay Setup” on page Eng
12-30.
• on Autofollow Setup, refer to the section “Auto Follow” on page Eng 12-39.
• on Squeeze & Tease Mode, refer to the section “Squeeze & Tease Mode” on
page Eng 12-6.
Eng 11–2 • Switcher Personality Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Table 11.1 Personality Option Settings
Personality Option Description Values
• On — Select this option to allow a
panel row to be assigned to a different
The Assign MLE feature allows you to MLE.
Assign MLE disable the ability to assign a control
panel row to a different MLE. The • Off — Select this option to disable the
(Assign MLE) control panel row will be locked to the ability to assign a different panel row to
currently assigned MLE. an MLE. The Assign MLE button on
the MLE Sel Button Menu is grayed
out.
The Audio Cut Only feature sets whether
audio transitions occur at the same rate as
the video transition, or whether the audio • On — Select this option to have audio
transitions cut. Note that this is not a true transition cut, regardless of the type or
cut as the speed that one channel is taken rate of the video transition.
Audio Cut Only
off-air and the next channel is take on-air • Off — Select this option when using
(AudioCutOnly) depends on the Audio Mixer. OverDrive, or to have the audio
When Editor Remote Enable is transition at the same rate as the video
Enabled, and OverDrive is controlling or at the Audio Fade rate.
the switcher, the audio transition rate for
the PGM MLE is set from OverDrive.
Depending on how you want audio • All — Select this option to have the
transitions to be performed, you can set switcher perform an audio transition
up the switcher so that it will either when any MLE is transitioned.
perform an audio transition when a • Pgm — Select this option to have the
Audio Transition
transition is performed on any MLE, or switcher perform an audio transition
(AudioTrans) only when a transition is performed on an only when an on-air MLE is
on-air MLE. transitioned. An MLE is considered to
Note: If OverDrive is controlling the be on-air when it is re-entered onto the
switcher, this is locked to All. Program/Preset MLE.
• Relaxed - Select this option to have
The Auto Key Alpha feature allows you the switcher treat the alpha as if it is
Auto Key Alpha to select how the switcher treats the alpha white. The key is not transparent.
(Auto Key Alpha) when the internally generated Black is • Strict - Select this option to have the
assigned to an auto key. switcher treat the alpha as if it is black.
The key is fully transparent.
• Off — Select this option to have
memories not recall KEYS ONLY,
Effects Dissolve and DVE Wipe
settings with the memory. These
The Auto Recall feature sets whether or attributes must be turned on manually
Auto Recall not the switcher includes switcher before the memory is recalled. This is
(Auto Recall) settings, such as Effects Dissolve on or the default setting.
off, with the memory. • On — Select this option to have
memories also recall the KEYS ONLY,
Effects Dissolve (EFF DISS) settings
stored with the memory from the
Global Memory Module.

The Auto Remove Key feature allows
you to have the switcher remove a Keyer • Off — Select this option to have the
from the Next Transition after that Keyer switcher not remove the Keyer from the
has been transitioned off-air from the next transition selection if it has just
Keyers Module. For example, Key 2 is been transitioned off-air from the
Auto Remove Key on-air and it is selected as part of the next Keyers Module.
transition on the Transition Module. If
(AutoRemoveKey) you cut or dissolve Key 2 off-air from the • On — Select this option to have the
Keyers Module, Key 2 will be switcher remove the Keyer from the
de-selected for the next transition on the next transition selection if it has just
Transition Module. If Key 2 was the only been transitioned off-air from the
selected item for the next transition, the Keyers Module.
background will be selected instead.
• Off — Select this option to have the
BANK button not lit when Bank 0 is
The Bank 0 Lit feature sets whether or selected.
Bank 0 Lit
not the Bank button on the Memory • On — Select this option to have the
(Bank 0 Lit) Modules is lit when Bank 0 is selected. BANK button lit when Bank 0 is
selected in the Memory Module, or
Global Memory Module.
• Off — Select this option to not include
the on-air keyers with the next
The Background Double-Press feature transition when the BKGD button is
BKGD Double Press allows you to have a double-press of the double-pressed.
BKGD button on a Transition Module
(BKGD DblPress) select background and all on-air keyers as • On — Select this option to include all
part of the next transition. on-air keyers with the next transition
when the BKGD button is
double-pressed.
The Camera Grab Time feature allows
you to have the switcher select the first
camera on the preview bus a set amount
of time (in seconds) after a transition has
been performed. This allows you to • Use the Time knob to set the time (in
Camera Grab Time
automatically have menu and positioner seconds) after a transition that the
(Camera Grab) control over the camera when OverDrive switcher selects the camera.
prepares the next shot. A duration of 0
seconds turns this feature off.
Note: This feature is only active when
Editor is turned on.
The Custom Control/Macro Attachment custom controls attached to control
feature sets whether or not custom panel buttons not run when the button
CC/Macro Attachments controls that are attached to control panel is pressed.
(CC Attachments) buttons using the Attach Custom • On — Select this option to have
Controls Menu are run when the button custom controls attached to control
is pressed. panel buttons run when the button is
pressed.

• Off — Select this option to only allow
clips to be recalled from the Global
The CC Global Recall feature sets Memory module using the RECALL
CC Global Recall whether or not the RECALL CLIP/CC CLIP/CC button.
(CC Global Recall) button on the Global Memory module • On — Select this option to only allow
can be used to run a custom control. custom controls to be run from the
Global Memory module using the
RECALL CLIP/CC button.
The Clear Bus Hold on All-All feature Bus Hold feature not cleared when a
Clear Bus Hold on All-All sets whether or not the Bus Hold software reset is performed.
(Clear BusHold) selection on a bus is cleared when a • On — Select this option to have the
soft-reset is performed. Bus Hold feature cleared on every bus
when a software reset is performed.
• Off — Select this option to use the
video format based default transition
The Default Transition Active feature rates when you default an MLE or the
Default Trans Active allows you to set a default transition rate entire switcher.
(Dflt Trns Activ) for switcher transitions, effects, and • On — Select this option to use the
sequences. selected default transition rates when
you default an MLE or the entire
switcher.
The Default Transition Effects Dissolve
Rate feature allows you to set a default
Default Trans Eff Rate • Use the Rate knob to set a default rate,
effects dissolve rate.
(Dflt Trns Eff) in frames.
This rate is only used if the Default
Trans Rate Active feature is set to On.
The Default Transition Fade to Black
Rate feature allows you to set a default
Default Trans FTB Rate • Use the Rate knob to set a default rate,
fade to black rate.
(Dflt Trns FTB) in frames.
The Default Transition Key Rate feature
allows you to set a default Keyer
Default Trans Key Rate • Use the Rate knob to set a default rate,
transition rate.
(Dflt Trns Key) in frames.
The Default Transition PGM(MLE) Rate
feature allows you to set a default MLE
Default Trans PGM Rate • Use the Rate knob to set a default rate,
transition rate.
(Dflt Trns PGM) in frames.
The Default Transition Sequence Rate
feature allows you to set a default • Use the Rate knob to set a default rate,
Default Trans Seq Rate in frames. If you set the rate to 1, the
sequence rate.
(Dflt Trns Seq) transition uses the duration set in the
This rate is only used if the Default sequence.

• Use the Value knob on the Personality
The Double-Press Rate feature sets the
Double Press Rate Menu 1-2 to select the amount of time,
length of time that you have to press a
in frames, that you are given to press a
(DblPress Rate) button a second time in order for the
button again for the switcher treat it as
switcher to treat it as a double-press.
a double-press.
DSK 1 Auto Cut
(DSK1 Auto Cut)
DSK 2 Auto Cut
(DSK2 Auto Cut)
DSK 3 Auto Cut • Off — Select this option to have the
Downstream Keyers not affected by
(DSK3 Auto Cut) The Downstream Keyer Auto Cut feature selections made directly on the
DSK 4 Auto Cut sets whether or not the DSKs are cut Program Bus of the Program/Preset
(DSK4 Auto Cut) off-air when a source is selected directly MLE.
on the Main Program Bus of the switcher. • On — Select this option to have the
DSK 5 Auto Cut Note: The DSK Auto Cut feature is not selected Downstream Keyers
(DSK5 Auto Cut) available for MultiDSK Keys if the automatically taken off-air when any
DSK 6 Auto Cut Isolate MultiDSKs feature is turned On. source is selected directly on the
Program Bus of the Program/Preset
(DSK6 Auto Cut) MLE.
DSK 7 Auto Cut
(DSK7 Auto Cut)
DSK 8 Auto Cut
(DSK8 Auto Cut)

• None — Select this option to have no
pattern code numbers on the pattern
buttons.
• GVG100 Bttn# — Select this option
to have the GVG100 button number, for
the pattern, displayed on the pattern
button.
• GVG100 Bttn#H — Select this option
to have the GVG100 button number, for
the pattern, displayed in hexidecimal on
the pattern button.
The Editor Pattern Codes feature sets • GVG100/200 — Select this option to
whether or not the GVG100, have the GVG100/200 pattern code
GVG100/200, or GVG4000 editor displayed on the pattern button.
Editor Pattern Codes pattern codes are displayed on the pattern
buttons. When active for a particular • GVG100/200 H — Select this option
(Editor Codes)
editor protocol, the plain or hexidecimal to have the GVG100/200 pattern code
pattern code is shown on the pattern displayed in hexidecimal on the pattern
buttons on the Pattern Selection Menu. button.
• GVG4000 — Select this option to
have the GVG4000 pattern code
displayed on the pattern button.
• GVG4000 H — Select this option to
have the GVG4000 pattern code
displayed in hexidecimal on the pattern
button.
• OverDrive — Select this option to
have the Ross pattern code displayed on
the pattern button. Use this number to
select a pattern in OverDrive.
• Normal — Select this option to have
the transition rates that are set from an
Editor Trans Rates The Editor Transition Rates feature sets external editor not changed.
whether transition rates that are set from
(Editor Trans) an external editor are doubled or not. • Double — Select this option to have
the transition rates that are set from an
external editor doubled.
• Off — Select this option to not have the
camera move execute on a transition.
• On — Select this option to have the
ExCamMoveOnTrans The Execute Camera Move on Transition
feature sets whether the camera move
(ExCamMoveOnTrans) will be triggered with a transition or not. • Roll Clip — Select this option to use
the Roll Clip functionality to have a
The set Preroll time is be used.

memories recalled on MLEs that are the
same relative distance from the PGM
MLE as they were recorded. For
The Fixed Memory feature allows you to example, if MLE 4 is the Program
Fixed Memories select whether memories are recalled on MLE and you store a memory on
the MLEs that they were recorded on, or MLE 2. If you change the Program
(Fixed Mem) whether they are recalled on MLEs MLE to MLE 8, the memory is recalled
relative to the PGM MLE. on MLE 6.
• On — Select this option to have
memories recalled on same MLE they
were recorded on.
The Fade to Black Display Mode sets
• SmrtConv — Select this option to
whether the display on the Fade to Black
have the display on the Fade to Black
Module will display the current fade rate,
Module show the number of available
or the number of Up/Down Converters
up/down converters for
FTB Display available on the switcher.
SmartConversion to use.
(FTB Display) Refer to the section “Fade to Black
• FTB — Select this option to have the
Display Mode for Up/Down
display on the Fade to Black Module
Converters” on page Eng 16-7 for
show the transition rate for a Fade to
information on setting the Fade to Black
Black transition.
Display feature.
• Off — Select this option to not be able
to use the keypad on the Global
The Global Memory Number Entry Memory Module to enter Punchpad
Global Mem Num Entry Mode sets whether the keypad on the values.
(Glob NumEntry) Global Memory Module can be used to
enter Punchpad values. • On — Select this option to be able to
use the keypad on the Global Memory
Module to enter Punchpad values.
The Global-Store 4 Mode option sets • Still-Store — Select this option to
whether or not the 4th channel of enable Global-Store channel 4. Preview
Global-Store 4 Mode Global-Store is available or not. This Overlay is disabled.
channel is shared by the Preview
(GlobStorChan4) Overlay. When Global-Store channel 4 is • Pvw Overlay — Select this option to
active, the Preview Overlay is not disable Global-Store channel 4. The
available. Preview Overlay is enabled.
You can isolate the MultiDSKs to prevent

• Off — Select this option to include the
them from being affected by memory
MultiDSKs with the rest of the MLE.
recalls and soft-resets of the switcher.
Isolate MultiDSK • On — Select this option to isolate the
If you isolate the MultiDSKs, you will
MultiDSKs from the rest of the MLE.
(ISO MultiDSK) not be able to include them in a transition
The MultiDSKs will not be affected by
on the Transition Module. You will only
memory recalls, soft resets, or
be able to transition the MultiDSKs from
Program/Preset MLE Transitions.
the Keyers Module.

The Key Cut then Fade feature allows
you to change the behavior of the CUT
button on the Keyers module. When this • Off — Select this option to have the
feature is active, the CUT button on the CUT button on all Keyers modules
Keyers module will cut a key on-air, but operate normally.
Key Cut Then Fade
dissolve, or fade, the key off-air. This • On — Select this option to have the
(KeyCutThenDis) allows you to use the same button to cut a CUT button on all Keyers modules
key on-air and then transition is off-air. will cut keys on-air, but dissolve them
If you press CUT as the key is being off-air.
transitioned off-air, a cut is immediately
performed to take the key off-air.
• None — Select this option to have the
keypads not allow you to load a clip on
the selected video server.
• MLE — Select this option to have only
the Effects Memory keypad allow you
The Keypad Clip IDs Entry feature sets to load a clip on the selected video
Keypad Clip IDs Entry whether the Global Memory or Effects server.
(KeypadClipIDs) Memory keypads allow you to select a • Global — Select this option to have
clip on a video server. only the Global Memory keypad allow
you to load a clip on the selected video
server.
• Both — Select this option to have all
keypads allow you to load a clip on the
selected video server.
keypads not allow you to select a new
DVE wipe pattern for a transition.
the Effects Memory keypad allow you
The Keypad DVE Num Entry feature sets to select a new DVE wipe pattern for a
Keypad DVE Num Entry whether the Global Memory or Effects transition.
(KeypadDVE) Memory keypads allow you to select a • Global — Select this option to have
DVE wipe pattern for a transition. only the Global Memory keypad allow
you to select a new DVE wipe pattern
for a transition.
keypads allow you to select a new DVE
wipe pattern for a transition.
keypads not allow you to load a still.
The Keypad Still Num Entry feature sets the Effects Memory keypad allow you
Keypad Still Num Entry whether the Global Memory or Effects to load a still.
(KeypadStill) Memory keypads allow you to load a still • Global — Select this option to have
in a Global-Store or MLE-Store. only the Global Memory keypad allow
you to load a still.
the keypads allow you to load a still.

keypads not allow you to load a wipe
pattern.
The Keypad DVE Num Entry feature sets the Effects Memory keypad allow you
Keypad Wipe Num Entry whether the Global Memory or Effects to load a wipe pattern.
(KeypadWipe) Memory keypads allow you to select a • Global — Select this option to have
wipe pattern for a wipe transition. only the Global Memory keypad allow
you to load a wipe pattern.
the keypads allow you to load a wipe
pattern.
color range of the matte generators not
The Matte Limit feature sets whether or limited to the RGB color space. This is
Matte Limit
not the Matte Generators on the switcher the default setting.
(Matte Limit) are limited to the RGB color space or not. • On — Select this option to have the
color range of the matte generators
limited to the RGB color space.
Menu 1-2 to select the maximum
number of Memory Banks you want to
The Memory Bank Cycle feature sets the cycle through, starting from Bank00.
maximum number of memory banks that By repeatedly pressing the BANK
Memory Bank Cycle you will cycle through when pressing the button on the keypad of the Memory
(MemBank Cycle) Bank button on a Memory Module. Modules or Global Memory Module,
Note: This feature is disabled if Quick you can jump from bank to bank. The
Bank Select is set to On. Cycle Max value sets how many Banks
you can cycle through, starting at
Bank00, before jumping back to
Bank00.
The Mouse Sensitivity feature allows you
Mouse Sensitivity • Use the Value knob on the Personality
to set the speed that the mouse pointer
Menu 1-2 to select a sensitivity, or
(Mouse Speed) moves around the screen when you move
speed, for the mouse.
the mouse.
• On — Select this option to allow
multiple custom controls to run
simultaneously. Starting a custom
control while a custom control is
The Multiple Custom Controls feature
running does not stop the other custom
allows you to set whether the switcher
control and the currently selected one
Multiple Customs can run multiple custom controls
starts.
(Multiple CCs) simultaneously or only one at a time.
• Off — Select this option to allow only
Note: If OverDrive is controlling the
one custom control to run at a time.
switcher, this is locked to Off.
Starting a custom control while a
custom control is running stops the
running custom control and starts the
new one.

The Panel Sleep Time feature sets the
length of time before the switcher goes • Use the Value knob on the Personality
into sleep mode. Menu 1-2 to select the amount of time,
Panel Sleep Time in minutes, that the control panel will
Note: An Audio Control Module that is go without being use before entering
(Pnl SleepTime) installed on an external panel row will sleep mode. Selecting a sleep time of 0
not go into sleep mode, and using the prevents the control panel from
module will not wake the rest of the entering sleep mode.
panel.
• No Send — Select this option to have
the switcher not tell the Pbus devices to
store or recall memories.
The Pbus Memory feature allows you to
Pbus Memory store or recall memories on a Pbus device • Send — Select this option to have the
when you store or recall memories on the switcher tell all connected Pbus devices
(Pbus Memory)
switcher. to perform a memory store or recall
when one is performed on the switcher.
The memory number is the same as the
one used on the switcher.
The Quick Bank Select feature allows • Off — Select this option to select a
you to select a memory bank by either memory bank by pressing and holding
holding the BANK button and selecting the BANK button, and selecting the
Quick Bank Select the bank, or by pressing the BANK bank.
(QuickBank Sel) button, and then selecting the bank. • On — Select this option to select a
You can always select a bank by pressing memory bank by pressing and releasing
and holding the BANK button and the BANK button, and selecting the
selecting the bank. bank.
• Never — Select this option to have
Global-Store settings never included
during memory recalls. The stills
loaded in the Global-Store channels are
not replaced with those included in the
memory.
The Recall Global-Store Memory Mode • Always — Select this option to have
Recall Global-Store sets whether the Global-Store settings are Global-Store settings always included
included with memory recalls always, during memory recalls. The stills
(RecallGlblSto) only when turned on from the MLE loaded in the Global-Store channels are
Memory Attributes Menu, or never. replaced with those included in the
memory.
• Attributes — Select this option to
have Global-Store setting included
during memory recalls if the
Global-Store channel is turned on from
the MLE Memory Attributes Menu.

MLE-Store settings never included
during memory recalls. The stills
loaded in the MLE-Store channels are
not replaced with those included in the
memory.
The Recall MLE-Store Memory Mode • Always — Select this option to have
Recall MLE-Store sets whether the MLE-Store settings are MLE-Store settings always included
included with memory recalls always, during memory recalls. The stills
(RecallMLEStor) only when turned on from the MLE loaded in the MLE-Store channels are
Memory Attributes Menu, or never. replaced with those included in the
memory.
• Attributes — Select this option to
have MLE-Store setting included
during memory recalls if the
MLE-Store channel is turned on from
the MLE Memory Attributes Menu.
WhiteFlash settings never included
during memory recalls.
The Recall WhiteFlash sets whether the • Always — Select this option to have
Recall WhiteFlash WhiteFlash settings are included with WhiteFlash settings always included
memory recalls always, only when turned during memory recalls.
(RecallWhiteFl) on from the MLE Memory Attributes • Attributes — Select this option to
Menu, or never. have WhiteFlash setting included
during memory recalls if the Transition
Area option is turned on from the MLE
Memory Attributes Menu.
The Re-entry Depth feature allows you to • Prevent — You can only create
have the switcher either prevent or allow re-entry chains up to 4 MLEs deep.
re-entry chains of more than 4 MLEs. For • Warn — You can create re-entry
Re-entry Depth
example, MLE 1 -> MLE 2 -> MLE 3 -> chains over 4 MLEs deep, but a pop-up
(Re-entryDepth) MLE 4. is displayed.
Note: Re-entry chains of more than 4 • Allow — You can create re-entry
MLEs can cause line drops. chains over 4 MLEs deep.
switcher block re-entry loops. If a
The Re-entry Loops feature allows you to crosspoint is selected that would cause
have the switcher either prevent or allow a re-entry loop, a popup is displayed
Re-entry Loops an MLE re-entry feedback loop. If and the crosspoint is not selected. If the
(Re-entry Loops) Re-entry Loops is set you On, you are crosspoint selection is contained in a
able to re-enter MLE 1 into MLE 2, and memory, Black is selected instead.
re-enter MLE 2 into MLE 1. • On — Select this option to have the
switcher not block re-entry loops. A
popup is displayed.

• Play — This mode allows you to play
a server clip directly by pressing the
ROLL CLIP button on the Transition
Module. Once pressed, the clip will
start to play and will have to be taken
on-air manually with a transition.
• Arm — This mode allows you to have
The Roll Clip Mode determines how the the server play the clip with the next
ROLL CLIP button behaves when a transition performed in the Transition
server is selected on the preview bus. Module that the ROLL CLIP button is
Roll Clip Mode
This setting is applied to all MLEs on the on, or lit, in. This can be used to roll
(RollClip Mode) switcher. multiple servers if they are re-entered.
Note: If OverDrive is controlling the Once pressed, the clip will only start to
switcher, this is locked to Arm. play when a Cut or Auto-Transition is
performed. You can also play the clip
by double-pressing the crosspoint
button on the same MLE.
• Armed Always — This selection
locks the switcher in Arm and does not
allow the ROLL CLIP button to be
turned off.
• Always — Select this option to always
play a server clip even if the MLE is
Roll Clip On-Air Only The Roll Clip On-Air Only determines not On-Air.
how to play a clip based on the MLE
(RlClpOnAirOnly) On-Air status. • On-Air Only — Select this option to
play a server clip only when the MLE is
On-Air.
The Shift Locking feature sets whether
Shift button function normally.
double-pressing the SHIFT button on a
Shift Locking crosspoint bus toggles shift on. • On — Select this option to have the
bus remain shifted when the SHIFT
(Shift Locking) Note: If Shift Lock is active on an MLE,
button is double-pressed. Pressing the
the mnemonics for that MLE switch to a
SHIFT button again returns the bus to
two-line format.
unshifted.
• Off — Select this option to not show
The Show CC’s on Key Bus feature sets the custom control name on the
Show CC’s on Key Bus whether or not custom controls that are mnemonic.
attached to crosspoint buttons on the
(ShowCCAttach) keyer bus are shown on the keyer • On — Select this option to show the
mnemonics. name of the custom control attached to
a crosspoint button on the mnemonic.

The Show Last Custom Control Pressed
feature allows you to keep the last
pressed custom control button lit after the • Off — Select this option to not
custom control has finished. The button continue to light the custom control
remains lit until another custom control is button after the custom control has
Show Last CC Pressed
pressed or the switcher is reset. This is finished.
(Show Last CC) shown for each custom control bank • On — Select this option to continue to
independently. light the custom control button after the
Use the Color knob to select the color custom control has ended.
you want the custom control button to be
lit with.
The Show Last Memory Recalled feature
allows you to keep the last pressed • Off — Select this option to not light the
memory number lit after you have last memory number you have recalled.
Show Last Mem Recalled recalled a memory on the same bank. The
button remains lit until another memory • On — Select this option to light the last
(Show Last Mem)
is recalled or the switcher is reset. This is memory number you have recalled, if
shown for each effects memory module the memory is in the same bank.
independently.
Squeeze & Tease Mode Refer to the section “Squeeze & Tease Mode” on page Eng 12-6 for information on
(S&T Mode) this personality setting.
• Hold — Select this option to have the
Global Memory Module, or the
The Store Mode sets whether or not a Memory Module, stay in Store mode
Store Mode memory module remains in Store Mode after a memory has been stored.
(Store Mode) after a memory has been stores, or switch • 1-Time — Select this option to have
to Recall Mode. the Global Memory Module, or the
Memory Module, switch to Recall
mode after a memory has been stored.
• Swap — Select this option to have the
The Swap Keyers Cut & Auto feature CUT and AUTO TRANS buttons on
allows you to swap the behavior of the all Keyers modules swap their
Swap Keyer Cut & Auto CUT and Auto TRANS buttons on the functions. The CUT button performs an
Keyers module. When this feature is set Auto Trans.
(SwapKeyC/A) to swap, the CUT button performs an
auto transition, and the AUTO TRANS • Normal — Select this option to have
button performs a cut. the transition buttons on the Keyers
modules keep their original functions.
The Swap Program and Preset Buses
feature allows you to swap the functions • Swap — Select this option to have the
of the Program bus to the Preset bus on Program and Preset buses on all MLEs
Swap PGM/PST Buses all MLEs. When this feature is turned on, swapped.
the sources that you select on the preset
(SwapPGM/PST) bus act as if they are being selected on • Normal — Select this option to have
the program bus, and the sources selected the Program and Preset buses keep their
on the program bus act as if they are original functions.
being selected on the preset bus.

• Swap — Select this option to have the
The Swap Trans Cut & Auto feature CUT and AUTO TRANS buttons on
allows you to swap the behavior of the all Transition modules swap their
Swap Trans Cut & Auto CUT and Auto TRANS buttons on the functions. The CUT button performs an
Transition module. When this feature is Auto Trans.
(SwapTransC/A) set to swap, the CUT button performs an
auto transition, and the AUTO TRANS • Normal — Select this option to have
button performs a cut. the transition buttons on the Transition
modules keep their original functions.
• Internal — Select this option to have
The Time Clock Source feature allows the switcher use the internally
you to set the source for the Preview generated time clock data.
Overlay Time Clock. This source can • UMD Input — Select this option to
Time Clock Source either be internally generated, or have the switcher use data from an
(TimeClock Src) generated from an external UMD device. external UMD device for the time
An external UMD device must be set up clock. You must use the Time Clock
on a Remote port in order for the UMD Number feature to set which
switcher to receive time clock data. UMD Address that the time clock data
should come from.
The Time Clock UMD Number feature • Use the Value knob on the Personality
Time Clock UMD Number allows you to set the specific address of Menu 1-2 to select the address, or
(TimeClock UMD) the UMD input that you want to get the UMD input number, that you want to
time clock data from. get the time clock data from.
The UltraChrome Default Color feature
allows you to set the default color that the
UltraChrome will be set to when the
UltraChrome Dflt Color • Use the Value knob on the Personality
keyer has been defaulted. Once a
Menu 1-2 to select the default color
(UChrome Color) different color is set for the UltraChrome,
you want to use for UltraChrome.
that new color remains until the keyer is
defaulted, or until a different
UltraChrome color is set manually.
The UltraChrome Default Mode feature
allows you to set the default mode that
Menu 1-2 to select the default mode for
UltraChrome Dflt Mode UltraChrome operates in. Once a
UltraChrome. Refer to the section
different mode is set for the
(UChrome Mode) “UltraChrome Operating Modes” on
UltraChrome, that mode remains until the
page Ops 7-11 for more information on
keyer is defaulted, or until a different
the UltraChrome modes.
UltraChrome mode is set manually.
• On — Select this option to have Edge
The UltraChrome Default Edge Width Sensitivity set to Low and the Width
UltraChrome Dflt Width feature sets whether or not the Edge set to 2 when the key is initialised.
(UChrome Edge) Sensitivity is set to High or Low when • Off — Select this option to have Edge
the chroma key is initialized. Sensitivity set to High and the Width
set to 0 when the key is initialised.
• Current — Select this option to use
The VTR On-air feature allows you to the current timecode of the VTR, or
specify whether the current timecode or Video Server.
VTR POL On-air Display the remaining time (for a video server) of
the currently loaded clip is displayed on • Remaining — Select this option to
(VTR On-air)
the On-air line on the Preview Overlay use the remaining time of the currently
when VTR TC is active. loaded clip. Cannot be used for VTRs,
on Video Servers.

• Current — Select this option to use
The VTR Prepared feature allows you to the current timecode of the VTR, or
specify whether the current timecode or Video Server.
VTR POL Prep’d Display the remaining time (for a video server) of
the currently loaded clip is displayed on • Remaining — Select this option to
(VTR Prep’d)
the Prepared line on the Preview Overlay use the remaining time of the currently
when VTR TC is active. loaded clip. Cannot be used for VTRs,
on Video Servers.
• On — Select this option to have the
The Wake Up On Command feature control panel wake up when it receives
Wake Up On Command allows you to specify whether the control a command from OverDrive.
(Wakeup On Cmd) panel will wake from sleep mode when it • Off — Select this option to have the
receives a command from OverDrive. control panel not wake up when it
receives a command from OverDrive.

Control Panel Button Color Schemes
The current color selection for the buttons on the control panel can be edited at any time during
operation. This allows you to change the glow color for MLEs and AuxKeys, as well as the on-air
crosspoints, or apply a specific color to an input. The color of the control buttons on the control
panel modules can also be edited.
General Color Usage Setup

There are a number of options for how the colors of the buttons on the Vision control panel can be
organized. Each MLE can have a unique color, or they can all be the same. Unique colors can also
be applied to the buttons on the touchscreen display, and the auxiliary control panels, as well as
the selected crosspoint or function buttons. The MLE re-entry buttons and specific crosspoint
buttons can have unique colors as well.
The color usage for the control panel must be set up before the individual colors can the edited.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  Color Scheme.
Color Scheme Menu 1-3

2. Toggle the MLEs Same Clr to On or Off to apply the same color all MLEs:
• Off — Select this option to use individual color schemes for each MLE on the
switcher. Each MLE will have the current color scheme that is assigned to it
displayed on the menu.
• On — Select this option to use the same color scheme for all MLEs on the switcher.
The individual color schemes for each MLE are replaced with a global color
scheme.

3. Press Set Up User Colors.
Set Up User Colors — Color Scheme Menu 1-3

4. Assign a color for selected crosspoint buttons as follows:
• Use the Option knob to select Selected Xpts.
• Use the Use knob to select which color you want to use for the selected buttons.
› Item On Color — Select this option to apply the Item On Color to the
selected crosspoints buttons.
› MLE Color — Select this option to apply the MLE Glow color to the
selected crosspoint buttons.
5. Assign a color for selected non-crosspoint buttons on each module as follows:
• Use the Option knob to select Selected Bttns.
• Use the Use knob to select which color you want to use for the selected buttons.
› Item On Color — Select this option to apply the Item On Color to the
selected buttons.
selected buttons.
6. Assign a color for the custom control buttons as follows:
• Use the Option knob to select Custom Controls.
• Use the Use knob to select which color you want to use for the custom control
buttons. You can choose between the following:
› Disp Color — Select this option to apply the Display Glow Color to the
custom control buttons.
selected buttons.
7. Assign a color for the re-entry buttons as follows:
• Use the Option knob to select Re-entry Glow.
• Use the Use knob to turn this feature on or off:
› No — Select this option to not assign a different color to the re-entry buttons.
› Yes — Select this option to assign the MLE Glow color to the re-entry button
for that MLE. For example, if the glow color for MLE 1 is blue, and the glow
color for MLE 2 is yellow. The re-entry button for MLE 1 is blue on MLE2,
instead of the yellow glow color for MLE 2.

8. Assign a color for the select crosspoint buttons as follows:
• Use the Option knob to select Xpt Colors.
• Use the Use knob to turn this feature on or off.
› No — Select this option to not use a different color for specific video inputs.
› Yes — Select this option to allow a User Color to be applied to the crosspoint
button for a specific video input. Refer to the section “Assigning a Crosspoint
Color” on page Eng 11-19 for information on assigning a color to a video
input.
Assigning a Crosspoint Color

Each video source on the switcher can have one of six user assignable colors assigned to the
crosspoint button for that source.
To assign a user color to a specific crosspoint button, the Xpt Colors option must be turned on.
Refer to the section “General Color Usage Setup” on page Eng 11-17 for information on turning
on the Xpt Color option.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  Color Scheme  Setup Xpt Colors.
Setup Xpt Colors Menu

2. Use the Input knob to select the button, or input, that you want to assign a user color to.
3. Use the Color knob to assign a user color to the selected input.
Selecting a Color
Any of the glow or user colors for the buttons on the control panel can be adjusted.
Note — With some pre-loaded color schemes, or user created color schemes, the Item On
Color or On-Air colors may not be easily distinguishable from the Glow color. Make sure to test
a color scheme with each MLE and Aux before using it.

1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  Color Scheme  Select Buttons.
Color Scheme Menu 1-3

2. Adjust the Glow color of the MLEs and Aux Buses as follows:
• Use the Color knob to select the element that you want to change the color for.
• Press Modify Color.
HSL Color Space — Color Selection Menu

• Select the color space that you want to edit the button color in as follows:
› RGB — Press RGB to display the RGB color space. This allows you to edit
the button color by mixing Red, Green, and Blue together.
› HSL — Press HSL to display the HSL color space. This allows you to edit the
button color by adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance of the color.
• Modify a color as follows:
› HSL Color Space — Use the Luminance, Saturation, and Hue knobs to
adjust the color of the selected element.
› RGB Color Space — Use the Red, Green, and Blue knobs to adjust the
color of the selected element.
• Press UP ONE to accept the color selection and display the Color Scheme Menus.

Mnemonic Color Schemes
The current color selection for the mnemonics on the buses of the control panel can be edited at
any time during operation. By adjusting the brightness of the color LEDs in the mnemonics, you
can create a new, custom color for the mnemonics.
Custom colors for individual input sources can be created for each video source. Refer to the
section “Naming Input Sources” on page Eng 7-2 for more information on editing mnemonic
colors for individual input sources.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  Color Scheme  More.
2. Select the mnemonic color that you want to adjust as follows:
• Orange — Press Mnemonic Orange and use the Orange Gain knob to adjust
the gain of the orange LED in the mnemonics.
Orange Mnemonic Brightness — Color Scheme Menu 2-3

• Yellow — Press Mnemonic Yellow and use the Yellow Gain knob to adjust the
gain of the yellow LED in the mnemonics.
• Green — Press Mnemonic Green and use the Green Gain knob to adjust the
gain of the green LED in the mnemonics.
3. Press Panel Mnemonic Bright/Contrast.
Panel Mnemonic Brightness and Contrast Settings — Color Scheme Menu 2-3
4. Adjust the Brightness and Contrast of the mnemonic display on the control panel as
follows:
• Use the Mnemonic Brightness knob to adjust the brightness of the mnemonics.
• Use the Mnemonic Contrast knob to adjust the contrast of the mnemonics.
5. Press Extern Mnemonic Bright/Contrast.

Extern Mnemonic Brightness and Contrast Settings — Color Scheme Menu 2-3
6. Adjust the Brightness and Contrast of the mnemonic display on external panels, such as
the Auxiliary Control Panel, as follows:
• Use the Mnemonic Brightness knob to adjust the brightness of the mnemonics.
• Use the Mnemonic Contrast knob to adjust the contrast of the mnemonics.

Control Panel Display Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the Control Panel Displays from the menu. These displays
include all the module displays found on the control panel, but not the Touchscreen Display.
Operating Tip — Lower Display Brightness settings will prolong the life of the displays on
the control panel.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  Color Scheme  More  Display

Bright./Contrast.
Display Brightness and Contrast Settings — Color Scheme Menu 2-3

2. Use the Display Brightness knob to adjust the brightness of the displays.
3. Use the Display Contrast knob to adjust the contrast of the displays.

• on menu themes, refer to the section “Menu Skins” on page Eng 5-12.

Loading Color Schemes
The Vision switcher comes pre-installed with a number of different color schemes that you can
use.
Each color scheme contains the button color settings, mnemonic brightness and contrast, as well
as the brightness and contrast of the displays. Monitor Skins are not included in Color Schemes
1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  Color Scheme  Load Color
Scheme.
Load Color Scheme Menu

2. Use the Scheme (middle) knob to select the color scheme you want to load.
3. Press Select This Scheme to apply the selected color scheme to the switcher.
Operating Tip — If you do not want to use the selected color scheme, you can press Undo
Changes on the Load Color Scheme Menu to revert back to the previous color scheme.

Lock/Unlock Personality
The Lock/Unlock Personality feature allows you to lock-out changes to the Personality Menus
with a password. This prevents changes to the Personality Menus without first unlocking the
personality settings. This also included the recalling of a personality register.
1. Press HOME  Setup  More  More  Lock/Unlock Personality.
Note — If the Lock/Unlock Personality feature is active, and a password has been set up, the
Enter Personality Password Menu is displayed. Enter the password in the New Name field
and press Accept New Name to display the Lock/Unlock Personality Menu.
Lock/Unlock Personality Menu

2. Toggle Personality Lock to On or Off:
• On — Select this option to turn the personality lock feature on.
• Off — Select this option to turn the personality lock feature off.
Operating Tip — You can delete the current password by pressing Clear Password on the
Lock/Unlock Personality Menu.
3. Set a password for the personality lock as follows:

• Press Add/Change Password.
Change Personality Password Menu

• Enter the new password in the New Password field.
• Press Accept New Password to save the new password.

Completing Setup
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on finalizing the setup of the Vision switcher. This includes
setting up Aux Buses, including the installation of remote aux panels, recalling factory setting,
personality setup, and setting up the preview overlay.
• Aux Bus Setup
• Default MLE Map Assignment
• Squeeze & Tease Mode
• Key 4 Mode
• Standard GPI Setup
• Clip Setup
• Audio Channel Setup
• Factory Default Settings
• Preview Overlay Setup
• Set System Time
• Auto Follow
• Frame Over-Temperature Shutdown
• Lock/Unlock Installation
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Completing Setup • Eng 12–1

Aux Bus Setup
An Aux Bus allows you to use the additional Output BNC of the Vision switcher to pass video
signals out to other external equipment. There are a total of 48 Aux Buses available on the
switcher, that have access to all the same video signals that are available to an MLE. The Aux
Buses are organized into 6 Banks, with 8 Aux Buses per bank.
If you have the AuxKey option installed, Aux Bus outputs can be used to pass dedicated mixed
video signals, including keys, out to other external equipment, or back into the switcher as an
additional mixer/keyer.
An Aux Bus can be accessed in a number of ways, either through the Auxiliary Control Panels, or
by assigning a crosspoint group to an Aux Bus.
Selecting Aux Buses

1. Press the SEL button on the Crosspoint Group that you want to assign the Aux Bus to.
The MLE SEL Button Menu for the selected Crosspoint Group is displayed.
2. Press Select Aux Bus.
Aux Bus Selection — MLE SEL Button Menu

3. Press the Aux Bus Bank X button to select the Aux Bus Bank that you want to use,
where X is the number of the bank.
4. Press the Aux Bus X or AuxKey X button to select the Aux Bus that you want to use,
where X is the number of the aux bus.

• on using an Aux Bus, refer to the section “Assigned to Aux Bus” on page Ops 4-7.
Naming Aux Buses

Each Aux Bus on the Vision switcher can be given a specific name that is displayed on the menus
for that source.
Eng 12–2 • Completing Setup Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Aux Bus  Modify Name.
Aux Bus Names Menu
more information on using the Aux Bus Names Menu to enter a name.
2. Use the Aux Bus knob to select the Aux Bus you want to name.
4. Press Accept New Name to assign the name to the Aux Bus.
Aux Bus Router Follow

The router follows feature allows you to map sources on the switcher to sources on the router so
that when a source is selected on the switcher, the corresponding source is selected on the router.
A single destination on the router is associated to an aux bus on the switcher.
The router must be set up to be controlled by the switcher for this feature to work.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Aux Bus  More  Router Follow.
2. Assign a Router to an Aux Bus as follows:
• Press Select Router.
Select Router — Aux Bus Router Follow Menu

• Use the Aux Bus knob to select the Aux Bus that you want to router to follow.
• Use the Router knob to select the router that you want to follow the Aux Bus.
3. Press Select Output.

Select Output — Aux Bus Router Follow Menu
• Use the Rtr Dest knob to select the destination on the router that you want to use
for router follow.
• Use the Breakaway knob to select the breakaway on the router that you want to
use for router follow.
4. Press Input Matrix.
• Use the Input knob to select the video input on the switcher that you want to assign
a router source to.
• Use the Rtr Src knob to select the router source you want to assign to the video
input on the switcher.

• on setting up an Output BNC as an Aux Bus output, refer to the section “Configuring
Video Outputs” on page Eng 8-2.
• on setting up and using the AuxKeys option, refer to the section “AuxKeys” on page Eng
8-26.
• on setting up an Auxiliary Control Panel, refer to the section “Auxiliary Panels” on
page Eng 14-1.
• on assigning Bus Maps to all or individual Aux Buses, refer to the section “Assigning
Panel Bus Maps” on page Eng 7-19.

Default MLE Map Assignment
The Default MLE Map Assignment feature allows you to specify the default MLE that each
Crosspoint Group, or row, on the switcher, and external to the switcher, is assigned to.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  MLE Maps.
MLE Map Menu

2. Use the Panel Row knob to select the Crosspoint Group, or row, that you want to
assign an MLE to. You can choose between the following:
• Row X — Select the row on the control panel (1 through 8) that you want to assign
an MLE to, where X is the number of the row.
• Ext Row X — Select the external row (1 through 16) on an Auxiliary Control
Panel, for example, that you want to assign an MLE to, where X is the number of
the row.
3. Use the Mapped to MLE knob to select the MLE that you want to assign to the
selected row to.
Note — The Default MLE Map Assignment is only applied after a restart or ALL+ALL software
reset. Refer to the section “Resetting the Switcher” on page Eng 4-24 for more information on
performing a restart or software reset.

Squeeze & Tease Mode
The Squeeze & Tease Mode sets how Squeeze & Tease resources are allocated or shared among
MLE-pairs on the switcher.
2. Use the Option knob to select S&T Mode.
Squeeze & Tease Mode — Personality Menu 1-2

3. Use the Value knob to toggle to Fixed or Float.
Note — Squeeze & Tease MD DVE channel resources are available to MLE-pairs. How many
DVE channel resources are available to each MLE-pair depends on the configuration of your
switcher. Refer to the section “Squeeze & Tease” on page Eng 2-27 for more information on the
different configurations.
• Fixed — Select this option to have the Squeeze & Tease DVE channel resources
locked to specific MLEs in the MLE-pair as follows (WARP resources are not
locked):
› Octane/QMD-X — MLEs 1-4 have 4 DVE channel resources locked to
them, and MLEs 5-8 have 2 DVE channel resources locked to them.
› QMD-X — Each MLE has 4 DVE channel resources locked to it.
› MD-X — Each MLE has 4 DVE channel resources locked to it.
› QMD — Each MLE has 2 DVE channel resources locked to it.
› MD — Each MLE has 4 DVE channel resources locked to it.
• Floating — Select this option to have the Squeeze & Tease DVE channel resources
and WARP resources float across the MLE-pair as follows:
› Octane/QMD-X — MLEs 1-4 have access to all 8 DVE channel resources
provided by the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board, and MLEs 5-8 have access
to 4 DVE channel resources, and both WARP resource.
› QMD-X — Each MLE-pair has access to all 8 DVE channel resources
provided by the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board.
› MD-X — Each MLE-pair has access to all 8 DVE channel resources provided
by the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board.
› QMD — Each MLE-pair has access to 4 DVE channel resources, and a single
WARP resource. For example, MLE 1 and MLE 2 share 4 DVE channel
resources and 1 WARP resource, and MLE 3 and MLE 4 share the remaining
4 DVE channel resources and 1 WARP resource.

Note — If there is only 1 Squeeze & Tease MD WARP card installed in the QMD frame, that
WARP resource floats between all MLES on the switcher. If there is only 1 Video Processor
Board board installed in the QMD frame, WARP resources float between both MLES on the
switcher.
› MD — Each MLE-pair has access to all 8 DVE channel resources provided by

the Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board.

• on MLEs and video routing, refer to the section “Video Routing” on page Eng 2-20.
• on Squeeze & Tease DVE Channel Resources, refer to the section “DVE Keys (Fly
Key)” on page Ops 8-2.

Key 4 Mode
The Key 4 Mode sets how many Utility Buses, Aux Bus Color Correctors and Clean Feeds are
available to the selected MLE when Key 4 is using internal or external video sources.
Keep the following in mind when setting the Key 4 Mode:
• Key 4 Mode is only available on 4-Keyer Octane/QMD-X and QMD switchers.
• Key 4 Mode settings are stored and recalled with memories.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Key 4 Config.
Flexi Mode — Key 4 Configuration Menu

2. Press the MLE X button to select the MLE that you want to set up the Key 4 Mode for.
3. Select the mode that you want to assign to the selected MLE as follows:
• Flexi Mode — Select this option to be able to switch between External Mode and
Internal Mode 1 from the MLE Sel Button Menu.
• External Mode — Select this mode to allow Key 4 to have access to all video
sources. The selected MLE has access to 0 Utility Buses, 0 Aux Bus Color
Correctors, and 2 Clean Feeds. Utility Masks can only select MLE-Stores in this
mode.
• Internal Mode 1 — Select this mode to restrict Key 4 to have access to
MLE-Stores only. The selected MLE has access to 2 Utility Buses, 0 Aux Bus
Color Correctors, and 2 Clean Feeds.
MLE-Stores only. The selected MLE has access to 0 Utility Buses, 2 Aux Bus
Color Correctors, and 0 Clean Feeds.
MLE-Stores only. The selected MLE has access to 1 Utility Bus, 1 Aux Bus Color
Corrector, and 1 Clean Feed.
ports.
Support.

• on using the Flexi Mode, refer to the section “Selecting an MLE Mode” on page Ops
4-10.

Standard GPI Setup
The Vision switcher uses General Purpose Interface (GPI) input and output signals to trigger
events on external equipment, or have external equipment trigger events on the switcher. All of
these signals are passed through a single DB25 port on the Frame CPU Board. This port
provides the 10 GPI Inputs and 10 GPI Outputs of the standard GPIs, with a single Ground
pin.
Operating Tip — A GPI Output Worksheet and a GPI Input Worksheet are provided to
assist you in setting up your GPIs. Refer to the section “Standard GPI I/O Input Worksheets”
on page Eng 21-13 for a copy of the GPI Input worksheet. Refer to the section “Standard GPI
I/O Output Worksheets” on page Eng 21-14 for copy of the GPI Output worksheet.
GPI I/O Information

You can use the GPI I/O Information to check the settings of all the GPI I/Os on the switcher.
This allows you to quickly determine which GPI I/O is being used for what, and which GPI I/Os
are still available for use.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  GPI I/O  View GPI I/O.
GPI I/O Information — GPI I/O Menu

2. Use the Scroll knob to scroll through the list of input and GPI Outputs. The following
information is provided:
• GPI Information
› GPI # — This column provides the GPI number and assignment of each GPI
Input on the switcher. GPIs that are not assigned are also indicated.
› Polarity — This column provides the current level, or signal polarity, of each
GPI Input on the GPI I/O port.
• GPO Information
› GPO # — This column provides the GPO number for each GPI Output on the
switcher.
› Name — This column provides the name of each GPI Output.
› Trigger — This column provides the trigger effect that is used for each GPI
Output.
› Level — This column provides the current level, or signal polarity, of each
GPI Output on the GPI I/O port.

GPI I/O Connection
You can connect a single DB25, male, connector to the GPI I/O port on the CPU Board frame of
your Vision switcher (Figure 12.1). The GPI I/O port provides 10 GPI Input pins, 10 GPI
Output pins, plus a single Ground pin.
GP I/O Port
LAN1 LAN2 PANEL

CPU
LTC
2
10/100 10/100 USB
Figure 12.1 GPI I/O Port on Frame CPU Board
To connect to a specific GPI Input or GPI Output, locate the wire connected to the pin for the GPI
I/O you want to use (Table 12.1).
Table 12.1 Pinouts — GPI I/O Port

GPI Input Pin # Signal GPI Output Pin # Signal
1 Ground 1 Ground
2 n/c 14 n/c
3 n/c 15 n/c
4 GPI In 10 16 GPI Out 10

• on the GPI I/O port, refer to the section “GPI I/O Ports” on page Eng 20-18.
Setting Up GPI Inputs

GPI Inputs can be used to trigger a number of events on the switcher from a GPI I/O device. An
example of a commonly used GPI Input is the small, hand-held, trigger a weather forecaster uses
to advance though the different backgrounds in the weather forecast.
Note — The GPI Interface must be enabled in order to control the switcher using GPI Inputs.
Refer to the section “GPI Interface Control” on page Ops 11-2 for more information on turning
the GPI Interface on.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  GPI I/O  Inputs.

2. Assign a Memory Recall event to an GPI Input as follows:
• Use the GPI Input knob to select the GPI Input that you want to configure.

• Use the Function knob to select the function you want to assign to the selected
GPI Input. You can choose between the following:
› Off — Select this option to have the switcher perform no function when a
trigger signal is received by the selected GPI Input.
› Mem Recall — Select this option to have the memory recalled across all
MLEs when a trigger signal is received by the selected GPI Input.
Memory Recall — GPI I/O Menu

• Use the Memory knob to select the memory register that you want to be recalled on
all MLEs when the GPI Input signal is received.
3. Assign a Transition event to an GPI Input as follows:
Operating Tip — A GPI triggered transition will only transition the selected Key or
Background buses on the target MLE. If you want to ensure that only a particular transition is
performed when the GPI signal is received, have a memory recalled before the transition.
› Auto — Select this option to have an auto transition performed in the MLE,
MultiDSK key, or Fade to Black Module, that you select when a trigger signal
is received by the selected GPI Input.
› Cut — Select this option to have a cut performed in the MLE, MultiDSK key,
or Fade to Black Module, that you select when a trigger signal is received by
the selected GPI Input.
Transition Function — GPI I/O Menu

• Use the Area knob to select the MLE, MultiDSK key, or Fade to Black Module,
that you want the selected function to be performed when the GPI Input signal is
received.
4. Assign a Run Custom Control event to an GPI Input as follows:
Operating Tip — If you have a custom control with a number of holds in it, the GPI Run
Custom Control trigger can be used to start the custom control, and continue it at each hold.
› Cust Ctrl — Select this option to have the custom control you select run
when a trigger signal is received by the selected GPI Input.
Run Custom Control Function — GPI I/O Menu

• Use the Cust Ctrl knob to select the custom control bank and button you want to
run when the GPI I/O signal is received. The Bank is indicated by the number
before the # sign, and the button by the number after the # sign. For example,
custom control button 12 on bank 3 is shown as 3#12.
5. Press GPI Polarity.
GPI Input Polarity — GPI I/O Menu

6. Assign a trigger signal polarity to an GPI Input as follows:
• Use the Polarity knob to select the trigger signal polarity you want to assign to the
selected GPI Input. You can choose between the following:

› Low — Select this option to have the GPI I/O triggered when a low signal is
received. The GPI Input should be receiving a constant high signal. When the
signal goes low (0 Volts), the GPI I/O will respond to the trigger.
› High — Select this option to have the GPI I/O triggered when a high signal is
received. The GPI Input should be receiving a constant low signal. When the
signal goes high (+5 Volts), the GPI I/O will respond to the trigger.
ports.
Support.
GPI Input Tallies

You can associate a particular GPI Input with a standard parallel tally. This allows you to force
the switcher to toggle a tally on or off when an GPI Input signal is received, even if the tally is
associated to an input source that is not on-air.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  GPI I/O  Tally on GPIs.
GPI Input Tallies — GPI I/O Menu

2. Use the Tally knob to select the tally you want to associate with an GPI Input.
Note — You can assign a tally to a GPI Input that is already assigned to an input source. The
switcher will not distinguish between a tally that is activated because of a GPI trigger, or
because the input source is on-air.
3. Use the GPI Input knob to select the GPI Input that you want to assign to the selected
tally. The tally remains on as long as the GPI I/O trigger remains on.
ports.
Support.


• on assigning tallies to input sources, refer to the section “Assigning Tallies to Input
Sources” on page Eng 7-22.
Setting Up GPI Outputs

GPI Outputs can be used to trigger events on an external GPI I/O device from the switcher. An
example of an Output GPI I/O would be the use of an GPI Output to trigger a transition on a
Character Generator. Refer to the documentation that came with your device for more
information on what commands you can trigger with a GPI I/O.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  GPI I/O  Outputs.
GPI Outputs — GPI I/O Menu

2. Use the GPI Output knob to select the GPI Output that you want to configure.
3. Use the Trigger knob to select the trigger signal type you want to assign to the selected
GPI Output. You can choose between the following:
• Pulse Low — Select this option to have the GPI Output send a
momentary low (0 Volts) trigger and then return to the base high (+5
Trigger
Volts) level. The duration of the trigger is set with the Pulse Dur’n
knob. Duration
• Pulse High — Select this option to have the GPI Output send a
Duration
momentary high (+5 Volts) trigger and then return to the base low (0
Trigger
Volts) level. The duration of the trigger is set with the Pulse Dur’n
knob.
• Level Low — Select this option to have the GPI Output toggle from
the base high (+5 Volts) level to the low level (0 Volts). The GPI
Trigger
Output signal remains at this level until reset.
• Level High — Select this option to have the GPI Output toggle
from the base low (0 Volts) level to the high level (+5 Volts). The
Trigger
GPI Output signal remains at this level until reset.
4. Use the Pulse Dur’n knob to select the duration of the trigger signal, in
frames, that you want to use.

ports.
Support.
Naming GPI Outputs

Each GPI Output can be named. This name is displayed on all the menus for the selected GPI I/O.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  GPI I/O  Name Outputs.
Name Outputs Menu
more information on using the Name Outputs Menu to enter a name for the GPI I/O.
2. Use the Output number knob to select the GPI Output you want to name.
4. Press Accept New Name on to assign the new name to the GPI Output.
ports.
Support.

Clip Setup
In order to easily recall clips on the VTR or Video Server from the Vision switcher, you must
store the clips you want to use to Clip Registers on the switcher. These Clip Registers store the
location, or timecode, on the device for the clip, and the name of the clip.
Note — The switcher supports a maximum of 10,000 clips in the clip list from a video server. If
there are more than 10,000 clips on your video server, the switcher will only report 10,000.
In a MultiPanel configuration, only the Master Panel can access the VTR Clips Menus.
The VTR Clips Menu allows you to perform the following functions:
• Select a VTR or Video Server and a clip number.
• Grab or enter a timecode (and other device specific data), name the clip, and store it in a
clip register. Up to 300 clip registers can be stored (using registers 000 to 299).
• Cue and preview each clip.
• Modify the inpoint and outpoint of a clip.
Programming Clips
1. Press HOME  Clips  Assign Clips  Clip Type.
Clip Type — VTR Clips Menu 1-2

2. Select the Clip Register you want to store a VTR clip to as follows:
• Use the Clip knob to select the clip register that you want to store the clip
information to (000 through 299).
• Use the Device knob to select the device you want to store the clip information for.
A device is selected by the input source that it is assigned to. Select NONE to
disable a clip and have it not displayed on the Remote Control Menu.
• Use the Looping knob to select if you want the clip to loop by default. This turns
the Loop button on the Remote Control Menu on or off when the clip is cued.
Note — Only VDCP video servers support the looping of clips. If the clip is from a VTR or
Betacam video server, you cannot enable looping.
3. Name the Clip Register as follows:

• Press Name Clip. The Clip Name is the name that is shown for the register on all
the displays on the switcher.

Clip Name Menu
more information on using the Clip Name Menu to enter a name for a clip.
• Enter the new name for the clip in the New Name field. The name can be no more
than 8 characters in length and cannot contain a leading or trailing space.
• Press Accept New Name to store the new name and display the VTR Clips
Menu 1-2.
4. Select a clip on the VTR or Video Server as follows:
• Press Choose ID.
Operating Tip — If you know the name of the clip, press Enter ID and enter the name of the
clip directly from the Enter Clip ID Menu. Only clip names up to 96 characters long are
supported.
Choose ID — VTR Clips Menu 1-2
Note — If you want to refresh the list of clips returned by the VTR or Video Server, press
Refresh & Choose ID to poll the device for a current list of clips. The total number of clips
returned is indicated under the Showing heading.
• Use the ×1, ×10, or ×100 knobs to select the clip on the VTR or Video Server that
you want to use. The ID and Duration of the currently selected clip is shown in the
respective fields.
5. Modify the Inpoint and Outpoint of the clip as follows:
• Press Inpoint/Outpoint.

Note — If you select different start and end frames to use on-air, the original inpoint and
outpoint for the clip will remain unchanged on the device. This allows you to create sub-clips
from a longer master clip directory on the switcher.
Inpoint/Outpoint Menu
• Toggle Enable to enable the Inpoint/Outpoint overrides.
› No — Select this option to use the default inpoint and outpoint of the clip on
the VTR or Video Server. If you have made changes to the inpoint of outpoint
of the clip, these values are saved, but not applied to clip until you select Yes.
› Yes — Select this option to override the inpoint and outpoint of the clip on the
VTR or Video Server. When you select Yes, the Inpoint/Outpoint Menu
changes to allow you to modify the start and stop positions of the clip.
• Toggle Edit to select either the inpoint or outpoint for editing.
› In — Select this option to modify the inpoint, or start position, of the clip.
› Out — Select this option to modify the outpoint, or stop position, of the clip.
Operating Tip — You can cue the clip to the current Inpoint or Outpoint by pressing Cue to
Inpoint when Edit is set to In, or Cue to Outpoint when Edit is set to Out.
• Press Hours/Minutes.
Hours/Minutes — Inpoint/Outpoint Menu

› Use the Hours knob to adjust the value in the hours field of the Inpoint or
Outpoint.
› Use the Minutes knob to adjust the value in the minutes field of the Inpoint
or Outpoint.
• Press Seconds/Frames.

Seconds/Frames — Inpoint/Outpoint Menu
› Use the Seconds knob to adjust the value in the seconds field of the Inpoint
or Outpoint.
› Use the Frames knob to adjust the value in the frames field of the Inpoint or
Outpoint.
• Press Grab Timecode to use the new Inpoint or Outpoint value for the clip
registers.
Grabbing a Timecode
If you do not know the timecode for the inpoint or outpoint you want to store, you can manually
scan the video using the commands on the VTR Clips Menu 2-2 and grab the timecode.
1. Press HOME  Clips  Assign Clips.
2. Select the clip register and VTR or Video Server you want to store.
3. Grab a timecode as follows:
Transport Controls — VTR Clips Menu 2-2

• Cue the VTR or Video Server to the desired clip location using the transport
controls: Rewind, Back Frame, Pause, Play, Ahead Frame, and Fast
Forward.
• Press Pause to hold the device at the desired timecode.
• Press Grab Timecode to grab the current timecode. The new timecode is
displayed on the Timecode field.

Audio Channel Setup
Audio from a remote mixer can be configured as individual channels or grouped together, with up
to three channels per group. When you set up the audio channels, you also set the Default Levels
for the individual channels. These default levels are the ones that the switcher will set the
channels to when you perform an audio reset custom control.

• on setting up Audio Control modules, refer to the section “Audio Control Module” on
page Eng 15-6.
Setting Up Audio Sources

For the some audio mixers, each audio source needs to be assigned to an audio channel that is
controlled by the switcher. This allows you to select specific audio sources to be controlled when
there are more audio sources than input channels on the Audio Mixer.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Audio  Assign Source.
Assign Audio Source Menu

2. Assign as audio source to an audio channel as follows:
• Use the Audio Channel knob to select the input audio channel you want to assign
an audio source to. The number of channels listed is the number of channels you
selected when setting the Max Channels extra options for your Audio Mixer.
• Use the Audio Source knob to select the audio source that you want to assign to
the selected input audio channel.
3. Press Name Channel.
Audio Source Names Menu

more information on using the Audio Source Names Menu to enter a name for the audio
group.
• Use the Audio Src knob to select the audio source you want to name.
• Enter the new name you want to use in the New Name field. The name can be no
longer than eight characters.
• Press Accept New Name to assign the name to the audio source.
4. Press Assign All to send the audio input channel to audio source assignments to the
Audio Mixer.
ports.
Support.
Setting Up Audio Channels

Each audio channel can be set with a custom audio level that is used when the channel is taken
on-air. This level can be adjusted manually using the sliders on the Audio Mixer, or by selecting
the level on the menu. The default audio level for each channel is 75%.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Audio  Audio Level.
Audio Level — Audio Menu

2. Include audio channels from the control of the switcher as follows:
• Use the Audio Channel knob to select the audio channel that you want to remove
from the control of the switcher. All channels are included by default.
Note — If you have programmed Audio Assign Custom Controls, the Audio Channel knob
will display the custom control that you assigned the channel to.
• Use the Include knob to select Yes, to include the channel, or No, to not include
the channel. If the channel is not included, the switcher will not control the audio
levels for that channel.

3. Set the level for each audio channel as follows:
• Use the Audio Channel knob to select the audio channel that you want to set the
default level for.
• Use the Level knob to select the default level for the selected channel. All channels
are initially set at 75%.
ports.
Support.
Setting Up Audio Groups

Up to three audio channels, or groups, can be grouped together. This allows you to assign
multiple audio channels to a single input source. Assigning audio channels will not change the
default audio levels that have been set for each of the channels. When the group is taken on-air,
each audio channel is taken up to the level set for that particular channel.
Note — Assigning audio channels to groups does not alter the default or custom levels that
you have set for them.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Audio  Audio Groups.
Audio Groups — Audio Menu

2. Press Group 1 to assign audio channels to that group. There are a total of 6 audio
groups that you can assign audio channels to.
3. Assign up to 3 audio channels to the selected group as follows:
Note — If you have programmed Audio Assign Custom Controls, the Audio Channel knobs
on the Audio Menu will display the custom control that you assigned the channel to.
• Use the Audio Channel 1 knob to select the first audio channel that you want to
assign to the group.
• Use the Audio Channel 2 knob to select the second audio channel that you want
to assign to the group.

• Use the Audio Channel 3 knob to select the third audio channel that you want to
assign to the group.
ports.
Support.
Setting Audio Channel Names

Each audio channel can have a unique name. This name appears on the mnemonic above the
audio fader on the Audio Control module. The color of the mnemonic indicates the status of the
audio channel. Orange for an on-air channel, and yellow for an off-air channel. Refer to the
section “Audio Control Module” on page Eng 15-6 for more information on audio fader
mnemonics.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Audio  Name Channels.
Audio Channel Menu
more information on using the Audio Channel Names Menu to enter a name for the audio
channel.
• Use the Channel Name knob to select the audio channel you want to name.
• Enter the new name you want to use in the New Name field. The name can be no
longer than 14 characters.
• Press Accept New Name to assign the name to the audio channel.
Setting Audio Fade Rate

Each audio channel can be set to use either the video transition rate, or a unique fade-in and
fade-out rate when the audio channel is transitioned on, or off, air.
Note — If the Audio Cut Only personality option is set to On, any audio fade rate settings are
ignored.

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Audio.
2. Toggle Fade Rate to Audio.
Audio Fade Rate — Audio Menu

3. Use the Audio Channel knob to select the audio channel that you want to set the audio
fade rate for.
4. Use the Fade-in Rate knob to set the audio fade-in rate, in frames, for the selected
audio channel.
5. Use the Fade-out Rate knob to set the audio fade-out rate, in frames, for the selected
audio channel.
Operating Tip — Toggle Fade Rate to Video to set the selected channel back to the video
transition rate.

ports.
Support.
Not Assign Audio Channel to Audio Fader

Each audio channel can be prevented from being assigned to a fader on the Audio Control
module. This is useful if you only want a single channel from a stereo pair to be assigned to the
Audio Control module. The single fader will control both channels in the stereo pair, or all
channels in the group.

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Audio  More  OnFader
Module.
Audio Fade Rate — Audio Menu

2. Use the Audio Channel knob to select the audio channel you don’t want assigned to a
fader on the Audio Control module.
3. Use the OnFaderModule knob to select No to have the selected channel not assigned
to a fader. The channels that will not be assigned to a fader are listed on the menu.

Factory Default Settings
Each Vision switcher comes pre-configured from the factory with a number of default settings.
Recalling these default settings allows you to return the switcher to a known state for diagnostic
purposes, creating new Setups, or if advised to do so by Ross Technical support. The following
are some of the situations where you may want to perform a recall of the factory default settings:
• If you sense a problem with one of the registers.
• If you need to create a new switcher Setup and want to start from the default state.
• If you need to delete all entries in a particular register. For example, if you needed to
delete all memories on the switcher.
• If you need to reset all control panel values.
The recalling of factory default setting is performed on individual register types. Defaulting one
of these register types will return all the entries stored in registers of that type to the factory
installed state. Any entries in the registers are destroyed.
Note — If the Installation is locked, you cannot recall the factory default settings for Installation,
but all other registers will recall normally.
Recalling Factory Default Settings

When you perform a recall of the factory default settings, each register must be recalled
individually. This allows you to recall the factory default setting for only those registers that need
to be defaulted. Factory default settings only apply to the active Setup on the switcher. Additional
Setups that are stored on the switcher are not affected.
Important — You should back up any of your registers that you want to keep to a Setup
before performing the recall of the factory default setting. Refer to the section “Storing and
Recalling Files and Setups” on page Eng 13-4 for more information on storing registers to
switcher Setups.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  More  Recall Factory.
Recall Factory Menu 1-3

2. Recall a factory default setting by pressing the corresponding button for the register you
want to default. You are prompted to confirm the factory default. The following registers
can be factory defaulted:
• Personality — The personality registers contain all the user interface settings.
These registers contain items such as mnemonic settings, preview overlay positions

and settings, and transition rates. As a rule, anything that is set up from the
Personality Menus is stored in these registers. If you recall the factory default
setting for the personality registers, all these settings are returned to the default
state.
• Memories — The memory registers contain all the memories that are stored on the
switcher. If you recall the factory default settings for the memory registers, all the
memories that have been stored on the switcher are erased.
• Switcher — The switcher registers contain information on the configuration of the
control panel. If you recall the factory default settings for the switcher registers, all
keyer settings and MLE settings are reset.
• Installation — The installation registers contain all the external device setup, and
software configuration settings for the switcher. As a rule, anything that is set up
from the Installation Menus is stored in these registers. If you recall the factory
default settings for the installation registers, all the external devices you have set up
and software configurations you have made are erased. In a multipanel
configuration, the master panel is assigned all installed MLEs, with the highest
numbered MLE as the Program MLE. For satellite panels, only the lowest number
MLE installed is assigned to the panel and set as the Program MLE.
• Custom Controls — The custom control registers contain all the custom controls
that have been stored on the switcher. If you recall the factory default setting for the
custom control registers, all the custom controls that have been recorded on the
switcher are erased. Custom control banks are stored in the Installation Registers.
• Default VTR Clips — The clip registers contain all the VTR and video server
timecode and clip information stored on the switcher. If you recall the factory
default settings for the clip registers, all clip information are erased. This will not
affect the clip information on the external device.
• Default NV-RAM — The Non-Volatile RAM on the Vision switcher contains
information such as active key effects and some personality settings. If you recall
the factory default setting for the NV-RAM, all the information stored in the
NV-RAM is erased.
• Default S&T — The Squeeze & Tease registers contain all the Squeeze & Tease
sequences that have been stored on the switcher. If you recall the factory default
settings for the Squeeze & Tease registers, all the sequences that have been recorded
on the switcher are erased.
• Default Bus Maps — The Bus Maps registers contain all the user defined bus
maps that have been stored on the switcher. If you recall the factory default settings
for the Bus Map registers, all the custom bus mappings that have been created on
the switcher are erased.
• Default Shot Box Pages — The Shot Box Pages registers contain all the user
defined Shot Box Pages that have been stored on the switcher. If you recall the
factory default settings for the Shot Box Pages registers, all the Shot Box Pages that
have been created on the switcher are erased.
• Camera File — The Camera File registers contain all the camera shots that have
been stored on the switcher. Only cameras that store shots on the switcher use this
registers. If your camera does not store shots on the switcher, defaulting this register
will not erase the shots stored on the camera. If you recall the factory default
settings for the Camera File registers, all the camera shots that have been stored on
the switcher, not on the camera, are erased.
• CC/Macro Attachments — The Custom Control Attachments registers contain
all the attachments of custom controls to control panel buttons. If you recall the
factory default settings for the CC/Macro Attachments registers, all the assignments
of custom controls to control panel buttons are erased. The custom control that are
attached to buttons are not defaulted.

• Default MultiViewer — The default MultiViewer option defaults both the
MultiViewer Assignment registers and the MultiViewer Layout registers. If you
recall the factory default settings for the MultiViewer, the mapping of layouts to
MultiViewers, as well as the actual layouts and sources assigned to the boxes in the
layout are defaulted.
• Default CC Variables — The default CC Variables register contains all the user
defined custom control variables that have been stored on the switcher. If you recall
the factory default settings for the CC Variables, all the values for the custom
control variables that have been set on the switcher are erased.
ports.
Support.

Preview Overlay Setup
The Preview Overlay allows you to view information such as Source ID, Safe Title area, and
Time Clock on the preview monitor of your Vision switcher. With the exception of the Preview
Overlay Module on the Vision 1 control panel (Figure 12.2), all of these features can be turned
on or off by pressing the associated button on the Preview Overlay Module (Figure 12.3).
The Preview Overlay is only available to the highest number MLE. If your control panel does not
have that MLE assigned to it, the Preview Overlay is not available.
Note — If Global-Store channel 4 is enabled, the Preview Overlay feature is not available.
Refer to the section “Personality List” on page Eng 11-2 for more information on Global-Store 4
Mode.
PREVIEW PREVIEW OVERLAY

MLE MLE SOURCE SAFE
PGM PV SRC
PGM PV ID TITLE
Figure 12.2 Vision 1 Preview Overlay Module
PREVIEW OVERLAY
SOURCE VTR SAFE TIME MASK HIDE
CENTER
Figure 12.3 Vision Preview Overlay Module for all other switchers
Operating Tip — On the Vision 1, the Preview Overlay functions can be turned off and on
from the Preview Overlay Menus.
Preview Overlay Font Color

You can adjust the color of the font used for various elements of the preview overlay. Color
selections are applied to the fonts, and not to the safe title or other graphical elements.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  Preview OVL Font Colors.
Preview Overlay Font Color Menu

2. Use the Font knob to select the preview overlay element that you want to change the
font color for. You can choose between the following:

• Time Up — Select this option to set the color of the Time Clock text when the
time clock is counting up.
• Time Down — Select this option to set the color of the Time Clock text when the
time clock is counting down.
• VTR On Air — Select this option to set the color of the VTR Timecode text when
a VTR is contributing to the Program output.
• VTR Active — Select this option to set the color of the VTR Timecode text when
a VTR is selected on the Preset bus of the Program MLE.
• VTR Inactive — Select this option to set the color of the VTR Timecode text
when a VTR is not selected.
• Source ID — Select this option to set the color of the program video on the
Source ID text.
• Tran ID — Select this option to set the color of the transition type on the Source ID
text.
• Dest ID — Select this option to set the color of the preset video on the Source ID
text.
3. Use the Color knob to select the color that you want to apply to the text of the selected
preview overlay element.
Preview Overlay Component Setup

From the Preview Overlay Menus, you can adjust the color, size, and appearance of many of the
components used in the Preview Overlay.
1. Press HOME  More  Effects  More  More  More  Preview Overlay.
Preview Overlay Menu

2. Use the following sections to set up the Preview Overlay element you want to use:
• VTR Timecode
• Source ID
• Safe Title
• Center
• Time Clock

• on using the preview overlay, including the preview mask, refer to the section “Preview
Overlay” on page Ops 4-17.

VTR Timecode
The VTR Timecode element shows the current timecode, or remaining time, of the VTR or Video
Server currently selected on the Program/Preset MLE.
1. Press VTR.
VTR Position Menu

2. Adjust the VTR TC element as follows:
• Use the X knob, or the positioner, to select the horizontal position on the Preview
Overlay that the VTR Timecode text appears.
• Use the Y knob, or the positioner, to select the vertical position on the Preview
Overlay that the VTR Timecode text appears.
• Use the Size knob, or the positioner, to select the size (20 to 350) of the VTR
Timecode text on the Preview Overlay.
3. Press Done to save the current settings and display the Preview Overlay Menu.
Source ID
The Source ID element shows the name of the current on-air video signal, the transition type that
is currently selected, and the video signal that is taken on-air with the next transition.
1. Press Source ID.
Source ID Position Menu

2. Adjust the Source ID element as follows:
• Use the X knob, or the positioner, to select the horizontal position on the preview
overlay that the Source ID text appears.
• Use the Y knob, or the positioner, to select the vertical position on the preview
overlay that the Source ID text appears.

• Use the Size knob, or the positioner, to select the size (20 to 350) of the Source ID
text on the preview overlay.
3. Press Done to save the current settings and display the Preview Overlay Menus.
Safe Title
The Safe Title element shows guides for Safe Title, Safe Action and Minimum Text Size
(Figure 12.4) using the SMPTE standards. A number of pre-defined Safe ID setups are stored on
the switcher. The size and position of the elements for these Safe ID setups can be adjusted and
stored.
Safe Action
Safe Title
Minimum Text
Figure 12.4 Safe Title Preview Overlay elements
1. Press Safe Title Center Pos.
Safe Title Setup Menu

2. Use the Safe ID knob to select the Safe ID that you want to adjust the values for.
3. Adjust the position of the Top and Left sides of the Safe Title and Safe Action elements
as follow:
• Press Top/Left.
• Use the Left knob, or the Positioner, to adjust the horizontal position of the left side
of the Safe Title and Safe Action elements.
• Use the Top knob, or the Positioner, to adjust the vertical position of the top side of
the Safe Title and Safe Action elements.
4. Adjust the position of the Bottom and Right sides of the Safe Title and Safe Action
element as follow:
• Press Bottom/Right.
• Use the Right knob, or the Positioner, to adjust the horizontal position of the right
side of the Safe Title and Safe Action elements.
• Use the Bottom knob, or the Positioner, to adjust the vertical position of the bottom
side of the Safe Title and Safe Action elements.

5. Name the Safe ID as follows:
more information on using the Change Safe Title Name Menu to enter a name.
• Press Modify Name.

• Use the Safe Title knob to select the Safe ID you want to name.

• Enter the new name you want to use in the New Name field.
• Press Accept New Name to assign the name to the Safe ID.
Center
The Center element shows a crosshairs on the Preview Overlay to indicate the center of the
picture. The position of the crosshairs can be adjusted and stored.
1. Press Safe Title Center Pos.

2. Use the Safe ID knob to select the Safe ID that you want to adjust the values for.
3. Adjust the position of the Center element as follows:
• Press Center.
• Use the X knob, or the positioner, to adjust the horizontal position of the Center
element.
• Use the Y knob, or the positioner, to adjust the vertical position of the Center
element.

Time Clock
The Time Clock element shows a count-down, count-up, or count-down-then-up timer on the
Preview Overlay. The Time Clock can be set up to start counting down, or up, on every transition,
from a preset start time. This can be tied to any MLE, or a particular MLE, or Fade to Black
transition.
1. Press Time Clock.
Time Clock Menu

2. Adjust the Position of the Time Clock element as follows:
• Press Position.
• Use the X knob, or the positioner, to select the horizontal position on the Preview
Overlay that the Time Clock appears.
• Use the Y knob, or the positioner, to select the vertical position on the Preview
Overlay that the Time Clock appears.
• Use the Size knob, or the positioner, to select the size (20 to 350) of the Time
Clock on the Preview Overlay.
• Press Done to save the current settings and display the Time Clock Menu.
3. Select the MLEs that the Time Clock will activate on when a transition is performed as
follows:
• Press Transition.
Preview Trans Menu

• Toggle Master to On to allow the Time Clock to be tied to an MLE.
Note — You must have Master set to On in order to be able to tie the operation of the Time
Clock to an MLE or Fade to Black transition.

• Toggle MLE X to On to tie the operation of the Time Clock to the selected MLE,
where “X” represents the MLE number. Turning this feature Off will not have the
Time Clock reset when a transition is performed in this MLE.
• Toggle FTB to On to tie the operation of the Time Clock to a Fade to Black
transition. Turning this feature Off will not have the Time Clock reset when a Fade
to Black transition is performed.
4. Set up the direction that the Time Clock will count as follows:
• Press Direction.
• Use the Going knob to select the direction you want the Time Clock to count in.
› Up — Select this option to have the Time Clock count up from zero when
reset and started.
› Down — Select this option to have the Time Clock count down to zero when
reset and started. The starting time is set from the Reset Time Menu.
› Down–>Up — Select this option to have the Time Clock count to zero, and
then count up from zero when reset and started. The starting time is set from
the Reset Time Menu.
5. Set up the Reset Time, or starting time, for the Time Clock as follows:
• Press Reset Time.
• Use the Hours knob to set the number of hours you want the Time Clock to count
down from.
• Use the Minutes knob to set the number of minutes you want the Time Clock to
count down from.
• Use the Seconds knob to set the number of seconds you want the Time Clock to
count down from.

• on using the preview overlay, refer to the section “Video Preview” on page Ops 4-15.
• on using time clock custom controls, refer to the section “Programming Special
Functions” on page Eng 10-15.

Set System Time
The System Time allows you to set the current date and time on the hardware clocks on both the
frame and the Vision control panel.
The System Time can be set manually from the Master Panel, or automatically from a Network
Time Protocol (NTP) server. The Set System Time Menu is not available to the Satellite Panels.
Setting System Time Manually

The Set System Time Menu allows you to manually set the system time for the switcher when a
NTP server is not available. If an NTP server is set up, the current date and time entered into the
Set System Time Menu is overwritten the next time the NTP time is updated.
1. Press HOME  Setup  More  Set System Time.
Set System Time Menu
Note — If there are NTP Servers listed on the Set System Time Menu, the switcher is getting
system time information from the listed NTP Servers. You cannot set the time manually when an
NTP Server is active.
2. Set the current date as follows:

• Press Date.
• Use the Year knob to select the current year.
• Use the Month knob to select the current month.
• Use the Day knob to select the current day.
3. Set the current time as follows:
• Press Time.
• Use the Hour knob to select the current hour.
• Use the Minute knob to select the current minute.
• Use the Second knob to select the current second.
4. Press Set to set the hardware clock on the Vision control panel and frame to the selected
date and time.

Setting System Time Automatically
The system time can be set automatically by entering the IP address of up to three (3) Network
Time Protocol (NTP) servers. The switcher must be able to access the IP addresses to get the time
from an NTP server.
displayed.
3. Click Other  Time to display the Time Page. All NTP servers that have been set up
on the switcher are listed.
Time Page
4. In the blank Time Servers field, enter the IP Address of the NTP server you want to
add. IP addresses in the range of 169.254.x.x are reserved by the switcher and cannot
be used as a time server address.
Operating Tip — To remove an NTP server from the list, click DELETE next to the time
server you want to remove.
5. Click ADD. You are asked to confirm the addition of the time server once it is validated,
click OK to add the server.
Once the switcher is synchronized to the new NTP server, Okay appears in the Status column. If
Okay is not shown next the IP address, check that the IP address is correct, or that the switcher
has access to the address.

Auto Follow
The Auto Follow feature allows you to set one part, or many parts, of an MLE or Aux Bus to
follow the operation of another part (Table 12.2). For example, you can have one Transition
Module follow another, a Keyer bus follow another Keyer bus, or have an entire MLE or Aux Bus
follow another. Both parts of the auto follow must be of the same type, a crosspoint bus can only
follow another crosspoint bus.
Operations, such as crosspoint selection or transitions, that are performed on part are repeated on
the other part.
Table 12.2 Supported Auto Follow Actions

Module Action
Memory Recall
Memory
Reset MLE (Store+Recall)
Keyers Cut and Auto Transition
Next Transition Selection
Transition Type
Cut, Auto, Fader Transitions
Preset Black
Transition
Key Priority
Transition Limit
Roll Clip
Transition PV
Crosspoint Source Selection
Auto follow actions only echo commands, and do not echo the state. For example, if a transition
is performed on an MLE, the auto follow MLE also performs a transition, regardless of what is
currently on-air on that MLE. If Key 1 is on-air on MLE 1 but off-air on MLE 2, the transition
takes Key 1 off-air on MLE 1, but on-air on MLE 2.
The same is true for memory recalls. If a memory register contains different setting on each MLE,
the local settings will be used. Auto Recall for memories only ensures that the same memory
register is recalled on the Echo To MLE. For example, if memory register 09 is recalled on the
Echo From MLE, memory register 09 is also recalled on the Echo To MLE. These two memory
registers may contain different commands.
Auto Follow Setup

The Auto Follow feature must be turned on from the Personality Menu. Once turned on, you can
specify the buses, keyers, transitions, and memory recalls that follow.
Operating Tip — When an Auto Follow is turned on, the word Active appears on the Main
Menu 1-2 next to the Auto Follow under the Remote Enables.
An auto follow can be set up for an entire MLE at once, or for the individual elements of an MLE.

1. Press HOME  Setup  Personality  More  Auto Follow Setup.
Operating Tip — The currently active Auto Follows are listed on the Auto Follow Setup
Menu 2-2. Press Buses to view the bus follows, Keyers to view the keyer follows, Transitions
to view transition follows, and Mem Recalls to view memory recall follows.
2. Press Config.
Configure — Auto Follow Setup Menu 1-2

3. Turn on auto follows as required:
• AutoFollow CustCtrl — The Auto Follow Custom Control feature allows you to
select whether or not custom control events are included in the auto follow
command echoing.
› Off — Select this option to have the switcher not perform any command
echoing for active custom controls.
› On — Select this option to have the switcher perform command echoing for
the active custom control. Any commands recorded in the custom control for
an MLE, bus, or Transition Module, will be echoed on the auto follow.
• AutoFollow Editor — The Auto Follow Editor feature allows you to select
whether or not external editor commands are included in the auto follow command
echoing.
echoing for external editor commands.
external editor commands.
• AutoFollow Panel — The Auto Follow Control Panel feature allows you to select
whether or not control panel button presses are included in the auto follow
command echoing.
echoing for control panel button presses.
control panel button presses. This includes memory recalls, transitions, and
crosspoint button selection. Custom control or editor based commands are not
included.
4. Set up an auto follow for an entire MLE at once as follows:
• Press MLEs.

MLEs — Auto Follow Setup Menu 1-2
• Use the Echo From knob to select the MLE that you want to be followed. This is
the MLE that you perform the actions on that you want to be repeated on the Echo
To MLE.
• Use the Echo To knob to select the MLE that you want to follow the select MLE.
This is the MLE that repeats the actions performed on the Echo From MLE.
• Press Set to apply changes.
Operating Tip — You can clear the currently selected MLE auto follow by pressing Clear.
5. Press More.
6. Set up a Bus auto follow as follows:
• Press Buses.
Buses — Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2

• Use the Echo From knob to select the bus that you want to be followed. You can
› AuxBusY — Select this option to assign an Aux Bus as the bus that you want
followed, where “Y” represents the number of the Aux Bus.
› MLE X PGM — Select this option to have the Program Bus of an MLE as the
bus that you want followed, where “X” represents the number of the MLE.
› MLE X PST — Select this option to have the Preset Bus of an MLE as the bus
that you want followed, where “X” represents the number of the MLE.
› MLE X Key #V — Select this option to have the Key Video Bus of an MLE
as the bus that you want followed, where “X” represents the number of the
MLE and “#” represents the number of the Keyer.

› MLE X Key #A — Select this option to have the Key Alpha Bus of an MLE
as the bus that you want followed, where “X” represents the number of the
MLE and “#” represents the number of the Keyer.
› MLE X Util 1 — Select this option to have Utility Bus 1 of an MLE as the bus
› MLE X Util 2 — Select this option to have Utility Bus 2 of an MLE as the bus
• Use the Echo To knob to select the bus that you want to follow the Echo From
bus.
• Press Set Bus Follow to apply changes.
Operating Tip — You can clear the currently selected Bus auto follow by pressing Clear
Bus Follow on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2, or you can clear all the Bus auto follows by
pressing Clear All Bus Follows on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2.
7. Set up a Keyer auto follow as follows:

• Press Keyer.
Keyers — Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2

• Use the Echo From knob to select the keyer that you want to be followed.
• Use the Echo To knob to select the keyer that you want to follow the Echo From
keyer.
• Press Set Keyer Follow to apply changes.
Operating Tip — You can clear the currently selected Bus auto follow by pressing Clear
Keyer Follow on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2, or you can clear all the Keyer auto follows
by pressing Clear All Keyer Follows on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2.
8. Set up a Transition auto follow as follows:

• Press Transitions.

Transitions — Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2
• Use the Echo From knob to select the Transition Module that you want to be
followed.
• Use the Echo To knob to select the Transition Module that you want to follow the
Echo From Transition Module.
• Press Set Trans Follow to apply changes.
Operating Tip — You can clear the currently selected Transition auto follow by pressing
Clear Trans Follow on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2, or you can clear all the Transition
auto follows by pressing Clear All Trans Follows on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2.
9. Set up a Memory Recall auto follow as follows:

• Press Mem Recalls.
Memory Recalls — Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2

• Use the Echo From knob to select the MLE that you want memory recalls to be
followed from. Memory registers that are recalled on this MLE are also recalled on
the Echo To MLE.
• Use the Echo To knob to select the MLE that you want to follow the Echo From
MLE.
• Press Set Mem Follow to apply changes.
Operating Tip — You can clear the currently selected Memory auto follow by pressing Clear
All Mem Follows on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2, or you can clear all the Memory auto
follows by pressing Clear All Mem Follows on the Auto Follow Setup Menu 2-2.

Frame Over-Temperature Shutdown
In the event that the frame over-heats, the switcher can be set to shutdown boards to prevent
damage. When the frame over-heats, a warning is provided with the option to over-ride the
shutdown. If you do not cancel the shutdown in 15 minutes, the frame will shutdown the boards
automatically.
Frame over-heating can be caused by a high ambient temperature in the equipment rack room,
poor airflow through the frame fan filter, or failing frame or power supply fans.
After the frame has shutdown the boards, you must correct the conditions that caused the
over-heating and restart the frame.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  More  Temperature Alarm.
Temperature Alarm Menu

2. Press Shutdown to turn this feature on or off:
• On — Select this option to have the switcher shutdown all the frame boards, except
the CPU Board, when the frame is over-heating.
• Off — Select this option to have the switcher not shutdown boards when the frame
over-heats.
3. Press Yes to save the settings.

Lock/Unlock Installation
The Lock/Unlock Installation feature allows you to lock-out changes to the Installation Menus
on the switcher with a password. This prevents anyone from changing settings on the Installation
Menus without first unlocking the installation settings. This also included the recalling of an
installation register. Other registers, such as Personality, can be recalled when the installation
menu is locked.
A Warning Screen is displayed when you attempt to navigate to the Installation Menu stating
that the installation settings are locked and any changes will not be saved.
1. Press HOME  Setup  More  More  Lock/Unlock Installation.
Note — If the Lock/Unlock Installation feature is active, and a password has been set up, the
Enter Installation Password Menu is displayed. Enter the password in the New Name field
and press Accept New Name to display the Lock/Unlock Installation Menu.
Lock/Unlock Installation Menu

2. Turn the installation lock on or off as follows:
• Toggle Install’n Lock to On or Off:
› On — Select this option to turn the installation lock feature on.
› Off — Select this option to turn the installation lock feature off.
Operating Tip — You can delete the current password by pressing Clear Password on the
Lock/Unlock Installation Menu.
3. Set a password for the installation lock as follows:

• Press Add/Change Password to display the Change Installation Password
Menu. If a password has already been set, the button is labelled Change
Password.

Change Installation Password Menu
• Enter the new password in the New Password field on the Change Installation
Password Menu.
• Press Accept New Password on the Change Installation Password Menu to
save the new password.

File and Setup Storage
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on storing files and registers to the internal hard drive, a USB
drive, or directly to an external computer for backup.
• File Storage Overview
• Storing and Recalling Files and Setups
• Managing Setups with an External Computer
• Hard Drive Backup and Restore
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) File and Setup Storage • Eng 13–1
File Storage Overview
The Vision switcher stores configuration and operation data in a number of registers that contain
the individual entries for items such as memories or personality settings. These registers can be
stored as a single archive file, as a register set that contains all the individual register of that type,
or as all individual registers. These files can be stored into Setups on the Hard Drive of the
switcher, or as files onto a USB flash drive. Setups allow you to store a complete set of switcher
files on the hard drive. Different Setups can be created for different shows or applications,
allowing you to quickly locate and recall the switcher configurations.
The following Register Types are present on the Vision switcher:
• Memory Registers — The memory registers contain all the memories that are stored on
the switcher. The memory registers can be stored and recalled as a set of all the memories
on the switcher, or as individual memory registers (0 to 99). Memory registers are stored
and recalled across all MLEs on the switcher, even if the same memory register contains
different settings for each MLE.
• Custom Control Registers — The custom control registers contain all the custom
controls that are stored on the switcher. The custom control registers can be stored and
recalled as a set of all the custom controls on the switcher, or as individual custom
controls. Custom control registers are stored and recalled by Bank and Custom Control. If
there are more or fewer custom control buttons on the switcher you are recalling the
custom control registers on, you may want to store and recall individual custom controls.
Custom Control Bank information is stored in the installation registers.
• Personality Registers — The personality registers contain all the user interface settings.
These registers contain items such as mnemonic settings, preview overlay positions and
settings, and transition rates. As a rule, anything that is set up from the Personality
Menus is stored in these registers. The following items are stored in the Personality
Registers:
› Personality settings
› Preview Overlay setting
› Default Mnemonics settings
› Pbus Memory settings
› Character Generator settings
› Memory Attributes
› Bus Map Assignment
• Clip Registers — The clip registers contain all the VTR and video server timecode and
clip information stored on the switcher.
• Installation Registers — The installation registers contain all the external device setup,
and software configurations settings for the switcher. As a rule, anything that is set up
from the Installation Menus is stored in this register. The following items are stored in
the installation registers:
› Input source settings (including tally and crosspoint button assignments)
› Output BNC settings
› Aux Bus settings
› GPI I/O settings
› Clean Feed settings
› Device communication settings
› Custom Control Bank settings (not including custom controls)
› Bus Maps
Eng 13–2 • File and Setup Storage Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Squeeze & Tease Registers — The Squeeze & Tease registers contain all the Squeeze &
Tease sequences that have been stored on the switcher.
• Bus Maps Registers — The Bus Map registers contain all the Bus Maps that have been
stored on the switcher.
• Shot Box Pages Registers — The Shot Box Pages registers contain all the Shot Box
Pages that have been stored on the switcher.
• Camera Registers — The Camera registers contain all the stored shots for cameras that
do not store shots on the camera or camera head controller. Refer to the Ross Video
External Device Setup Sheet for your camera for information on whether it uses the
Camera registers.
• CC/Macro Attachments — The Custom Control Attachments registers contain all the
mappings of custom controls that are attached to control panel buttons.
• MultiViewer Assignment — The MultiViewer Assignment registers contain all the
mapping of what layout is assigned to each MultiViewer.
• MultiViewer Layouts — The MultiViewer Layouts registers contain all the layouts and
assigned sources for the MultiViewer that have been stored on the switcher. The
assignment of a MultiViewer to output BNCs is stored in the Installation Register.
The Memory, Custom Control and Squeeze & Tease registers can all be stored as individual files
for each value on the switcher. This allows you to store a particular Memory, Custom Control, or
Squeeze & Tease sequence to a Setup on the Hard Drive, or to the USB flash drive, and recall it to
another register position on the same or a different switcher. For example, Custom Control Bank
3 Button 9 can be stored on the USB flash drive and then recalled into Bank 1 Button 3. This
allows you to organize these registers on a single switcher, or transfer only the registers you need
to another switcher.

• on recalling the factory default settings for the switcher registers, refer to the section
“Factory Default Settings” on page Eng 12-27.
• on attaching custom controls to panel buttons, refer to the section “Attaching Custom
Controls to Panel Buttons” on page Eng 10-25.
Storing and Recalling Files and Setups
The Vision switcher allows you to store and recall the various installation setting, custom
controls, memories, sequences, and bus maps to either the hard drive, or USB flash drive. This
can be to backup your settings, or to copy your settings from one switcher to another.
The Vision switcher can store files and setups on either the internal hard drive, located in the
frame, or a USB drive that is inserted into the USB port on the Fade To Black Module. The USB
drive must be formatted as FAT or NTFS.
Only the Master Panel can store or recall files or setups to either the internal hard drive, or a USB
flash drive.
Storing Registers
You can store your switcher settings and files either to the internal hard drive, or to an external
USB flash drive from the Master Panel.
1. Press Disk  Dest/Source.
Destination/Source — Disk Menu

› Hard Drive — Select this option to store the files to one of the setups on the
hard drive. There are 100 setups available to store files.
• If you are storing files to the internal hard drive, use the Set Names knob on the
Disk Menu to select the Setup, or location, that you want to store the files in.
Important — Do not remove the USB flash drive from the control panel during a store or
recall. If the USB flash drive is removed during a store or recall, the panel may need to be
restarted to restore proper functionality.
3. Press Store.
Disk Store Menus
4. Select the switcher registers that you want to store to the selected Setup, or USB flash
drive, as follows:
Note — If a  is shown above a register type, then a switcher configuration file for that type is
already present on the storage device. Confirm that you want to overwrite this file, or select a
different Setup.
• All — Select this option to store all categories of registers to the storage device.
• Memories — Select this option to store only Memory Registers.
• Custom Controls —Select this option to store only Custom Control Registers.
• Personality — Select this option to store only Personality Registers.
• VTR Clips — Select this option to store only VTR Clip Registers.
• Installation — Select this option to store only Installation Registers.
• Press More to view the following options.
• S&T MD Sequences — Select this option to store only Squeeze & Tease
Sequences.
• Bus Maps — Select this option to store only Bus Map Registers.
• Shot Box Pages — Select this option to store only Custom Control Shot Box
Page Registers.
• Camera — Select this option to store only Camera Shot Registers.
• CC/Macro Attachments — Select this option to store only the custom control
attachments to control panel buttons.
• MultiViewer Assignment — Select this option to store only the MultiViewer
Assignment Registers.
• MultiViewer Layouts — Select this option to store only the MultiViewer Layout
Registers.
• CC Variables — Select this option to store only the CC Variables Register.
5. Press Name Setup.
more information on using the Setup Name Menu to enter a name for a Setup.
6. Enter the new name for the Setup in the New Name field. The name can be no more than
8 characters in length.
7. Press Accept New Name on the Setup Names Menu to store the new name.
Storing Individual Registers
When you store an individual register, the switcher allows you to select into which register that
entry is stored and recalled. For example, this allows you to store the memory in register 06, and
then recall it to Memory register 35. This can be useful for organizing your registers, or for
copying only select registers onto a new switcher.

› Hard Drive — Select this option to store the files to one of the setups on the
hard drive. There are 100 setups available to store files.
• If you are storing files to the internal hard drive, use the Set Names knob on the
Disk Menu to select the Setup, or location, that you want to store the files in.
3. Press Store Individual.
4. Store an individual Memory Register as follows:
• Press Memory Register.
Memory Registers — Store Individual Items Menu 1-2

• Use the From Switcher knob to select the switcher memory register that you want
to save.
• Use the To Disk knob to select the register on the storage device to save the file to.
• Press Store Item to store the memory register to the selected location.
5. Store an individual Custom Control Register as follows:
• Press CustCtrl Register.
Custom Control Registers — Store Individual Items Menu 1-2

• Use the From Switcher knob to select the custom control register that you want to
save. This list does not distinguish between relative and normal custom controls.
• Press Store Item to store the custom control register to the selected location.
6. Store an individual Sequence Registers as follows:
• Press Sequence.
Sequence — Store Individual Items Menu 1-2

• Use the From Switcher knob to select the sequence that you want to save.
• Press Store Item to store the sequence to the selected location.
7. Store an individual Bus Map as follows:
• Press Bus Maps.
Bus Maps — Store Individual Items Menu 1-2
• Use the From Switcher knob to select the bus map that you want to save.
• Press Store Item to store the bus map to the selected location.
8. Store an individual Shot Box Page as follows:
• Press Shot Box Pages.
Shot Box Pages — Store Individual Items Menu 1-2

• Use the From Switcher knob to select the shot box page that you want to save.
• Press Store Item to store the shot box page to the selected location.
9. Store an individual MultiViewer Layout as follows:
• Press MultiViewer Layouts.
MultiViewer Layouts — Store Individual Items Menu 2-2
• Use the From Switcher knob to select the MultiViewer layout that you want to
save.
• Press Store Item to store the MultiViewer layout to the selected location.
With your individual registers stored, you can recall them onto the same switcher in different
locations, or recall them onto a different switcher. Recalling your registers in different locations
on the same switcher allows you to organize your memories, sequences, or custom controls in a
different order.
Recalling Registers
When you recall switcher registers by type, the switcher extracts the individual register items
from the register type files and replaces the existing register entries with the new ones.
Important — A Recall cannot be undone. Ensure that you have Stored your current switcher
configuration before recalling a new Setup so that you can revert to the previous configuration if
needed.

2. Select the storage device that you want to recall your files from as follows:
• Use the Disk Type knob to select the storage device you want to recall your files
from. You can choose between the following:
› Hard Drive — Select this option to recall the files from one of the setups on
the hard drive.
› USB — Select this option to recall the files from a USB flash drive inserted in
the USB port on the control panel.
• If you are recalling files from the internal hard drive, use the Set Names knob on
the Disk Menu to select the Setup, or location, that you want to recall the files from.
Important — Do not remove the USB flash drive from the control panel during a store or
recall. If the USB flash drive is removed during a store or recall, the panel may need to be
restarted to restore proper functionality.
3. Press Recall.
Disk Recall Menus
4. Select the switcher registers that you want to recall from the selected Setup or USB flash
drive as follows:
Note — If a  is shown above a register type, then a switcher configuration file for that type is
already present on the storage device.
• All — Select this option to recall all categories of registers.

• Memories — Select this option to recall only Memory Registers.
• Custom Controls —Select this option to recall only Custom Control Registers.
• Personality — Select this option to recall only Personality Registers.
• VTR Clips — Select this option to recall only VTR Clip Registers.
Note — If you recall an Installation register that has the Video Processor Board set differently
than it currently is (as a MultiViewer vs an MLE for example), the Video Processor will reboot on
the recall.
• Installation — Select this option to recall only Installation Registers. If the

Lock/Unlock Installation feature is active, you cannot recall an installation register.
• S&T MD Sequences — Select this option to recall only Squeeze & Tease
Sequences.
• Bus Maps — Select this option to recall only Bus Map Registers.
• Shot Box Pages — Select this option to recall only Custom Control Shot Box
Page Registers.
• Camera — Select this option to recall only Camera Shot Registers.
• CC/Macro Attachments — Select this option to recall only the custom control
attachments to control panel buttons.
• MultiViewer Assignment — Select this option to recall only the MultiViewer
Assignment Registers.
• MultiViewer Layouts — Select this option to recall only the MultiViewer Layout
Registers.
• CC Variables — Select this option to recall only the CC Variables Register.

• on the Lock/Unlock Installation feature, refer to the section “Lock/Unlock Installation”
on page Eng 12-45.
Recalling Individual Registers
When you recall an individual register, the switcher allows you to select into which register that
entry is recalled. For example, this allows you to store the memory in register 06, and then recall
it to Memory register 35. This can be useful for organizing your registers, or for copying only
select registers onto a new switcher.

2. Select the storage device that you want to recall your files from as follows:
› Hard Drive — Select this option to recall the files from one of the setups on
the hard drive.
› USB — Select this option to recall the files from a USB flash drive inserted in
the USB port on the control panel.
• If you are recalling files from the internal hard drive, use the Set Names knob on
the Disk Menu to select the Setup, or location, that you want to recall the files from.
3. Press Recall Individual.
4. Recall an individual Memory Register as follows:
• Press Memory Register.
Memory Registers — Recall Individual Items Menu 1-2

• Use the From Disk knob to select the memory register on the storage device to
recall.
• Use the To Switcher knob to select the switcher memory register that you want
recall to.
• Press Recall Item to recall the memory register to the selected location.
5. Recall an individual Custom Control Register as follows:
• Press CustCtrl Register.
Custom Control Registers — Recall Individual Items Menu 1-2

• Use the From Disk knob to select the custom control register on the storage device
to recall.
• Use the To Switcher knob to select the custom control register that you want recall
to.
• Press Recall Item to recall the custom control register to the selected location.
6. Recall an individual Sequence Registers as follows:
• Press Sequence.
Sequence — Recall Individual Items Menu 1-2

• Use the From Disk knob to select the sequence on the storage device to recall.
• Use the To Switcher knob to select the sequence that you want recall to.
• Press Recall Item to recall the sequence to the selected location.
7. Recall an individual Bus Map as follows:
• Press Bus Maps.
Bus Maps — Recall Individual Items Menu 1-2
• Use the From Disk knob to select the bus map on the storage device to recall.
• Use the To Switcher knob to select the bus map that you want recall to.
• Press Recall Item to recall the bus map to the selected location.
8. Recall an individual Shot Box Pages as follows:
• Press Shot Box Pages.
Shot Box Pages — Recall Individual Items Menu 1-2

• Use the From Disk knob to select the shot box page on the storage device to recall.
• Use the To Switcher knob to select the shot box page that you want recall to.
• Press Recall Item to recall the shot box page to the selected location.
9. Recall an individual MultiViewer Layout as follows:
• Press MultiViewer Layouts.
MultiViewer Layouts — Recall Individual Items Menu 2-2
• Use the From Disk knob to select the MultiViewer layout on the storage device to
recall.
• Use the To Switcher knob to select the MultiViewer layout that you want recall to.
• Press Recall Item to recall the MultiViewer layout to the selected location.
Managing Setups with an External Computer
The web interface of the frame allows you to not only upgrade the software on the switcher, but
also to manage the Setups you have stored on the hard drive of the switcher. Using a computer on
the same sub-net of a network as the frame, you can browse to the frame, log in, and either
download or upload Setups from or to the frame.
Downloading Setups to an External Computer

Downloading Setups from the frame allows you to back up different switcher configurations off
of the switcher. These Setups can then either be archived, or uploaded to a different switcher.
displayed.
3. Click File Sets to display the File Sets Page. All the populated Setups on the switcher
are shown in blue. If the Setup that you want to download does not appear, verify the
Setup number on the switcher and refresh your browser.
File Sets Page

4. Download a Setup from the switcher to your computer as follows:
• Click on the blue Setup number that corresponds to the Setup you want to
download. A Save dialog box is displayed.
• Select the folder, or directory, on your computer to save the Setup to. The switcher
will compress the contents of Setup into a single file and download it to the selected
folder, or directory.
Uploading Setups from an External Computer

Uploading Setups to the frame allows you to restore different switcher configurations that you
backed up off of the switcher, or transfer Setups from one switcher to another on the same
network.
displayed.
3. Click File Sets to display the File Sets Page. All the populated Setups on the switcher
are shown in blue.
File Sets Page

4. Upload a Setup to the switcher from your computer as follows:
• In the Number field, enter the 2-digit number for the Setup on the switcher that you
want to upload the Setup files to. If any Setup files exist in that location, they will be
replaced with the new files. All the populated Setups on the switcher are shown in
blue.
• In the Filename field, enter the location and name of the Setup on the computer that
you want to upload to the selected Setup on the switcher.
Operating Tip — You can use the Browse... button to display file browser dialog, and then
locate the file you want to upload.
• Click Upload set and OK to upload the Setup to the switcher.

• on logging into the frame, refer to the section “Vision Web Interface Account” on
page Eng 6-2.
Hard Drive Backup and Restore
The content of the hard drive in the switcher can be backed up for archiving, or if you are
replacing the hard drive.
Note — The backup and restore should not be used as a method of copying setups between
switchers.
Keep the following in mind when working with the restore and backup feature:
• The backup requires a Linux-compatible USB storage device with at least 11GB of
available space.
• Backup and restore can only be performed from a Master Panel.
• All panels connected to the switcher during the backup will be unresponsive.
• Option codes and serial number are not stored with the backup.
• Only files that are different on the USB drive compared to the hard drive will be backed
up or restored.
To Backup the Switcher Hard Drive

1. Insert the USB storage device that you want to perform the backup to into the USB port
on the control panel. The backup requires a Linux-compatible USB storage device with
at least 11GB of available space. If the drive is not Linux-compatible, you will be
prompted to format the drive.
2. Press Disk  More  System Backup. Based on the information on the hard drive,
an estimated time for the backup is shown. The switcher will be unresponsive during this
time, but the process can be aborted at any time.
System Backup Menu

3. Press Continue.
Operating Tip — You can stop the backup at any time by pressing Abort Backup. The
backup can be started again from where it left off.
To Restore the Switcher Hard Drive
1. Insert the USB storage device that you want to perform the restore from into the USB
port on the control panel.
2. Press Disk  More  System Restore.
System Restore Menu

3. Press Continue.
Auxiliary Panels
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on setting up an Auxiliary Control Panel or a Remote Aux
Panel with the Vision switcher.
The following topics are discussed:
• Auxiliary Panel Overview
• Installing Auxiliary Panels
• Communications Connections
• Communications Setup
• Auxiliary Panel GPIs
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Auxiliary Panels • Eng 14–1

Auxiliary Panel Overview
The Vision switcher supports both the Vision Auxiliary Control Panel and the Remote Aux
Panels used with the Ross Synergy family of switchers.
Auxiliary Control Panel

The Auxiliary Control Panel (Figure 14.1) is available in either a 16, 24, 32, or 40 button version
to match the size of your Vision control panel, and can be installed either on the back of the
control panel or into the desk. The 24-button Auxiliary Control Panel can also be installed into a
19-inch rack frame. For information on installing and cabling your Auxiliary Control Panel, refer
to the documentation that came with your Auxiliary Control Panel.
Note — An Auxiliary Control Panel that does not match the size of your control panel can be
used; however, a different bus map will have to be assigned to the Auxiliary Control Panel to
properly map all the crosspoint buttons.
Figure 14.1 Auxiliary Control Panel (24-Button Shown)
Auxiliary Control Panel Components

The Auxiliary Control Panel has a number of functional components that allow you to select the
mode the panel is operating in, and perform various operations when in each mode.
1
BANK BANK BANK BANK BANK BANK
1 2 3 4 5 6
2
AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 14.2 Auxiliary Control Panel Components (24-Button Shown)
1) Aux Bank Select Buttons 3) Command Buttons 4) Crosspoint Buttons

2) Aux Select Buttons
1. Aux Bank Select Buttons

These buttons are used to select the Aux Bus Bank that the Auxiliary Control Panel is currently
assigned to.
Eng 14–2 • Auxiliary Panels Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

2. Aux Select Button
These buttons are used to select the Aux Bus that the Auxiliary Control Panel is currently
assigned to.
3. Command Buttons
These mnemonic buttons are used to switch between operational modes and perform specific
functions based on the operational mode the Auxiliary Control Panel is in.
4. Crosspoint Buttons
The crosspoint buttons are used to select video sources. The number of crosspoint buttons
depends on the model of Auxiliary Control Panel you have.
Remote Aux Panels

The Vision switcher supports the Assignable (Figure 14.3) Remote Aux Panel. The Remote
Aux Panels are self-contained units that have their own power supply and connect to the control
panel through one of the External Link ports.
Even though an unlimited number of Remote Aux Panels can be connected to the switcher, a
practical limit of 24 panels should be observed. This limit will minimize delay, and allows 8
panels to be daisy-chained to each of the three External Link ports.
BLCK
MLE MLE MLE CLEAN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN ASSIGN
SHIFT PV PGM
1 2 3 FEED +4 +8 1 2 3 4
Figure 14.3 Assignable Remote Aux Panel
Remote Aux Panel Connections

The Remote Aux Panel has a number of connections on the back of the panel that allow you to
connect it to the switcher, as well as provide GPI and power connections.
1 2 3
Figure 14.4 Remote Aux Panel Rear Connections
1) Power Connector 3) Main Connector 4) Echo Connector

2) GPI Connector
1. Power Connector
A single DC power connector is provided for the +5 VDC power supply. An AC Adapter (90-264
VAC) is provided with each Remote Aux Panel to provide the +5 VDC power for the panel.
2. GPI Connector
A single DB9 GPI connector is provided for special GPI triggers that allows a camera operator to
manually override the Aux panel selection.
3. Main Connector
A single RJ-12 connector is provided for connecting the Remote Aux Panel to the External Link
port on the back of the control panel.

4. Echo Connector
A single RJ-12 connector is provided for daisy-chaining the Remote Aux Panel to the next
Remote Aux Panel in the chain.

Installing Auxiliary Panels
The Remote Aux Panel is 1 RU high, and is designed to install into a standard 19-inch equipment
rack.
Note — For information on installing and cabling your Auxiliary Control Panel, refer to the
documentation that came with your Auxiliary Control Panel.
1. Disconnect all cables from the Remote Aux Panel.

2. Place the Aux Panel into the rack where you want to install it.
3. Using standard rack mounting bolts, attach the Remote Aux Panel to the equipment
rack.
Caution — Always connect the External Power Supply to the Remote Aux Panel before
connecting the AC mains power. Connecting the power supply to the AC mains power before
connecting to the Remote Aux Panel could damage the Remote Aux Panel.
4. Connect the AC Adapter to the Power port on the Aux Panel and to the appropriate
AC outlet.

Communications Connections
This section outlines how to connect a Remote Aux Panel to one of the Aux ports on the Vision
control panel.
For information on installing and cabling your Auxiliary Control Panel, refer to the
documentation that came with your Auxiliary Control Panel.
In order to properly complete this procedure you will need the following cables:
• Remote Aux Panel Cable Adapter — This is a short TIA/EIA-568-B (CAT5e) cable
with an RJ-45 connector on one end and an RJ-12 connector on the other. (Ross Part
Number 4800CR-370)
• Aux Cable — This is a shielded, 6-conductor telco cable with an RJ-12 connector on
each end.
To Connect Two Remote Aux Panels to the Switcher

1. Connect and secure the RJ-45 end of the Remote Aux Panel Cable Adapter to one of
the External Link Ports on the back of the control panel (Figure 14.5).
Note — External Link Port 1 must be used to connect to the Touchscreen display, and
External Link Port 2 is used to connect to the OverDrive Production Control System. If
OverDrive is set up on any Vision control panel connected to the switcher, External Link Port 2
cannot be used for Remote Aux Panels.
To OverDrive or
To Touchscreen
Remote Aux
To Remote Aux To Remote Aux
Remote Aux Panel Remote Aux Panel
To Main on the next To Main on the next

Aux Panel in the chain, Aux Panel in the chain,
or no connection if the or no connection if the
last panel in the chain. last panel in the chain.
Figure 14.5 Vision Control Panel — Remote Aux Connection
2. Connect and secure one of the RJ-12 ends of the Aux Cable to the RJ-12 end of the
Remote Aux Panel Cable Adapter.
3. Connect and secure the other RJ-12 end of the Aux Cable to the MAIN port on the back
of the Remote Aux Panel.
4. Connect and secure one end of the Aux Cable to the ECHO port on the back of the
Remote Aux Panel.
5. Connect and secure the other end of the Aux Cable to the MAIN port on the back of the
second Remote Aux Panel.
You can connect up to 8 Remote Aux Panels to a single Aux Port on the switcher.

Remote Aux Cable Pinouts
Use the information in this section to connect the Remote Aux Panel Interface Cable from the
Vision switcher to the Remote Aux Panel.
Remote Aux Panel Cabling

The Vision switcher connects to the Remote Aux Panel via the External Link ports on the Vision
control panel, and the Main port on the Remote Aux Panel.
Note — Ross Video provides a Remote Aux Panel Cable Adapter (#4800CR-370) that plugs
into the RJ-45 External Link ports and provides an RJ-12 Remote Aux port for a standard aux
cable.
Cable connection in the following table (Table 14.1) refer only to those between the Vision
switcher and the Remote Aux Panel. Refer to the section “Remote Aux Panel Pinouts” on page
Eng 20-27 for information on other cable connections present on the Remote Aux Panel.
Table 14.1 Vision -to- Remote Aux Panel Wiring Chart

Vision Switcher Remote Aux Panel
External Link Port Signal Main Port Signal
1 RxB (Rx+)  2 TxB (Tx+)
2 RxA (Rx-)  1 TxA (Tx-)
3 TxB (Tx+)  4 RxB (Rx+)
4
5
6 TxA (Tx-)  3 RxA (Rx-)
7 Reset  5 Reset
8

Communications Setup
The Vision switcher needs to be set up with the Auxiliary Control Panel or Remote Aux Panel to
allow proper control and monitoring, as well as tally and GPI communications.
Auxiliary Control Panel

The Auxiliary Control Panel can be assigned to either an Internal Panel Row, or an External Panel
Row, depending on the functionality you want.
Note — Only Auxiliary Control Panels assigned to Internal Panel Rows can be used for menu
auto follows, double press actions, or recording custom controls.
Internal Panel Row Assignment

Assign the Auxiliary Control Panel to an Internal Panel Row if you need menu follows and
double press actions. Actions such as double-pressing a crosspoint button to assign a Color
Corrector to that video source must be done on an internal panel row.
To set up an Auxiliary Control Panel on an internal panel row, ensure that the Auxiliary Control
Panel is connected to the NEXT port on the back of the Touchscreen Display, and assign the
Auxiliary Control Panel to one of the Internal Panel Rows.
External Panel Row Assignment

Assign the Auxiliary Control Panel to an External Panel Row if you do not need menu follows or
double press action.
To set up an Auxiliary Control Panel on an external panel row, ensure that the Auxiliary Control
Panel is connected to External Link Ports 2, 3, or 4, and assign the Auxiliary Control Panel to
one of the External Panel Rows.

• on installing and cabling up your Auxiliary Control Panel, refer to the documentation that
came with your Auxiliary Control Panel.
on page Eng 17-5.
• on how GPIs are assigned by panel row, refer to the section “Auxiliary Control Panel
GPIs” on page Eng 14-11.
• on setting an External Link Port to External Module, refer to the section “External Panel
Modules” on page Eng 9-20.
Remote Aux Panel

To set up a Remote Aux Panel, you must first assign an External Link port to Remote Aux Panels,
and then assign each Remote Aux Panel to an Aux Bus.


2. Assign a Remote Aux port to the Remote Aux Panel as follows:
• Use the Com Port knob to select the communications port on the Vision switcher
that is connected to the Remote Aux Panel.
• Use the Device knob to select Remote Aux. If the OverDrive Production Control
System is set up with the switcher, you cannot assign ExtLnk 2 to Remote Aux.
• Use the Aux Buses knob to select the range of aux buses that you want to make
available to the remote aux panels connected to the selected External Link port.
Note — All the Remote Aux Panels that are connected to the selected External Link port, or to
other Remote Aux Panels that are connected to the port, are restricted to Aux Buses in the
range you select.

ports.
Support.
4. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Aux Bus  Remote Panels.
5. Press Remote Panel Setup. This places all the Remote Aux Panels connected to the
switcher into assignment programming mode. The red On-Air indicator on the Remote
Aux Panels flash (Figure 14.6).

Remote Panel Setup Menu
BLACK
SHIFT PV PGM
1 2 3 FEED +4 +8 1 2 3 4
On-Air
Indicator
Figure 14.6 On-Air Indicator (Tally)
6. In assignment programming mode, the first 12 crosspoint buttons (Figure 14.7)

represent Aux Bus outputs in the range specified in Step (2.) above.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BLACK
SHIFT PV PGM
1 2 3 FEED +4 +8 1 2 3 4
Figure 14.7 Aux Bus Output Buttons
7. Each aux panel can be assigned to all the available aux buses. The aux panel can be set
up for each aux bus in one of three modes. Press the Aux Bus Output buttons on the
Remote Aux Panel repeatedly until the required mode is selected for the aux bus. You
• Regular — The aux panel is assigned to the selected aux bus, allowing full control.
The button is lit steadily.
• Follow — The aux panel is assigned to the selected aux bus, allowing you to view
what crosspoints are selected on that aux bus, but you cannot control the aux bus.
The button is flashing.
8. Press Accept on the Remote Panel Setup Menu to store the new settings and exit
programming mode.

Auxiliary Panel GPIs
Using the 16 GPIs on each Auxiliary Control Panel, or the 8 GPIs on each Remote Aux Panel, a
camera operator can manually override the aux panel selection using a GPI trigger. For purposes
of matching or monitoring cameras, the camera operator can override the selected aux bus
crosspoint and manually switch to a selected output BNC using a button on the joystick or camera
control unit.
Each aux panel can be programmed to ignore all the GPIs if required. Remote GPIs cannot be
used for any other function other than aux bus signal selection.

• on the GPI Ports on the Remote Aux Panel, refer to the section “GPI Port” on page Eng
20-27.
• on the programming mode of the Remote Aux Panel, refer to the section “Aux Panel
Programming Mode Summary” on page Eng 20-29.
Auxiliary Control Panel GPIs

The 16 GPIs on each Auxiliary Control Panel are assigned based on the GPI group that the
Auxiliary Control Panel was assigned to. For example, if an Auxiliary Control Panel is assigned
to GPI Group 1, GPIs 1-16 are used.
1. Press HOME  Setup  More  Panel Modules. A warning is displayed, asking
you if you want to enter the menu. Press Yes to display the Panel Modules Menu.
2. Use the Link/Node knob to select the module on the Auxiliary Control Panel that has
the command buttons on it. You can also press a button on the module to jump to the link
and node.
3. Press Custctrl & GPI Group.
Custctrl & GPI Group (Auxiliary Control Panel Module) — Panel Modules Menu
4. Use the GPI Group knob to select the GPI group that you want to assign to the
Auxiliary Control Panel.

on page Eng 17-5.

Remote Aux Panel GPIs
The 8 GPIs on each Remote Aux Panel can be offset by multiples of 8, allowing each remote
panel to use different GPIs, to the maximum of 64. For example, Remote Aux Panel 1 can be set
to use GPIs 1-8. By setting Remote Aux Panel 2 to an offset of 1, it will use GPIs 9-16.
In order to gain access to all 64 GPIs, you must program the offset and group for each Remote
Aux Panel.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Aux Bus  Remote Panels.
2. Press Remote Panel Setup. This places all the Remote Aux Panels connected to the
switcher into programming mode. The On-Air indicators on the Remote Aux Panels
flash.
Remote Panel Setup Menu

3. Press CLEAN FEED on the Remote Aux Panel to switch the panel from assignment
programming mode to GPI programming mode. The CLEAN FEED button flashes.
4. In GPI programming mode, the first 8 crosspoint buttons (Figure 14.8) on the Remote
Aux Panel allow you to select the GPI Group you want to assign to the aux panel.
Group 2 Group 4 Group 6 Group 8
Offset 1 Offset 3 Offset 5 Offset 7
Group 1 Group 3 Group 5 Group 7
Offset 0 Offset 2 Offset 4 Offset 6
BLACK
SHIFT PV PGM
1 2 3 FEED +4 +8 1 2 3 4
Figure 14.8 GPI Programming Buttons
5. Select the GPI Group you want to assign to the Remote Aux Panel, by selecting the
appropriate crosspoint button (offset). Only one GPI Group can be assigned to a Remote
Aux Panel at a time.
• GPIs 1-8 — Select GPI Group 1 (Offset 0) to assign these GPIs.
6. Test the GPIs on the Remote Aux Panel as follows:

• Press the GPI buttons on the CCU joystick. The crosspoint button that corresponds
to the GPI (Figure 14.9) will light up, indicating that the GPI has been shorted to
ground.
GPI 7 GPI 5 GPI 3 GPI 1
GPI 8 GPI 6 GPI 4 GPI 2
BLACK
SHIFT PV PGM
1 2 3 FEED +4 +8 1 2 3 4
Figure 14.9 GPI Testing
7. Press Accept to store the new settings and exit programming mode.
ports.
Support.
This completes the procedure for programming a Remote Aux Panel GPI. Once the GPIs have
been set up, you will have to set up the CCU Joystick controls.
Setting Up CCU Joystick Control

Once the aux panel GPIs have been set up, and the panels have been set up with the proper group
and offsets, you can assign each aux panel GPI to an aux bus and an input source, as well as
setting the trigger type.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Aux Bus  Remote Panels  Remote
GPI Assignment.
Remote GPI Assignment — Remote Panels Menu

2. Assign a remote GPI input to an Aux Bus and Input as follows:
• Use the Remote knob to select the Auxiliary Panel GPI that you want to assign an
aux bus to.
• Use the Aux Bus knob to select the aux bus that you want to assign the GPI input
to.

• Use the Source knob to select the video source that you want to be selected on the
Auxiliary Panel when the selected GPI is triggered.
3. Press Remote GPI Type.
Remote GPI Type — Remote Panels Menu

4. Set the type of GPI trigger as follows:
• Use the Remote knob to select the Auxiliary Panel GPI that you want to set up.
• Use the Type knob to select the type of control that you want to assign to the
selected GPI. You can choose between the following:
› Low-Override — Select this option to set the trigger as a temporary override
when the circuit is closed (high to low signal). When the circuit opens again
(low to high signal), the aux bus output returns to the selected video signal.
› Low-Toggle — Select this option to set the trigger as a toggle when the
circuit closes (high to low signal). Every time the circuit closes, the override
state will toggle.
› High-Toggle — Select this option to set the trigger as a toggle when the
circuit opens (low to high signal). Every time the circuit opens, the override
state will toggle.
› Latch — Select this option to set the trigger to latch when the circuit opens or
closes. Once latched, the trigger cannot be released except by selecting a
different source on the Auxiliary Panel itself.
› Off — Select this option to disable the GPI trigger.
Operating Tip — The Remote Panel Setup Menu shows which Auxiliary Panel GPIs are
currently closed. You can update the list by pressing the Inquire GPIs button.

ports.
Support.

• on naming an external panel row, refer to the section “Naming an External Row” on
page Eng 17-8.

External Modules
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on setting up a Custom Control Shot Box Module or Audio
Fader Module with the Vision switcher.
The following topics are discussed:
• Custom Control Shot Box Module
• Audio Control Module

• on installing the Custom Control Shot Box Module, refer to the documentation that came
with your Shot Box Module.
• on storing and recalling shot box pages, refer to the section “Storing and Recalling Files
and Setups” on page Eng 13-4.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) External Modules • Eng 15–1

Custom Control Shot Box Module
The Custom Control Shot Box Module (Figure 15.1) allows you to map custom controls from
various banks to any of the 28 buttons on the Shot Box Module. Each custom control is mapped
to a position on a Shot Box Page that corresponds to a button on the Shot Box. When the button
on the Shot Box is pressed, the corresponding custom control is run. Additional commands such
as selecting other pages can also be assigned to buttons on a page.
CUSTOM CONTROL SHOT BOX
Figure 15.1 Shot Box Module
The active Shot Box Page is indicated in reverse text on the mnemonic button. The currently
running custom control is indicated by the mnemonic text flashing between reverse text and
normal, and the previously run custom control is shown in a different color, depending on the set
color (if the normal color is green, the previously run custom control is shown in yellow). To
avoid confusion, choose fonts and colors so the page buttons look different from the custom
control buttons, and so you can tell the active page button from the other page buttons (its font is
reversed between normal and inverted).
Custom Control Shot Box Module Setup

To set up the Shot Box Module, you must first assign each Shot Box Module to a panel row. Once
the Shot Box Module is assigned to a panel row you can assign Shot Box Pages to the buttons.
Assigning Shot Box Pages to buttons allows you to switch between pages by pressing the button
on the Shot Box Module, just like switching between custom control banks on the bus.
Note — If more than one Shot Box Module is assigned to the same panel row, both modules
will mirror each other. You cannot have two Shot Box Modules operate independently if they are
assigned to the same panel row.
Shot Box Pages can be assigned to control buttons on the Auxiliary Control Panel when it is in
Aux Bus mode.

• on assigning a module to a panel row, refer to the section “Mapping a Module to a
Row” on page Eng 17-5.
• on the control buttons on the Auxiliary Control Panel, refer to the section “Auxiliary
Control Panel Operation” on page Ops 12-2.
To Set up a Custom Control Shot Box Module

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Custom Controls  Setup
Shot Box Modules.
Eng 15–2 • External Modules Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Shot Box Module Setup Menu
2. Use the Module Row knob to select the Shot Box Module that you want to assign
buttons to pages on. Individual Shot Box Modules are identified by the panel row that
they are assigned to. If you are setting up an Auxiliary Control Panel, the Panel Row is
the row that the Auxiliary Control Panel is assigned to.
3. Use the Page knob to select the shot box page that you want to assign to a button.
4. Use the Button knob to select the button that you want to assign the select shot box
page to.. Only buttons 1 through 14 are available on the Auxiliary Control Panel.
ports.
Support.
Creating Shot Box Pages

When you create a Shot Box Page, you assign custom controls to the buttons on the page. The
text on the buttons shows the mnemonic text for the custom control. The buttons on the shot box
page correspond to the buttons on the Shot Box Module.
1. Press HOME  Custom Controls  More  Setup Shot Box Pages.
Shot Box Page Setup Menu

2. Use the Page knob to select the shot box page that you want to assign custom controls
to.

3. Select the button on the shot box page that you want to assign a custom control to.
4. Use the Bank and Button knobs to select the custom control that you want to assign to
the button on the shot box page.
Naming Shot Box Pages

The Shot Box Page names appear on the menus the mnemonics, and the Shot Box buttons for that
page. This is useful when working with multiple pages.
1. Press HOME  Custom Controls  More  Setup Shot Box Pages.
2. Use the Page knob to select the shot box page that you want to change the name for.
3. Press Modify Page Name.
Page Name Menu
more information on using the Page Name Menu to enter a name, or set up the mnemonics for
the custom control button.
4. Enter the new name for the page in the New Name field. The name can be no more than
8 characters in length.
Copying or Moving Shot Box Pages

Each Shot Box page can be copied or moved to any other page location. The contents of the
destination page is lost when a page is copied or moved to it. This allows you to duplicate or
re-organize the Shot Box Pages.

1. Press HOME  Custom Controls  More  Setup Shot Box Pages
 Copy/Move Pages.
Manage Shot Box Pages Menu

2. Use the Source knob to select the shot box page you want to copy or move.
3. Use the Destination knob to select the shot box page that you want to copy, or move,
the source page to.
4. Copy a shot box page as follows:
• Press Copy to copy the source shot box page to the destination.
5. Move a shot box page as follows:
• Press Move to move the source shot box page to the destination. The commands in
the source shot box page are moved to the destination. The source shot box page
will be empty after the move.

Audio Control Module
The Audio Control Shot Box Module (Figure 15.2) allows you to map audio channels, or groups,
from an audio mixer to any of the audio fader on the Audio Control Module.
AUDIO CONTROL
Figure 15.2 Audio Control Module
When an audio channel, or group, is assigned to a slider, the source name for that audio channel is
shown in the mnemonic above the audio fader. Audio channels, or groups, can be dynamically
assigned to audio faders with a custom control.
The color of the mnemonic above each audio fader indicates the state of the audio channel, or
group, assigned to the fader.
• Orange — Indicates that a channel assigned to that fader is on-air.
• Yellow — Indicates that all channels assigned to that fader are off-air.
To set up the Audio Control Module, you must first assign each Audio Control Module to a panel
row. Once the Audio Control Module is assigned to a panel row you can assign audio channels to
the audio faders.

• on assigning a module to a panel row, refer to the section “Mapping a Module to a
Row” on page Eng 17-5.
• on naming audio channels, refer to the section “Setting Audio Channel Names” on
page Eng 12-24.
• on creating audio fader custom controls, refer to the section “Programming Special
Functions” on page Eng 10-15.
• on preventing a channel from being assigned to the module, refer to the section “Not
Assign Audio Channel to Audio Fader” on page Eng 12-25.
Audio Fader Maps

Audio fader maps assign audio channels to audio faders on the Audio Control Menu.

1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Audio  Assign Source.
AudioFader Map Menu

2. Use the Fader knob to select the audio fader that you want to assign an audio channel
to.
3. Use the Audio Source knob to select the audio source that you want to assign to the
audio fader.
• NONE — Select this option to not assign an audio channel to the selected audio
fader.
• Chan X — Select this option to assign an audio channel to the selected audio fader.
• Group X — Select this option to assign an audio group to the selected audio fader.
• Floating — Select this option to have the switcher dynamically assign the audio
channel, or group, that is on-air to the audio fader. Audio channel assignment starts
with the lowest number channel that is on-air.
• Master — Select this option to assign the master level to the audio fader.

SmartConversion and Up/Down
Converters
In This Chapter
This chapter provides instructions for connecting, and setting up an Up/Down Converter with
your Vision switcher. Before you begin, ensure that the SmartConversion™ option is installed.
If not, please contact Ross Video for details. Refer to the section “Installed Options” on page
Eng 6-9 for instructions on verifying the status of installed options.
• Setting Up a Conversion Loop
• Switcher Setup
Operating Tip — A Conversion Loop Worksheet is provided to assist you in keeping track
of which inputs and outputs have been assigned to the Up/Down Converters. Refer to the
section “Conversion Loop Worksheets” on page Eng 21-20 for a copy of this worksheet.

• on operating an Up/Down Converter with SmartConversion, refer to the section
“SmartConversion™” on page Ops 4-24.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters • Eng 16–1
Setting Up a Conversion Loop
Each conversion loop has an Output BNC that goes to the Up/Down Converter and an input
source that comes from the Up/Down Converter. Along with the input and output BNCs, each
conversion loop is assigned an input and output video format. This allows SmartConversion to
route video signal that need to be converted to the proper Up/Down Converters.
Note — Up/Down Converters can only be used on a single video signal at a time. You should
plan ahead to ensure that you will have enough Up/Down Converters of each video format for all
the video signals you will want on-air at any one time. This includes video signals that are being
transitioned off-air.
A conversion loop ties an Aux Bus output and an input source together so that when
SmartConversion sends a video signal out to an Up/Down Converter, it knows on which input
source the converted video signal is returned on.
Note — If you want the video selections for the Aux Buses that you are using for Up/Down
Converters to be stored in memories, you must enable Aux Bus in the memory. Refer to the
section “MLE Memory Attributes” on page Ops 9-10 for more information on using this feature.
1. Ensure that the Output BNCs that you want to use for your Up/Down Converter have
been set up as Aux Bus outputs. Refer to the section “Configuring Video Outputs” on
page Eng 8-2 for information on assigning an Aux Bus to an Output BNC.
2. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Aux Bus.
3. Press Ext Device Assign.
4. Assign Input and Output BNCs to a particular Up/Down Converter as follows:
• Use the Aux Bus knob to select the Aux Bus Output BNC that is connected to the
input of your Up/Down Converter. This is the video signal that needs to be
converted. The Aux Bus name and number is used to identify the conversion loop
on the switcher.
• Use the Input knob to select the input source that is connected to the output of your
Up/Down Converter. This is the video signal that has been converted.
• Use the Tally when knob to select XPT On Air. This allows the switcher to
identify when a video signal is going on-air, and needs to be converted.
5. Press SmartConversion  Aux To Converters.
Aux To Converters Setup — SmartConversion Menu

6. Activate a particular conversion loop as follows:
Eng 16–2 • SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
• Use the Aux Bus knob to select the Aux Bus Output BNC that is connected to the
input of your Up/Down Converter.
• Use the Used for Converter knob to toggle the conversion loop on or off.
› Yes — Select this option to activate the selected conversion loop.
SmartConversion will now be able to use this Up/Down Converter. Once
activated, you will have to set the input and output video formats for each
Up/Down Converter. Refer to the section “Assigning Buses to Use
SmartConversion” on page Eng 16-5 for more information on assigning
video formats to an Up/Down Converter.
› No — Select this option to not activate the selected conversion loop.
SmartConversion will not use this Up/Down Converter.
7. Set the delay for a particular Up/Down Converter as follows:
• Use the Delay knob to select the amount of time that is required for the Up/Down
Converter to convert the video signal and send it back to the switcher. Refer to your
Up/Down Converter documentation for specific delay values.
8. Press Converter Format
Format Setup — SmartConversion Menu

9. Assign input and output video formats to a conversion loop as follows:
• Use the Aux Bus knob to select the conversion loop you want to assign the input
and output video formats for.
• Use the Input Format knob to select the video format that is being sent to the
Up/Down Converter.
Note — The Converter Output Format does not change the video format of the input source
used by the conversion loop. When the conversion loop is activated, the video format of the
input source is overridden by the Converter Output Format. Refer to the section “Assigning
Input Source Types” on page Eng 7-4 for more information on setting up input sources.
• Use the Output Format knob to select the video format that the Up/Down
Converter is converting the input video signal to. This is the output video signal of
the Up/Down Converter.
ports.
Support.
Next you must set up how the switcher will use the converters, and on which buses.

• on video formats, refer to the section “Video Formats” on page Eng 2-31.
• on setting specific video formats for input sources, refer to the section “Assigning Input
Source Types” on page Eng 7-4.
• on resetting the video format of all input sources, refer to the section “Reference
Connection and Setup” on page Eng 4-11.
• on defaulting the video format of all Aux Bus outputs, refer to the section “Reference
Connection and Setup” on page Eng 4-11.
Switcher Setup
You can specify which MLEs and video feeds that SmartConversion is used on. This allows you
to turn SmartConversion on or off for Specific MLE video feeds or lock a specific conversion
loop to an MLE or key. The display on the Fade to Black Module can be used to show the number
of conversion loops that are still available.
Assigning Buses to Use SmartConversion

Assigning which buses, or video signals, SmartConversion can convert, allows you to prevent
SmartConversion from converting video signals that you want to remain in non-native video
format. This will also help to limit the usage of conversion loops for buses that do not need to be
converted.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Aux Bus  SmartConversion  Bus
Disabling.
Bus Disabling Setup — SmartConversion Menu

2. Use the Bus knob to select the Bus or Video Signal that you want to assign the
SmartConversion usage to. You can choose between the following for each MLE:
• MLE X Program — Select this option to select whether the Program bus on the
selected MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X” represents the number of the
MLE.
• MLE X Preset — Select this option to select whether the Preset bus on the
MLE.
• MLEX KY Video — Select this option to select whether the Key Video Signal for
the selected MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X” represents the number of
the MLE, and “Y” is the number of the keyer.
• MLEX KY Alpha — Select this option to select whether the Key Alpha Signal for
the selected MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X” represents the number of
the MLE, and “Y” is the number of the keyer.
Note — If you have disabled Keyer 4 to activate Utility Bus 1 and 2, Key 4V and Key 4A will be
replaced with U1 and U2.
• MLEX Utility1 — Select this option to select whether the Utility 1 bus on the
MLE.
• MLE X Utility2 — Select this option to select whether the Utility 2 bus on the
MLE.
• MLEX DSKY Video — Select this option to select whether the MultiDSK Key
Video Signal on the program MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X” represents
the number of the MLE, and “Y” is the number of the keyer.
• MLEX DSKY Alpha — Select this option to select whether the MultiDSK Key
Alpha Signal on the program MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X”
represents the number of the MLE, and “Y” is the number of the keyer.
• MLEX KY BackV — Select this option to select whether the Key Y Backside
Video Signal for the selected MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X” represents
• MLEX KY BackA — Select this option to select whether the Key 1 Backside
Alpha Signal for the selected MLE can use SmartConversion, where “X” represents
• Aux Buses — Select this option to select whether a particular Aux Bus can use
SmartConversion. Aux Buses assigned to a conversion loop will not appear in the
list.
Note — If an Aux Bus is assigned to an AuxKey, it is set to Conversion Enabled by default, all
other Aux Buses are set to Conversion Disabled by default.
3. Use the Conversion Enabled knob to toggle SmartConversion On or Off.

• On — Select this option to allow the selected bus, or video signal, to use
SmartConversion.
• Off — Select this option to prevent the selected bus, or video signal, from using
SmartConversion.
ports.
Support.
Locking Conversion Loops to Buses

You can lock a specific conversion loop to a bus. This dedicates that Up/Down Converter to the
selected bus preventing SmartConversion from using it somewhere else.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Aux Bus  SmartConversion
 Converter Locking.
Converter Locking Setup — SmartConversion Menu

2. Use the Aux Bus knob to select the conversion loop you want to lock to an MLE bus.
3. Use the Lock To Bus/Pair knob to select the bus, or bus pair that you want to lock the
selected conversion loop to. You can choose between the following for each MLE:
• None — Select this option to not lock the conversion loop to a bus.
• MLE X BKGD+PST — Select this option to lock the conversion loop to the
Program and Preset bus of the select MLE, where “X” represents the number of
the MLE.
Note — If you are locking a conversion loop to the BKGD+PST bus pair, you should lock 2
conversion loops to the bus pair. One conversion loop for each bus.
• MLE X KEY Y — Select this option to lock the conversion loop to the Key bus of
the selected MLE, where “X” represents the number of the MLE, and “Y” is the
number of the keyer.
• Aux Buses — Select this option to lock the conversion loop to an Aux Bus.
ports.
Support.
Fade to Black Display Mode for Up/Down Converters

The Fade to Black Display Mode sets whether the display on the Fade to Black Module will
display the current fade rate, or the number of Up/Down Converters available on the switcher.
2. Use the Option knob to select FTB Display.
FTB Display — Personality Menu 1-2
3. Use the Value knob to toggle between SmrtConv or FTB.
• SmrtConv — Select this option to have the display on the Fade to Black Module
show the number of available up/down converters for SmartConversion to use.
• FTB — Select this option to have the display on the Fade to Black Module show the
transition rate for a Fade to Black transition.
Switcher Calibration and
Diagnostics
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on performing calibration and diagnostic tests on your Vision
switcher.
• Switcher Software Version
• Switcher Calibration
• Mapping a Module to a Row
• Fail Indicators Diagnosis
• Communication Status and Errors
• Non-Sync Status
• Control Panel Diagnostic Tools
• Frame Diagnostic Tools
• VNC Viewer
• Video Checksum Custom Controls
• Communication Port Monitor
• Switcher Logs
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics • Eng 17–1
Switcher Software Version
The Version Information shows the version number and date of the software that is currently
running on the control panel and frame. Other information that is provided on this menu are the
IP address of the control panel and frame, and size of the Global-Store on the frame.
• Press HOME  Status  Version Info.
Version Information — Status Menu

• on finding the current version of the Vision Operating System, refer to the section “Panel
Boards Menu” on page Eng 6-9.
Eng 17–2 • Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Switcher Calibration
Calibration allows you to reset the limits of the faders on the control panel, re-center the
positioner with X, Y and Z limits, and align the touchscreen display.
Calibration can also be used to have the LEDs in the buttons of the control panel display in a
calibrated, or uncalibrated mode. When the control panel is manufactured, the LEDs for each
button are calibrated to a single standard so that all the buttons appear as a consistent color. This
color offset is stored in each module.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  More  Calibration.
Calibration Menu
2. Use the LED Calibration knob to turn LED calibration on or off.
• No — Select this option to not have the LEDs light as normal.
• Yes — Select this option to have the LEDs light in an uncalibrated state. Any
calibration color offsets are ignored.
3. Press ADC Calibration.
ADC Calibration Menu
Operating Tip — For more information on the Node and Link values for the module you are
calibrating, refer to the section “Module Control Link Backbone” on page Eng 20-9.
4. Calibrate a Fader as follows:

• Move the fader from one limit to the other and back again. Be sure not to pressure
the fader into the stop. Doing so may make it difficult to end a transition, or cause
the fader to accidentally start a new transition when it is released.
5. Calibrate the Positioner as follows:
• Move the positioner forwards and backwards along the Y-axis to calibrate the Y
limits of the positioner.
• Move the positioner left and right along the X-axis to calibrate the X limits of the
positioner.
• Twist the positioner clockwise and counter-clockwise to calibrate the Z limits of the
positioner.
6. Press Accept to accept the new calibration limits.
7. Calibrate the Touchscreen as follows:
• Press Touch Screen Calibration. The calibration screen is displayed.
• Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note — If you have the V-100B TouchScreen, you must restart the control panel to apply the
new calibration values.
Mapping a Module to a Row
Control Panel Mapping allows you to assign modules to Panel Rows, or control panel rows. This
is used to assign a newly installed module to a row of modules on the control panel, or to assign
an Auxiliary Control Panel to the switcher.
You can install a single module, or multiple at the same time, depending on how you want to
install the modules.

• on installing a module, refer to the section “Replacing a Control Panel Module” on
page Eng 18-21.
• on assigning a GPI to an Auxiliary Control Panel, refer to the section “Auxiliary Control
Panel GPIs” on page Eng 14-11.
• on assigning an external module to an External Link Port, refer to the section “External
Panel Modules” on page Eng 9-20.
Mapping Multiple Modules

If you are mapping several modules to a panel row, you can use the Quick Module Configuration
to quickly map modules to a row by pressing button on each row in succession.
Important — Do not use the Remove Unfound Module Cfgs button on the Panel Modules
Menu unless instructed to do so by Ross Video Technical Support.
Panel Modules Menu

2. Press Quick Configure.
Panel Module Quick Configure Menu
3. Select the panel row that you want to start assigning modules to as follows:
• Select the type of panel row you want to program. You can choose between the
following:
› Internal Rows — Select this option to program a row on the Vision control
panel. You can choose between Row 1 and Row 8.
› External Rows — Select this option to program a row on an Auxiliary
Control Panel, or other external module, not including the Touchscreen
Display. You can choose between Row 1 and Row 16.
4. Press any button on the panel row module that you want to map buttons starting at 1 to.
All the buttons on the module will light up.
5. Press any button on the next panel row module that you want to map the next set of
buttons to. All the buttons on this module will light up.
6. Continue selecting modules until all the Crosspoint Modules and control modules,
including the Transition Module and Memory Module, that you want to assign to the
row, have been selected.
7. Configure additional rows as needed.
8. Press Exit to exit the menu.
Mapping a Single Module

If you are mapping a single module to a panel row, you can use select the link and node that you
installed the module on and assign it to a panel row.
Important — Do not use the Remove Unfound Module Cfgs button on the Panel Modules
Menu unless instructed to do so by Ross Video Technical Support.
2. Use the Link/Node knob to select the link and node that the module you want to assign
to a row is installed on. You can also press a button on the module to jump to the link
and node.
Panel Row & Crosspoint — Panel Modules Menu
3. Press Panel Row & Crosspoint.
4. Use the Panel Row knob to select the panel row that you want to assign the module to.
You can select either an internal row (Row 1 to Row 8), or an external row (Row 1 to
Row 16).
5. Use the First Crosspoint knob to select the number of the first crosspoint button on
the module you are setting up. Each Crosspoint Module has 8 buttons, so the first button
on module 1 is 1, the first button on module 2 is 9. If the module does not have
crosspoint buttons, this knob is gray.
Note — If you are programming an Auxiliary Control Panel, the modules have 16 buttons.
6. Set up a Custom Control module as follows:

• Use the Link/Node knob to select the link and node that the module you want to
assign to a row is installed on. You can also press a button on the module to jump to
the link and node.
• Press Custctrl & GPI Group.
Custctrl & GPI Group (Custom Control Module) — Panel Modules Menu
Operating Tip — The Custom Control module number will follow the numbering of the
Crosspoint modules by default.
• Use the First Custctrl knob to select the number of the first custom control button
on the module you are setting up. Each custom control module has 8 buttons, so the
first button on module 1 is 1, the first button on module 2 is 9. If the module does
not have custom control buttons, this knob is gray.
7. Set up an Audio Control module as follows:
• Use the Link/Node knob to select the link and node that the module you want to
assign to a row is installed on. You can also press a button on the module to jump to
the link and node.
• Press Audiofader.
Audio Fader Module — Panel Modules Menu

• Use the First Fader knob to select the number of the first audio fader on the
module you are setting up. Each Audio Control module has 8 audio faders, so the
first audio fader on module 1 is 1, the first audio fader on module 2 is 9.
Naming an External Row

Each external row can be given a unique name that appears on the Assign Bus Maps Menu, as
well as the Panel Module Quick Configuration Menu.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Installation  Aux Bus  Remote Panels
 External Row Setup.
External Rows Menu

2. Use the External Row knob to select the external row that you want to name.
3. Press Rename Row.
External Row Names Menu
more information on using the External Row Names Menu to enter a name.
4. Enter the new name for the external row in the New Name field. The name can be no
more than 8 characters in length.
5. Press Accept New Name to store the new name.
ports.
Support.
Fail Indicators Diagnosis
The touchscreen display has two fail indicators (Figure 17.1) that are used to identify a possible
problem with either a power supply or fan in either the control panel or frame.
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
HOME
UP
ONE
HOLD
SYSTEM FRAME MENU - + SELECT PANEL
Frame Fail Panel Fail
Figure 17.1 Panel and Frame Power Fail Indicators
When either of these indicators is lit, the switcher has detected a possible problem with either the
frame or control panel. With either of these fail indicators, pressing the lit indicator displays the
Status Menus.
Complete Status
The Complete Status shows the current operational status of the fans and power supplies in the
frame and control panel, as well as the temperature and communications status of the panel.
1. Press HOME  Status  Complete Status.
Complete Status — Status Menu

2. Refer to the section “Status Components and Conditions” on page Eng 17-11 for
information on the status conditions.
Warnings
The Warnings list shows all the warnings or errors that have been generated by the switcher. This
can include fan or power supply failures, or communications problems.
1. Press HOME  Status  Warnings.
Warnings — Status Menu

2. Refer to the section “Status Components and Conditions” on page Eng 17-11 for
information on the status conditions.
Status Components and Conditions

There are a number of components and conditions that the switcher monitors and reports on.
These items are as follows:
Note — If a board, card, or power supply is not present in the system, it is not shown on the
list.
• 1080p29.97 Video Mode — This item lists any boards in the frame that are not
compatible with the 1080p 29.97Hz video format when this video format is selected.
• 3G Video Mode — This item lists any boards in the frame that are not compatible with
the 1080p 59.94Hz and 1080p 50Hz video formats when one of these video formats is
selected.
• Driver Status — This item indicates the status of the FlexDevice drivers that are
currently installed on the switcher. A driver can be OK, Obsolete, or Unsupported. Refer
to the section “Installing and Managing FlexDevice Drivers” on page Eng 9-4 for
information on managing drivers.
• Frame Fans — This item indicates whether the cooling fans in the frame are operating
normally, or that a number of fans have failed. Refer to the section “Frame Fan Failure”
on page Eng 18-8 for more information on replacing a fan.
• Frame Graphics Buffer FPGA Temperature — This item indicates whether the
graphics buffer FPGA is operating in the normal temperature range.
• Frame Power Supplies — This item indicates whether there are enough power
supplies in the frame, that they are operating normally, or that one, or more, of them has
failed. If the status for the power supply is “Temperature not available”, the temperature
sensor in the power supply is not functioning normally. Refer to the section “Frame
Power Supply Failure” on page Eng 18-6 for more information on replacing a power
supply.
• Frame Power Supply Fans — This item indicates whether the fans in the frame
power supplies are operating normally.
• Frame Present — This item indicates whether a frame has been detected and is
communicating with the Vision control panel. If the message, Unsupported frame
board configuration. is displayed, one or more of the boards in the frame is in the
wrong slot. Refer to the section “Removing and Installing Frame Boards” on page Eng
4-18 for information on the supported board locations for your frame.
• Hard Drive Status — This item indicates whether the hard drive on the frame CPU
Board is reporting any Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology
(S.M.A.R.T.) warnings or has experiences a complete failure. If a warning or failure is
displayed, contact Ross Video Technical Support for information on diagnosing the
warning or replacing your hard drive.
• Panel and Frame Software Versions — This item indicates if the software version
on the control panel is not the same as the software version on the frame. An upgrade
must to be performed so that both the frame and the control panel are on the same
software version. Refer to the section “Software Upgrade” on page Eng 6-3 for more
information on performing a software upgrade.
• Panel Fans — This item indicates whether the cooling fans in the control panel are
operating normally, or that one, or more, of them has failed. The Power Supply Modules
that contain the cooling fans are closed units and not field serviceable. If a fan needs to be
replaced, the entire module is replaced. Refer to the section “Control Panel Power
Supply Failure” on page Eng 18-2 for more information on replacing a fan.
• Panel Module Discovery — This item indicates whether or not all the modules on the
control panel have been successfully discovered and set up. If a module is not properly
set up, or is not present, a warning is displayed. Refer to the section “Replacing a
Control Panel Module” on page Eng 18-21 for more information on setting up a control
panel module.
• Panel OS Version — This item indicates what the current version of the Operating
System running on the control panel CPU Module is and if it is up to date.
• Panel PCH Temperature — This item indicates whether the Panel Communications
Hub is operating in a safe temperature range.
• Panel Power Supplies — This item indicates whether the power supplies in the
Vision control panel are operating normally, or that one, or more, of them has failed.
Refer to the section “Control Panel Power Supply” on page Eng 18-10 for more
information on replacing a power supply.
• PMC Status — This item indicates whether Panel Module Controller are running the
current version of software. Refer to the section “Upgrading PMCs” on page Eng 18-23
for information on updating the software on a PMC.
• Reference — This item indicates whether the current input reference format is properly
locked.
• SBC CPU Temperature — This item indicates whether the CPU in the Control Panel
CPU Module is operating in the normal temperature range.
• SBC Motherboard Temperature — This item indicates whether the motherboard in
the Control Panel CPU Module is operating in the normal temperature range.
• Stuck Buttons — This item indicates whether there are any stuck buttons on the Vision
control panel. Refer to the section “Stuck Button Test” on page Eng 17-19 for more
information on stuck buttons.
• Vid Card Temperatures — This item indicates whether the Video Processor Board in
the frame is operating in the normal temperature range.
Status Icons
There are 3 types of status icons that indicate the current status of each component or condition
that the switcher is monitoring. These icons are as follows:
• Good — This icon indicates that a component or condition is operating
properly.
• Warning — This icon indicates that a condition is outside of the normal
operating parameters. For example, the temperature inside the panel may be
slightly above or below the safe operating temperature.
• Failure — This icon indicates a major problem with a component or
condition that the switcher is monitoring. For example, the temperature inside
the control panel could be dangerously above or below the safe operating
temperature. The fail icon will also indicate control panel modules that are not
properly assigned to MLEs.
Communication Status and Errors
The Vision switcher provides a number of status and error detection menus that allow you to
troubleshoot and diagnose communication problems.
Control Panel Communication Status

The TX/RX Status Menu allows you to view the current communication status of the
communication ports on the control panel.
• Press HOME  Status  TxRx Status.
TX/RX Stats Menu

• The TX/RX Status Menu shows the current status of the Remote ports (R1-R8), the
External Link ports (ELP2-ELP4), and the communication between the control panel
and the frame (Panel/Frame).
Serial Communication Errors

The TxRx Errors Menu shows all the errors that have been reported for the serial
communications from the frame and the control panel. The errors can be shown for all the serial
communications ports on the control panel and frame, or for a specific port on either.
1. Press HOME  Status  TxRx Errors.
TxRx Errors Menu
Operating Tip — You can reset the error count by pressing the Reset Count button on the
TxRx Errors Menu. This will clear all the error counters on the control panel and frame.
2. Use the Panel knob to select the serial communications port on the control panel that
you want to view the errors for. You can choose between the following:
• Total Errors — Select this option to view the total number of errors for all the
serial communication ports on the control panel.
• AUXPAN X (AX) — Select this option to view the errors for the selected Auxiliary
serial communications port, where X represents the number of the port.
• REMOTE X (RX) — Select this option to view the errors for the selected Remote
3. Use the Frame knob to select the serial communications port on the frame that you
want to view the errors for. You can choose between the following:
• Total Errors — Select this option to view the total number of errors for all the
serial communication ports on the frame.
• FRM2PAN (FP) — Select this option to view the errors for the PANEL port.
• PERIPH X (PX) — Select this option to view the errors for the selected Peripheral
If you want more information on the serial communication errors that have occurred, you can
view the error statistics.
Non-Sync Status
The Non-Sync Status Menu allows you to check if a video signal selected on a crosspoint bus, or
the video outputs of the switcher, is synchronized with the switcher reference format. The
Non-Sync indicators serve as a warning only, indicating that the timing of the input should be
fixed at the source. If the source is non-synchronous with the switcher reference format, cuts,
dissolves and other effects can still be performed, but the source is shifted vertically.
If a non-synchronous source is selected on a crosspoint bus, and the non-sync detection feature is
turned on, the crosspoint button flashes, indicating that the source is mis-timed.
1. Press HOME  Status  Non-Sync Status  MLEs.
Non-Sync Status Menu (4-Keyer, QMD-X shown)

2. A Green or Yellow indicator is shown for each bus on each MLE. As you select different
sources on each bus, the indicator updates, showing if the source is synchronized or not.
• Green — A green indicator shows that the source selected on the corresponding bus
and MLE is synchronized with the switcher reference.
• Yellow — A yellow indicator shows that the source selected on the corresponding
bus and MLE is not synchronized with the switcher reference. This source should
be synchronized to the switcher reference from the source.
3. Press Output Boards.
Non-Sync Status Menu (QMD-X shown)

4. A Green or Yellow indicator is shown for each output BNC on each Video Output Board
installed in the frame.
• Green — A green indicator shows that the video being output on the corresponding
output BNC is synchronized with the switcher reference.
• Yellow — A yellow indicator shows that the video being output on the
corresponding BNC is not synchronized with the switcher reference.

• on turning Non-Sync detection on or off, refer to the section “Non-Sync Detection” on
page Eng 7-10.
Control Panel Diagnostic Tools
The Vision control panel supports a number of diagnostic tests that can be used to identify issues
with your switcher.
These tests are designed to be used by Ross Video Technical Support and other qualified Ross
Video personnel.
The control panel diagnostic tests are grouped into the following categories:
• Module Tests
• Panel Communications Hub Tests
• Control Panel SBC Test
• Touchscreen Tests
• Burn Mode
Module Tests
The Module Tests allow you to test the functionality of the knobs, buttons, faders, and positioner
of the switcher, as well as test the color of the buttons. Additional tests are provided for the
control panel displays and the memory for each module.
Button Color Test

The button color test allows you to test the LEDs in each button on a module. Each Button LED
on the module illuminates, and then transition to the next LED, cycling through the different
colors. The brightness of the LEDs is also be cycled between max and min brightness.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Panel Diagnostics  Module Test.
2. Press LED Test to enter Button Color Display Mode.
3. Press any button on the control panel module you want to test.
4. Confirm that all buttons on the module are changing at the same time, and that the colors
and brightness are consistent.
This completes the procedure for performing a button color test.
Button Function Test

The button function test allows you to test if the buttons on the control panel are working properly
or not. This test requires you to press the button that you want to test and the switcher reports
where and what that button is.
2. Press Device Test.
3. Press the button that you want to test. The Button Test Information is displayed with
the name, or function, of the button is listed on the menu, as well as the module and
hardware location of the button.
Button Test Information — Device Test Menu
4. Confirm that the button you pressed is shown on the menu.
5. Double-press Exit on the Device Test Menu to stop the test.
Stuck Button Test

The stuck button test allows you to identify any and all buttons that the switcher reports as being
stuck. A button is considered to be stuck when it is held for more than 30 seconds.
2. Press Stuck Buttons to display a list of any stuck buttons.
Stuck Button — Module Test Menu

3. Any buttons that the switcher reports as being stuck is listed on the menu. The button is
identified by the Module it is on, as well as the Label of the button.
Fader Test
The fader test allows you to test the functionality of the faders on the control panel. This test
requires you to move the fader that you want to test from one limit to the other. The switcher
reports where that fader is, and whether the fader has been moved from one limit to the other.
3. Move the fader that you want to test. The Fader Test is displayed with an illustration of
the fader, and the transition indicators on the Transition Module light. The module and
hardware location of the fader are also be displayed on the menu.
Fader Test — Device Test Menu
4. Confirm that the fader you moved is shown on the menu.
5. Double-press Exit to stop the test.
Positioner Test
The positioner test allows you to test the functionality of the positioner on the control panel. This
test requires you to move the positioner left and right, as well as twist it. The switcher reports
where that positioner is, and how it is being moved.
3. Move the positioner forward and backward to display the Positioner Test. An
illustration of the positioner appears on the menu. As you move the positioner, the Y
value for the positioner is displayed on the menu.
Fader Test — Device Test Menu

4. Move the positioner left and right. As you move the positioner, the X value for the
positioner is displayed on the menu.
5. Twist the positioner clockwise and counter-clockwise. As you twist the positioner, the
Z value for the positioner is displayed on the menu.
6. Double-press Exit to stop the test.
Control Panel Display Test

The control panel display test allows you to test the color pixel functionality of all the displays
and mnemonics on the control panel. Each display and mnemonic on the control panel is
illuminate, and then transitions to the next color, cycling through the different colors. The
brightness of the displays and mnemonics is also cycled between max and min brightness.
2. Press Display Test to enter Display Test Mode.
3. Confirm that all displays and mnemonics are changing at the same time, and that the
colors and brightness are consistent.
Knob Test
The knob test allows you to test the functionality of the knobs on the touchscreen display of the
control panel. The Vision control panel supports either haptic knobs, with force feedback on the
knob, or optical knobs, without feedback on the knob.
2. Press Knob Test. In the center of the menu is a position graph for the knob. As you
rotate the knob, the slider moves along the position graph.
Note — If your Vision control panel uses optical knobs, only the Change Only button is
available. All other knob tests are unavailable.
Change Only — Knob Test Menu
Operating Tip — Select Change Only on the Knob Test Menu to show only the changes in
the knob position. Any range or boundary information is ignored. Select Wrap in Range on the
Knob Test Menu to show the range for the knob. When the knob reaches the end of the range,
it wraps around on the position graph.
3. Test the Boundaries functionality of the knob as follows:

• Press Range with Boundaries.
• Rotate the knob you want to test. The knob should become increasingly difficult to
turn at the end of the position graph.
4. Test the Barrier functionality of the knob as follows:
• Press Range with Barriers.
• Rotate the knob you want to test. The knob should stop at the end of the position
graph.
5. Test the Knob Button as follows:
• Press the knob you want to test. The text under the knob should change to Knob
Button Down while the knob button is being pressed.
Module Memory Test
The module memory test allows you to test the integrity of the button and mnemonic memory
used in a module.
2. Press Memory Test. The switcher tests each module on the control panel, including the
touchscreen display, and report any errors on the menu.
This completes the procedure for performing a module memory test.
Audio Fader Test

The Audio Fader test allows you to test the functionality of the audio faders on the Audio Control
module. This test moves the audio faders on the menu and on the module, and shows you which
audio fader is currently being touched.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Panel Diagnostics  Module Test  AudioFader.
2. Use the Link/Nodes knob to select the Audio Control module that you want to test.
3. Move each audio fader on the Audio Control module and confirm that the menu shows
the correct position of the slider. As you touch each audio fader, a finger icon appears
below that fader on the menu.
AudioFader Test Menu

4. Run one of the automated movement test as follows:
• Up — Press this button to have all the audio faders move to the top position.
• Down — Press this button to have all the audio faders move to the bottom position.
• Wave — Press this button to have all the audio faders move up and down in a wave
pattern.
Panel Communications Hub Tests

The Panel Communications Hub (PCH) Tests allow you to test the functionality of the PCH
communication links with the various components of the switcher. Some of these tests require the
use of a loopback adapter on the communications port.
PCH Transmit/Receive Test

The PCH Tx/Rx test allows you to test the various serial communications ports on the control
panel. This test helps to diagnose communication problems with external devices that you may be
having on a particular serial communications port on the control panel.
These do not include the ports on the Control Panel CPU. Refer to the section “Control Panel
SBC Test” on page Eng 17-25 for more information on testing the Control Panel CPU ports.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Panel Diagnostics  PCH Test.
2. Press TX/RX Test.
Panel TX/RX Test Menu

3. Connect a loopback adapter to the port that you want to test.
4. Use the Com Port knob to select the serial communications port on the frame you want
to test. You can choose between the following:
• AUXPAN X (AX) — Select this option to test one of the Aux ports on the control
panel, where X represents the port number.
• REMOTE X (RX) — Select this option to test one of the Remote ports on the
control panel, where X represents the port number.
Operating Tip — If you want to monitor the communications on one of the communications
ports, you can select Monitor on the Panel CPU TX/RX Test Menu to view the communications
on that port. Refer to the section “Communication Port Monitor” on page Eng 17-36 for more
information on using the Communications Port Monitor.
5. Use the Mode knob to select the transmission standard you want to use to test the
selected port. You can choose between the following:
Note — The External Link port on the Vision control panel only support the RS-422
(TIA/EIA-422) transmission standard.
• RS-422 — Select this option to test the selected serial communications port using
the RS-244 (TIA/EIA-422) transmission standard.
• RS-422 Null — Select this option to test the selected serial communications port
using the RS-422 (TIA/EIA-422) transmission standard. This option changes the
signals on the pinouts of the port for use with a null modem cable.
• RS-232 — Select this option to test the selected serial communications port using
the RS-232 (TIA/EIA-232) transmission standard.
6. Press Test to run the test on the selected serial communications port. The outcome of
the test is reported on the menu as Passed or Failed.
LVDS Test
The Low Voltage Differential Signalling (LVDS) test allows you to test the various
communications between the Panel Communications Hub (PCH) and all the Panel Module
Controllers (PMC) installed on the switcher. This test includes both internal and external
modules.
2. Press LVDS Test.
3. Test the internal LVDS links as follows:
• Toggle LVDS Links to Intern display the Internal LVDS Test. The switcher tests
the integrity of all the communications connections between the PCH and each
PMC.
Internal LVDS Test — LVDS Test Menu

• Confirm that all the modules that are installed on your control panel pass. If you
want to test LVDS links that are not connected to a PMC, you must use a loopback
adapter.
4. Test the external LVDS links as follows:
• Toggle LVDS Links to Extern display the External LVDS Test Menu. The
switcher tests the integrity of all the communications connections between the PCH
and each external PMC.
External — LVDS Test Menu

• Confirm that all the external modules that are installed on your control panel pass. If
you want to test LVDS links that are not connected to a PMC, you must use a
loopback adapter.

• on the LVDS Backbone, refer to the section “Module Control Link Backbone” on
page Eng 20-9.
Tally Test
The tally test allows you to test the standard parallel tally system of the switcher. A Tally Test
Box is required to ensure that the tally relays are operating properly. The number of tallies you
have available to test depends on whether you have the Extended Tallies option installed.
2. Press Tally Test.
Tally Test Menu

3. Test your Tallies as follows:
• Press Prev to select and test the previous tally.
• Press Next to select and test the next tally.
• Press All On to turn all tallies on.
• Press All Off to turn all tallies off.
PCI Bridge Test

The Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Bridge test allows you to test the PCI Bridge that
is used to pass information between the Control Panel CPU and the PCH.
2. Press PCI Test. The switcher will test the PCI Bridge and report any errors on the
menu.
The outcome of the test is reported on the menu as Passed or Failed.
Control Panel SBC Test

The Control Panel Single Board Computer (SBC) Tests allow you to test the functionality of the
external ports on the Control Panel SBC. Some of these tests require the use of the a loopback
adapter on the communications port.
Control Panel SBC Transmit/Receive Test

The Control Panel SBC Tx/Rx Test allows you to test the various communications ports on the
control panel SBC.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Panel Diagnostics  SBC Test.
2. Press TX/RX Test.
SBC TX/RX Test Menu
3. Connect a loopback adapter to the port that you want to test.
4. Use the Com Port knob to select the serial communications port on the control panel
you want to test. You can choose between the following:
• Com 1 — Select this option to test the Serial 1 port on the control panel.
• Com 2 — Select this option to test the Serial 2 port on the control panel.
• Parallel — Select this option to test the Parallel 1 port on the control panel.
5. Press Test to run the test on the selected communications port.
The outcome of the test is reported on the menu as Passed or Failed.
Touchscreen Tests
The Touchscreen tests allow you to test the functionality and performance of the touchscreen
display. These tests include how well the touchscreen displays content, and if the touch sensor is
properly calibrated.
Pattern Test
The pattern test allows you to visually check the performance of the touchscreen as it cycles
through a number of patterns and colors.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Panel Diagnostics  Touch Screen.
2. Press Test Pattern. The touchscreen cycles through a number of test patterns of
different colors.
3. Confirm that the touchscreen is displaying the pattern correctly, and that the colors and
brightness are consistent.
4. Tap the touchscreen anywhere to stop the test.
Draw Test
The Draw Test allows you to visually check the functionality of the touchscreen by having it
feedback the location of where you touch with an X on the screen.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Panel Diagnostics  Touch Screen.
2. Press Draw Test. The touchscreen goes blank for the duration of the test.
3. Tap the touchscreen to test it. A red X will appear where you start. Trace the yellow line
from the red X to the blue O.
4. Press Quit, or press Esc on the keyboard, to stop the test.
Burn Mode
The burn mode performs a number of tests on the control panel to ensure that all internal memory
and communications ports are operating properly. To ensure that all external communications
ports are operating properly, a loopback adapter must be installed on each port.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Panel Diagnostics  Burn Mode.
Burn Mode Menu 1-2
Burn Mode Menu 2-2

2. Set the dongle usage as follows:
• LVDS Ports — Toggle the LVDS Dongle to Yes if you have connected a loop
back dongle to the LVDS ports, including the Aux ports, that you want to test.
• Serial Ports — Toggle the RS422 Dongle to Yes if you have connected a loop
back dongle to the serial ports, including the Remote ports, that you want to test.
Operating Tip — The View Summary and View Log options allow you to view the outcome
of the test on the menu. The Log can then be saved to a USB flash drive by pressing Save Log
to USB.
3. Press Start Test to start the test. The switcher cycles through the LED tests, Display
and Mnemonics tests, LVDS tests, Memory tests, and all the Tx/Rx tests for the control
panel. The tests continues until stopped.
4. Press Stop Test to stop the test.
Frame Diagnostic Tools
The QMD/X and MD/X frames support a number of diagnostic tests that can be used to identify
issues with your switcher. Some tests require a loopback adapter, or other external device, to
confirm the diagnostics outcome.
Video personnel.
In a MultiPanel configuration, only the Master Panel can access the Frame Diagnostics Menu.
Frame Transmit/Receive Test

The frame Tx/Rx test allows you to test the various serial communications ports on the frame.
This helps to diagnose communications problems with external devices that you may be having
on a particular serial communications port on the frame.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Frame Diagnostics  TX/RX Test.
Frame TX/RX Test Menu

2. Use the Com Port knob to select the serial communications port on the frame you want
to test.
Operating Tip — You can have the test run continuously by toggling Loop to Yes, on the
Frame TX/RX Test Menu. When the test reaches the end, it starts over from the beginning until
Loop is toggled to No.
3. Press Test to run the test on the selected serial communications port.
Operating Tip — If you want to monitor the communications on one of the communications
ports, you can select Monitor on the Frame TX/RX Test Menu to view the communications on
that port. Refer to the section “Communication Port Monitor” on page Eng 17-36 for more
information on using the Communications Port Monitor.
GPI Test
The GPI test allows you to test the functionality of each GPI input and output on the switcher. A
graphical representation of each GPI indicates whether a particular GPI is on or off. Refer to the
section “Standard GPI Setup” on page Eng 12-10 for more information on setting up and using
GPIs.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Frame Diagnostics  GPI Test.
GPI Test Menu

2. Test your GPIs as follows:
• Press Prev to select and test the previous GPI input or output.
• Press Next to select and test the next GPI input or output.
• Press All On to turn all GPI inputs and outputs on.
• Press All Off to turn all GPI inputs and outputs off.
LEDs Test
The LEDs test allows you to confirm the functionality of the diagnostic LEDs on the frame CPU
Board. In order to complete this test you need to access the internal boards of the frame.
Note — You must remove the front door of the frame to perform this test. Refer to the section
“Opening and Closing the Frame Door” on page Eng 3-3 for more information on removing
and installing the frame door.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Frame Diagnostics  LEDs Test.

2. Check the LEDs on the frame.
3. Press UP ONE to stop the test and display the Frame Diagnostics Menu.
DIP Switch Test

The DIP test allows you to verify the current settings of the DIP Switch on the Frame CPU Board
(4800AR-001 and 4800AR-002). To confirm this test, you must remove the Frame CPU Board
to verify the setting of the DIP Switch. Contact Ross Video Technical Support before attempting
to change any DIP switch setting on the Frame CPU Board. Refer to the section “Frame CPU
Board DIP Switch” on page Eng 20-8 for more information on the Frame CPU Board and the
DIP Switch.
• Press HOME  Setup  Frame Diagnostics  DIP Test. The number of DIP
switches shown depends on the Frame CPU Board that you have.
Frame DIP Test Menu (4800AR-002 shown)
Graphics Buffer Test

The GfxBuffDDR test allows you to test the performance of the graphics buffer RAM. The test
verifies both read and write functionality of the graphics buffer.
1. Press HOME  Setup  Frame Diagnostics  GfxBuffDDR Test.
Frame GfxBuffDDR Test Menu

2. Perform a quick Bus Test on the graphics buffer as follows:
• Press Bus Test to perform the test. This test verifies the performance of the bus
between the DDR and the switcher. The results of the test are shown on the menu.
3. Perform a full Device Test on the graphics buffer as follows:
• Press Device Test to perform the test. This test verifies the performance of the
graphics buffer DDR. The results of the test are shown on the menu.
VNC Viewer
The Virtual Network Computing (VNC) viewer allows you to remotely control the menu system
of one of the control panels connected to the frame. You can only connect to one control panel at
a time.
Note — This feature requires Vision OS 37, or higher, to be running on all the control panel you
want to control. Contact Ross Video technical support for information on upgrading the OS on
your Vision control panels.
Keep the following in mind when using the VNC viewer:

• You will be able to see the menu actions that a user at the control panel makes, and they
can see the actions you make.
To Run the VNC Viewer
Note — The VNC Viewer requires Java to be installed for the browser you are using, and
popup blocking to be turned off.
displayed.
3. Click Other...  VNC Viewer.
4. In the Panel list, click the control panel that you want to control. Control panels are
listed as Master or Satellite and by their IP addresses.
5. Click Launch VNC Viewer. A VNC Viewer applet page will open, causing a Java
window (sbc-vision) to open.
6. In the Java window, type user and press Enter.
7. Type password and press Enter.
Video Checksum Custom Controls
The Video Checksums custom control is a diagnostic tool that allows Ross Video Technical
Support and other Ross Video staff to diagnose the operation of specific switcher functions based
on the video output of the MLEs. When a checksum is inserted into a custom control, the switcher
records the values that are returned at that point. When the custom control is run again, the
switcher compares the new values that are returned against the stored values and reports either an
error or a validation at the end of the custom control.
Video personnel.
Setting Up a Checksum Custom Control
Note — In order for the checksum value to be validated, the video signal used when running
the test must be the same that was used when the custom control was recorded. Only stills or
internally generated signals, such as color patterns, should be used.

on.
3. Press More  Checksums.
Checksums Menu
4. Toggle Checksums to On to activate this feature.
5. To perform a Short Checksum, press Short to have a short checksum performed.
When you choose a short checksum, you have to select the type of checksum to perform,
and which input or output video signal to perform the test on.
• Use the Checksum reg knob to select the Checksum Register you want to use.
› FE out — Select this option to have the checksum calculated at the output of
the Video Interface FPGAs on the Video Processor Board.
› Vid in — Select this option to have the checksum calculated at the input of the
Video Core FPGA on the Video Processor Board.
› Vid out — Select this option to have the checksum calculated at the output of
the Video Core FPGA on the Video Processor Board.
› FE in — Select this option to have the checksum calculated at the input of the
Video Interface FPGAs on the Video Processor Board.
› All — Select this option to have the checksum calculated on all the checksum
registers.
• If you selected FE out or Vid in, use the Input video knob to select the video
signal that you want to perform the checksum on. You can choose between the
following:
› Background — Select this option to perform the checksum on the
Background video signal.
› Preset — Select this option to perform the checksum on the preset, or
Preview, video signal.
› K1V — Select this option to perform the checksum on the Video Fill signal of
Key 1.
› K1A/K2A — Select this option to perform the checksum on the Alpha signal
for all the Keys.
› Trans_mix 0/1 — Select this option to perform the checksum on the video
signals as a transition is being performed.
› K2V — Select this option to perform the checksum on the Video Fill signal of
Key 2.
• If you selected FE in or Vid out, use the Output video knob to select the video
signal that you want to perform the checksum on. You can choose between the
following:
› Program — Select this option to perform the checksum on the Program
video signal coming out of the MLE.
› Preview — Select this option to perform the checksum on the Preview video
signal coming out of the MLE.
› Clean — Select this option to perform the checksum on the Clean Feed video
signal coming out of the MLE.
6. Press Up One  More  Start Recording.
7. Add events into the custom control. Refer to the section “Programming Control Panel
Functions” on page Eng 10-10 for more information on adding events into a custom
control.
Important — A 4 frame Custom Control Pause Command should be added to the custom
control before each checksum point if the video signal has been changed. This ensures that
enough time has passed to allow the new video signals to propagate through the switcher.
8. Add a Checksum event to the custom control as follows:

• Press HOME  Custom Controls  Insert Special  More  Video
Checksums.
Insert Video Checksum
9. Select the MLE, or MLEs, that you want to calculate a checksum for.
10. Add events into the custom control as needed.
11. Press Finish Recording.

• on the different video signals used by the switcher, refer to the section “Video Routing”
on page Eng 2-20.
Using a Checksum Custom Control

The Checksum custom control records and display the checksum validation on one of four
different ways. This option must be set before the custom control is run to have the validation
perform the actions you want.
1. Press HOME  Custom Controls  More  Checksums  Checksum Diff
Action.
Checksum Difference Settings — Checksums Menu

2. Use the Action on error knob to select the action you want the switcher to take when a
checksum is performed. You can choose between the following:
Note — Unless you select No action, a pop-up with the result of the checksum is displayed
when the checksum event has finished.
• No action — Select this option to have no action taken when the checksum custom
control is run.
• Log change — Select this option to have any changes in the checksum values
recorded to a system log that can be viewed by a Ross Video employee. A pop-up is
displayed when the custom control is finished. This is the default setting.
• Halt macro — Select this option to have any changes in the checksum values halt
the custom control and display the checksum event that returned the incorrect value.
A pop-up is displayed, indicating the problem.
• Recalc c’sums — Select this option to have the checksum values that are
returned the next time the checksum custom control is run saved as the new
checksum values. The existing checksum values is replaced with the new values. A
pop-up is displayed if any of the checksum values were replaced.
3. Press HOME.
4. Run the checksum custom control.
Communication Port Monitor
The communications port monitor allows you to view the information that is being sent to or
received by the switcher. This information can then be saved to a file that can be sent to Ross
Video Technical Support if required.
The Com Port Monitor Menu is accessed through the Panel TX/RX Test Menu or the Frame
Tx/RX Test Menu. On that menu you must select which port you want to monitor.

• on selecting a communications port on the frame, refer to the section “Control Panel
SBC Transmit/Receive Test” on page Eng 17-25.
• on selecting a communications port on the frame, refer to the section “PCH
Transmit/Receive Test” on page Eng 17-22.
Note — You cannot Save or turn on Streaming for a communications port that has been set to
a Baud Rate of 115200.
To Monitor a Serial Port

1. Toggle Freeze to Yes to stop data from being displayed.
2. Press Clear to remove any existing data stored in the monitor buffer.
Com Port Monitor Menu

3. Toggle Format to Hex or ASCII to select how you want the data displayed.
• Hex — Select this option to have the data displayed in a Hexidecimal format.
• ASCII — Select this option to have the data displayed in an ASCII format.
4. Toggle View to Tx or Rx to select which data is displayed.
• Tx — Select this option to monitor the data that is being transmitted from the
selected serial communications port.
• Rx — Select this option to monitor the data that is being received by the selected
serial communications port.
Operating Tip — Toggle Streaming to Yes to store all the data being transmitted from or
received by the selected communications port. Streaming stores data for a maximum of 1 hour,
at which point Streaming is toggled to No.
5. Toggle Freeze to No to start viewing the data that is being sent to or received by the
selected port.
6. Send or receive the commands you want to monitor.
7. Toggle Freeze to Yes to stop displaying the data on screen. At this point you can save
Operating Tip — At this point you can save the data displayed on screen by pressing Save
on the Com Port Monitor Menu.
If you saved, or streamed, the data to a file, you will have to navigate to the frame to view the file.
Port Monitor Data Files

After you have saved the port monitor data to the hard drive on the frame, you have to navigate to
the frame to access the data file.
displayed.
3. Click Other...  PMBrowser to display the Port Monitor File Browser Page. This
page allows you to download all the port monitor log files.
Port Monitor File Browser Page

4. Click on the file you want to view. Files are identified by where they come from, what
port they are from, and whether they are transmit or receive data.
Note — Port Monitor file number is offset by three (3). For example, the file pan04tx.txt is from
the control panel, remote port 1, transmit data.
Operating Tip — Press the Refresh Files button updates the list of port monitor files. You
can also delete a file by selecting the file and pressing the Delete Selected Files button.
Switcher Logs
Switcher logs are used by Ross Video Technical Support to track and diagnose possible problems
you might be having with your switcher. When asked for your switcher logs, you must log into
the frame and download the logs.
The switcher stores up to a week worth of log data at any time. This log data is usually broken up
into eight (8), 24-hour sets of log files.
Collecting Logs
At any one time there is a current log file, and up to seven archived log files. When you collect
the log files, you can either get all of the logs for the past week, or only the current log file that the
switcher is writing to.
2. When the Login Dialog Box appears, enter your username and password as follows:
• In the Name field enter user. This is the factory default name.
• In the Password field enter password. This is the factory default password.
• Click OK to display the System Info Page.
Operating Tip — You can collect only the current log files by clicking on Get Current Logs
and following the instructions. Only the logs that the switcher is currently writing to are copied
and a new log is started.
3. Click Logs...  Get All Logs to display the Get All Switcher Log Files Page.
4. Click Get All Switcher Log Files. The switcher starts collecting all of the log files
together into a single archive. This process may take several seconds to complete.
5. Click the stills/all-logs.tar.gz link to open or download the archive to your computer.
Deleting Logs
You can delete all or only the archived log files from the switcher. This allows you to free up
space on the switcher, or clean up the logs before starting to debug an issue for technical support.
Operating Tip — You can delete only the archived log files by clicking Delete Old Logs and
following the instructions. The current log files are unaffected.
3. Click Logs...  Delete All Logs to display the Delete All Switcher Log Files Page.
4. Click Delete All Switcher Log Files.
Cycling Logs
You can manually have the switcher start a new set of current log files. The old set of log files are
added to the archive, and the oldest set of archived log files are deleted.
3. Click Logs...  Cycle Logs to display the Cycle Switcher Log Files Page.
4. Click Cycle Switcher Log Files. The switcher archived the current set of log files
and starts a new set of current log files.
Switcher Maintenance
In This Chapter
This chapter provides information on maintaining and replacing the power supplies, fans, faders
and control panel modules of the Vision switcher. This includes diagnosing and replacing a failed
power supply, cleaning the filters and replacing a fader assembly. General information is also
provided for replacing a control panel module.
• Control Panel Power Supply Failure
• Frame Power Supply Failure
• Frame Fan Failure
• Control Panel Power Supply
• Frame Power Supply
• Cleaning the Frame Air Filter
• Replacing the Hard Drive
• Replacing a Control Panel Module
• Dusting Mode
Warning Hazardous Voltage — Hazardous voltages are present in the control panel as
long as any of the power supplies are connected to the AC power.

Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Maintenance • Eng 18–1

Control Panel Power Supply Failure
When a control panel power supply or cooling fan fails, the switcher will identify the failed
component on the Status Menu. Use this information to trouble-shoot the Power Supply Module
and replace it if required.
Note — The Vision control comes with a single power supply. If you purchased the Redundant
Power option, a second power supply is installed in the control panel.
Troubleshooting a Failed Power Supply

When the switcher reports that a power supply has failed, the failure could be in the power
supply, or in the Power Distribution Board for the control panel.
1. The Status Menu identifies which power supply is reporting a failure (Figure 18.1). If
you have the Redundant Power option installed, Power Supplies 1 and 2 are located in
the Primary Power Supply Module and Power Supplies 3 and 4 are located in the
Secondary Power Supply. If you do not have the Redundant Power option, only the
Primary Power Supply Module is present with Power Supplies 1 and 2.
Primary Secondary
Power Supply Power Supply
Module Module
Figure 18.1 Power Supply Modules
2. Check the AC power cords for the failed Power Supply Modules. Ensure that they are
securely plugged into the control panel power supply, as well as the power outlet.
3. If each Power Supply Module is connected to separate circuits, check that there has not
been an interruption to the AC power for the failed power supply.
5. Locate the Power Distribution Board (Figure 18.2) at the back of the tub above the
Control Panel CPU Module.
Power Power Power Power
Supply 4 Supply 3 Supply 2 Supply 1
Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator
Eng 18–2 • Switcher Maintenance Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Power Power
Supply 1 Supply 2
Indicator Indicator
Figure 18.2 Power Distribution Board — Power Supply Indicators
6. Using the Power Supply Indicators (Figure 18.2), identify the power supply that has
failed. If a power supply is not providing power, or is not installed, the Power Supply
Indicator will not be lit.
• Vision 3 and 4 — Power Supplies 1 and 2 are located in the Primary Power
Supply Module and Power Supplies 3 and 4 are located in the Secondary Power
Supply Module.
• Vision 1 and 2 — Power Supply 1 is located in the Primary Power Supply
Module and Power Supply 2 is located in the Secondary Power Supply Module.
Note — If all the Power Supply Indicators are lit, check the cables between the power
supplies and the Power Distribution Board.
7. Remove the failed Power Supply Module. Refer to the section “Replacing a Power
Supply Module” on page Eng 18-4 for information on replacing a power supply
module.
Troubleshooting a Failed Cooling Fan

When the switcher reports that a cooling fan has failed, the failure could be in the power supply,
or in the fan itself.
1. The Status Menu identifies which cooling fan is reporting a failure. Locate that fan on
the control panel (Figure 18.3). If you have the Redundant Power option installed,
Cooling Fans 1 and 2 are located in the Primary Power Supply Module and Cooling
Fans 3 and 4 are located in the Secondary Power Supply. If you do not have the
Redundant Power option, only the Primary Power Supply Module is present.
Primary Secondary
Power Supply Power Supply
Module Module
Figure 18.3 Power Supply Modules
2. Place a small piece of paper in front of each cooling fan in the Power Supply Module to
determine if the fan is moving air.
3. If a cooling fan is not moving air, or is moving much less than the other fans, that Power
Supply Module must be replaced. Refer to the section “Replacing a Power Supply
Module” on page Eng 18-4 for information on replacing a Power Supply Module.

Note — If all the cooling fans appear to be moving air properly, check that the cables between
the Power Supply Module and the Power Distribution Board are not damaged.
Replacing a Power Supply Module

To replace a Power Supply Module in the control panel, you must power down the control panel,
disconnect all the cables and remove the old the Power Supply Module.
panel to OFF (Figure 18.4).
Power Power
Switch Switch
Secondary Primary
Power Power
Supply Supply
Module Module
Figure 18.4 Power Supplies Inside The Control Panel Tub — Vision 4
2. Disconnect the AC power cords from the back of the Power Supply Module that
contains the failed power supply.
3. Label and remove the Power Supply Status Cables and Power Supply Cables for each
power supply in the Power Supply Module before you remove them. If there is only
power supply in the module, you do not need to label the cables.
4. Disconnect the Power Supply Status Cables and Power Supply Power Cables for the
power supplies in the Power Supply Module that you want to remove.
5. Remove the 2 retaining screws along the front flange of the Power Supply Module.
6. Slide the failed Power Supply Module out of the control panel tub and place on a clean,
dry surface.
7. Slide the new Power Supply Module into the open slot in the control panel tub that you
just removed the failed Power Supply Module from.
8. Replace the 2 retaining screws along the front flange of the Power Supply Module.
Note — If you do not connect the cables to the proper power supplies, you may cause the
Status Menu to give false readings.

9. Reconnect the Power Supply Status Cables and Power Supply Power Cables for each
power supply in the Power Supply Module according to how you marked them in Step
(3.) above.
10. Reconnect the AC power cords from the back of the Power Supply Module.

Frame Power Supply Failure
In order to diagnose a power supply failure you must remove the door from the frame, and
identify the failed power supply using the status indicators on each power supply.
1. Check the network status between the control panel and frame. If there has been a
network interruption, the switcher may report a power failure of the frame power
supplies.
2. Check the AC power cords for all power supplies. Ensure that they are securely plugged
into each receptacle.
3. If each of your power supplies are connected to separate circuits, check that there has not
been an interruption to the AC power on either of those circuits.
4. Check if there are enough power supplies installed in your frame. Refer to the section
“Frame Power Supplies” on page Eng 20-4 for the minimum number of power supplies
required.
5. Check if there is a power supply mismatch. The 500 Watt (4800AR-014) and 700 Watt
(4800AR-024) power supplies cannot be used in the same frame at the same time.
6. Remove the front door of the frame. Refer to the section “Opening and Closing the
7. Locate the frame power supplies (Figure 18.5).
Power Supply
Slot 1
Slot 2
Power Supply
Slot 3
Figure 18.5 Frame Power Supplies (QMD Shown)
8. Use the following table (Table 18.1) to diagnose the status of each power supply and
determine the corrective action.
Table 18.1 Panel Power Supply Diagnosis

Green Yellow Red
Power
Power Standby Fail Status
Switch
Indicator Indicator Indicator
On On Off Off Normal Operation — Check the network
connection between control panel and frame.
Off Off On Off Standby Mode (QMD/MD)
• Toggle the power switch on the power supply
On for normal operation.
On Off On Off Standby Mode (QMD-X/MD-X)
• Toggle the power switch on the power supply
On for normal operation.
• Check that the Main Power switch is on.

Table 18.1 Panel Power Supply Diagnosis
Green Yellow Red
Power
Power Standby Fail Status
Switch
Indicator Indicator Indicator
On Off Off On Fail
• Check the AC power cable and building
circuit breakers.
• Replace the power supply if needed.
On Off Off Off Fail
circuit breakers.
• Check the AC power input fuse and replace if
needed.
Off Off Off Off Fail
circuit breakers.
• Check the AC power input fuse and replace if
needed.
9. Replace the power supply if needed. Refer to the section “Replacing a Frame Power
Supply” on page Eng 18-13 for information on replacing a power supply.

Frame Fan Failure
In order to diagnose and repair a cooling fan failure, you must identify the fan that the switcher is
reporting as failed on the Status Menu, and replace the fan.
1. Press HOME  Status  Complete Status.
Complete Status — Status Menu

2. Next to Frame Fans, identify which fans have failed by the fan numbers. These
numbers identify individual fans on the Fan Carrier Board. The location of the fan on the
board depends on the board you have.
9 10
11 1 8
4 5 7 12 13
10
9 11
8
5 12
13
4 7
15 6
3 14 14 6
1 2
2
3 15
Figure 18.6 QMD-X Fan Board (4800AR-030 and 4800AR-031) Fan Numbers

1 2
3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
13 14
11 12 15
Figure 18.7 QMD-X Fan Board (4800AR-12A) Fan Numbers
2 1
5 6 7
4 3
Figure 18.8 QMD Fan Board (4400AR-12) Fan Numbers
Eng 4-3 for information on powering down the switcher.
5. The System Status Indicators on the left side of the frame changes from Green to Red,
indicating that it is safe to turn the power off.
6. Remove the Fan Carrier Board from the frame.
7. Replace the failed fans as required.

Control Panel Power Supply
The Power Supply Modules in the Vision control panel can operate in a primary, or load sharing
mode, if the Redundant Power option is installed. The Redundant Power option allows all the
Power Supply Modules in the frame to share the power load of the frame. In this configuration,
if one of the Power Supply Modules fails, the remaining Power Supply Module can maintain
the operation of the frame.
This section provides information on the functional components of a Power Supply Module.
Control Panel Power Supply Functional Components

The Vision control panels use a 250 or 500 (Figure 18.9) Watt Power Supply Module,
depending on the control panel you have. The 250 Watt Power Supply Module is similar to the
500 Watt Power Supply Module, but has only the single power supply inside.

• on which power supply module each control panel requires, refer to the section “Control
Panel Power Supplies” on page Eng 20-3.
Warning Hazardous Voltage — Hazardous voltages are present within the power supply
for a short period of time after removal from the control panel. The power supply cover is
intended to protect the user from access to these areas, and should not be removed. Ross
Video Power Supply Module are intended to be factory serviced by qualified Ross Video service
personnel only.
Top of Power Supply Module Back of Power Supply Module
1
6 8
2
5
3 7
Figure 18.9 Control Panel 500 Watt Power Supply Module
1) Power Supply 1 Power Connector 4) Power Supply 2 Status Connector 7) Power Supply 2 Cooling Fan
2) Power Supply 1 Status Connector 5) Power Switch 8) AC Plug
3) Power Supply 2 Power Connector 6) Power Supply 1 Cooling Fan
1. Power Supply 1 Power Connector

The power connector for Power Supply 1 uses a 14-Pin, keyed locking Molex connector to
interface with the Power Distribution Board to provide power to the control panel.
2. Power Supply 1 Status Connector
The status connector for Power Supply 1 uses a 9-Pin, friction fit Molex header to interface with
the Power Distribution Board to pass status information on the power supply and cooling fan.
3. Power Supply 2 Power Connector
The power connector for Power Supply 2 uses a 14-Pin, keyed locking Molex connector to
interface with the Power Distribution Board to provide power to the control panel.

4. Power Supply 2 Status Connector
The status connector for Power Supply 2 uses a 9-Pin, friction fit Molex header to interface with
the Power Distribution Board to pass status information on the power supply and cooling fan.
5. Power Switch
The Power Switch is used to turn the individual Power Supply Modules on and off. The single
switch turns both power supplies on and off for the 500 Watt Power Supply Module.
6. Power Supply 1 Cooling Fan
The single fan provides cooling for Power Supply 1.
7. Power Supply 2 Cooling Fan
The single fan provides cooling for Power Supply 2.
8. AC Plug
The single AC port is used to connect the mains or AC power in the facility to the control panel.

Frame Power Supply
The power supplies in the frame can operate in a primary, or load sharing mode, if the
Redundant Power option is installed. The redundant power option allows all the power supplies
in the frame to share the power load of the frame. In this configuration, if one of the power
supplies fails, the remaining power supplies can maintain the operation of the frame.
This section provides information on the functional components of a power supply, as well as
information on how to replace a power supply.
Frame Power Supply Functional Components

There are a number of important components of the Frame Power Supply that are discussed in
this section. These components include the power switch, the status indicators, and the midplane
connectors.

• on which power supply module each frame requires, refer to the section “Control Panel
Power Supplies” on page Eng 20-3.
Warning Hazardous Voltage — Hazardous voltages are present within the power supply
for a short period of time after removal from the frame. The power supply cover is intended to
protect the user from access to these areas, and should not be removed. Ross Video power
supplies are intended to be factory serviced by qualified Ross Video service personnel only.
Service or any component replacement other than the AC input fuse is not advised.
Power Supply
1 2
Figure 18.10 Frame Power Supply Front
1) Power Switch 3) Yellow Standby Indicator 4) Red Fail Indicator

2) Green Power Indicator
1. Power Switch
The Power Switch is used to turn the individual power supplies on and off. The switch is in the
off position when it is toggled down.
2. Green Power Indicator
This green indicator illuminates to show that the power supply is functioning properly.
3. Yellow Standby Indicator
This yellow indicator illuminates to show that the power supply is in standby mode. A power
supply will be in standby mode because the master power switch or the power switch on the
power supply has been turned off.
4. Red Fail Indicator
This red indicator illuminates to show that the power supply is not operating. This is because the
power supply has failed or is installed incorrectly.

Replacing a Frame Power Supply
The power supplies in the frame are hot-swappable only if the Redundant Power option is
installed. If you do not have redundant power supplies, you must power down the frame before
attempting to remove a power supply.
Warning Hazardous Voltage — Hazardous voltages are present on the pins of supply
mating connectors within the frame power supply housing area. To reduce the risk of electric
shock, keep clear of mating connectors within the supply area when power supplies modules
are not installed.
2. Locate the power supply to be replaced.
Important — If you do not have redundant power installed in your frame, you must power
down the frame before proceeding, if it is not already off.
3. Switch the power supply Off by toggling the power switch down.
4. Loosen the 2 screws holding the slider catch in place until the catch moves freely
(Figure 18.11).
Screws
FA BY
D
IL
ST R
AN
E
W
PO
Slider Catch O Tab
Figure 18.11 Power Supply Protective Cage
5. Move the slider catch all the way to the right.
Caution — The metal cage surrounding the power supply may be hot after prolonged
switcher operation.
6. Grasp the tab and gently pull the power supply out of the frame.
7. Switch the replacement power supply Off by toggling the power switch down.
Warning — The 500 Watt (4800AR-014) and 700 Watt (4800AR-024) power supplies cannot
be used in the same frame at the same time; doing so may damage the power supply, the
frame, or both.
8. Install the new power supply by sliding it into the open slot and pushing it firmly into
place.
9. Move the slider catch to the left until it hooks the side of the slot.
10. Tighten the screws to secure the slider catch in place.

11. Switch the new power supply On by toggling the power switch up. The switcher will
automatically detect the new power supply and clear the fail message.
12. Install the front door of the frame.

Cleaning the Frame Air Filter
The frame has a single air filter that is used to prevent dust and airborne particulates from
contaminating the frame. This filter should be cleaned at least once a year; but may need to be
cleaned more frequently in some environments.
1. Remove the front cover of the frame.
2. Locate the air filter on the far left side of the frame (Figure 18.12), next to the Fan
Carrier assembly.
3. Grasp the end of the filter and gently pull it out of the frame.
Cooling Fan Card
Filter
To Remove
Figure 18.12 Fan Carrier and Filter (QMD Shown)
4. While servicing the air filter, replace the front cover of the frame to ensure no dust or
debris falls into the frame.
5. Brush any loose dust off of the filter.
6. Place the filter under warm running water to remove any remaining dust. On one side of
the filter is a “bug screen” mesh. When rinsing, water should flow out of this side.
7. Remove the filter from the water and pat dry with a towel to remove any moisture.
8. Remove the front cover of the frame.
9. Replace the clean, dry filter back into the air filter slot in the frame. Ensure that the side
with the mesh is facing the outer wall of the frame, and the edge without the foam is
situated at the front of the frame.
10. Replace the front cover of the frame.
With the air filter cleaned, it is a good idea to record how dirty it was and how long it has been
since the last cleaning. If the filter was very dirty, you should shorten the interval between
cleanings to compensate for your particular conditions.

Replacing the Hard Drive
In the event that the hard drive installed in your frame needs to be replaced, a spare hard drive,
with the original shipping version of the software on it, is provided in the spare parts kit.
Depending on the frame CPU you have, the type of hard drive that is used, and how it is installed
are different.
Note — The software provided on the spare hard drive should be the current shipping version
at the time the hard drive was imaged. This may not be the newest version of software available.
Once you have installed the spare hard drive, you should contact Ross Video for the most
current version of the software.

• on performing a software upgrade, refer to the section “Software Upgrade” on page Eng
6-3.
• on backing up your switcher setups, refer to the section “Storing and Recalling Files
and Setups” on page Eng 13-4.
Replacing the Hard Drive on the 4800AR-001 Frame CPU Board

1. Power down the switcher. Refer to the section “Powering Down the Switcher” on page
Eng 4-3 for information on shutting down switcher.
2. Remove the Frame CPU Board from Slot A at the back of the frame. Refer to the
section “Removing and Installing Frame Boards” on page Eng 4-18 for more
information on locating and removing this board.
3. Locate the Hard Drive on the Frame CPU Board.
Ribbon Cable
Ribbon Cable Connector
Hard Drive
Figure 18.13 CPU Board (4800AR-001) — Hard Drive Location
4. Release the Ribbon Cable from the Ribbon Cable Connector by pressing down and
out on the Ejector Tabs at either end of the Ribbon Cable Connector (Figure 18.14).

Figure 18.14 Releasing the Ribbon Cable
5. Flip the CPU Board over so that the Hard Drive is facing down.
6. Locate the four Retaining Screw securing the Hard Drive in place (Figure 18.15).
Retaining Screws
Figure 18.15 CPU Board — Retaining Screws Location
7. Using a non-magnetic (electronics safe) screwdriver, remove the 4 Retaining Screws

securing the Hard Drive.
8. While holding the Hard Drive to the CPU Board, flip the CPU Board back over so
that the Hard Drive is facing up again.
Note — Ensure that you do not damage the rubber spacers located at each screw hole when
you remove the Hard Drive.
9. Remove the Hard Drive from the CPU Board and place in a safe location.
10. Remove the Ribbon Cable from the Hard Drive you just removed and install it onto
the replacement Hard Drive. Ensure that the stripe on the Ribbon Cable is aligned
towards the four unused pins as illustrated (Figure 18.16).

Hard Drive Ribbon Cable Pins
Pin1
CPU Board
Ribbon Cable
Pin1
Figure 18.16 CPU Board — Ribbon Cable Alignment
Caution — Ensure that you connect the Ribbon Cable to the pins illustrated (Figure 18.16).
If the Ribbon Cable is not properly connected, your Hard Drive could be damaged when the
switcher is powered On.
11. Ensuring that the Rubber Spacers are in place, install the replacement Hard Drive
using the 4 Retaining Screws you removed earlier (Figure 18.17).
Rubber Spacer
CPU Board
Retaining Screw
Figure 18.17 CPU Board — Retaining Screws
Caution — Do not over tighten the Retaining Screws. These screws only need to be snug in
order to secure the Hard Drive in place.
12. Push the Ribbon Cable into the Ribbon Cable Connector until the Ejector Tabs at
either end of the Ribbon Cable Connector close together, securing the Ribbon Cable
in place.
13. Re-install the Frame CPU Board into the same slot in the frame that you removed it
from.
You may have to reset your network configurations or update your software version.
Replacing the Hard Drive on the 4800AR-002 Frame CPU Board

1. Power down the switcher. Refer to the section “Powering Down the Switcher” on page
Eng 4-3 for information on shutting down switcher.
2. Remove the Frame CPU Board from Slot A at the back of the frame. Refer to the
section “Removing and Installing Frame Boards” on page Eng 4-18 for more
information on locating and removing this board.
3. Locate the Hard Drive on the Frame CPU Board.

Hard Drive
Hard Drive
Connector
Figure 18.18 CPU Board (4800AR-002) — Hard Drive Location
4. Flip the CPU Board over so that the Hard Drive is facing down. Ensure that you do not
dislodge or damage the heat sinks on the top of the board.
5. Locate the four Retaining Screw securing the Hard Drive in place (Figure 18.19).
Retaining Screws
Figure 18.19 CPU Board — Retaining Screws Location
6. Using a non-magnetic (electronics safe) screwdriver, remove the 4 Retaining Screws

securing the Hard Drive.
7. While holding the Hard Drive to the CPU Board, flip the CPU Board back over so
that the Hard Drive is facing up again.
Note — Ensure that you do not damage the rubber spacers located at each screw hole when
you remove the Hard Drive.
8. Ensuring that the Rubber Spacers are in place, install the replacement Hard Drive by
angling it slightly down towards the Hard Drive Connector and pushing it firmly onto
the connector.
Hard Drive
Connector
Rubber Spacer Rubber Spacer
Figure 18.20 Hard Drive Installation
9. Secure the replacement Hard Drive using the 4 Retaining Screws you removed earlier
(Figure 18.19).

Caution — Do not over tighten the Retaining Screws. These screws only need to be snug in
order to secure the Hard Drive in place.
10. Re-install the Frame CPU Board into the same slot in the frame that you removed it
from.
You may have to reset your network configurations or update your software version.

Replacing a Control Panel Module
Each module on the Vision control panel can be removed and replaced as required with the
exceptions of the Preview Bus Module and the Positioner Module.
Note — Installing control panel modules in different locations than the default is not supported
at this time.
Removing a Control Panel Module

To remove a module, you will have to power down the control panel, disconnect the power and
communications cables to the module, and then un-bolt it from the control panel.
1. Power down the control panel. The frame can remain on during this procedure. Refer to
the section “Powering Down the Switcher” on page Eng 4-3 for information on
shutting down the control panel.
2. Unplug the Primary and Redundant (if installed) power from the control panel.
4. Identify the module that you want to replace from inside the control panel tub.
5. Disconnect the Module Power Cable from the module you want to remove (Figure
18.21). This 4-conductor ribbon cable delivers power to all the modules in the row, when
removing it, ensure that you do not accidentally unplug it from any neighboring
modules.
PMC Board
Power Connector
Figure 18.21 Effects Keyer Module — Power Connector
Note — The Preview Bus Module connects to the Module Control Link Backbone through the
Positioner Module. To remove either of these modules, the 26-Pin ribbon cable between the
two modules must be removed. The Preview Bus will not operate properly if it is not connected
to the Positioner Module.
6. Disconnect the Module Control Link Cables from the module you want to remove
(Figure 18.22). This CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) cable delivers all the command signals to
and from the module, as well as other modules in the same row.

To Next Module
To Previous Module
Figure 18.22 Panel Module Controller (PMC) — Module Control Link Connectors
7. Remove the Retaining Bolts located at each corner of the module and keep them in a
safe place. A ¼ inch hex driver or wrench is required.
8. Remove the module from the control panel and place it on a clean, static free surface.
Important — If a replacement module is not available, you must install and secure a blank
module cover plate to replace the module until the new module is available.
Next, you will have to install the new control panel module.
Installing a Control Panel Module

To install a module, you will have to power down the control panel, disconnect the
communications cables, remove the blank cover plate if installed, install the new module, and
then connect the power and communications cables.
1. Power down the control panel. The frame can remain on during this procedure. Refer to
the section “Powering Down the Switcher” on page Eng 4-3 for information on
shutting down the control panel.
2. Unplug the Primary and Redundant (if installed) power from the control panel.
4. Identify the module that you want to replace from inside the control panel tub.
5. Remove the blank cover plate, if one was installed in the module opening.
6. Slide the new module into the module opening. Ensure that the module opening is of the
correct size for the module you are trying to install. Refer to the section “Control Panel
Dimensions” on page Eng 20-6 for more information.
7. Install the Retaining Bolts located at each corner of the module to a maximum torque of
5 in-lbs (6 cm-kg). A ¼ inch hex driver or wrench is required.
Note — The Preview Bus Module connects to the Module Control Link Backbone through the
Positioner Module. To remove either of these modules, the 26-Pin ribbon cable between the
two modules must be removed. The Preview Bus will not operate properly if it is not connected
to the Positioner Module.
8. Connect and secure the Module Control Link Cables to the module you are installing
(Figure 18.23). This CAT5 (TIA/EIA-568-B) cable delivers all the command signals to
and from the module, as well as other modules in the same row.

To Next Module
To Previous Module
Figure 18.23 Panel Module Controller (PMC) — Module Control Link Connectors
9. Connect and secure the Module Power Cable to the module you want to install (Figure
18.24). This 6-conductor ribbon cable delivers power to all the modules in the row, when
installing it, ensure that you do not accidental unplug it from any neighboring modules.
PMC Board
Power Connector
Figure 18.24 Effects Keyer Module — Power Connector
10. Close the control panel lid and reconnect the Main and Redundant (if installed) power to
the control panel.
11. Power up the control panel. Refer to the section “Powering Up the Switcher” on page
Eng 4-2 for information on powering up the control panel.
12. If the message PMCs need to be upgraded; please go to Panel Modules menu
is shown on the Main Menus, you need to upgrade your PMC. Refer to the section
“Upgrading PMCs” on page Eng 18-23 for information on upgrading PMCs.
13. Test the functionality of the new module. Refer to the section “Control Panel
Diagnostic Tools” on page Eng 17-18 for more information on performing control panel
diagnostics.
14. Assign the module to a Crosspoint Group, or row, on the control panel. Refer to the
section “Mapping a Module to a Row” on page Eng 17-5 for more information on
assigning a module to a crosspoint group.
Upgrading PMCs
The Panel Module Controllers (PMCs) may need to be upgraded if you perform a software
upgrade or replace a module. If PMCs need to be upgraded, the message PMCs need to be
upgraded; please go to Panel Modules menu is shown on the Main Menus.

Panel Modules Menu

2. Press Upgrade PMCs. The switcher starts upgrading the PMC on the control panel.

• on mapping a module to a control panel row, refer to the section “Mapping a Module to
a Row” on page Eng 17-5.

Dusting Mode
Dusting Mode allows you to clean the surface of the Vision control panel, including the
touchscreen display, without the switcher reacting to any accidental pressing of buttons. Dusting
Mode does not affect the operation of the switcher, but prevents the switcher from acting upon
button presses.
Caution — Do not use water, or any other liquid cleaner, to clean the surface of the control
panel. Doing so can cause personal injury and/or damage to the control panel itself. A dry
duster, vacuum, or low pressure compressed air should be used to clean the surface of the
control panel.
1. Press HOME  More  Remote Enables  Dust.
Dusting Menu
2. Dust the surface of the control panel as required. In dusting mode the switcher will not
act upon any input from the control panel.
3. Press the F1 and F6 buttons simultaneously to take the control panel out of dusting
mode. The F1 and F6 buttons are the two physical buttons located below the two EXIT
buttons on the Dusting Menu.

Appendix A. Menu Trees
In This Appendix
This appendix provides information on the various branches of the Vision menu system.
The following menu trees are discussed in this appendix:
• Setup and Installation Menu Trees
• Source Configuration Menu Tree
• Output BNC Menu Tree
• Communications Menu Tree
• Custom Control Bank Menu Tree
• Custom Controls Menu Tree
• File Storage Menu Tree
• Recall Factory Menu Tree
• Squeeze & Tease and Effects Menu Tree
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix A. Menu Trees • Eng 19–1
Setup and Installation Menu Trees
Setup Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Setup (1-3)
Setup (2-3)
Setup (3-3)
Figure 19.1 Setup Menu Tree
Installation Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Setup (1-3)
Installation (1-3)
Installation (2-3)
Installation (3-3)
Figure 19.2 Installation Menu Tree
Eng 19–2 • Appendix A. Menu Trees Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Source Configuration Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Setup (1-3)
Installation (1-3)
Source Configuration (1-3)
Figure 19.3 Source Configuration Menu Tree
Output BNC Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Setup (1-3)
Installation (1-3)
Output (1-2)
Output (2-2)
Figure 19.4 Output BNC Menu Tree
Communications Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Setup (1-3)
Installation (1-3)
Communications (1-2)
Communications (2-2)
Figure 19.5 Communications Menu Tree
Custom Control Bank Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Setup (1-3)
Installation (1-3)
Installation (2-3)
Custom Controls
Figure 19.6 Custom Control Bank Menu Tree
Custom Controls Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Custom Controls (1-2)
Insert Special (1-2)
Insert Special (2-2)
Figure 19.7 Custom Controls Menu Tree
File Storage Menu Tree
Disk Store Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Disk (1-2)
Disk Store (1-3)
Disk Store (2-3)
Disk Store (3-3)
Figure 19.8 Disk Store Menu Tree
Disk Recall Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Disk (1-2)
Disk Recall (1-3)
Disk Recall (2-3)
Disk Recall (3-3)
Figure 19.9 Disk Recall Menu Tree
Disk Store Individual Item Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Disk (1-2)
Store Individual Items (1-2)
Store Individual Items (2-2)
Figure 19.10 Disk Store Individual Item Menu Tree
Disk Recall Individual Item Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Disk (1-2)
Recall Individual Items (1-2)
Recall Individual Items (2-2)
Figure 19.11 Disk Recall Individual Item Menu Tree
Recall Factory Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Setup (1-3)
Installation (1-3)
Installation (2-3)
Installation (3-3)
Recall Factory (1-3)
Figure 19.12 Recall Factory Menu Tree
Squeeze & Tease and Effects Menu Tree
Effects Menu Tree
Main Menu (1-2)
Main Menu (2-3)
Effects (1-3)
Effects (2-3)
Effects (3-3)
Figure 19.13 Effects Menu Tree
Squeeze & Tease MD Position/Crop Menu Tree
S&T MD Main Menu (1-2)
S&T MD Position/Crop (1-2)
S&T MD Position/Crop (2-2)
S&T MD Advanced Positioning
Figure 19.14 Squeeze & Tease MD Position/Crop Menu Tree
Squeeze & Tease MD Border Menu Tree
S&T MD Border
S&T MD Border Color
Figure 19.15 Squeeze & Tease MD Border Menu Tree
Squeeze & Tease MD Sequence Menu Tree
S&T MD Sequence (1-2)
S&T MD Sequence (2-2)
Figure 19.16 Squeeze & Tease MD Sequence Menu Tree
Channel Management Menu Tree
Channel Management (1-2)
Channel Management (2-2)
Figure 19.17 Channel Management Menu Tree
Squeeze & Tease MD Preprocessor Menu Tree
S&T MD Preprocessor
Figure 19.18 Squeeze & Tease MD Preprocessor Menu Tree
Squeeze & Tease MD Lighting Menu Tree
S&T MD Lighting
Figure 19.19 Squeeze & Tease MD Lighting Menu Tree
Squeeze & Tease WARP Menu Tree
S&T WARP
Figure 19.20 Squeeze & Tease WARP Menu Tree
Appendix B. Specifications
In The Appendix
This appendix provides technical specifications and connector pinout diagrams for the Vision
switcher.
The following topics are discussed in this appendix:
• Standard Components
• General Switcher Specifications
• Physical Specifications
• Communication Specifications
• Video Characteristics
• Frame Pinouts
• Control Panel Pinouts
• Control Panel CPU Module Ports
• Remote Aux Panel Pinouts
• Aux Panel Programming Mode Summary
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix B. Specifications • Eng 20–1

Standard Components
The following components are standard on all models:
• Complete Control Panel
• 2 UltraChrome™ Chroma keys per full MLE
• 8 Pattern Generators per full MLE
• Wipes in full Program/Preset
• 32 Timed Aux Buses
• Hard Disk Drive and USB Ports for file storage
• Touchscreen Display
• Custom Control Macro Buttons
• 100 Event Memory System
• 10 GPI Inputs and 10 GPI Outputs
• 72 Tally Outputs
• Switcher Manuals
• 1 Year Transferable Warranty
Eng 20–2 • Appendix B. Specifications Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

General Switcher Specifications
The information provided in the following table (Table 20.1) lists the general specifications of
the switcher with all options installed.
Table 20.1 General Specifications

Switcher MLEs Input BNCs Buttons/Bus Output BNCs Keys/MLE
8 MLE Octane/QMD-X 8 96 40 48 4
4 MLE QMD-X 4 96 40 48 4
4 MLE MD-X 4 96 40 48 2
4 MLE QMD 4 48 40 16 4
3 MLE QMD-X 3 96 32 48 4
3 MLE MD-X 3 96 32 48 2
3 MLE QMD 3 48 32 16 4
2 MLE QMD-X 2 96 16 48 4
2 MLE MD-X 2 96 16 48 2
2 MLE QMD 2 48 16 16 4
2 MLE MD 2 32 16 16 2
1 MLE QMD-X 1 96 16 48 4
1 MLE MD-X 1 96 16 48 2
1 MLE QMD 1 48 16 16 4
1 MLE MD 1 32 16 16 2
Control Panel Power Supplies

The Vision control panels use a 250 or 600 Watt Power Supply Module, depending on the control
panel you have (Table 20.2).
Table 20.2 Control Panel Power Supply Modules

Vision 4 Vision 3 Vision 2X Vision 3M Vision 2M Vision 2 Vision 1M Vision 1
Power
600W 600W 250W 600W 250W 250W 250W 250W
Supply
Power Consumption – Control Panel

The information provided in the following table (Table 20.3) lists power consumption for each
Vision control panel at average (8% Panel Glow) and peak power (100% Panel Glow)
consumption.

Table 20.3 Vision Control Panel Power Consumption
Power Consumption
Parameter
(average) / (peak)
Input Voltage 90V~250V AC, 47~63Hz
Vision 4 206W / 526W
Vision 3M 150W / 340W
Vision 2X 133W / 289W
Vision 1 94W / 159W
Frame Power Supplies

The Octane/QMD/X and MD/X frames use a 500 or 700 Watt Power Supply, depending on the
frame you have (Table 20.4). The following table provides the number of power supplies that are
required for a fully populated frame.
Table 20.4 Frame Power Supply Modules for Fully Populated Frame
Power Supply Watts 700W 500W 700W 500W
Number of Supplies (Min/Max) 2/4 3/4 1/2 1/2
Power Consumption – Frame

The information provided in the following table (Table 20.5) lists power consumption for the
Octane/QMD/X and MD/X frames.
Table 20.5 Frame Power Consumption

Frame Parameter Power Consumption
100-120V~
220-240V~
Power Supply Rating 47-63 Hz
Octane/QMD-X 9A 650W
(Canada 120V~ only)
Base System ~225W
Fully Loaded ~1160W

Table 20.5 Frame Power Consumption
Frame Parameter Power Consumption
100-120V~
220-240V~
MD-X 9A 650W
(Canada 120V~ only)
Base System ~225W
Fully Loaded ~975W
100-120V~
220-240V~
QMD 9A 650W
(Canada 120V~ only)
Base System ~150W
Fully Loaded ~500W
100-120V~
220-240V~
MD 9A 650W
(Canada 120V~ only)
Base System ~150W
Fully Loaded ~500W
Operating Environment Requirements

The information provided in the following table (Table 20.6) lists operating environment
requirements for the Vision control panel and frame.
Table 20.6 Vision Operating Environment Requirements

Parameter Specification
Ambient Temperature Range 0 – 35°C
Ambient Frame Cooling Side-to-Side airflow
• 500W - Passive
Frame Power Supply Cooling
• 700W - Active left-to-right
Ambient Control Panel Cooling Passive
Control Panel Power Supply Front-to-Back airflow
Cooling

Physical Specifications
This section provides information on the physical dimensions of the control panel and frame, as
well as the module sizes for the control panel.
Control Panel Dimensions

The dimensions (Figure 20.1) of the Vision control panels are listed in the following table (Table
20.7) and do not include the extra height of the positioner or fader above the control panel
surface.
SEL

BLACK PV OVER LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2
CUT CUT
Height
KEYS 1 2 3 MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES


SEL KEY SELECT FILL MEM ON OFF ALPHA

BLACK PV OVER LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2
CUT CUT
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ 4 5 6
KEYS 1 2 3 MLE
FRAMES ONLY RATE
ROLL CUT AUTO EFF KEY AUTO AUTO

CLIP TRANS DISS BANK 0 ENTER RATE TRANS TRANS

SEL

BLACK PV OVER LIMIT
RECALL 7 8 9 STORE
1 2
CUT CUT
KEYS 1 2 3 MLE
ONLY RATE FRAMES

PREVIEW BUS PREVIEW OVERLAY FADE TO BLACK FRAMES USB
MLE 1 MLE 2 MLE 3 MLE 4 SRC PV PGM SOURCE VTR SAFE CENTER TIME MASK HIDE CUT FADE
TRANSITION DOWNSTREAM KEYERS GLOBAL MEMORY SYSTEM POSITIONER

SEL
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 3 KEY 4 PST CHROMA KEY MASK FLY CHAN KEY
PST TRANS KEY TRANS SEL SEL SEL SEL ALL UNDO 7 8 9 ALL
BLACK PV OVER LIMIT
1 2 3 4 MLE RECALL 4 5 6 FADE MLE
1 CLIP RATE 1
CUT CUT CUT CUT
MLE 1 2 3 EFF MLE
DISS WIPE DVE SEQ 2 RATE 2 DEFLT
MLE KEYS +/- 0 . MLE MLE

3 ONLY RATE 3 LINK
FRAMES
ROLL CUT AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO MLE EFF KEY MLE
CLIP TRANS 4 DISS BANK DEFLT ENTER RATE 4 LOCK
th
Dep
Width
Figure 20.1 Control Panel Dimensions
Table 20.7 Control Panel Dimensions

Panel Width Depth Height
55.5 inches 26 inches 7.9 inches
Vision 4
(1409.7 mm) (660.4 mm) (200.7 mm)
45.3 inches 20.5 inches 6.7 inches
Vision 3M
(1150.6 mm) (520.7 mm) (170.2 mm)
Vision 3
(1295.4 mm) (520.7 mm) (170.2 mm)
Vision 2X
(1295.4 mm) (419.1 mm) (152.4 mm)
Vision 2M
(1003.3 mm) (419.1 mm) (152.4 mm)
Vision 2
(863.6 mm) (419.1 mm) (152.4 mm)
Vision 1M
(889 mm) (419.1 mm) (152.4 mm)
Vision 1
(723.9 mm) (419.1 mm) (152.4 mm)
Frame Dimensions
The information provided in the following table (Table 20.8) lists the frame dimensions for the
frame.

Table 20.8 Frame Dimensions
Frame Rack Units Height Width Depth
8RU 14.13 inches 19.00 inches 26.00 inches
Octane/QMD-X
(35.9 cm) (48.3 cm) (66.0 cm)
MD-X
(35.9 cm) (48.3 cm) (66.0 cm)
QMD
(13.34 cm) (48.3 cm) (66.0 cm)
MD
(13.34 cm) (48.3 cm) (66.0 cm)

Communication Specifications
This section provides information on the default network addresses of the control panel and
frame, the Module Control Link backbone of the control panel, as well as the different connector
types on the control panel and frame.
Default Network Settings

The Vision control panel and frame are set with default network addresses from the factory. These
specific setting are listed in the table below (Table 20.9). The frame can be manually configured
to these settings using a DIP switch on the Frame CPU Board.
Table 20.9 Default Network Settings

Frame Settings Frame Settings
Panel Settings
(LAN 1) (LAN 2)
IP Address 192.168.1.1 172.16.1.1 192.168.1.2
Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0
Gateway 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Frame CPU Board DIP Switch

This DIP switch sets various system configurations and operational modes for the entire switcher.
All DIP switches should be in the OFF position for normal operation.
DIP Switch
Figure 20.2 Frame CPU Board (4800AR-001) — DIP Switch Location
DIP Switch
Figure 20.3 Frame CPU Board (4800AR-002) — DIP Switch Location

Setting DIP switch 1 to ON defaults the IP address and netmask of the frame the next time the
frame is restarted. This allows you to connect to the frame with the control panel to change the
network address. Any changes to the network address will not be applied until the next time the
frame is restarted.
Caution — Incorrect DIP switch settings may make your switcher inoperable. If your switcher
does not appear to boot properly, and will not pass video, check that all DIP switches are in the
OFF position. Do not change the position of the DIP switches unless instructed to do so by Ross
Video Technical Support.
Module Control Link Backbone

The Module Control Link Backbone allows the switcher to identify where a particular module
has been installed by the Link and Node address it has been assigned. All modules, external and
internal, for the switcher have a link and node number.
External Links
The External Link Ports are located on the back of the control panel and support the Touchscreen
Display, Auxiliary Control Panels, and any External Modules that are connected to the switcher.
The Touchscreen Display must be connected to External Link Port 1 (Link 1) in order to
operate properly.
Internal Links
The internal links support all the modules in the Vision control panel, including the crosspoint,
and custom control buttons. The module that is assigned to a particular link and node will depend
on the control panel that you are using.
Link5 Link5 Link5 Link5 Link5 Link9 Link9 Link9 Link9

Node4 Node3 Node2 Node1 Node0 Node0 Node1 Node2 Node3


Link8 Link8 Link8 Link8 Link8

Node4 Node3 Node2 Node1 Node0 Link12 Link12 Link12 Link12
Node0 Node1 Node2 Node3
Figure 20.4 Vision 4 Control Panel — Module Control Link Backbone

Link5 Link5 Link5 Link8 Link8 Link8 Link8
Node2 Node1 Node0 Node0 Node1 Node2 Node3
Link6 Link6 Link6 Link9 Link9 Link9 Link9

Node2 Node1 Node0 Node0 Node1 Node2 Node3
Link7 Link7 Link7

Node2 Node1 Node0 Link10 Link10 Link10 Link10
Figure 20.5 Vision 3M Control Panel — Module Control Link Backbone
Link5 Link5 Link5 Link5 Link8 Link8 Link8 Link8

Node3 Node2 Node1 Node0 Node0 Node1 Node2 Node3

Link7 Link7 Link7 Link7

Node3 Node2 Node1 Node0 Link10 Link10 Link10 Link10
SEL

SEL

Node3 Node2 Node1 Node0 Link8 Link8 Link8 Link8
Figure 20.7 Vision 2X Control Panel — LVDS Backbone

Link5 Link5 Link5 Link7 Link7 Link7
Node2 Node1 Node0 Node0 Node1 Node2
Link6 Link6 Link6

Node2 Node1 Node0 Link8 Link8 Link8
Node0 Node1 Node2
Figure 20.8 Vision 2M Control Panel — LVDS Backbone

Node1 Node0 Node0 Node1 Node2
Link6 Link6
Node1 Node0
Link8 Link8 Link8
Node0 Node1 Node2

Node2 Node1 Node0 Node0 Node1
Link6 Link6 Link6

Node2 Node1 Node0
Link8 Link8
Node0 Node1
Figure 20.10 Vision 1M Control Panel — Module Control Link Backbone

Link6 Link6
Node1 Node0
Link8 Link8
Node0 Node1

• on the Aux Ports, refer to the section “Communication Ports” on page Eng 2-15.
Frame Connector Types

The information provided in the following table (Table 20.10) lists the connector types for each
connection on the frame.

Table 20.10 Frame Connector Specifications
Video BNC Type (Female)
Reference BNC Type (Female)
Peripheral Ports DB9 (Female)
GPI I/O DB25 (Female)
Panel Port (legacy control panel) RJ-45
LAN Ports RJ-45
USB 1.1 Compatible, Type A
USB Ports
(host)
AC Power (primary, redundant) 3-Pin IEC
Control Panel Connector Types

The information provided in the following table (Table 20.11) lists the connector types for each
connection on the control panel.
Table 20.11 Control Panel Connector Specifications

Remote Ports DB9 (Female)
Tally Ports DB25 (Female)
External Link Ports RJ-45
Ethernet Port RJ-45
USB 1.1 Compatible, Type A
USB Ports
(host)
AC Power (primary, redundant) 3-Pin IEC
DVI Video DVI-D
Mouse Port PS/2
Keyboard Port PS/2

Video Characteristics
This section provides information on the video formats, timing, and input and outputs that the
Vision switcher uses.
Video Processing
The Vision switcher has the following video processing characteristics:
• 10 bit 4:2:2 Component Digital Video and Key Processing
• 4:3 and Anamorphic 16:9 switchable Aspect Ratio where applicable
Video Formats
The Vision switcher supports the following Input Reference and Video Formats (Table 20.12).
References to 1080p 59.94Hz (A) and 1080p 50Hz (A) refer to 1080p Level A only.

• 480i
• 480i 16:9
• 720p 59.94Hz*
480i
• 1080i 59.94Hz*
• 1080p 29.97Hz
• 1080p 59.94Hz (A)
• 576i
• 576i 16:9
576i • 720p 50Hz*
• 1080i 50Hz*
• 1080p 50Hz (A)
720p 59.94Hz • 720p 59.94Hz
720p 50Hz • 720p 50Hz
• 480i
• 480i 16:9
• 720p 59.94Hz
1080i 59.94Hz
• 1080i 59.94Hz
• 1080p 29.97Hz
• 1080p 59.94Hz (A)
• 576i
• 576i 16:9
1080i 50Hz • 720p 50
• 1080i 50Hz
• 1080p 50Hz (A)
1080p 24Hz • 1080p 24Hz

1080pSF 24Hz • 1080pSF 24Hz
1080pSF 23.98Hz • 1080pSF 23.98Hz
1080p 29.97Hz • 1080p 29.97
*Important — It is not recommended that you operate the switcher in these video formats
when you are using a composite sync (480i or 576i) reference signal.
Timing
The Vision switcher has the following system timing characteristics:
• All video inputs are zero-time relative to reference input
• Auto timing correct for inputs out of sync by up to ± ¼ line (16us)
LTC Timecode Input

The information provided in the following table (Table 20.11) lists the LTC Timecode
specifications.
Table 20.13 LTC Timecode Specifications

Signal Level 0.5 – 2.0V (1.0V nominal)
Termination 600 ohm, soft-selectable
Video Input Signal Characteristics

The information provided in the following table (Table 20.14) lists the video input signal
characteristics.
Table 20.14 Video Input Signal Characteristics

50m @ 3Gb/s
Max Cable Length
75m @ 1.5Gb/s
(using Belden 1694 cable)
150m @ 270Mb/s
Impedance 75 ohm, terminating
>18dB 5Mb/s to 1.5Gb/s
Return Loss
>15dB 1.5Gb/s to 3Gb/s
SMPTE 259M/292M/424M serial
Video Inputs
digital (non-looping)
Reference Inputs • Standard Definition — analog black
(non-terminating, looping) • High Definition — tri-level sync

Video Output Signal Characteristics
The information provided in the following table (Table 20.15) lists the video output signal
characteristics.
Table 20.15 Video Output Signal Characteristics

>18dB 5Mb/s to 1.5 GHz
Return Loss
>15dB 1.5Gb/s to 3Gb/s
• SD Video Format — <0.2UI
Timing Jitter
• HD Video Format — <1UI
• SD Video Format — <0.2UI
Alignment Jitter
• HD Video Format — <0.2UI
• SD Video Format — 450ps to 700ps
Rise and Fall times
• HD Video Format — <240ps
Signal Level 800 mV ± 10%
DC Offset 0 volts
Overshoot <8%
• SD Mode — 10-bit SMPTE 259M-C
Video Outputs (serial
digital) • HD Mode — 10-bit SMPTE
292M/424M
Note — In SD Mode, Error Detection and Handling (EDH) signals are inserted into all video
outputs, and can be disabled. Aux Bus outputs do not have EDH insertion, but do pass
previously inserted EDH.

Frame Pinouts
This section provides pinout information for the ports found on the frame.
Peripheral Ports
The 4 DB9 Peripheral ports (Figure 20.12) on the back of the frame support both the RS-232
(TIA/EIA-232) and RS-422 (TIA/EIA-422) transmission standards. The following table (Table
20.16) lists the signal pinouts for the Peripheral ports.
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Figure 20.12 Peripheral Port — Female
Table 20.16 Peripheral Port Pinouts

Pin RS-232 RS-422
1 n/c Odd/Even Tx+
2 Rx TxA (Tx-)
3 Tx RxB (Rx+)
4 Ground Ground
5 Ground Ground
6 n/c Odd/Even Tx-
7 n/c TxB (Tx+)
8 n/c RxA (Rx-)
9 n/c 5V 1K Pull-up
Panel Port
Note — The Panel port is not used by the Vision control panel. The Panel port is only used to
connect to the Synergy control panel.
The single RJ-45 Panel port (Figure 20.13) on the back of the frame supports the RS-422
transmission standard for direct connection to the control panel. The following table (Table
20.17) lists the signal pinouts for the Panel ports.
12345678
Figure 20.13 Panel Port — Female

Table 20.17 Panel Port Pinouts
Pin Signal
1 TxB (Tx+)
2 TxA (Tx-)
3 RxB (Rx+)
4 RxA (Rx-)
5 Odd/Even+
(Transmit)
6 Odd/Even-
(Transmit)
7 Ground (AC coupled)
8 Ground (AC coupled)
GPI I/O Ports

The single DB25 GPI I/O port (Figure 20.14) on the back of the frame supports a total of 10 GPI
Inputs and 10 GPI Outputs. The following table (Table 20.18) lists the signal pinouts for the
GPI I/O port.
• GPI Inputs — Active Drive 5V TTL-compatible signal
• GPI Outputs — 5V TTL-compatible edge or level trigger
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Figure 20.14 GPI I/O Port — Female
Table 20.18 GPI I/O Port Pinouts

Pin Signal
1 Ground
2 n/c
3 n/c
4 GPI In 10
5 GPI In 9
6 GPI In 8
7 GPI In 7
8 GPI In 6
9 GPI In 5
10 GPI In 4
11 GPI In 3
12 GPI In 2
13 GPI In 1

Pin Signal
14 n/c
15 n/c
16 GPI Out 10
17 GPI Out 9
18 GPI Out 8
19 GPI Out 7
20 GPI Out 6
21 GPI Out 5
22 GPI Out 4
23 GPI Out 3
24 GPI Out 2
25 GPI Out 1
LAN Ports
The 2 RJ-45 LAN ports (Figure 20.15) on the back of the frame support 10Base-T and
100Base-TX Ethernet communication. The following table (Table 20.19) lists the signal pinouts
for the LAN port.
12345678
Figure 20.15 LAN Port — Female
Table 20.19 LAN Port Pinouts

Pin Signal
1 Tx+
2 Tx-
3 Rx+
4 n/c
5 n/c
6 Rx-
7 n/c
8 n/c
AC Power Ports
The 3-pin IEC AC Power ports (Figure 20.16) on the back of the frame deliver AC power to the
power supplies in the frame. The following table (Table 20.20) lists the signal pinouts for the AC
Power ports.

1 2
Figure 20.16 AC Power Port — Male
Table 20.20 AC Power Port Pinouts

Pin Signal
1 Neutral/Line 2
2 Line
3 Ground

Control Panel Pinouts
This section provides pinout information for the ports found on the Vision control panel.
Remote Ports
The 8 DB9 Remote ports (Figure 20.17) on the back of the control panel support both the RS-232
(TIA/EIA-232) and RS-422 (TIA/EIA-422) transmission standards. The following table (Table
20.21) lists the signal pinouts for the Remote ports.
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Figure 20.17 Remote Port — Female
Table 20.21 Remote Port Pinouts

Pin RS-232 RS-422
1 n/c n/c
2 Tx RxA (Rx-)
3 Rx TxB (Tx+)
4 Ground Ground
5 Ground Ground
6 n/c n/c
7 n/c RxB (Rx+)
8 n/c TxA (Tx-)
9 n/c n/c
External Link Ports

The 4 RJ-45 External Link ports (Figure 20.18) on the back of the control panel support the
Touchscreen Display, the external control panel modules, Remote Aux Panels, and the Auxiliary
Control Panels. The following table (Table 20.22) shows the signal pinouts for the External Link
ports.
12345678
Figure 20.18 External Link Port — Female
Note — The Touchscreen Display must be connected to External Link port 1 (Link 1) in order
to operate properly.

Table 20.22 External Link Port Pinouts
Pin Signal
1 RxB (Rx+)
2 RxA (Rx-)
3 TxB (Tx+)
4 PMC_SDI_Load+
5 PMC_SDI_Load-
6 TxA (Tx-)
7 PMC_SDI_Latch+
8 PMC_SDI_Latch-
Tally Ports
The DB25 Tally ports (Figure 20.19) on the back of the control panel provide the solid state
contact closure to tally common tally signals. The following table (Table 20.23) lists the signal
pinouts for the Aux ports.
• Tally Rating: 150mA @ 100V DC (25°C operating temperature)
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Figure 20.19 Tally Port — Female
Note — Tally Ports 3 through 8 are used for the extended tallies option and require the
extended tallies hardware to be installed before they can be used.
Table 20.23 Tally Port Pinouts

Pin Tally Port 1 Tally Port 2 Tally Port 3 Tally Port 4 Tally Port 5 Tally Port 6 Tally Port 7 Tally Port 8
1 Tally 1 Tally 19 Tally 37 Tally 55 Tally 73 Tally 91 Tally 109 Tally 127
10 Common Common Common Common Common Common Common Common

Table 20.23 Tally Port Pinouts
Pin Tally Port 1 Tally Port 2 Tally Port 3 Tally Port 4 Tally Port 5 Tally Port 6 Tally Port 7 Tally Port 8
AC Power Ports
The 2 3-pin IEC AC Power ports (Figure 20.20) on the back of the control panel deliver AC
power to the power supplies in the control panel. The following table (Table 20.24) lists the
signal pinouts for the AC Power ports.
1 2
Figure 20.20 AC Power Port — Male
Table 20.24 AC Power Port Pinouts

Pin Signal
1 Neutral/Line 2
2 Line
3 Ground

Control Panel CPU Module Ports
The Control Panel CPU Module houses the Single Board Computer (SBC) and the Panel
Communications Hub (PCH). This module performs all the command and control functions
between the different modules on the control panel, and the frame.
This section identifies and describes the various functional components and rear panel
connections found on the Control Panel CPU Module.
Important — The Control Panel CPU Module is designed to be a closed module and should
not be opened or serviced except by Ross Video Technical Support.
Control Panel CPU Module Functional Components

The top of the Control Panel CPU Module (Figure 20.21) has a number of different ports and
connections.
4
6 1
7 8
5 3 2
Figure 20.21 Control Panel CPU Module — Functional Components
1) Power Connector 4) Power Status Port 7) Reset Button

2) Module Control Link Ports 5) Tally Interface Port 8) Power Switch
3) Fan Status Port 6) Tally Power Connector 9) DIP Switches
1. Power Connector
The power connector uses a single 4-Pin, friction fit Molex connector to provide 12V DC to the
Control Panel CPU Module from the Power Distribution Board.
2. Module Control Link Ports
The Module Control Link backbone uses 10, independent, 8-Pin, RJ-45 connectors to interface to
the various internal PMCs on the control panel modules.
3. Fan Status Port
The Fan Status Port uses a single 8-Pin, RJ-45 connector to interface with the Power Distribution
Board to pass fan status information from the individual cooling fans.

4. Power Status Port
The Power Status Port uses a single 8-Pin, RJ-45 connector to interface with the Power
Distribution Board to pass power supply status information from the individual power supplies.
5. Tally Interface Port
The Tally Interface Port uses a single 8-Pin, RJ-45 connector to interface with the tally board.
6. Tally Power Connector
The tally power connector uses a single 2-Pin, friction fit Molex connector to provide power to
the Tally Boards.
7. Reset Button
The Reset Button performs a hard reset of the Single Board Computer (SBC). This will re-start
the control panel software.
8. Power Switch
The Power Switch will power on and off the Single Board Computer (SBC).
9. DIP Switch
This 8 switch DIP sets various control panel configurations and operational modes. Switches 2
through 8 should be in the OFF position for normal operation.
If you have a Vision 1 or Vision 2 control panel, switch 1 should be in the OFF position. If you
have a Vision 3 or Vision 4 control panel, switch 1 should be in the ON position.
Control Panel CPU Module Rear Panel

The rear panel of the Control Panel CPU Module (Figure 20.22) has a number of different ports
and connections
6 7 5
4 3 2 1
Figure 20.22 Control Panel CPU Module — Rear Panel
1) Serial Communications Ports 4) Keyboard Port 7) Ethernet Port

2) External Link Ports 5) DVI Port
3) USB Ports 6) Mouse Port
Note — Other ports found on the Control Panel CPU Module are not supported at this time and
should not be used.
1. Serial Communications Ports

The 8 Serial Communications Ports, or Remote Ports, use 9-Pin, DB9 connectors to interface
with external devices using either an RS-232 (TIA/EIA-232) or RS-422 (TIA/EIA-422)
transmission standard.
2. External Link Ports
The 4 External Link Ports use 8-Pin, RJ-45 connectors to interface with the Touchscreen Display,
Auxiliary Control Panels, and Remote AUX Panels.

3. USB Ports
The 2 USB Ports use 4-Pin, USB Type-A connectors to interface with the touchscreen controller
on the Touchscreen Display, as well as other supported USB devices.
4. Keyboard Port
The Keyboard Port uses a purple, 6-Pin, PS/2 connector to interface with a standard keyboard.
5. DVI Port
The DVI Port uses a single 24-Pin, DVI-D connector to interface with the LCD display on the
6. Mouse Port
The Mouse Port uses a green, 6-Pin, PS/2 connector to interface with a standard mouse.
7. Ethernet Port
The Ethernet Port uses a single 8-Pin, RJ-45 connector to interface with a local network, and the
control panel, using a 10/100 BASE-T network.

Remote Aux Panel Pinouts
GPI Port
The DB9 GPI port (Figure 20.23) on the back of the Remote Aux Panel provide a total of 8 GPI
Inputs. The following table (Table 20.25) lists the signal pinouts for the GPI I/O port.
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Figure 20.23 GPI Port — Female
Important — Remote Aux Panel GPI inputs are only intended for connection to “dry contact”,
open collector type transistor outputs, or +5 VDC signals. Application of any negative voltages,
or voltages in excess of +5 VDC, may damage the GPI inputs.

Pin Signal
1 GPI 1
2 GPI 2
3 GPI 3
4 GPI 4
5 GPI 5
6 GPI 6
7 GPI 7
8 GPI 8
9 Ground
Main Port
The RJ-12 Main port (Figure 20.24) on the back of the Remote Aux Panel connects to the Aux
port on the control panel, or the Echo port on the previous aux panel in the daisy-chain. The
following table (Table 20.27) shows the signal pinouts for the Aux ports.
123456
Figure 20.24 Main Port — Female

Table 20.26 Main Port Pinouts
Pin Signal
1 TxA (Tx-)
2 TxB (Tx+)
3 RxA (Rx-)
4 RxB (Rx+)
5 RESET (In)
6 Ground
Echo Port
The RJ-12 Echo port (Figure 20.25) on the back of the Remote Aux Panel connects to the Main
port on the next aux panel in the daisy-chain. The following table (Table 20.26) shows the signal
pinouts for the Aux ports.
123456
Figure 20.25 Echo Port — Female
Table 20.27 Echo Port Pinouts

Pin Signal
1 RxA (Rx-)
2 RxB (Rx+)
3 TxA (Tx-)
4 TxB (Tx+)
5 RESET (Out)
6 Ground

Aux Panel Programming Mode Summary
This section describes the normal, GPI, and diagnostic Remote Aux Panel programming modes.
Table 20.28 Remote Aux Panel Programming Mode Button Assignment

Button/ Programming Mode Programming Mode Power Up
Normal Mode
LED Bus Assignmenta GPI Offset Diagnostics
Display/Modify Access Set GPI to group 1, offset 0 Start Walking
1 Select Crosspoint 1 b
Right to Aux Bus 1 LED Test c
Display/Modify Access Start Button
2 Select Crosspoint 2 Set GPI to group 2, offset 1
Right to Aux Bus 2 LED Test
Display/Modify Access Start DUART
Right to Aux Bus 3 Test d
Display/Modify Access Start EEPROM
Right to Aux Bus 4 Test
Display/Modify Access
Right to Aux Bus 5
Right to Aux Bus 6
Right to Aux Bus 7
Right to Aux Bus 8
9 Select Crosspoint 9 GPI 8 Status (on = shorted)
Right to Aux Bus 9
Right to Aux Bus 10
Right to Aux Bus 11
Right to Aux Bus 12
LED used in
EEPROM test
Select Crosspoint 17 Allow access to Shifted
17/Shift
or Shift Crosspointse
Clean Assignment Programming
GPI Programming Mode
Feed Mode
Progra Send Software Version to Send Software Version to
m panel. panel.
Active Selected aux crosspoint is Flashing (along with Clean
LED used in Program output
Flashing
Feed button) Test Fail Statusf

a. For the first 12 indicators in the column, information applies to the Vision 3 and 4 Assignable Remote Aux
Panels only. The Vision 2 Assignable Remote Aux Panels use the 12 Assignment buttons on the bottom
row of the panel.
b. Indicator show the current group setting. Only one indicator in the first eight buttons can be on at a time. A
panel that has never been programmed my have all the indicators off at first.
c. On the Vision 3 Remote Aux Panel, the indicator is button Shift/30. On the Vision 4, the indicator is button
Shift/35.
d. Requires a special Loop Back Adapter.
e. Does not show special shifted modes, such as Reverse Shift.
f. In the EEPROM and DUART tests, the Active LED indicates that the test failed. If the crosspoint 1 button
is lit, the test passed.

Appendix C. Worksheets
In The Appendix
This appendix provides worksheets that can be used when setting up and using your Vision
switcher.
The following worksheets are provided:
• Video Input Worksheet
• Bus Map Worksheet
• Video Output Worksheet
• Communications Worksheet
• Standard GPI I/O Input Worksheets
• Standard GPI I/O Output Worksheets
• Aux Panel GPI I/O Worksheet
• Custom Control Worksheets
• Conversion Loop Worksheets
• Custom Device Protocol Worksheets
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix C. Worksheets • Eng 21–1

Video Input Worksheet
The video input worksheet (Table 21.2) helps you to identify which video source is connected to
which Input BNC, and what device that source is coming from.
Table 21.1 Sample Video Input Worksheet

Input Source/ Video Serial Device Input Input Tally Alpha Auto Audio
BNC Device Format Port Address Name Type Number Type Key Channel
X1 VTR 1 1080i 50 R1 -- VTR Blue VTR 12 -- -- --
X2 CG Alpha 720p 60 R2 -- CG Alpha Alpha -- Unshaped C15 --
Table 21.2 Video Input Worksheet

Eng 21–2 • Appendix C. Worksheets Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)




Bus Map Worksheet
The bus map worksheet (Table 21.4) helps you to identify which sources you have mapped to
each crosspoint button for a given bus map. Additional bus map worksheets will have to be
created for each bus map.
Table 21.3 Sample Bus Map Worksheet

Source
No Shift Shift 1 Shift 2 Shift 3 Shift 4 Shift 5 Shift 6 Shift 7 Shift 8
Button
1 C06 C06
(VTR-1) (VTR1)
2 Shift 5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3 C07 C02
(CAM-3)
Bus Map: ___________________________
Table 21.4 Bus Map Worksheet

Source Source/
Shift 1 Shift 2 Shift 3 Shift 4 Shift 5 Shift 6 Shift 7 Shift 8
Button Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Source Source/
Button Name
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55

Source Source/
Button Name
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70

Video Output Worksheet
The video output worksheet (Table 21.6) helps you to identify which video signals have been
assigned to which Output BNCs.
Table 21.5 Sample Video Output Worksheet

Locked
Output Locked Locked Output Video
Mix/DSK and Destination
BNC Mix/DSK MultiDSK Type Format
MultiDSK
X1 Program 1080i 50 Master Control
X2 Aux Bus 1:3 720p 60 Monitor 6
Table 21.6 Video Output Worksheet

Locked
MultiDSK
Program Program Program
Mix Preview Program Program
w/o Overlay
Mix Clean 1 Multi Preview Preview w/o
w/o Overlay Overlay
Mix Clean 2 Multi Preview Preview w/o
w/o Overlay Overlay
Mix Clean 3 Multi Clean 5 Clean 1
Mix Clean 4 Multi Clean 6 Clean 2
Clean 3
Clean 4
Clean 5
Clean 6

Table 21.6 Video Output Worksheet
Locked
MultiDSK

Communications Worksheet
The communications worksheet (Table 21.8) helps you to identify which external device is
connected to which serial communications port, or ethernet IP address.
Table 21.7 Sample Communications Worksheet

Port IP Address Device Port on Device
Remote 1B -- Router - Philips Jupiter Port 1
Peripheral 3 192.168.1.5 Audio Mixer - Wheatstone --
Table 21.8 Communications Worksheet


Table 21.8 Communications Worksheet

Standard GPI I/O Input Worksheets
The GPI I/O Input worksheet (Table 21.10) helps you to identify what events or actions have
been assigned to each GPI I/O input.
Table 21.9 Sample GPI I/O Input Worksheet

GPI Input Event Type Event Area Polarity
GPI 1 Auto MLE 1 Low
GPI 6 Cut Fade-to-Black High
Table 21.10 GPI I/O Input Worksheet

GPI Input Event Type Event Area Polarity
GPI 1
GPI 2
GPI 3
GPI 4
GPI 5
GPI 6
GPI 7
GPI 8
GPI 9
GPI 10

Standard GPI I/O Output Worksheets
The GPI I/O Output worksheet (Table 21.12) helps you to identify what events or actions have
been assigned to each GPI I/O input.
Table 21.11 Sample GPI I/O Output Worksheet

GPI Output Output Name Trigger Type Level
GPI 1 PrevStill Edge Low
GPI 6 Roll VTR Level High
Table 21.12 GPI I/O Output Worksheet

GPI Output Event Type Event Area Level
GPI 1
GPI 2
GPI 3
GPI 4
GPI 5
GPI 6
GPI 7
GPI 8
GPI 9
GPI 10

Aux Panel GPI I/O Worksheet
The Aux Panel GPI I/O Input worksheet (Table 21.14) helps you to identify what Remote Aux
Panel events or actions have been assigned to each GPI input.
Table 21.13 Sample Aux Panel GPI I/O Input Worksheet

Aux GPI Group Offset GPI Aux Bus (BNC) Event Area Polarity
GPI 5 1 0 5 Bnk: Aux1 (C03) Cam 4 joystick
Table 21.14 Aux Panel GPI I/O Input Worksheet

GPI 1
GPI 2
GPI 3
GPI 4
GPI 5
GPI 6
GPI 7
GPI 8
GPI 9
GPI 10
GPI 11
GPI 12
GPI 13
GPI 14
GPI 15
GPI 16
GPI 17
GPI 18
GPI 19
GPI 20
GPI 21
GPI 22
GPI 23
GPI 24
GPI 25

GPI 26
GPI 27
GPI 28
GPI 29
GPI 30
GPI 31
GPI 32
GPI 33
GPI 34
GPI 35
GPI 36
GPI 37
GPI 38
GPI 39
GPI 40
GPI 41
GPI 42
GPI 43
GPI 44
GPI 45
GPI 46
GPI 47
GPI 48
GPI 49
GPI 50
GPI 51
GPI 52
GPI 53
GPI 54
GPI 55
GPI 56
GPI 57

GPI 58
GPI 59
GPI 60
GPI 61
GPI 62
GPI 63
GPI 64

Custom Control Worksheets
The custom control worksheet (Table 21.16) helps you to identify which custom controls are
assigned to which button for each custom control bank. Additional worksheets will have to be
created for each bank.
Table 21.15 Sample Custom Control Worksheet

Number Button Name Function Device
5 13 Shot 1 Recall Shot 1 on Camera Telemetrics (Remote 2)
37 -- Opening Play Opening Sequence --
Custom Control Bank Name/Number: ___________________
Table 21.16 Custom Control Worksheet

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Table 21.16 Custom Control Worksheet
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

Conversion Loop Worksheets
The conversion loop worksheet (Table 21.18) helps you to identify each conversion loop from
the switcher, to the Up/Down Converter and back to the switcher.
Table 21.17 Sample Conversion Loop Worksheet

Aux Output Output Output Input Locked to
Bus Video Format Video Format BNC BNC Bus
Bank 1: Bus 1 480i 60 1080i 59.94 I16 H16 --
Bank 1: Bus 2 720p 59.94 1080i 59.94 I15 H15 MLE 3 – BKGD+PST
Table 21.18 Conversion Loop Worksheet

Bank 1: Bus 1
Bank 1: Bus 2
Bank 1: Bus 3
Bank 1: Bus 4
Bank 1: Bus 5
Bank 1: Bus 6
Bank 1: Bus 7
Bank 1: Bus 8
Bank 2: Bus 1
Bank 2: Bus 2
Bank 2: Bus 3
Bank 2: Bus 4
Bank 2: Bus 5
Bank 2: Bus 6
Bank 2: Bus 7
Bank 2: Bus 8
Bank 3: Bus 1
Bank 3: Bus 2
Bank 3: Bus 3
Bank 3: Bus 4
Bank 3: Bus 5
Bank 3: Bus 6
Bank 3: Bus 7
Bank 3: Bus 8
Bank 4: Bus 1

Table 21.18 Conversion Loop Worksheet
Bank 4: Bus 2
Bank 4: Bus 3
Bank 4: Bus 4
Bank 4: Bus 5
Bank 4: Bus 6
Bank 4: Bus 7
Bank 4: Bus 8
Bank 5: Bus 1
Bank 5: Bus 2
Bank 5: Bus 3
Bank 5: Bus 4
Bank 5: Bus 5
Bank 5: Bus 6
Bank 5: Bus 7
Bank 5: Bus 8
Bank 6: Bus 1
Bank 6: Bus 2
Bank 6: Bus 3
Bank 6: Bus 4
Bank 6: Bus 5
Bank 6: Bus 6
Bank 6: Bus 7
Bank 6: Bus 8

Custom Device Protocol Worksheets
The custom device protocol worksheet (Table 21.19) helps you to keep track of the custom
commands you have created for a Custom Device Protocol.
Table 21.19 Custom Device Protocol Worksheet — CUSTOM0

#1 Description Tag
Bytes
#2 Description Tag
Bytes
#3 Description Tag
Bytes
#4 Description Tag
Bytes
#5 Description Tag
Bytes
#6 Description Tag
Bytes
#7 Description Tag
Bytes
#8 Description Tag
Bytes
#9 Description Tag
Bytes
#10 Description Tag
Bytes

Table 21.20 Custom Device Protocol Worksheet — CUSTOM1
#1 Description Tag
Bytes
#2 Description Tag
Bytes
#3 Description Tag
Bytes
#4 Description Tag
Bytes
#5 Description Tag
Bytes
#6 Description Tag
Bytes
#7 Description Tag
Bytes
#8 Description Tag
Bytes
#9 Description Tag
Bytes
#10 Description Tag
Bytes
Operating Tip — Helpful Abbreviations: H=Hex, B=BCD, AH=ASCII Hex, AB=ASCII BCD /
1-8 (digits) or 4,8...32 (bits) /M=Mot, I=Int., /S=Sca, E=Ext, +=Sign

Appendix D. Software Licenses
In This Appendix
The Vision switcher uses software under one or more of the following licence agreements:
• GNU General Public License
• Lesser GNU Public License (LGPL)
• BSD License
• Apache License
• Expat License
• Imlib2
• Jiffy
• Fedora 14 - License Agreement
• PSF LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 2.7.3
Note — As required by the GNU General Public License, and the Lesser GNU Public License
(LGPL), source code can be obtained from Ross Video for at least 3 years. Contact Ross Video
Technical Support for more information.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix D. Software Licenses • Eng 22–1
GNU General Public License
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee
your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library
General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software
or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to
certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that
they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the
software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is
modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributes of a free program will individually obtain patent
licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this
General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any
derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not
restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by
running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such
modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a. You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b. You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be
licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
c. If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most
ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that
you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to
print an announcement.) _
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate
works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms
of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control
the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you also do one of the following:
a. Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b. Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing
source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c. Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for
noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b
above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the
source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
Eng 22–2 • Appendix D. Software Licenses Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code
from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or
its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights
granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on
you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License.
If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section
as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has
the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only
in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”,
you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission.
For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE
THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Lesser GNU Public License (LGPL)
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute
verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to
guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and
other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the
better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software
and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate
to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that
they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink
them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on,
the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be
introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a
free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent
with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies
to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those
libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of
the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General
Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides
other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public
License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To
achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In
this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example,
permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux
operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the
freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a
“work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those
functions and data) to form executable.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either
the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code
for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the
Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the
Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you
may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a. The modified work must itself be a software library.
b. You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
c. You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
d. If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an
argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such
function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore,
Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the
square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate
works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control
the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter
all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version
than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change
in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and
derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and
2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a
“work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the
Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the
Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a
library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing
that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of
the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and
reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must
supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as
well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a. Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work
(which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable
“work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to
recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b. Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already
present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of
the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
c. Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge
no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d. If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from
the same place.
e. Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from
it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with
the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such
a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this
License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is
otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a. Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be
distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b. Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its
derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based
on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or
works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the
rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on
you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License.
If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section
as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims
or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in
reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and
a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be
similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you
have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library
does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for
this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of
software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
BSD License
General
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Apache License
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
“License” shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
“Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
“Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For
the purposes of this definition, “control” means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (i) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
“You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
“Source” form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and
configuration files.
“Object” form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object
code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
“Work” shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is
included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).
“Derivative Works” shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions,
annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall
not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
“Contribution” shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative
Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to
submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, “submitted” means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent
to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking
systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is
conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as “Not a Contribution.”
“Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently
incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge,
royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of,
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such
Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge,
royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have
made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license
applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily
infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with
the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation
against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the
Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory
patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that
Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative
Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object
form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source
form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
d. If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the
attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of
the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along
with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The
contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within
Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices
cannot be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction,
or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise
complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution

intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under
the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such
Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks,
service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and
customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the
NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing,
Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an “AS
IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with
Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including
negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate
and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You
for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages
of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage,
computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses),
even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative
Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support,
warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf
and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You
agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred
by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such
warranty or additional liability.
Expat License
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd. and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
1. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
2. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Imlib2
Copyright (C) 2000 Carsten Haitzler and various contributors (see AUTHORS)
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies of the Software and its Copyright notices. In addition publicly documented
acknowledgment must be given that this software has been used if no source code of this software is made available publicly. Making the source available publicly
means including the source for this software with the distribution, or a method to get this software via some reasonable mechanism (electronic transfer via a network
or media) as well as making an offer to supply the source on request. This Copyright notice serves as an offer to supply the source on request as well. Instead of this,
supplying acknowledgments of use of this software in either Copyright notices, Manuals, Publicity and Marketing documents or any documentation provided with
any product containing this software. This License does not apply to any software that links to the libraries provided by this software (statically or dynamically), but
only to the software provided.
Please see the COPYING-PLAIN for a plain-english explanation of this notice and its intent.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Jiffy
Copyright (C) 2009 Paul Duncan [email protected]
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Fedora 14 - License Agreement
LICENSE AGREEMENT
FEDORA(TM) 14
This agreement governs the download, installation or use of the Software (as defined below) and any updates to the Software, regardless of the delivery mechanism.
The Software is a collective work under U.S. Copyright Law. Subject to the following terms, Red Hat grants to the user ("User") a license to this collective work
pursuant to the GNU General Public License version 2. By downloading, installing or using the Software, User agrees to the terms of this agreement.
1. THE SOFTWARE. Fedora (the "Software") is a modular Linux operating system consisting of hundreds of software components. The end user license agreement
for each component is located in the component's source code. With the exception of certain image files containing the Fedora trademark identified in Section 2
below, the license terms for the components permit User to copy and redistribute the component. With the potential exception of certain firmware files (denoted in
the License field of the RPM packaging), the license terms for the components permit User to copy, modify and redistribute the component, in both source code and
binary code forms. This agreement does not limit User's rights under, or grant User rights that supersede, the license terms of any particular component.
2. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. The Software and each of its components, including the source code, documentation, appearance, structure and
organization are copyrighted by Red Hat and others and are protected under copyright and other laws. Title to the Software and any component, or to any copy,
modification, or merged portion shall remain with the aforementioned, subject to the applicable license. The "Fedora" trademark is a trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
("Red Hat") in the U.S. and other countries and is used by permission. This agreement permits User to distribute unmodified copies of Software using the Fedora
trademark on the condition that User follows Red Hat's trademark guidelines located at http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Legal. User must abide by these trademark
guidelines when distributing the Software, regardless of whether the Software has been modified. If User modifies the Software, then User must replace all images
containing the "Fedora" trademark. Those images are in the fedora-logos package.
3. LIMITED WARRANTY. Except as specifically stated in this agreement or a license for a particular component, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE AND THE COMPONENTS ARE PROVIDED AND LICENSED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Neither the Fedora Project nor Red Hat warrants that the functions contained in the Software will meet User's requirements or that the
operation of the Software will be entirely error free or appear precisely as described in the accompanying documentation. USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS AT USER'S
OWN RISK.
4. LIMITATION OF REMEDIES AND LIABILITY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, FEDORA PROJECT AND RED
HAT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO USER FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS OR LOST
SAVINGS ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF FEDORA PROJECT OR RED HAT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
5. EXPORT CONTROL. As required by U.S. law, User represents and warrants that it: (a) understands that the Software is subject to export controls under the U.S.
Commerce Department's Export Administration Regulations ("EAR"); (b) is not located in a prohibited destination country under the EAR or U.S. sanctions
regulations (currently Cuba, Iran, Iraq, North Korea, Sudan and Syria); (c) will not export, re-export, or transfer the Software to any prohibited destination, entity, or
individual without the necessary export license(s) or authorizations(s) from the U.S. Government; (d) will not use or transfer the Software for use in any sensitive
nuclear, chemical or biological weapons, or missile technology end-uses unless authorized by the U.S. Government by regulation or specific license; (e) understands
and agrees that if it is in the United States and exports or transfers the Software to eligible end users, it will, as required by EAR Section 741.17(e), submit
semi-annual reports to the Commerce Department's Bureau of Industry & Security (BIS), which include the name and address (including country) of each transferee;
and (f) understands that countries other than the United States may restrict the import, use, or export of encryption products and that it shall be solely responsible for
compliance with any such import, use, or export restrictions.
6. GENERAL. If any provision of this agreement is held to be unenforceable, that shall not affect the enforceability of the remaining provisions. This agreement
shall be governed by the laws of the State of North Carolina and of the United States, without regard to any conflict of laws provisions, except that the United Nations
Convention on the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
All rights reserved. "Red Hat" and "Fedora" are trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. "Linux" is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
PSF LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 2.7.3
1. This LICENSE AGREEMENT is between the Python Software Foundation (“PSF”),
and the Individual or Organization (“Licensee”) accessing and otherwise using Python
2.7.3 software in source or binary form and its associated documentation.
2. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, PSF hereby grants
Licensee a nonexclusive, royalty-free, world-wide license to reproduce, analyze, test,
perform and/or display publicly, prepare derivative works, distribute, and otherwise use
Python 2.7.3 alone or in any derivative version, provided, however, that PSF’s License
Agreement and PSF’s notice of copyright, i.e., “Copyright © 2001-2012 Python
Software Foundation; All Rights Reserved” are retained in Python 2.7.3 alone or in any
derivative version prepared by Licensee.
3. In the event Licensee prepares a derivative work that is based on or incorporates Python
2.7.3 or any part thereof, and wants to make the derivative work available to others as
provided herein, then Licensee hereby agrees to include in any such work a brief
summary of the changes made to Python 2.7.3.
4. PSF is making Python 2.7.3 available to Licensee on an “AS IS” basis. PSF MAKES
NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. BY WAY
OF EXAMPLE, BUT NOT LIMITATION, PSF MAKES NO AND DISCLAIMS ANY
REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR
ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THAT THE USE OF PYTHON 2.7.3 WILL NOT
INFRINGE ANY THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
5. PSF SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE OR ANY OTHER USERS OF
PYTHON 2.7.3 FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR LOSS AS A RESULT OF MODIFYING, DISTRIBUTING, OR
OTHERWISE USING PYTHON 2.7.3, OR ANY DERIVATIVE THEREOF, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF.
6. This License Agreement will automatically terminate upon a material breach of its terms
and conditions.
7. Nothing in this License Agreement shall be deemed to create any relationship of agency,
partnership, or joint venture between PSF and Licensee. This License Agreement does
not grant permission to use PSF trademarks or trade name in a trademark sense to
endorse or promote products or services of Licensee, or any third party.
8. By copying, installing or otherwise using Python 2.7.3, Licensee agrees to be bound by
the terms and conditions of this License Agreement.
Appendix E. Custom Device
Protocols
In This Appendix
This appendix provides information for setting up a custom device and programming a serial
protocol to communicate with that device from a Vision peripheral or remote port.
The following topics are discussed in this appendix:
• Custom Devices – Uses and Limitations
• Advanced Topics and Tables
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Appendix E. Custom Device Protocols • Eng 23–1
Custom Devices – Uses and Limitations
Custom Device commands allow you to select the signals that the switcher sends to the custom
device when you select a command on the switcher. For example, when you create a Play DVE
custom control for CUSTOM0, the signal that you coded for that command is sent to the
CUSTOM0 device when that custom control is run.
Operating Tip — You can control devices other than VTRs, Video Servers, Audio Servers or
External DVEs by substituting their commands for those in the Command-tag list of the Custom
Device Menu. Make sure to note these substitution on the Custom Device Protocol Worksheet.
When working with a custom device protocol, the following limitations apply:
• The custom device protocol supports only one way communication. The switcher will not
record or act upon signals being returned from the custom device. Therefore, queries for
Current-time-sense (such as grab timecode), Inpoint, Outpoint and Clip-ID-names are not
supported.
• Some protocol signals may exceed the maximum number of bytes (19) allocated per
command. In cases where a custom control is used, 2 command slots (and 2 tags) can be
used and a custom control programmed to run both of them in immediate succession.
Each user-programmed device supports a maximum of 10 command slots. There may be
other practical problems with the protocol you are trying to reproduce that may render
custom devices unsuitable.
Eng 23–2 • Appendix E. Custom Device Protocols Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Advanced Topics and Tables
Besides strings of constant Hex values (bytes), commands can be programmed with special
characters and with converted parameter values. Examples of the special characters include the
two special values to perform a communications break. The communications break is formed by a
data zero event that extends beyond the normal data bit length permitted in the serial data word
(for example, serial word length of 8-Odd-1Stop bit is 1+8+1+1 = 11 bits long). The commonly
used minimum length for break is 17 bits long or one and a half to two data-words. To implement
a break in custom devices, there needs to be a [Break On], a [Break Off], and an optional delay
in between.
Certain commands pass a parameter to the custom device driver that can be converted into a
string of bytes using a special packed command in place of a single byte. Only one of these
special command lines may appear in any given command slot (since only one parameter is ever
passed). This command line is converted during runtime into the specified one to four bytes of
parameter data, and included at that location in the command string. One command tag that gets a
parameter is the Cue to Clip command. The value passed when a Cue to Clip command is
triggered is the desired cue time as represented in a packed word timecode format. Typically, this
value must then be converted into some representation of packed timecode bytes to be sent to the
external device. The packed command flags are described in the following table. You may want
to use the Panel Diagnostic\RX/TX\Monitor to view the results when using parameters in
commands.
Table 23.1 Packed Command Flags

Special Names Function
[Break On] Force the outputs to data low value (for RS-232 data low is a positive voltage)
[Break Off] Release the outputs from a forced data low

Insert the checksum byte (currently supports only simple 8-bit additive
[Checksum]
checksum)
[Posn X] Not currently supported
[Posn Y] Not currently supported
[Posn Z] Not currently supported
[Param…] Parameter (refer to the Parameter Formatting Flags (Table 23.2))
Table 23.2 Parameter Formatting Flags

Special Names Function
Parameters take as-is and are converted into string of bytes (1-4).
Hex If the parameter is already in a packed BCD format then using Hex
format will preserve the BCD format of the parameter.
ASCII Hex Text representation of the above “Hex” format.
Binary Coded Decimal (each nybble represents 1 digit 0-9). This
BCD command converts a parameter that is in non-BCD format to a BCD
format.
Text representation of the above “BCD” format. This command converts
ASCII BCD a parameter from a non-BCD format to a text representation of the
equivalent BCD format.
Table 23.3 Special Options
Selection Description
Mot Motorola ordering. Most Significant Byte (MSB) first, LSB last.
Int Intel ordering. Least Significant Byte (LSB) first, MSB last.
Scaled (Sca) Re-scales a 12-bit parameter to fit output range.
ASCII Extended Extends up the output to an even number of digits/characters without changing
(Ext) the output range.
Signed (Sign) Internal use — sign conversion.
Table 23.4 BCD Width Descriptions

BCD Width Motorola Description
1 Digit 1 byte of 1 digit, [00] to max [09]
2 Digits 1 bytes of 2 packed digits each, [00] to max [99]
3 Digits 1 bytes of 2 packed digits and 1 byte of 1 digit, [00][00] to max[09][99]
4 Digits 2 bytes of 2 packed digits each, [00][00] to max[99][99]
5 Digits 2 bytes of 2 packed digits and 1 byte of 1 digit, max [09][99][99]
6 Digits 3 bytes of 2 packed digits each, max [99][99][99]
7 Digits 3 bytes of 2 packed digits and 1 byte of 1 digit, max [09][99][99][99]
8 Digits 4 bytes of 2 packed digits each, max [99][99][99][99]
Table 23.5 Hexidecimal Width Description

Hex Width Description
4 Bits [00] to [0F]
8 Bits [00] to [FF]
12 Bits [00][00] to [0F][FF] (or Intel [FF][0F])
16 Bits [00][00] to [FF][FF]
24 Bits [00][00][00] to [FF][FF][FF]
32 Bits [00][00][00][00] to [FF][FF][FF][FF]
Table 23.6 Decimal to Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion Table
Decimal Hex ASCII Decimal Hex ASCII Decimal Hex ASCII Decimal Hex Decimal Hex Decimal Hex
0 00 43 2B + 86 56 V 129 81 172 AC 215 D7
1 01 44 2C , 87 57 W 130 82 173 AD 216 D8
2 02 45 2D - 88 58 X 131 83 174 AE 217 D9
3 03 46 2E . 89 59 Y 132 84 175 AF 218 DA
4 04 47 2F / 90 5A Z 133 85 176 B0 219 DB
5 05 48 30 0 91 5B [ 134 86 177 B1 220 DC
6 06 49 31 1 92 5C \ 135 87 178 B2 221 DD
7 07 50 32 2 93 5D ] 136 88 179 B3 222 DE
8 08 51 33 3 94 5E ^ 137 89 180 B4 223 DF
9 09 52 34 4 95 5F _ 138 8A 181 B5 224 E0
10 0A 53 35 5 96 60 ` 139 8B 182 B6 225 E1
11 0B 54 36 6 97 61 a 140 8C 183 B7 226 E2
12 0C 55 37 7 98 62 b 141 8D 184 B8 227 E3
13 0D 56 38 8 99 63 c 142 8E 185 B9 228 E4
14 0E 57 39 9 100 64 d 143 8F 186 BA 229 E5
15 0F 58 3A : 101 65 e 144 90 187 BB 230 E6
16 10 59 3B ; 102 66 f 145 91 188 BC 231 E7
17 11 60 3C < 103 67 g 146 92 189 BD 232 E8
18 12 61 3D = 104 68 h 147 93 190 BE 233 E9
19 13 62 3E > 105 69 i 148 94 191 BF 234 EA
20 14 63 3F ? 106 6A j 149 95 192 C0 235 EB
21 15 64 40 @ 107 6B k 150 96 193 C1 236 EC
22 16 65 41 A 108 6C l 151 97 194 C2 237 ED
23 17 66 42 B 109 6D m 152 98 195 C3 238 EE
24 18 67 43 C 110 6E n 153 99 196 C4 239 EF
25 19 68 44 D 111 6F o 154 9A 197 C5 240 F0
26 1A 69 45 E 112 70 p 155 9B 198 C6 241 F1
27 1B 70 46 F 113 71 q 156 9C 199 C7 242 F2
28 1C 71 47 G 114 72 r 157 9D 200 C8 243 F3
29 1D 72 48 H 115 73 s 158 9E 201 C9 244 F4
30 1E 73 49 I 116 74 t 159 9F 202 CA 245 F5
31 1F 74 4A J 117 75 u 160 A0 203 CB 246 F6
32 20 space 75 4B K 118 76 v 161 A1 204 CC 247 F7
33 21 ! 76 4C L 119 77 w 162 A2 205 CD 248 F8
34 22 " 77 4D M 120 78 x 163 A3 206 CE 249 F9
35 23 # 78 4E N 121 79 y 164 A4 207 CF 250 FA
36 24 $ 79 4F O 122 7A z 165 A5 208 D0 251 FB
37 25 % 80 50 P 123 7B { 166 A6 209 D1 252 FC
38 26 & 81 51 Q 124 7C | 167 A7 210 D2 253 FD
39 27 ' 82 52 R 125 7D } 168 A8 211 D3 254 FE
40 28 ( 83 53 S 126 7E ~ 169 A9 212 D4 255 FF
41 29 ) 84 54 T 127 7F 170 AA 213 D5
42 2A * 85 55 U 128 80 171 AB 214 D6
Note — 7-bit printable ASCII range from 32 to 126 decimal. The Custom device menus
represent text values outside that range with a period (.).
Glossary of Terms
Active Video Lines — All video lines not occurring in the vertical blanking interval. The portion
of the video signal that contains picture information.
Aspect Ratio — The numerical ratio of picture width to height, for example, 4:3 or 16:9.
Auto Transition — An automatic transition in which the manual movement of the fader handle
is simulated electronically. The transition starts when the AUTO TRANS button is pressed and
takes place over a pre-selected time period, measured in frames.
Border — Effects created around the edges of a pattern or on a keyer. If an optional Dual Border
Generator Card is installed, several border, shadow, and outline effects are available on that keyer
as well.
Border Generator — Circuitry that generates various border effects on keys created by the
switcher.
Chroma Key — An effect in which video from one source replaces video of a specific hue in a
second video source. The blue and green hues are most commonly used for chroma keying.
Chrominance — The “depth” or saturation of a color. The three characteristics of a TV color
signal are chrominance, luminance, and hue.
Cut — An instantaneous switch from one video signal to another.
Dissolve — A transition from one video signal to another in which one signal is faded down,
while the other is simultaneously faded up. The term “mix” is often used interchangeably with
“dissolve”.
Downstream Keyer (DSK) — A keyer that places a key “downstream” of the MLE effects
system output. This “top level” effect usually consists of a character generator title.
External Key — A video input (non-primary video) used to produce a key effect. Examples of
external key sources are character generators and cameras.
Fade-to-Black — A controlled change of the on-air picture signal level down to black level.
Field — One half of a complete picture (or frame) interval containing all of the odd, or all of the
even, lines in interlaced scanning. One scan of a TV screen is called a “field”; two fields are
required to make a complete picture (which is a “frame”).
Field Frequency — The rate at which one complete field is scanned, approximately 50 times per
second in 625 video, or 60 times per second in 525 video.
Frame — One complete picture consisting of two fields of interlaced scanning lines.
GPI — An abbreviation for General Purpose Interface, a device which typically allows switcher
automatic transition functions to be controlled remotely.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Glossary of Terms • GT–1

Hue — The characteristic of a color signal that determines whether the color is red, yellow,
green, blue, purple, etc. (the three characteristics of a TV color signal are chrominance,
luminance, and hue). White, black, and gray are not considered hues.
Internal Key — The use of a primary input to produce a key effect.
Key — An effect produced by “cutting a hole” in the background video, then filling the hole with
video or matte from another source. Key source video cuts the hole, key fill video fills the hole.
The video signal used for cut and fill can come from the same, or separate, sources.
Key Fill — A video input which is timed to “fill the hole” provided by the key source video. An
example of key fill is the video output of a character generator.
Key Invert — An effect that reverses the polarity of the key source so that the holes in the
background are cut by dark areas of the key source instead of bright areas. The KEY INV button
selects this effect.
Key Mask — A keying technique in which a pattern is combined with the key source to block out
unwanted portions of the key source.
Key Source — The video signal which “cuts a hole” in the background video to make a key
effect possible. Also called “Key Video”. In practice, this signal controls when a video mixer
circuit will switch from background to key fill video.
Key Video — See Key Source.
Linear Keys — Linear keys make it possible to fully specify the transparency of a key from
opaque, through transparent, to fully off. The transparency is specified by the key signal (also
known as the “hole cutter” or “alpha channel”) that is associated with the key fill. A keyer
capable of a linear key converts the key signal voltage directly to the transparency effect on the
screen. The KEY MEM button allows the user to store the Clip and Gain settings required to
match the incoming key signal to your requirements.
Line Frequency — The number of horizontal scans per second. For 525 line 60 Hz systems, this
is approximately 15734 scans per second.
Luminance Key — An effect in which video from one source is replaced by video that exceeds a
set level in a second video source.
Mask — See Key Mask.
Matte — A solid color signal that is generated by the switcher and can be adjusted for hue,
saturation, and luminance levels.
Matte Key — A key effect in which the fill video is a matte, provided by one of the internal
matte generators.
Memory — The memory feature provides storage and recall of complete switcher setups.
MIX — See Dissolve.
MLE — An abbreviation for multi-level effects.
PGM Output — The on-air video output of the system.
Primary Input — Video sources selected by the control panel push-buttons for the crosspoint
buses. These buses are normally labelled “KEY”, “PGM”, and “PST”.
PV Output — A switcher output that shows the scene that will go on-air when the next automatic
or manual transition takes place.
Self Key — A key effect in which the same video signal serves as both the key signal and key fill.
Soft Edge — A pattern edge effect produced by mixing key source and key fill signals in such a
way that the edge of the pattern is not sharp.
Split Screen — An effect in which a wipe pattern provides the key source signal. This is known
as a “preset pattern” key.
GT–2 • Glossary of Terms Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Tally — An indicator which illuminates when the associated button, or control, is selected or is
on-air.
Termination — A means of closing a circuit by connecting a resistive load to it. In video
systems, a termination is typically a 75 ohm resistive load.
Transition — A controlled change from one video input to another video input or black. The
change can occur through a wipe, cut, dissolve or “DVE Send” effect.
Transition Preview — A transition seen only on the preview monitor. It may be observed and
adjusted without disturbing the program or “on-air” output.
Video — The electrical signal produced by a camera, character generator or other image source.
The signal amplitude varies in relation to the tonal scale from black to white presented at the
source. White produces the highest amplitude; black produces the lowest signal amplitude.
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Glossary of Terms • GT–3

GT–4 • Glossary of Terms Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)
Index Arm, Mounting (Touchscreen) ...................... Eng 3-9
Assign
BKGDCUT button ................................ Eng 7-15
BKGDTRNS button .............................. Eng 7-15
black ...................................................... Eng 7-14
Bus Hold button .................................... Eng 7-15
Bus Maps .............................................. Eng 7-19
Bus Maps to Multiple Buses ................. Eng 7-20
color background .................................. Eng 7-14
global-store button ................................ Eng 7-14
Symbols K+B CUT button .................................. Eng 7-15
...................................................................... Eng 11-7 K+B TRNS button ................................ Eng 7-15
Key Cut button ...................................... Eng 7-15
Numerics Key Trans button .................................. Eng 7-15
1080i explained ............................................ Eng 2-31 MLE Re-entry ....................................... Eng 7-14
4400AR-061 ................................................. Eng 2-12 MLE-store button .................................. Eng 7-14
4400AR-062 ................................................. Eng 2-12 MV button ............................................. Eng 7-15
4800AR-001 ................................................. Eng 2-12 shift ....................................................... Eng 7-14
4800AR-020 ................................................. Eng 2-13 Assign Audio Custom Controls ................. Eng 10-16
4800AR-040 ................................................. Eng 2-13 Assign Channel Custom Control ................ Eng 10-19
4800AR-041 ................................................. Eng 2-13 Assign Fader Custom Controls .................. Eng 10-15
4800AR-043 ................................................. Eng 2-13 Assign MLE, Personality setting ................. Eng 11-3
4800AR-047 ................................................. Eng 2-13 Assign MultiViewer ..................................... Eng 8-14
4800AR-060A .............................................. Eng 2-12 Assigning Crosspoint Colors ..................... Eng 11-19
4800AR-060B .............................................. Eng 2-12 Assigning Individual Bus Maps ................... Eng 7-19
4800AR-060C .............................................. Eng 2-12 At Black Extra Option .................................. Eng 9-29
4800AR-061A .............................................. Eng 2-12 Attach Custom Control to Button .............. Eng 10-25
4800AR-061B .............................................. Eng 2-12 Post-Attach .......................................... Eng 10-26
4800AR-061C .............................................. Eng 2-12 Pre-Attach ........................................... Eng 10-26
4800AR-064 ................................................. Eng 2-12 Replace ................................................ Eng 10-26
4800AR-065 ................................................. Eng 2-12 Audio All Off Custom Controls ................. Eng 10-16
4800AR-066 ................................................. Eng 2-12 Audio channel assignment ........................... Eng 7-12
4800AR-067 ................................................. Eng 2-12 Audio Channel Off Custom Controls ......... Eng 10-16
4-Keyers option .............................................. Eng 2-2 Audio Channel On Custom Controls ......... Eng 10-16
720p explained ............................................. Eng 2-31 Audio Control Module .............. Eng 12-25, Eng 15-6
Map ....................................................... Eng 15-6
A Mnemonics ............................................ Eng 15-6
Abbreviations ................................................. Eng 1-5 Row Mapping ....................................... Eng 17-8
AC Power Ports ....................... Eng 20-19, Eng 20-23 Audio Cut Only, Personality setting ............ Eng 11-3
Act MLE Trans (Automation) Custom Control ... Eng Audio Fade Rate ......................................... Eng 12-24
10-19 Audio Fader Test ........................................ Eng 17-22
A-D, definition ............................................... Eng 1-5 Audio Memory Custom Controls ............... Eng 10-16
Adjusting, Touchscreen Display .................... Eng 5-4 Audio Mixers
AFV Hold Custom Controls ...................... Eng 10-16 Audio Fade Rate ................................. Eng 12-24
AFV Off Custom Controls ......................... Eng 10-16 channel and group setup ..................... Eng 12-21
AFV On Custom Controls .......................... Eng 10-16 channel assignment ............................... Eng 7-12
Air Filter Cleaning ..................................... Eng 18-15 Custom Controls
Alpha banks .............................................. Eng 10-8
Input BNC ............................................... Eng 7-6 PGM Audio Level/Duration ........ Eng 10-17
Input BNC Type ...................................... Eng 7-4 default levels ....................................... Eng 12-22
shaped ..................................................... Eng 7-7 Groups ................................................. Eng 12-23
unshaped ................................................. Eng 7-6 source assignment ............................... Eng 12-21
Ancillary Data .............................................. Eng 8-11 Audio Mute Off Custom Controls ............. Eng 10-16
Apache License ............................................ Eng 22-8 Audio Mute On Custom Controls .............. Eng 10-16
Architecture Audio Remote Control Setup ..................... Eng 12-21
CPU ....................................................... Eng 2-36 Audio Server Control option ........................ Eng 6-12
system ..................................................... Eng 2-1 Audio Server, Input Type, see VTR
Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Index • IX–1

Audio Servers B
custom control functions .......................Eng 10-2 Back Button ....................................................Eng 5-6
Audio Source Assignment ..........................Eng 12-21 Back-to-Back Extra Option ..........................Eng 9-26
Audio Transitions Personality setting ..........Eng 11-3 Bank 0 Lit, Personality setting .....................Eng 11-4
Auto Follow ................................................Eng 12-39 Bank Custom Control Shortcut ..................Eng 10-34
Bus Follow ..........................................Eng 12-41 Banks
Custom Control Commands ................Eng 12-40 audio versus normal ..............................Eng 10-8
Editor Commands ................................Eng 12-40 custom control functions ......Eng 10-2, Eng 10-7
Keyer Follow .......................................Eng 12-42 Select Memory Bank event ...................Eng 10-3
Memory Recall ....................................Eng 12-43 setup, custom control ............................Eng 10-7
MLE Follow ........................................Eng 12-40 types ......................................................Eng 10-8
Panel Commands .................................Eng 12-40 Base Extra Option ........................................Eng 9-29
Transition Module ...............................Eng 12-42 Basics
Auto Key ........................................................Eng 7-3 menu system ............................................Eng 5-5
Global-Store setup ...................................Eng 7-8 Switcher ...................................................Eng 2-1
MLE-Store setup .....................................Eng 7-8 BKGD 1, 2 ....................................................Eng 7-14
Auto Key Alpha, Personality setting ............Eng 11-3 BKGD Double-Press, Personality setting ....Eng 11-4
Auto Recall, Personality setting ...................Eng 11-3 BKGDCUT, button ......................................Eng 7-15
Auto Remove Key ........................................Eng 11-4 BKGDTRNS, button ....................................Eng 7-15
Auto Select Keys ............................................Eng 7-3 BLACK ........................................................Eng 7-14
setup ........................................................Eng 7-8 BNC
Automated Testing Tool, see Checksums configuration ...........................................Eng 8-1
Aux Buses Output ......................................................Eng 8-2
Aux Monitor Output BNCs .....................Eng 8-3 output verification ...................................Eng 8-5
naming ...................................................Eng 12-2 setup types ...............................................Eng 8-2
Output BNCs ...........................................Eng 8-3 type menu ................................................Eng 8-2
Output Menu ...........................................Eng 8-5 Boards
Quick Navigation .................Eng 5-10, Eng 5-11 frame location ........................................Eng 4-18
Router Follow ........................................Eng 12-3 front (frame) ..........................................Eng 4-21
Selecting ................................................Eng 12-2 labelling .................................................Eng 2-37
Aux Mix/Key setup ......................................Eng 8-26 Power Distribution ................................Eng 2-11
Aux Mix/Pre Cabling and Setup ..................Eng 8-28 rear (frame) ............................................Eng 4-22
Aux Mix/Pre Setup .......................................Eng 8-27 Bottom MLE
Aux Monitor Output BNCs ............................Eng 8-3 reference description ...............................Eng 1-4
Aux Panel GPI I/O Brightness, Setting Display ........................Eng 11-23
CCU joystick control ...........................Eng 14-13 BSD License .................................................Eng 22-7
Worksheet ...........................................Eng 21-15 BSS4
Aux Ports ....................................................Eng 20-22 cabling ...................................................Eng 9-13
Aux, definition ................................................Eng 1-5 communications settings .......................Eng 9-18
Auxiliary Control Panels ..............................Eng 14-1 programming .........................................Eng 9-17
External Row Bus Address Extra Option ............................Eng 9-25
com setup .......................................Eng 14-8 Bus Disabling, Conversion Loops ................Eng 16-5
GPIs .....................................................Eng 14-11 Bus Hold Clear, Personality setting .............Eng 11-5
Internal Row Bus Hold, button ...........................................Eng 7-15
com setup .......................................Eng 14-8 Bus Maps ......................................................Eng 7-13
overview ................................................Eng 14-2 Assigning ...............................................Eng 7-19
Ports individual bus .................................Eng 7-19
Echo .............................................Eng 20-28 multiple buses ................................Eng 7-20
GPI ...............................................Eng 20-27 copying ..................................................Eng 7-16
Main .............................................Eng 20-27 Defaulting ............................................Eng 12-28
Auxiliary Panels defaulting ...............................................Eng 7-17
Remote Aux Panels ...............................Eng 14-3 editing ....................................................Eng 7-13
AuxKeys naming ...................................................Eng 7-21
option .....................................................Eng 8-26 Recalling individual ............................Eng 13-12
setup ......................................................Eng 8-26 Registers ................................................Eng 13-3
AuxKeys option ............................................Eng 6-12 Shift .......................................................Eng 7-16
Storing individual ..................................Eng 13-7
IX–2 • Index Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Worksheet ............................................. Eng 21-6 Circuit Boards
Buses installing (frame) ................................... Eng 4-18
Swap Program and Preset ................... Eng 11-14 labelling ................................................ Eng 2-37
Button Cap Assembly, removing ................. Eng 3-17 removing (frame) .................................. Eng 4-18
Button Insert Films ....................................... Eng 3-17 Clean Feed ...................................................... Eng 8-7
installing ................................................ Eng 3-17 Layer Mode ............................................. Eng 8-7
size ........................................................ Eng 3-17 MLE ........................................................ Eng 8-3
specifications ........................................ Eng 3-17 output BNC ............................................. Eng 8-3
Button mapping, default ............................... Eng 3-13 setup ........................................................ Eng 8-7
Buttons Clean Feed Setup ........................................... Eng 8-7
Back ........................................................ Eng 5-6 Cleaning, Air Filter .................................... Eng 18-15
Bus Map ................................................ Eng 7-13 Clear Bus Hold ............................................. Eng 11-5
Copy Down ............................................. Eng 5-6 ClearAllFB Custom Control ...................... Eng 10-21
Copy Up .................................................. Eng 5-6 ClearFB Custom Control ........ Eng 10-20, Eng 10-21
Forward ................................................... Eng 5-6 Clip and Gain, Keys ..................................... Eng 7-26
programming a custom control button Eng 10-10 Clip ID
Swap ........................................................ Eng 5-6 setup .................................................... Eng 12-18
Clip Inpoint/Outpoint, video servers .......... Eng 12-18
C Clip List Extra Option .................................. Eng 9-30
Cables Clip Lists Extra Option (Automation) ......... Eng 9-26
control (Touchscreen) ............................. Eng 3-9 Clip Registers ............................ Eng 12-17, Eng 13-2
DVI ......................................................... Eng 3-9 timecode, grab ..................................... Eng 12-20
Frame/Control Panel ............................. Eng 3-11 Clip Setup ................................................... Eng 12-17
power (Touchscreen) ............................ Eng 3-20 Clips
USB (Touchscreen) ................................. Eng 3-9 Defaulting ........................................... Eng 12-28
Cabling Keypad Clip IDs Entry ......................... Eng 11-9
Aux Mix/Pre ......................................... Eng 8-28 Keypad DVE Num Entry ...................... Eng 11-9
BSS4 ..................................................... Eng 9-13 Keypad Still Num Entry ....................... Eng 11-9
DeviceMaster ........................................ Eng 9-14 Keypad Wipe Num Entry ................... Eng 11-10
frame to control panel ........................... Eng 3-11 Cmd Queuing Extra Option ......................... Eng 9-30
NetExp .................................................. Eng 9-14 CmdDelay Extra Option ............................... Eng 9-27
remote aux panels ................................. Eng 14-7 Color Correction .......................................... Eng 6-13
Calibration .................................................... Eng 17-1 Color Scheme Quick Navigation ................. Eng 5-10
Fader ..................................................... Eng 17-3 Color Schemes
Positioner .............................................. Eng 17-4 All MLEs the Same ............................. Eng 11-17
Touchscreen .......................................... Eng 17-4 editing buttons ..................................... Eng 11-17
Call Custom Control event ........................... Eng 10-3 editing mnemonics .............................. Eng 11-21
Cam All Stop Custom Controls ................. Eng 10-20 Loading ............................................... Eng 11-24
Camera File User Colors ......................................... Eng 11-18
Defaulting ........................................... Eng 12-28 Custom Control Buttons .............. Eng 11-18
Camera Grab Time, Personality setting ....... Eng 11-4 Re-entry ....................................... Eng 11-18
Capture, screen ............................................. Eng 5-19 Selected Buttons .......................... Eng 11-18
Card, System Information Page ..................... Eng 6-7 Selected Xpt ................................. Eng 11-18
Carrier, Squeeze & Tease Board . Eng 2-27, Eng 2-28 Xpt Colors .................................... Eng 11-19
CC/Macro Attachments ............. Eng 13-5, Eng 13-10 Communication Errors ............................... Eng 17-14
Registers ................................................ Eng 13-3 Communication Port Monitor .................... Eng 17-36
CC/Macro Attachments, Personality setting Eng 11-4 Data File .............................................. Eng 17-37
Center Communication Ports ................................... Eng 2-15
Preview Overlay Setup ....................... Eng 12-34 Device Drivers ........................................ Eng 9-2
CG, definition ................................................. Eng 1-5 Ethernet ................................................... Eng 9-3
Char Gen, Input BNC Type ........................... Eng 7-5 Serial, Frame ........................................... Eng 9-2
Character Generators .................................... Eng 6-12 Serial, Panel ............................................ Eng 9-2
Check, Keys ................................................. Eng 7-25 Communication Status ............................... Eng 17-14
Checksum Custom Control ........................ Eng 17-32 Communications ............................................ Eng 9-1
short .................................................... Eng 17-32 Extra Options ........................................ Eng 9-25
using .................................................... Eng 17-34 Setup ....................................................... Eng 9-7
Choose Clip ID ........................................... Eng 12-18 Com Settings ................... Eng 9-8, Eng 9-11

Com Type ........................Eng 9-8, Eng 9-11 displays ..................................................Eng 5-16
RS-232 ......................................Eng 9-8 brightness .....................................Eng 11-23
RS-422 ......................................Eng 9-8 installation ...............................................Eng 3-7
RS-422 Null ..............................Eng 9-8 Maintenance
TCP/IP ....................................Eng 9-11 Hard Drive replacement ...............Eng 18-16
UDP/IP ....................................Eng 9-11 mapping .................................................Eng 17-5
Device .............................Eng 9-7, Eng 9-10 Quick Module Configure ...............Eng 17-5
VTR Preroll Eng 9-8, Eng 9-9, Eng 9-11 Single Module Configure ...............Eng 17-6
ethernet communications ...............Eng 9-10 overview ..................................................Eng 2-2
Extra Options ...................................Eng 9-9 port ........................................................Eng 2-16
FlexDevice .......................................Eng 9-4 power connection ..................................Eng 3-19
Mon Wall Settings ...........................Eng 9-9 power fail indicators ..............................Eng 3-21
serial communications .....................Eng 9-7 reference description ...............................Eng 1-4
Type ................................Eng 9-7, Eng 9-10 restart .....................................................Eng 4-24
external link port .......................Eng 9-7 Touchscreen installation ..........................Eng 3-8
network port ............................Eng 9-10 tub installation (console-top) ...................Eng 3-7
peripheral port ..........Eng 9-7, Eng 9-10 tub installation (flush mounted) ..............Eng 3-8
remote port ...............Eng 9-7, Eng 9-10 tub installation (in-console) .....................Eng 3-7
Communications connections Vision 1 ...................................................Eng 2-6
remote aux panels ..................................Eng 14-6 Vision 1M ................................................Eng 2-5
Communications Settings Vision 2 ...................................................Eng 2-5
BSS4 ......................................................Eng 9-18 Vision 2M ................................................Eng 2-4
NetExp ...................................................Eng 9-18 Vision 2X ................................................Eng 2-3
Communications Worksheet ......................Eng 21-11 Vision 3 ...................................................Eng 2-2
Complete Status ..........................................Eng 17-10 Vision 3M ................................................Eng 2-4
Completing Setup .........................................Eng 12-1 Vision 4 ...................................................Eng 2-2
Composite Sync reference signal .................Eng 4-12 Control Panel Diagnostics ..........................Eng 17-18
Comtrol DeviceMaster Burn Mode ..........................................Eng 17-27
programming .........................................Eng 9-17 Button Color Test ................................Eng 17-18
Configuration Button Function Test ...........................Eng 17-18
BNC .........................................................Eng 8-1 Display Test ........................................Eng 17-20
control panel DIP ................................Eng 20-25 Fader Test ............................................Eng 17-19
frame DIP .............................Eng 20-8, Eng 20-9 Knob Test ............................................Eng 17-21
Configuring video inputs barrier ...........................................Eng 17-21
types ........................................................Eng 7-4 boundary ......................................Eng 17-21
Connecting to the GPI I/O port ..................Eng 12-11 button ...........................................Eng 17-21
Connections Module Memory Test ..........................Eng 17-22
input .......................................................Eng 3-13 PCH
output .....................................................Eng 3-15 LVDS Test ...................................Eng 17-23
Connector Types PCI Bridge Test ............................Eng 17-25
control panel ........................................Eng 20-13 Tally Test .....................................Eng 17-25
frame ...................................................Eng 20-12 Tx/Rx Test ...................................Eng 17-22
Console-Top, control panel installation .........Eng 3-7 Positioner Test .....................................Eng 17-20
Control Cable ...............................................Eng 3-11 SBC Tx/Rx Test ..................................Eng 17-25
Control cable (Touchscreen) ..........................Eng 3-9 Stuck Button Test ................................Eng 17-19
Control Panel Touchscreen
Auto Follow ........................................Eng 12-40 Draw Test .....................................Eng 17-26
boards ......................................................Eng 6-9 Pattern Test ..................................Eng 17-26
buttons .....................................................Eng 1-3 Control Panel Ports
color scheme AC power ............................................Eng 20-23
editing buttons ..............................Eng 11-17 aux .......................................................Eng 20-22
editing mnemonics .......................Eng 11-21 external link .........................................Eng 20-21
connecting to frame ...............................Eng 3-11 remote ..................................................Eng 20-21
connector Types ..................................Eng 20-13 Control Panel Power Supply ......................Eng 18-10
custom control functions .......................Eng 10-2 replacing ................................................Eng 18-4
Dimensions ............................................Eng 20-6 Control Panel Power Supply Failure ............Eng 18-2
dimensions .............................................Eng 20-6 troubleshooting .....................Eng 18-2, Eng 18-3

Conventions, documentation .......................... Eng 1-3 Audio Memory .................................... Eng 10-16
Conversion Loop Worksheet ..................... Eng 21-20 Audio Mute Off .................................. Eng 10-16
Conversion Loops ........................................ Eng 16-2 Audio Mute On ................................... Eng 10-16
activation ............................................... Eng 16-2 audio server clips .................................. Eng 10-2
Bus Disabling ........................................ Eng 16-5 Auto Follow ........................................ Eng 12-40
delay ...................................................... Eng 16-3 Automation
Include Aux ........................................... Eng 16-2 Act MLE Trans ............................ Eng 10-19
Locking to Buses .................................. Eng 16-6 Keys Off Air ................................ Eng 10-19
setup ...................................................... Eng 16-2 bank functions ....................................... Eng 10-2
switcher setup ....................................... Eng 16-5 bank naming .......................................... Eng 10-8
video formats ........................................ Eng 16-3 bank types ............................................. Eng 10-8
Converter Extra Option ................................ Eng 9-25 banks ..................................................... Eng 10-7
Converter Locking, Conversion Loops ........ Eng 16-6 banks setup ............................................ Eng 10-7
Cooling Fan Failure, Frame ......................... Eng 18-8 Button Color ....................................... Eng 11-18
Copy Bus Maps ............................................ Eng 7-16 Cam All Stop ...................................... Eng 10-20
Copy Down Button ........................................ Eng 5-6 Checksums .......................................... Eng 17-32
Copy Up Button ............................................. Eng 5-6 short ............................................. Eng 17-32
Copying Custom Controls .......................... Eng 10-32 using ............................................. Eng 17-34
Copying Shot Box Pages .............................. Eng 15-4 ClearAllFB .......................................... Eng 10-21
Count Down Custom Control .................... Eng 10-22 ClearFB ............................ Eng 10-20, Eng 10-21
Count Down/Up Custom Control .............. Eng 10-22 control panel functions ....... Eng 10-2, Eng 10-10
Count Up Custom Control ......................... Eng 10-22 copying ................................................ Eng 10-32
CPU Count Down ........................................ Eng 10-22
architecture ............................................ Eng 2-36 Count Down/Up .................................. Eng 10-22
structure ................................................ Eng 2-35 Count Up ............................................. Eng 10-22
Creating Custom Controls, tips .................... Eng 10-2 custom control bus ................................ Eng 10-5
Creating Shot Box Pages .............................. Eng 15-3 Cut Keys ............................................. Eng 10-22
Crosspoint Board .......................................... Eng 2-13 Defaulting ........................................... Eng 12-28
Crosspoint Bus Map ..................................... Eng 7-13 defaulting variables ............................. Eng 12-29
Crosspoint Colors ....................................... Eng 11-19 Deleting ............................................... Eng 10-33
Crosspoint Matrix, overview ........................ Eng 2-20 Deselect Cam ...................................... Eng 10-20
Crosspoints Device Transport Commands ............. Eng 10-36
Button Color ....................................... Eng 11-19 Down ................................................... Eng 10-21
Cue & Pause Extra Option ........................... Eng 9-30 Editing ................................................. Eng 10-29
Currently used storage capacity ..................... Eng 6-8 delete event .................................. Eng 10-31
CustCtrl MLE Extra Option ......................... Eng 9-27 insert event, control panel ............ Eng 10-30
Custom Control Attachments insert special event ....................... Eng 10-31
Defaulting ........................................... Eng 12-28 modify event ................................ Eng 10-30
Custom Control Module Run From Here ............................ Eng 10-30
Row Mapping ....................................... Eng 17-7 Run Single Event ......................... Eng 10-30
Custom Control Shot Box Modules ............. Eng 15-1 Execute Macro (CG) ........................... Eng 10-17
setup ...................................................... Eng 15-2 Execute Move ..................................... Eng 10-20
Custom Control Worksheet ........................ Eng 21-18 External DVE functions ........................ Eng 10-2
Custom Controls ...... Eng 10-1, Eng 13-5, Eng 13-10 Fast Forward ....................................... Eng 10-21
AFV Hold ........................................... Eng 10-16 Fire Salvo ............................................ Eng 10-21
AFV Off .............................................. Eng 10-16 Focus ................................................... Eng 10-21
AFV On ............................................... Eng 10-16 Frame Advance ................ Eng 10-18, Eng 10-21
Assign Audio ...................................... Eng 10-16 Frame Reverse ................. Eng 10-18, Eng 10-21
Assign Channel ................................... Eng 10-19 function naming .................................... Eng 10-8
Assign Fader ....................................... Eng 10-15 Go To Clip .......................................... Eng 10-21
attach to panel buttons ........................ Eng 10-25 Go To Cut ........................................... Eng 10-17
Post-Attach .................................. Eng 10-26 Go To End ........................................... Eng 10-18
Pre-Attach .................................... Eng 10-26 Go To Menu ........................................ Eng 10-22
Replace ........................................ Eng 10-26 Go To Start .......................................... Eng 10-18
Audio All Off ...................................... Eng 10-16 GPI ...................................................... Eng 10-21
Audio Channel Off .............................. Eng 10-16 GPI (CG) ............................................. Eng 10-17
Audio Channel On .............................. Eng 10-16 Grab Positioner ................................... Eng 10-20

Hold CC ..............................................Eng 10-23 Rewind ................................................Eng 10-22
Hold For Group ...................................Eng 10-23 Rewind DVE .......................................Eng 10-18
Hold For Run .......................................Eng 10-23 Run Custom Control event ....................Eng 10-3
In Flag Reset .......................................Eng 10-21 Run Held .............................................Eng 10-23
In Recall ..............................................Eng 10-21 Run Held Group ..................................Eng 10-23
Key Frame Adv ...................................Eng 10-18 Run Sequence ......................................Eng 10-24
Key Frame Rev ...................................Eng 10-18 Safe Title .............................................Eng 10-23
Load (CG) ........................Eng 10-17, Eng 10-18 Select Memory Bank event ...................Eng 10-3
Load Layout ........................................Eng 10-19 Seq Next ..............................................Eng 10-18
Loop CC ..............................................Eng 10-23 Seq Prev ..............................................Eng 10-18
looping ...................................................Eng 10-3 Seq Take ..............................................Eng 10-18
Modify Dynamic Text .........................Eng 10-19 SeqIn ...................................................Eng 10-20
moving .................................................Eng 10-32 SeqOut .................................................Eng 10-20
Multiple ...............................................Eng 11-10 Server functions ....................................Eng 10-2
naming buttons ....................................Eng 10-28 Set AFV Level .....................................Eng 10-16
Next .....................................................Eng 10-21 Set Folder (CG) ...................................Eng 10-18
Notify End CC .....................................Eng 10-23 shortcuts ..............................................Eng 10-34
OverDrive Bank .............................................Eng 10-34
Prepare Next .................................Eng 10-19 Pause/Hold ...................................Eng 10-34
Prepare Previous ..........................Eng 10-19 Record ..........................................Eng 10-34
Preview CC ..................................Eng 10-19 Run A-Z .......................................Eng 10-35
Run On-Air CC ............................Eng 10-19 Run Held ......................................Eng 10-34
Rundown ......................................Eng 10-19 Run Held X ..................................Eng 10-34
Take & Prepare ............................Eng 10-19 Stop CC ........................................Eng 10-35
Transition .....................................Eng 10-19 Stop Held X ..................................Eng 10-35
Pause ...................................................Eng 10-17 Shot Box Module .................Eng 10-6, Eng 15-2
Pause CC .............................................Eng 10-23 Simulate GPI .......................................Eng 10-19
Pause DVE ..........................................Eng 10-18 Soft Shot Box ........................................Eng 10-5
Pause VTR ..........................................Eng 10-22 Special Commands
Pbus protocol functions .........................Eng 10-2 Pause, modify ...............................Eng 10-30
PGM Audio Level/Duration ................Eng 10-17 Special Functions ................................Eng 10-15
Play ................ Eng 10-17, Eng 10-18, Eng 10-22 special functions ....................................Eng 10-2
Play (CG) ............................................Eng 10-18 Standby Off .........................................Eng 10-22
Play Loop Off ......................................Eng 10-22 Standby On ..........................................Eng 10-22
Play Loop On ......................................Eng 10-22 start recording ......................................Eng 10-10
Play no Stat .........................................Eng 10-22 start relative recording .........................Eng 10-13
Play Rev ..............................................Eng 10-18 Stop ................. Eng 10-4, Eng 10-17, Eng 10-22
Prepare Move ......................................Eng 10-20 Stop DVE ............................................Eng 10-18
Preroll ..................................................Eng 10-22 Stop Held X .........................................Eng 10-23
PST Audio Level .................................Eng 10-17 Stop Other CC .....................................Eng 10-24
Quick Navigation Button ......................Eng 5-11 Stop Time Clock .................................Eng 10-22
Read .....................................................Eng 10-21 Store Pbus ............................................Eng 10-19
Read (CG) ...........................................Eng 10-18 storing individual ..................................Eng 13-7
Recall (CG) .........................................Eng 10-18 swapping .............................................Eng 10-32
Recall DVE .........................................Eng 10-18 Take .................................. Eng 10-18, Eng 10-20
Recall Pbus ..........................................Eng 10-19 Take Out (CG) .....................................Eng 10-18
Recall Shot ..........................................Eng 10-20 Take XPT ............................................Eng 10-21
recalling individual ..............................Eng 13-12 time clock functions ..............................Eng 10-2
Record .................................................Eng 10-22 tips .........................................................Eng 10-2
Registers ................................................Eng 13-2 Transition Keys ...................................Eng 10-23
Relative ...............................................Eng 10-11 Trigger GPI .........................................Eng 10-19
Resave Last .........................................Eng 10-20 Trigger Pbus ........................................Eng 10-20
Reset Audio .........................................Eng 10-17 TypeInCmd .........................................Eng 10-21
Reset Fader ..........................................Eng 10-15 Up ........................................................Eng 10-21
Reset GPI ............................................Eng 10-18 Variable Pause CC ........... Eng 10-24, Eng 10-37
Reset Time Clock ................................Eng 10-22 video server functions ...........................Eng 10-2
Resume ................................................Eng 10-21 VTR functions .......................................Eng 10-2

Custom Device ............................................. Eng 9-21 Device Drivers, see FlexDevice Drivers
advanced topics and tables .................... Eng 23-3 Device, storage capacity ................................ Eng 6-8
commands ............................................. Eng 9-21 DeviceMaster
protocol uses and limitations ................ Eng 23-2 cabling ................................................... Eng 9-14
Protocol Worksheet ............................. Eng 21-22 Diagnosis
Customer service ............................................ Eng 1-7 Fail Indicators ..................................... Eng 17-10
Cut Keys Custom Control .......................... Eng 10-22 Diagnostics ................................................... Eng 17-1
Checksums Custom Controls .............. Eng 17-32
D Com Port Monitor ............................... Eng 17-36
D-A, definition ............................................... Eng 1-5 Data File ...................................... Eng 17-37
DA, definition ................................................ Eng 1-5 Communication Status ........................ Eng 17-14
Data Txfr Extra Option ................................ Eng 9-29 Errors ........................................... Eng 17-14
Date, System Information Page ..................... Eng 6-8 Status ........................................... Eng 17-14
DDR, definition .............................................. Eng 1-5 Control Panel ...................................... Eng 17-18
Decode NAKs Extra Option ........................ Eng 9-31 Audio Fader ................................. Eng 17-22
Default Audio Level, setting ...................... Eng 12-21 Burn Mode ................................... Eng 17-27
Default Audio Levels ................................. Eng 12-22 Button Color Test ........................ Eng 17-18
Default Mapping Button Function Test ................... Eng 17-18
input ...................................................... Eng 3-13 Display Test ................................. Eng 17-20
output .................................................... Eng 3-15 Fader Test .................................... Eng 17-19
Default MLE Map Assignment .................... Eng 12-5 Knob Test .................................... Eng 17-21
Default Names .............................................. Eng 4-16 barrier ................................... Eng 17-21
Default Network Address ............................. Eng 20-8 boundary ............................... Eng 17-21
Default Trans Rate button .................................... Eng 17-21
Active .................................................... Eng 11-5 Module Memory Test .................. Eng 17-22
Effects Dissolve .................................... Eng 11-5 PCH
FTB ....................................................... Eng 11-5 LVDS Test ............................ Eng 17-23
Keyer ..................................................... Eng 11-5 PCI Bridge Test .................... Eng 17-25
MLE ...................................................... Eng 11-5 Tally Test .............................. Eng 17-25
Sequence ............................................... Eng 11-5 Tx/Rx Test ............................ Eng 17-22
Defaulting Positioner Test ............................. Eng 17-20
Bus Maps ............................................ Eng 12-28 SBC
Camera File ......................................... Eng 12-28 Tx/Rx Test ............................ Eng 17-25
CC Variables ....................................... Eng 12-29 Stuck Button Test ........................ Eng 17-19
Clips .................................................... Eng 12-28 Touchscreen
Custom Control Attachment ............... Eng 12-28 Draw Test ............................. Eng 17-26
Custom Controls ................................. Eng 12-28 Pattern Test ........................... Eng 17-26
Installation .......................................... Eng 12-28 Frame .................................................. Eng 17-28
Memories ............................................ Eng 12-28 DIP Switch Test ........................... Eng 17-29
MultiViewer ........................................ Eng 12-29 GPI Test ....................................... Eng 17-28
NV-RAM ............................................ Eng 12-28 Graphics Buffer Test ................... Eng 17-30
Personality .......................................... Eng 12-27 LEDs Test .................................... Eng 17-29
Shot Box Pages ................................... Eng 12-28 Tx/Rx Test ................................... Eng 17-28
Squeeze & Tease ................................. Eng 12-28 Non-Sync ............................................ Eng 17-16
Switcher .............................................. Eng 12-28 Quick Navigation Button ...................... Eng 5-10
Defaulting Bus Maps ................................... Eng 7-17 Switcher Logs ..................................... Eng 17-38
Defaults, Factory ........................................ Eng 12-27 Switcher Status ................................... Eng 17-10
Defaults, recalling factory .......................... Eng 12-27 Complete Status ........................... Eng 17-10
Definitions Icons ............................................. Eng 17-12
abbreviations ........................................... Eng 1-5 Version Information ...................... Eng 17-2
terms ........................................................ Eng 1-4 Warnings ...................................... Eng 17-11
Deleting Custom Control Events ............... Eng 10-31 VNC Viewer ....................................... Eng 17-31
Deleting Custom Controls .......................... Eng 10-33 Digital reference connection ........................ Eng 4-11
Deleting FlexDevice Drivers ......................... Eng 9-6 Dimensions
Deleting option codes ................................... Eng 6-14 control panel ......................................... Eng 20-6
Deselect Cam Custom Controls ................. Eng 10-20 frame ..................................................... Eng 20-6
Device Drivers ............................................... Eng 9-2 DIP Switch

control panel ........................................Eng 20-25 Electrostatic Discharge Susceptibility ............Eng 3-2
frame ....................................Eng 20-8, Eng 20-9 Encrypt code .................................................Eng 6-11
Display Brightness .....................................Eng 11-23 Environment, operating ................................Eng 20-5
Display Mode Extra Option .........................Eng 9-26 Equipment overview .......................................Eng 2-2
Display, lower region .....................................Eng 5-3 Errors, Communications .............................Eng 17-14
Display, Touchscreen .....................................Eng 2-7 ESDS ..............................................................Eng 3-2
Display, upper region .....................................Eng 5-3 Ethernet Communication ................................Eng 9-3
Displays, control panel .................................Eng 5-16 Ethernet port .................................................Eng 2-15
Documentation Execute Macro (CG) Custom Control ........Eng 10-17
abbreviations ...........................................Eng 1-5 Execute Move Custom Controls .................Eng 10-20
conventions .............................................Eng 1-3 Expat License .............................................Eng 22-10
related publications .................................Eng 1-6 ExtendedChar Extra Option .........................Eng 9-30
terms ........................................................Eng 1-4 External Computer file storage
Door, frame ....................................................Eng 3-3 downloading ........................................Eng 13-15
Double-Press Rate, Personality setting ........Eng 11-6 Frame, web interface ...........................Eng 13-15
Down Custom Control ................................Eng 10-21 uploading .............................................Eng 13-15
DSK External Device
definition .................................................Eng 1-5 SmartConversion ...................................Eng 16-1
Mix/DSK ...............................................Eng 8-19 Up/Down Converters ............................Eng 16-1
Mix/DSK and MultiDSK ......................Eng 8-24 External Devices
MultiDSK ..............................................Eng 8-22 Communications .....................................Eng 9-7
DSK 3 and 4 .................................................Eng 8-22 Com Settings ...................Eng 9-8, Eng 9-11
DSK Auto Cut, Personality setting ...............Eng 11-6 Com Type ........................Eng 9-8, Eng 9-11
DSK, see Keyer Module RS-232 ......................................Eng 9-8
Dusting Mode .............................................Eng 18-25 RS-422 ......................................Eng 9-8
DVE RS-422 Null ..............................Eng 9-8
definition .................................................Eng 1-5 TCP/IP ....................................Eng 9-11
DVE Quick Navigation Button ....................Eng 5-11 UDP/IP ....................................Eng 9-11
DVE Send and Remote Control option ........Eng 6-12 Device .............................Eng 9-7, Eng 9-10
DVE, Input Source Type ................................Eng 7-4 VTR Preroll Eng 9-8, Eng 9-9, Eng 9-11
DVEs ethernet ...........................................Eng 9-10
Custom Device ......................................Eng 9-21 Extra Options ...................................Eng 9-9
DVI cable .......................................................Eng 3-9 Mon Wall Settings ...........................Eng 9-9
DVI port .......................................................Eng 2-15 serial .................................................Eng 9-7
DVR, definition ..............................................Eng 1-5 Type ................................Eng 9-7, Eng 9-10
external link port .......................Eng 9-7
E network port ............................Eng 9-10
Edit MultiViewer Layout .............................Eng 8-15 peripheral port ..........Eng 9-7, Eng 9-10
Editing Bus Maps .........................................Eng 7-13 remote port ...............Eng 9-7, Eng 9-10
Editing Color Schemes Extra Options ........................................Eng 9-25
buttons .................................................Eng 11-17 External DVEs
mnemonics ..........................................Eng 11-21 custom control functions .......................Eng 10-2
Editing Custom Controls ............................Eng 10-29 External Link Ports .....................................Eng 20-21
Editor Interface option ..................................Eng 6-12 External Panel Link Ports .............................Eng 2-15
Editor Type Extra Option .............................Eng 9-27 External Panel Modules
Editors setup ......................................................Eng 9-20
Auto Follow ........................................Eng 12-40 External Panel Row Auxiliary Control Panels Eng 14-8
Pattern Codes, Personality setting .........Eng 11-7 External Rows ..............................................Eng 17-6
Trans Rate, Personality setting ..............Eng 11-7 Naming ..................................................Eng 17-8
Effects Dissolve External Still Store, Input BNC Type ............Eng 7-4
Rate Extra Half MLE option .................................Eng 6-12
default ............................................Eng 11-5 Extra Option Settings ...................................Eng 9-25
Effects Memory Module ..............................Eng 2-10 Audio Mixers
Eject Clip Extra Option ................................Eng 9-30 Converter ........................................Eng 9-25
Electronics frame Frequency .......................................Eng 9-25
reference description ...............................Eng 1-4 Max Channels ................................Eng 9-25
Electronics Frame, see Frame Mixers ............................................Eng 9-25

OD Master ..................................... Eng 9-25 Cmd Queuing ................................. Eng 9-30
PGM Output .................................. Eng 9-25 Cue & Pause .................................. Eng 9-30
Post-Fade Delay ............................. Eng 9-25 Eject Clip ....................................... Eng 9-30
Version ........................................... Eng 9-25 ExtendedChar ................................ Eng 9-30
Audio Servers LoopMinLength ............................. Eng 9-30
Bus Address ................................... Eng 9-25 LoopRecueTime ............................ Eng 9-30
Automation MediaIDLength ............................. Eng 9-30
Clip Lists ........................................ Eng 9-26 Panel .............................................. Eng 9-30
Cameras Play with Alpha ............................. Eng 9-31
CmdDelay ...................................... Eng 9-27 Playback Mode .............................. Eng 9-30
Focus Speed ................................... Eng 9-27 Port Cmds ...................................... Eng 9-31
Iris Control ..................................... Eng 9-27 Record Time .................................. Eng 9-31
Iris Mode ........................................ Eng 9-28 Send Tries ...................................... Eng 9-31
Iris Res ........................................... Eng 9-28 Status Interval ................................ Eng 9-31
Iris Speed ....................................... Eng 9-28 Status Tries .................................... Eng 9-31
Lens Type ...................................... Eng 9-28 TargetMachine ............................... Eng 9-31
Master Ped ..................................... Eng 9-28 TimeOut ......................................... Eng 9-31
Pan/Tilt Damping .......................... Eng 9-28 VTR
Pan/Tilt Speed ................................ Eng 9-28 Decode NAKs ................................ Eng 9-31
Panel ID ......................................... Eng 9-28 NPlayRetries .................................. Eng 9-31
Poll ................................................. Eng 9-28 Request TC .................................... Eng 9-31
Protocol .......................................... Eng 9-28 TargetMachine ............................... Eng 9-31
RclTime ......................................... Eng 9-28 Wait nFields ................................... Eng 9-32
Select Delay ................................... Eng 9-28
SerialSwitch ................................... Eng 9-28 F
ShotOffset ...................................... Eng 9-29 Factory Defaults ......................................... Eng 12-27
Z Speed .......................................... Eng 9-29 Recalling ............................................. Eng 12-27
Zoom Speed ................................... Eng 9-29 Fade to Black
Character Generators Default Rate .......................................... Eng 11-5
Back-to-Back ................................. Eng 9-26 Display Mode ........................................ Eng 11-8
Display Mode ................................. Eng 9-26 Display Mode, Personality setting ........ Eng 16-7
PlayTime ........................................ Eng 9-26 setup ........................................................ Eng 8-9
Show on PV ................................... Eng 9-26 Fader Calibration .......................................... Eng 17-3
Software Ver .................................. Eng 9-26 Fail
Timeout .......................................... Eng 9-26 Frame Indicator ....................................... Eng 5-3
Editors Panel Indicator ........................................ Eng 5-3
CustCtrl MLE ................................ Eng 9-27 Fail Indicators Diagnosis ........................... Eng 17-10
Editor Type .................................... Eng 9-27 Fast Forward Custom Control .................... Eng 10-21
Pattern ............................................ Eng 9-27 Field 1 and Field 2 ....................................... Eng 2-32
Use Break ....................................... Eng 9-27 Field and Frame information ........................ Eng 2-33
Pbus Field, Switch on ........................................... Eng 8-13
Query Cmd ..................................... Eng 9-27 Fields ............................................................ Eng 2-32
Routers File and Setup Storage ................ Eng 13-1, Eng 13-4
Base ................................................ Eng 9-29 Downloading ....................................... Eng 13-15
Level Base ..................................... Eng 9-29 External Computer .............................. Eng 13-15
Num Levels .................................... Eng 9-29 Overview ............................................... Eng 13-2
Src & Dest Base ............................. Eng 9-29 Recall
Xpts ................................................ Eng 9-29 all ................................................. Eng 13-10
Serial Tallies bus maps ...................................... Eng 13-10
At Black ......................................... Eng 9-29 cameras ........................................ Eng 13-10
Data Txfr ........................................ Eng 9-29 CC Variables ................................ Eng 13-10
Rate ................................................ Eng 9-29 Custom Control Attachments ...... Eng 13-10
Slot 1 .............................................. Eng 9-29 custom controls ............................ Eng 13-10
Source Name .................................. Eng 9-29 individual Bus Maps .................... Eng 13-12
Start ................................................ Eng 9-29 individual custom control ............ Eng 13-12
Video Servers individual memory ....................... Eng 13-11
Clip List ......................................... Eng 9-30 individual MultiViewer layouts ... Eng 13-13

individual register items ...............Eng 13-11 MLE ....................................................Eng 12-40
individual S&T Sequences ...........Eng 13-12 Transition Module ...............................Eng 12-42
individual Shot Box Pages ...........Eng 13-13 Font Color, Preview Overlay Setup ...........Eng 12-30
installation ....................................Eng 13-10 Force Menu Change .....................................Eng 4-10
memories ......................................Eng 13-10 Format, Input BNCs .....................................Eng 4-13
MultiViewer Assignment .............Eng 13-10 Format, Output BNCs ...................................Eng 4-13
MultiViewer Layout .....................Eng 13-10 Forward Button ...............................................Eng 5-6
personality ....................................Eng 13-10 Frame
register types ..................................Eng 13-9 boards menu ..........................................Eng 6-10
shot box pages ..............................Eng 13-10 connecting to control panel ...................Eng 3-11
squeeze & tease sequences ...........Eng 13-10 CPU, overview ......................................Eng 2-12
VTR clips .....................................Eng 13-10 front layout ..............................................Eng 2-8
Store GPI I/O port, overview ..........................Eng 2-16
all ....................................................Eng 13-5 installation ...............................................Eng 3-5
bus maps .........................................Eng 13-5 installing boards ....................................Eng 4-18
cameras ..........................................Eng 13-5 LAN port, overview ..............................Eng 2-16
CC Variables ..................................Eng 13-5 operating environment ............................Eng 3-5
Custom Control Attachments .........Eng 13-5 Over-Temperature Shutdown ..............Eng 12-44
custom controls ..............................Eng 13-5 peripheral ports, overview .....................Eng 2-16
individual Bus Maps ......................Eng 13-7 ports .......................................................Eng 2-16
individual custom control ..............Eng 13-7 power connection ..................................Eng 3-19
individual memory .........................Eng 13-6 power fail indicators ..............................Eng 3-21
individual MultiViewer layouts .....Eng 13-8 processor ...............................................Eng 2-35
individual register items Eng 13-5, Eng 13-6 rear layout ................................................Eng 2-7
individual S&T Sequences .............Eng 13-7 reference description ...............................Eng 1-4
individual Shot Box Pages .............Eng 13-8 support brackets ......................................Eng 3-5
installation ......................................Eng 13-5 time code input, overview .....................Eng 2-16
memories ........................................Eng 13-5 USP ports, overview ..............................Eng 2-16
MultiViewer Assignment ...............Eng 13-5 web interface
MultiViewer Layout .......................Eng 13-5 downloading .................................Eng 13-15
personality ......................................Eng 13-5 uploading ......................................Eng 13-15
register types ..................................Eng 13-4 Frame Advance Custom Control Eng 10-18, Eng 10-21
shot box pages ................................Eng 13-5 Frame Board, rear .........................................Eng 4-22
squeeze & tease sequences .............Eng 13-5 Frame Boards
VTR clips .......................................Eng 13-5 front .......................................................Eng 4-21
Uploading ............................................Eng 13-15 locations ................................................Eng 4-18
Films, button insert .......................................Eng 3-17 Frame Connector Types .............................Eng 20-12
Fire Salvo Custom Control .........................Eng 10-21 Frame CPU Board ........................................Eng 2-12
Flash full .........................................................Eng 6-5 Frame Diagnostics ......................................Eng 17-28
FlexDevice ......................................................Eng 9-2 DIP Switch Test ..................................Eng 17-29
FlexDevice Drivers .........................................Eng 9-4 GPI Test ..............................................Eng 17-28
Deleting ...................................................Eng 9-6 Graphics Buffer Test ...........................Eng 17-30
Installing ...................................Eng 9-4, Eng 9-5 LEDs Test ............................................Eng 17-29
Status .......................................................Eng 9-4 Tx/Rx Test ...........................................Eng 17-28
Obslete .............................................Eng 9-4 Frame Dimensions ........................................Eng 20-6
OK ....................................................Eng 9-4 Frame Door, opening/closing .........................Eng 3-3
Unsupported .....................................Eng 9-4 Frame Fail Indicator ....................Eng 5-3, Eng 17-10
Stopping ..................................................Eng 9-5 cooling fans ...........................................Eng 18-8
Flexi Mode, Key 4 ........................................Eng 12-8 power supply .........................................Eng 18-6
FlexiClean Setup ............................................Eng 8-7 Frame Ports
Flush mounted control panel installation .......Eng 3-8 AC power ............................................Eng 20-19
Focus Custom Control ................................Eng 10-21 GPI I/O ................................................Eng 20-18
Focus Speed Extra Option ............................Eng 9-27 LAN .....................................................Eng 20-19
Follow .........................................................Eng 12-39 panel ....................................................Eng 20-17
Bus .......................................................Eng 12-41 peripheral .............................................Eng 20-17
Keyer ...................................................Eng 12-42 Frame Power Supplies ................................Eng 18-12
Memory Recall ....................................Eng 12-43 functional components ........................Eng 18-12

replacing .............................................. Eng 18-13 Trigger Signal Polarity ................ Eng 12-13
Frame Rates, using ....................................... Eng 2-33 Output GPI I/Os .................................. Eng 12-15
Frame Reverse Custom Control Eng 10-18, Eng 10-21 Naming ........................................ Eng 12-16
Frame Serial Ports .......................................... Eng 9-2 Trigger Signal .............................. Eng 12-15
Frame to Control Panel cabling ................... Eng 3-11 Ports .................................................... Eng 20-18
Frame, overview ............................................. Eng 2-7 setup .................................................... Eng 12-10
Frame/Control Panel cabling ....................... Eng 3-11 Worksheet
Frames .......................................................... Eng 2-32 Input ............................................. Eng 21-13
Frequency Extra Option ............................... Eng 9-25 Output .......................................... Eng 21-14
Frequency, scan ............................................ Eng 2-33 Grab a Timecode
Front Frame Boards ..................................... Eng 4-21 Video Server ....................................... Eng 12-20
Full MLE Grab Positioner Custom Controls .............. Eng 10-20
reference description ............................... Eng 1-4 Grey Input BNC ............................................. Eng 7-4
Full reset ....................................................... Eng 4-24 Grouping Audio Channels ......................... Eng 12-23
Function buttons ............................................. Eng 5-3
Function, System Information Page ............... Eng 6-7 H
Functional check .......................................... Eng 4-17 Half MLE
reference description ............................... Eng 1-4
G Half MLE, see Mix/DSK
General Specifications ................................. Eng 20-3 Hard Drive
GfxBuffDDR Test, see Frame Diagnostics installing .............................................. Eng 18-16
Global Memory CC Recall, Personality setting ... Eng Ribbon Cable Connector ..................... Eng 18-16
11-5 Hard Restart, switcher ..................... Eng 6-3, Eng 6-6
Global Memory Module ............................... Eng 2-10 HD, definition ................................................ Eng 1-5
Global Memory Number Entry, Personality Eng 11-8 Help
Global-Store online manuals ...................................... Eng 5-18
Auto key setup ........................................ Eng 7-8 pop-up ................................................... Eng 5-18
Enable Channel 4 .................................. Eng 11-8 Quick Navigation Button ...................... Eng 5-10
Memory Recall Mode, Personality ..... Eng 11-11 HOLD button ................................................. Eng 5-2
Global-Store 4 Mode, Personality ................ Eng 11-8 Hold CC Custom Control ........................... Eng 10-23
GNU General Public License ....................... Eng 22-2 Hold For Group Custom Control ............... Eng 10-23
Go To Clip Custom Control ....................... Eng 10-21 Hold For Run Custom Control ................... Eng 10-23
Go To Cut Custom Controls ...................... Eng 10-17 Hold Quick Navigation Button .................... Eng 5-10
Go To End Custom Control ....................... Eng 10-18 Hold, Store Mode ....................................... Eng 11-14
Go To Menu Custom Control .................... Eng 10-22 HOME button ................................................. Eng 5-2
Go To Start Custom Control ...................... Eng 10-18 Home Quick Navigation Button .................. Eng 5-10
GP I/O Horizontal Scan Lines .................................. Eng 2-31
port ........................................................ Eng 2-19
GPI (CG) Custom Control ......................... Eng 10-17 I
GPI Custom Control ................................... Eng 10-21 Icons
GPI I/O ......................................................... Eng 2-16 positioner ................................................ Eng 5-9
Aux Panel setup Status ................................................... Eng 17-12
CCU joystick control ................... Eng 14-13 ID, definition .................................................. Eng 1-5
Aux Panels .......................................... Eng 14-11 Imlib2 License ............................................ Eng 22-11
Auxiliary Control Panel setup In Flag Reset Custom Control .................... Eng 10-21
programming GPI ........................ Eng 14-11 In Recall Custom Control .......................... Eng 10-21
Remote Aux Panel setup Include Aux .................................................. Eng 16-2
programming GPI ........................ Eng 14-12 In-Console, control panel installation ............ Eng 3-7
GPI I/Os Indicators
Connections ........................................ Eng 12-11 frame power fail .................................... Eng 3-21
Information Menu ............................... Eng 12-10 panel power fail .................................... Eng 3-21
Input BNC ............................................. Eng 7-24 Power Fail ............................................. Eng 3-21
Input GPI I/Os ..................................... Eng 12-11 Information, Web Interface ............................ Eng 6-7
Memory Recall event ................... Eng 12-11 Inpoint, Video Server Clip ......................... Eng 12-18
Run Custom Control .................... Eng 12-13 Input BNCs
Tallies .......................................... Eng 12-14 Alpha ....................................................... Eng 7-6
Transition event ........................... Eng 12-12

Auto Key Frame Boards ........................................Eng 6-10
setup .................................................Eng 7-8 Panel Boards ............................................Eng 6-9
Bus Map ................................................Eng 7-13 Software Options ...................................Eng 6-11
default mapping .....................................Eng 3-13 Installing
GPI Outputs ...........................................Eng 7-24 Button Insert Films ................................Eng 3-17
gray ..........................................................Eng 7-4 FlexDevice Drivers .................. Eng 9-4, Eng 9-5
Non-Sync Detect ...................................Eng 7-10 frame boards ..........................................Eng 4-18
Output BNC ............................................Eng 8-3 frame door ...............................................Eng 3-4
Tallies ....................................................Eng 7-22 Hard Drive replacement ......................Eng 18-16
Type Remote Aux Panels ...............................Eng 14-5
Alpha ................................................Eng 7-4 serial numbers .........................................Eng 6-9
Char Gen ..........................................Eng 7-5 software options ....................................Eng 6-11
External Still Store ...........................Eng 7-4 Installing New Modules ...............................Eng 17-5
Robotic Cam ....................................Eng 7-5 Quick Module Configure ......................Eng 17-5
Router ...............................................Eng 7-4 Single Module Configure ......................Eng 17-6
Video ................................................Eng 7-5 Interface, menu ...............................................Eng 5-2
Video Formats .........................................Eng 7-5 Interlaced .....................................Eng 2-31, Eng 2-32
Input GPI I/Os ............................................Eng 12-11 Internal Panel Row Auxiliary Control Panels Eng 14-8
Setting up Memory Recall events .......Eng 12-11 Internal reference ..........................................Eng 4-14
Setting up run custom control events ..Eng 12-13 Internal Rows ...............................................Eng 17-6
Setting up transition events .................Eng 12-12 Internet Security .............................................Eng 4-8
Setting up trigger signal priority .........Eng 12-13 IP Issues ..........................................................Eng 4-8
Tallies ..................................................Eng 12-14 IP, default .....................................................Eng 20-8
Input Source Type Iris Control Extra Option ..............................Eng 9-27
DVE .........................................................Eng 7-4 Iris Mode Extra Option .................................Eng 9-28
Input Sources Iris Res Extra Option ....................................Eng 9-28
Type Iris Speed Extra Option ................................Eng 9-28
off .....................................................Eng 7-4 Isolate MultiDSK .........................................Eng 11-8
VTR ..................................................Eng 7-4
Input Verification .........................................Eng 4-16 J
Inputs, connection ........................................Eng 3-13 Jiffy License ...............................................Eng 22-12
Inputs, naming (video) ...................................Eng 7-2
Inserting Custom Control Events K
control panel ........................................Eng 10-30 K+B CUT, button .........................................Eng 7-15
special ..................................................Eng 10-31 K+B TRNS, button .......................................Eng 7-15
Inserts, button ...............................................Eng 3-17 Key 4 Mode
Install Quick Navigation Button ...................Eng 5-10 External .................................................Eng 12-8
Install serial numbers ....................................Eng 6-11 Flexi .......................................................Eng 12-8
Installation Internal 1 ...............................................Eng 12-8
control panel ............................................Eng 3-7 Internal 2 ...............................................Eng 12-8
control panel power ...............................Eng 3-19 Internal 3 ...............................................Eng 12-8
control panel to frame ...........................Eng 3-11 Key Alpha
control panel touchscreen ........................Eng 3-8 output BNC .............................................Eng 8-4
control panel tub .......................Eng 3-7, Eng 3-8 Key Cut then Fade ........................................Eng 11-9
Defaulting ............................................Eng 12-28 Key Cut, button ............................................Eng 7-15
frame .......................................................Eng 3-5 Key Frame Adv Custom Control ................Eng 10-18
frame power ..........................................Eng 3-19 Key Frame Rev Custom Control ................Eng 10-18
lock/unlock ..........................................Eng 12-45 Key Trans, button .........................................Eng 7-15
monitor ..................................................Eng 3-16 Key Video
reference ................................................Eng 4-11 output BNC .............................................Eng 8-4
Registers ................................................Eng 13-2 Key, Auto .......................................................Eng 7-3
serial numbers .........................................Eng 3-2 Keyboard installation ...................................Eng 3-12
Installation Menu Status ...............................Eng 4-10 Keyboard port ...............................................Eng 2-15
Installed Keyer Module ...............................................Eng 2-10
frame boards, option boards ..................Eng 6-10 Keyer Rate
panel boards ............................................Eng 6-9 default ....................................................Eng 11-5
Installed Options .............................................Eng 6-9

Keyers M
Auto Follow ........................................ Eng 12-42 Macros, see Custom Controls
Key Cut then Fade ................................ Eng 11-9 Main Area ...................................................... Eng 5-7
Swap Cut and Auto ............................. Eng 11-14 Main Area, menu ............................................ Eng 5-7
Keypad Clip IDs Entry ................................. Eng 11-9 Maintenance ................................................. Eng 18-1
Keypad DVE Num Entry ............................. Eng 11-9 control panel module .......................... Eng 18-21
Keypad Still Num Entry ............................... Eng 11-9 control panel power supplies .............. Eng 18-10
Keypad Wipe Num Entry ........................... Eng 11-10 failure ............................................. Eng 18-2
Keys dusting ................................................. Eng 18-25
check ..................................................... Eng 7-25 frame fans
Clip and Gain ........................................ Eng 7-26 failure ............................................. Eng 18-8
Key Memory ......................................... Eng 7-26 frame power supplies .......................... Eng 18-12
Keys Off Air (Automation) Custom Control Eng 10-19 failure ............................................. Eng 18-6
Knobs Hard Drive replacement ...................... Eng 18-16
selection .................................................. Eng 5-3 Managing Custom Controls ....................... Eng 10-32
Managing Setups ........................................ Eng 13-15
L downloading ........................................ Eng 13-15
Labelling boards ........................................... Eng 2-37 uploading ............................................ Eng 13-15
LAN Ports .................................................. Eng 20-19 Managing Web Interface Account ................. Eng 6-2
overview ................................................ Eng 2-16 Manuals
Large Audio Mixer option ........................... Eng 6-12 online help ............................................. Eng 5-18
Layout Mapping
front frame .............................................. Eng 2-8 Control Panel ........................................ Eng 17-5
rear frame ................................................ Eng 2-7 Audio Control ................................ Eng 17-8
Layouts Custom Control .............................. Eng 17-7
MultiViewer .......................................... Eng 8-15 Quick Module Configure ............... Eng 17-5
edit ................................................. Eng 8-15 Single Module Configure .............. Eng 17-6
name ............................................... Eng 8-17 crosspoint buttons ................................. Eng 7-13
Lens Type Extra Option ............................... Eng 9-28 Master Panel
Lesser GNU Public License ......................... Eng 22-4 reference description ............................... Eng 1-4
Level Base Extra Option .............................. Eng 9-29 Master Ped Extra Option .............................. Eng 9-28
Levels Matrix, crosspoint ........................................ Eng 2-20
default levels ....................................... Eng 12-22 Matte Limit
LGPL, see Lesser GNU Public License Personality setting ............................... Eng 11-10
Limitations Max Channels Extra Option ......................... Eng 9-25
custom device protocol ......................... Eng 23-2 MD DVE option ........................................... Eng 6-12
Link and Node .............................................. Eng 20-9 MD, definition ................................................ Eng 1-5
external links ......................................... Eng 20-9 MediaIDLength Extra Option ...................... Eng 9-30
internal links ......................................... Eng 20-9 Memories
Load (CG) Custom Control ..... Eng 10-17, Eng 10-18 Defaulting ........................................... Eng 12-28
Load Layout Custom Control .................... Eng 10-19 Recall
Loading Color Schemes ............................. Eng 11-24 auto follow ................................... Eng 12-43
Locations, frame boards ............................... Eng 4-18 Recalling individual ............................ Eng 13-11
Lock/Unlock Installation ............................ Eng 12-45 Registers ................................................ Eng 13-2
Lock/Unlock Personality ............................ Eng 11-25 Store Mode Personality Setting .......... Eng 11-14
Logs ............................................................ Eng 17-38 Storing individual ................................. Eng 13-6
Look Ahead Preview Memory Bank Cycle, Personality setting .. Eng 11-10
MLE ........................................................ Eng 8-3 Memory, Key ............................................... Eng 7-26
Loop CC Custom Controls ......................... Eng 10-23 Menu
Looping Custom Controls ............................ Eng 10-3 BNC type ................................................ Eng 8-2
LoopMinLength Extra Option ..................... Eng 9-30 Menu Locking
LoopRecueTime Extra Option ..................... Eng 9-30 Installation .......................................... Eng 12-45
Lower Display Region ................................... Eng 5-3 Personality .......................................... Eng 11-25
LTC Timecode Specifications ................... Eng 20-15 Menu System .................................................. Eng 5-5
Back button ............................................. Eng 5-6
Copy Down button .................................. Eng 5-6
Copy Up button ....................................... Eng 5-6

Forward button ........................................Eng 5-6 Mnemonics ...................................................Eng 5-13
main area .................................................Eng 5-7 Mnemonics, default names ...........................Eng 4-16
menu title .................................................Eng 5-6 Modify bank name, custom control ..............Eng 10-8
navigation area ........................................Eng 5-7 Modify Dynamic Text Custom Control .....Eng 10-19
positioner icons .......................................Eng 5-9 Modify function name, custom control ........Eng 10-8
punchpad .................................................Eng 5-7 Modifying Custom Control Events ............Eng 10-30
Quick Navigation buttons .....................Eng 5-10 Module Configuration ..................................Eng 17-6
screen capture ........................................Eng 5-19 Audio Control ........................................Eng 17-8
selection area ...........................................Eng 5-6 Custom Control .....................................Eng 17-7
Swap button .............................................Eng 5-6 Module Control Link Backbone ...................Eng 20-9
Menu Title ......................................................Eng 5-6 external links .........................................Eng 20-9
Menus internal links ..........................................Eng 20-9
Appearance ............................................Eng 5-12 Modules
Aux Bus Outputs .....................................Eng 8-5 Control Panel CPU ............. Eng 2-10, Eng 20-24
control buttons .........................................Eng 5-2 Effects Memory .....................................Eng 2-10
Function buttons ......................................Eng 5-3 Global Memory .....................................Eng 2-10
Hold button ..............................................Eng 5-2 Keyer Module ........................................Eng 2-10
Home button ............................................Eng 5-2 Panel Communications Hub ..................Eng 2-10
knobs .......................................................Eng 5-3 Panel Communications Hub (PCH) ....Eng 20-24
lower display region ................................Eng 5-3 Panel Module Controller .......................Eng 2-10
More button .............................................Eng 5-3 Positioner ...............................................Eng 2-11
on the touchscreen ...................................Eng 5-2 Preview Bus ..........................................Eng 2-11
quick navigation buttons ........Eng 5-3, Eng 5-10 Replacing .............................................Eng 18-21
Quick Navigation More Button ...............Eng 5-3 installing .......................................Eng 18-22
Skins ......................................................Eng 5-12 removing ......................................Eng 18-21
System Power button ...............................Eng 5-3 Transition ..............................................Eng 2-11
Up One button .........................................Eng 5-2 Monitor Connection .....................................Eng 3-16
upper display region ................................Eng 5-3 Monitor Wall option .....................................Eng 6-12
Midplane .......................................................Eng 2-13 MORE button .................................................Eng 5-3
Mix/DSK ......................................................Eng 8-19 Mounting Arm (Touchscreen) ........................Eng 3-9
operation ................................................Eng 8-20 Mouse installation ........................................Eng 3-12
setup .................... Eng 8-20, Eng 8-23, Eng 8-24 Mouse port ....................................................Eng 2-15
with MultiDSK ......................................Eng 8-24 Mouse Sensitivity, setting ..........................Eng 11-10
Mix/DSK option ...........................................Eng 6-12 Moving Custom Controls ...........................Eng 10-32
Mixers Extra Option .....................................Eng 9-25 Moving Shot Box Pages ...............................Eng 15-4
MLE MultiDSK .....................................................Eng 8-22
Auto Follow ........................................Eng 12-41 isolate ....................................................Eng 11-8
definition .................................................Eng 1-5 option .....................................................Eng 6-12
fade to black ............................................Eng 8-9 setup .....................................Eng 8-23, Eng 8-25
Naming ....................................................Eng 7-2 with Mix/DSK .......................................Eng 8-24
processor ...............................................Eng 2-35 MultiDSK 5 and 6 ........................................Eng 8-22
resetting .................................................Eng 4-25 MultiDSK Key Alpha
tally ........................................................Eng 8-10 output BNC .............................................Eng 8-4
MLE Assignment ...........................................Eng 4-9 MultiDSK Key Video
MLE MD option ...........................................Eng 6-12 output BNC .............................................Eng 8-4
MLE Rate MultiPanel
default ....................................................Eng 11-5 MLE Assignment ....................................Eng 4-9
MLE Re-entry button ...................................Eng 7-14 Setup ........................................................Eng 4-9
MLE reset System Permissions ...............................Eng 4-10
all ...........................................................Eng 4-25 Multiple Custom Controls ......... Eng 10-3, Eng 11-10
individual ...............................................Eng 4-26 running ................................................Eng 10-13
individual (1-4) ......................................Eng 4-25 MultiViewer ............. Eng 8-14, Eng 13-5, Eng 13-10
individual (5-8) ......................................Eng 4-26 Assignment ............................................Eng 8-14
MLE SD option ............................................Eng 6-12 defaulting .............................................Eng 12-29
MLE-Store Layouts ..................................................Eng 8-15
Auto key setup .........................................Eng 7-8 edit ..................................................Eng 8-15
Mnemonic Displays Appearance ..................Eng 5-13 name ...............................................Eng 8-17

Recalling individual ..................... Eng 13-13 Options
Storing individual .......................... Eng 13-8 codes, deleting ...................................... Eng 6-14
option .................................................... Eng 6-12 codes, store and recall ........................... Eng 6-14
Output BNC ............................................ Eng 8-3 custom control banks, enable ................ Eng 10-7
Registers installed ................................................... Eng 6-9
assignment .................. Eng 12-29, Eng 13-3 installed panel boards .............................. Eng 6-9
layout .......................... Eng 12-29, Eng 13-3 Outpoint, Video Server Clip ...................... Eng 12-18
MV, button ................................................... Eng 7-15 Output BNCs .................................................. Eng 8-2
Aux Bus .................................................. Eng 8-3
N Aux Monitor ........................................... Eng 8-3
Name MultiViewer Layout .......................... Eng 8-17 Clean Feed .............................................. Eng 8-3
Names, mnemonic default ............................ Eng 4-16 clean feed ................................................ Eng 8-7
Naming Bus Maps ........................................ Eng 7-21 Clean Feed, MLE .................................... Eng 8-3
Naming custom control banks ...................... Eng 10-8 default mapping .................................... Eng 3-15
Naming Custom Control Buttons ............... Eng 10-28 Input BNC ............................................... Eng 8-3
Naming custom control functions ................ Eng 10-8 Key Alpha, MLE ..................................... Eng 8-4
Naming External Rows ................................ Eng 17-8 Key Video, MLE ..................................... Eng 8-4
Naming Menus ............................................. Eng 5-17 Look Ahead Preview, MLE .................... Eng 8-3
Naming Output GPI I/Os ........................... Eng 12-16 MultiDSK Key Alpha, MLE ................... Eng 8-4
Naming Shot Box Pages .............................. Eng 15-4 MultiDSK Key Video, MLE ................... Eng 8-4
Naming video inputs ...................................... Eng 7-2 MultiViewer ............................................ Eng 8-3
Navigation Area ............................................. Eng 5-7 Preview, main ......................................... Eng 8-3
Navigation Area, menu .................................. Eng 5-7 Preview, MLE .......................... Eng 8-3, Eng 8-4
Net Expander Program, main ......................................... Eng 8-3
communications settings ....................... Eng 9-18 Program, MLE ......................... Eng 8-3, Eng 8-4
NetExp verification .............................................. Eng 8-5
cabling ................................................... Eng 9-14 Output Boards Functionality ........................ Eng 2-35
Network Address, default ............................ Eng 20-8 Output Connections ...................................... Eng 3-15
Network Security ........................................... Eng 4-8 Output GPI I/Os ......................................... Eng 12-15
Network Setup ................................................ Eng 4-5 Naming ................................................ Eng 12-16
Next Custom Control ................................. Eng 10-21 Setting up trigger signals .................... Eng 12-15
Next Quick Navigation Button .................... Eng 5-10 OverDrive
Non-Sync Detect .......................................... Eng 7-10 relative custom controls ...................... Eng 10-11
Non-Sync Status ......................................... Eng 17-16 Overlay, Preview ........................................ Eng 12-30
Normal custom control banks ...................... Eng 10-8 Over-Tempurature Shutdown, Frame ........ Eng 12-44
Notify End CC Custom Control ................. Eng 10-23 Overview
NPlay Retries Extra Option .......................... Eng 9-31 Equipment ............................................... Eng 2-2
NTP Server Time ....................................... Eng 12-38 Video Formats ....................................... Eng 2-31
Num Levels Extra Option ............................ Eng 9-29
NV-RAM P
Defaulting ........................................... Eng 12-28 Pages, Shot Box
copying .................................................. Eng 15-4
O creating .................................................. Eng 15-3
OD Master Extra Option .............................. Eng 9-25 moving .................................................. Eng 15-4
Off, Input Source Type .................................. Eng 7-4 naming .................................................. Eng 15-4
Online Manuals ............................................ Eng 5-18 Pan/Tilt Damping Extra Option ................... Eng 9-28
Opening/Closing the frame door, QMD/X .... Eng 3-3 Pan/Tilt Speed Extra Option ........................ Eng 9-28
Operating Environment Requirements ......... Eng 20-5 PANEL ......................................................... Eng 2-16
Operating Environment, frame ...................... Eng 3-5 Panel Boards Menu ........................................ Eng 6-9
Operator Panel buttons
reference description ............................... Eng 1-4 assign black ........................................... Eng 7-14
Option assign color background ....................... Eng 7-14
Mix/DSK ............................................... Eng 8-19 BKGDCUT ........................................... Eng 7-15
Mix/MultiDSK ...................................... Eng 8-24 BKGDTRNS ......................................... Eng 7-15
Option Codes Bus Hold ............................................... Eng 7-15
recalling ................................................ Eng 6-15 Global-Store .......................................... Eng 7-14
K+B CUT .............................................. Eng 7-15

K+B TRNS ............................................Eng 7-15 FTB ................................................Eng 11-5
Key Cut .................................................Eng 7-15 Keyer ..............................................Eng 11-5
Key Trans ..............................................Eng 7-15 MLE ...............................................Eng 11-5
MLE re-entry .........................................Eng 7-14 Sequence ........................................Eng 11-5
MLE-Store .............................................Eng 7-14 Defaulting ............................................Eng 12-27
MV ........................................................Eng 7-15 Double-Press Rate .................................Eng 11-6
Shift .......................................................Eng 7-14 DSK Auto Cut .......................................Eng 11-6
Panel Communications Hub .........................Eng 2-10 Editor Pattern Codes .............................Eng 11-7
Panel Communications Hub (PCH) ...........Eng 20-24 Editor Trans Rate ..................................Eng 11-7
Panel Extra Option .......................................Eng 9-30 Execute Camera Move on Trans ...........Eng 11-7
Panel Fail Indicator .....................Eng 5-3, Eng 17-10 FTB Display Mode ...............Eng 11-8, Eng 16-7
Panel ID Extra Option ..................................Eng 9-28 Global Memory Number Entry .............Eng 11-8
Panel Module Controller ..............................Eng 2-10 Global-Store 4 Mode .............................Eng 11-8
Panel Port ...................................................Eng 20-17 Isolate MultiDSKs .................................Eng 11-8
Panel port on frame ......................................Eng 3-11 Key Cut then Fade .................................Eng 11-9
Panel Rows Keypad Clip IDs Entry ..........................Eng 11-9
External .................................................Eng 17-6 Keypad DVE Num Entry ......................Eng 11-9
Internal ..................................................Eng 17-6 Keypad Still Num Entry ........................Eng 11-9
Panel Serial Ports ............................................Eng 9-2 Keypad Wipe Num Entry ....................Eng 11-10
Panel Sleep Time, Personality setting ........Eng 11-11 lock/unlock ..........................................Eng 11-25
Parallel Tallies Overview .............................Eng 2-18 Matte Limit ..........................................Eng 11-10
Pattern Extra Option .....................................Eng 9-27 Memory Bank Cycle ...........................Eng 11-10
Pause Audio Server Custom Controls ........Eng 10-17 Mnemonics appearance .........................Eng 5-13
Pause CC Custom Control ..........................Eng 10-23 Mouse Sensitivity ................................Eng 11-10
Pause Custom Controls Multiple Custom Controls ...................Eng 11-10
modify .................................................Eng 10-30 Panel Sleep Time .................................Eng 11-11
Pause DVE Custom Control .......................Eng 10-18 Pbus Memory ......................................Eng 11-11
Pause VTR Custom Control .......................Eng 10-22 Quick Bank Select ...............................Eng 11-11
Pause/Hold Custom Control Shortcut ........Eng 10-34 Quick Navigation Button ......................Eng 5-10
Pbus Recall Global-Store Memory Mode ....Eng 11-11
custom control functions .......................Eng 10-2 Recall MLE-Store Memory Mode ......Eng 11-12
option .....................................................Eng 6-12 Recall WhiteFlash ...............................Eng 11-12
Pbus Memory .............................................Eng 11-11 Re-entry Depth ....................................Eng 11-12
PCH, see Panel Communications Hub Re-entry Loops ....................................Eng 11-12
Percent Used, storage capacity .......................Eng 6-8 Roll Clip Mode ....................................Eng 11-13
Peripheral Bus II option ...............................Eng 6-12 Roll Clip On-Air Only ........................Eng 11-13
Peripheral Ports .........................Eng 2-16, Eng 20-17 Shift Locking .......................................Eng 11-13
Personality ....................................................Eng 11-2 Show CC’s on Key Bus .......................Eng 11-13
Assign MLE ..........................................Eng 11-3 Show Last CC Pressed ........................Eng 11-14
Audio Cut Only .....................................Eng 11-3 Show Last Mem Recalled ...................Eng 11-14
Audio Transitions ..................................Eng 11-3 Squeeze & Tease Mode .........................Eng 12-6
Auto Follow Store Mode ..........................................Eng 11-14
Custom Controls ..........................Eng 12-40 Swap Keyers Cut and Auto .................Eng 11-14
Editors ..........................................Eng 12-40 Swap Program and Preset ....................Eng 11-14
Panel .............................................Eng 12-40 Swap Trans, Cut and Auto ..................Eng 11-15
Auto Key Alpha ....................................Eng 11-3 Time Clock Source ..............................Eng 11-15
Auto Recall ............................................Eng 11-3 Time Clock UMD Number .................Eng 11-15
Auto Remove Key .................................Eng 11-4 UltraChrome
Bank 0 Lit ..............................................Eng 11-4 default color .................................Eng 11-15
BKGD Double-Press .............................Eng 11-4 default edge width ........................Eng 11-15
Camera Grab Time ................................Eng 11-4 default mode .................................Eng 11-15
CC Global Recall ..................................Eng 11-5 VTR POL On-air Display ...................Eng 11-15
CC/Macro Attachments .........................Eng 11-4 VTR POL Prep’d Display ...................Eng 11-16
Clear Bus Hold ......................................Eng 11-5 Wake Up On Command ..... Eng 11-8, Eng 11-16
Default Trans Rate Personality Registers ....................................Eng 13-2
Active .............................................Eng 11-5 PGM
Eff Dissolve ...................................Eng 11-5 definition .................................................Eng 1-5

PGM Audio Level/Duration Custom Controls .... Eng Keyboard .............................. Eng 2-15, Eng 3-12
10-17 LAN ...................................................... Eng 2-16
PGM Output Extra Option ........................... Eng 9-25 Mouse ................................... Eng 2-15, Eng 3-12
Physical BNC ................................................. Eng 7-3 PANEL .................................................. Eng 3-11
Play (CG) Custom Control ......................... Eng 10-18 Panel ...................................................... Eng 2-16
Play Audio Server Custom Controls .......... Eng 10-17 Peripheral .............................................. Eng 2-16
Play Custom Control ............... Eng 10-18, Eng 10-22 power (Touchscreen) ............................ Eng 3-20
Play Loop Off Custom Control .................. Eng 10-22 PS/2 ....................................................... Eng 3-12
Play Loop On Custom Control ................... Eng 10-22 Reference .............................................. Eng 4-11
Play no Stat Custom Control ...................... Eng 10-22 Remote .................................................. Eng 2-16
Play Rev Custom Control .......................... Eng 10-18 Tally ...................................................... Eng 2-18
Play w/ Alpha Extra Option ......................... Eng 9-31 time code input ...................................... Eng 2-16
Playback Mode Extra Option ....................... Eng 9-30 USB ...................................... Eng 2-15, Eng 2-16
PlayTime Extra Option ................................ Eng 9-26 USB (Touchscreen) ................................. Eng 3-9
PMC, see Panel Module Controller Positioner
PMCs, Upgrading ....................................... Eng 18-23 icon, circular ........................................... Eng 5-9
Poll Extra Option ......................................... Eng 9-28 icon, left-right ......................................... Eng 5-9
Pop-up Help ................................................. Eng 5-18 icon, up-down ......................................... Eng 5-9
Port Cmds Extra Option ............................... Eng 9-31 icons ........................................................ Eng 5-9
Port Expanders Positioner Calibration .................................. Eng 17-4
BSS4 Positioner Module ........................................ Eng 2-11
Cabling ........................................... Eng 9-13 Post-Attach Custom Control ...................... Eng 10-26
communications settings ................ Eng 9-18 Post-Fade Delay Extra Option ..................... Eng 9-25
Programming ................................. Eng 9-17 Power ............................................................. Eng 4-2
DeviceMaster Power Button, touchscreen display ................ Eng 5-3
Cabling ........................................... Eng 9-14 Power connection
Programming ................................. Eng 9-17 installing control panel .......................... Eng 3-19
NetExp installing frame ..................................... Eng 3-19
Cabling ........................................... Eng 9-14 Power Consumption
communications settings ................ Eng 9-18 control panel ......................................... Eng 20-3
Supported .............................................. Eng 9-13 Frame .................................................... Eng 20-4
Port Monitor Data File ............................... Eng 17-37 Power Distribution Board ............................ Eng 2-11
Port Monitor, Communication ................... Eng 17-36 Power down, switcher .................................... Eng 4-3
Ports Power Fail indicators ................................... Eng 3-21
Aux Panel Frame ...................................................... Eng 5-3
Echo ............................................. Eng 20-28 Panel ........................................................ Eng 5-3
GPI ............................................... Eng 20-27 Power Failure ............................................... Eng 3-21
Main ............................................. Eng 20-27 Power Supplies ............................................. Eng 2-13
communication, overview ..................... Eng 2-15 Control Panel ...................................... Eng 18-10
Control Panel control panel ......................................... Eng 20-3
AC power ..................................... Eng 20-23 Frame ................................. Eng 18-12, Eng 20-4
aux ................................................ Eng 20-22 Power Supply (Touchscreen) ....................... Eng 3-20
external link ................................. Eng 20-21 Power Supply Failure
remote .......................................... Eng 20-21 Control Panel ........................................ Eng 18-2
DVI ........................................ Eng 2-15, Eng 3-9 troubleshooting ............. Eng 18-2, Eng 18-3
Ethernet ................................................. Eng 2-15 Frame .................................................... Eng 18-6
ethernet (Touchscreen) ........................... Eng 3-9 replacing ................................................ Eng 18-4
External Panel Link .............................. Eng 2-15 Pre-Attach Custom Control ........................ Eng 10-26
Frame Prepare Move Custom Controls ................. Eng 10-20
AC power ..................................... Eng 20-19 Prepare Next (OverDrive) Custom Control Eng 10-19
GPI I/O ......................................... Eng 20-18 Prepare Previous (OverDrive) Custom Control ... Eng
LAN ............................................. Eng 20-19 10-19
panel ............................................. Eng 20-17 Preroll Custom Control .............................. Eng 10-22
peripheral ..................................... Eng 20-17 Preview
frame ..................................................... Eng 2-16 main ........................................................ Eng 8-3
GP I/O ................................................... Eng 2-19 MLE ........................................................ Eng 8-3
GPI/O .................................................... Eng 2-16 output BNC ............................................. Eng 8-4

overlay option ........................................Eng 10-2 Hold .......................................................Eng 5-10
Preview Bus Module ....................................Eng 2-11 Home .....................................................Eng 5-10
Preview CC (OverDrive) Custom Control .Eng 10-19 Install .....................................................Eng 5-10
Preview output Next .......................................................Eng 5-10
main .........................................................Eng 8-3 Pers ........................................................Eng 5-10
Preview output, main ......................................Eng 8-3 Quick Navigation buttons ...............................Eng 5-3
Preview Overlay .........................................Eng 12-30 More ........................................................Eng 5-3
Center setup .........................................Eng 12-34
font color .............................................Eng 12-30 R
Safe Title setup ....................................Eng 12-33 Rate Extra Option .........................................Eng 9-29
Safe Title, naming ...............................Eng 12-34 Rates, Effects Dissolve
Source ID setup ...................................Eng 12-32 default ....................................................Eng 11-5
Time Clock RclTime Extra Option ..................................Eng 9-28
Count Direction ............................Eng 12-36 Read (CG) Custom Control ........................Eng 10-18
Position ........................................Eng 12-35 Read Custom Control .................................Eng 10-21
Reset on Transition ......................Eng 12-35 Rear connectors, frame ...................................Eng 2-7
Reset/Start Time ...........................Eng 12-36 Rear Frame Boards .......................................Eng 4-22
setup .............................................Eng 12-35 Recall
VTR Timecode setup ..........................Eng 12-32 all .........................................................Eng 13-10
Preview Overlay output ..................................Eng 8-3 bus maps ..............................................Eng 13-10
Proc Amps option .........................................Eng 6-13 cameras ................................................Eng 13-10
Processor CC variables ........................................Eng 13-10
frame .....................................................Eng 2-35 cc/macro attachments ..........................Eng 13-10
Video .....................................................Eng 2-35 custom controls ...................................Eng 13-10
Processor, Video ..........................Eng 2-24, Eng 2-26 Factory Defaults ..................................Eng 12-27
Program individual Bus Maps ...........................Eng 13-12
output BNC .............................................Eng 8-4 individual custom control ....................Eng 13-12
Program output Individual Items ..................................Eng 13-11
main .........................................................Eng 8-3 individual memories ............................Eng 13-11
MLE ........................................................Eng 8-3 individual MultiViewer Layouts .........Eng 13-13
Programming BSS4 ......................................Eng 9-17 individual S&T Sequences ..................Eng 13-12
Programming Comtrol DeviceMaster ..........Eng 9-17 individual Shot Box Pages ..................Eng 13-13
Programming control panel functions ........Eng 10-10 installation ...........................................Eng 13-10
Progressive Scan ..........................Eng 2-31, Eng 2-32 memories .............................................Eng 13-10
Progressive Segmented Frames ....................Eng 2-33 multiviewer assignment ......................Eng 13-10
Protocol Extra Option ...................................Eng 9-28 multiviewer layouts .............................Eng 13-10
PS/2 port .......................................................Eng 2-15 option codes ..........................................Eng 6-14
PS/2 ports .....................................................Eng 3-12 personality ...........................................Eng 13-10
PST Audio Level Custom Controls ............Eng 10-17 Register Types .......................................Eng 13-9
PST PATT, definition .....................................Eng 1-5 shot box pages .....................................Eng 13-10
PST, definition ................................................Eng 1-5 squeeze & tease sequences ..................Eng 13-10
Punchpad ........................................................Eng 5-7 VTR clips ............................................Eng 13-10
PV, definition .................................................Eng 1-5 Recall (CG) Custom Control ......................Eng 10-18
Recall DVE Custom Control ......................Eng 10-18
Q Recall Memories
QMD/X Auto Follow ........................................Eng 12-43
4-Keyers option .......................................Eng 2-2 Recall MLE-Store
Query Cmd Extra Option .............................Eng 9-27 Memory Recall Mode, Personality .....Eng 11-12
Quick Bank Select Personality ...................Eng 11-11 Recall Pbus Custom Control ......................Eng 10-19
Quick Module Configuration .......................Eng 17-5 Recall Shot Custom Controls .....................Eng 10-20
Quick Navigation .........................................Eng 5-10 recall variables ............................................Eng 13-10
Aux Bus ................................Eng 5-10, Eng 5-11 recalling assignments from disk .................Eng 13-10
Color Scheme ........................................Eng 5-10 recalling from disk ......................................Eng 13-10
Custom Controls ....................................Eng 5-11 recalling layouts from disk .........................Eng 13-10
Diagnostics ............................................Eng 5-10 Recalling Option Codes ................................Eng 6-15
DVE .......................................................Eng 5-11 Record Custom Control ..............................Eng 10-22
Help .......................................................Eng 5-10 Record Custom Control Shortcut ...............Eng 10-34

Record Time Extra Option ........................... Eng 9-31 source assignment ............................... Eng 12-21
Recording Remote Aux Panel GPI I/O
custom controls ................................... Eng 10-10 programming GPI ............................... Eng 14-12
relative custom controls ...................... Eng 10-13 Remote Aux Panels ...................................... Eng 14-3
Recording custom controls ......................... Eng 10-10 cabling ................................................... Eng 14-7
Redundant Power ......................................... Eng 2-13 com setup .............................................. Eng 14-8
Redundant power ......................................... Eng 3-19 communications connections ................ Eng 14-6
Re-entry GPIs .................................................... Eng 14-11
MLE Button Color .............................. Eng 11-18 installing ................................................ Eng 14-5
Re-entry Depth, Personality ....................... Eng 11-12 Remote Control Port .................................... Eng 2-16
Re-entry Loops, Personality ....................... Eng 11-12 Remote Ports .............................................. Eng 20-21
Reference Removing Button Cap Assembly ................. Eng 3-17
Composite ............................................. Eng 4-11 Removing frame boards ............................... Eng 4-18
connection ............................................. Eng 4-11 Removing the frame door, MD/X .................. Eng 3-4
Input BNCs reset ................................... Eng 4-13 Replace Custom Control ............................ Eng 10-26
Internal .................................................. Eng 4-14 Replacing a Control Panel Module ............ Eng 18-21
Output BNCs reset ................................ Eng 4-13 installing .............................................. Eng 18-22
setting .................................................... Eng 4-11 removing ............................................. Eng 18-21
Tri-Level Sync ...................................... Eng 4-11 Replacing a Power Supply, Panel ................ Eng 18-4
Reference Description Request TC Extra Option ............................. Eng 9-31
Bottom MLE ........................................... Eng 1-4 Resave Last Custom Controls .................... Eng 10-20
Control Panel .......................................... Eng 1-4 Reset
Frame ...................................................... Eng 1-4 All MLEs .............................................. Eng 4-25
Full MLE ................................................. Eng 1-4 Individual MLE ..................................... Eng 4-26
Half MLE ................................................ Eng 1-4 Individual MLEs (1-4) .......................... Eng 4-25
Master Panel ........................................... Eng 1-4 Individual MLEs (5-8) .......................... Eng 4-26
Operator .................................................. Eng 1-4 software ................................................. Eng 4-25
Satellite Panel ......................................... Eng 1-4 system ................................................... Eng 4-24
SDI .......................................................... Eng 1-4 Reset Audio Custom Controls .................... Eng 10-17
Setup ....................................................... Eng 1-4 Reset Fader Custom Controls .................... Eng 10-15
Storage Device ........................................ Eng 1-4 Reset GPI Custom Control ......................... Eng 10-18
Switcher .................................................. Eng 1-4 Reset Input BNCs Format ............................ Eng 4-13
User ......................................................... Eng 1-4 Reset Output BNCs Format ......................... Eng 4-13
Video System .......................................... Eng 1-4 Reset Time Clock Custom Control ............ Eng 10-22
Registers Reset, full ..................................................... Eng 4-24
Bus Maps ........................... Eng 12-28, Eng 13-3 Resetting individual MLEs .......................... Eng 4-25
Camera .................................................. Eng 13-3 Restart
Camera File ......................................... Eng 12-28 control panel ......................................... Eng 4-24
Clip ........................................................ Eng 13-2 switcher ................................................. Eng 4-24
Clips .................................................... Eng 12-28 Resume Custom Control ............................ Eng 10-21
Custom Control Attachment ............... Eng 12-28 Rewind Custom Control ............................. Eng 10-22
Custom Control Attachments ................ Eng 13-3 Rewind DVE Custom Control ................... Eng 10-18
Custom Controls ................ Eng 12-28, Eng 13-2 RGB Color Corrector option ........................ Eng 6-13
Installation ......................... Eng 12-28, Eng 13-2 Ribbon Cable Connector ............................ Eng 18-16
Memory .............................. Eng 12-28, Eng 13-2 Robotic Cam, Input BNC Type ...................... Eng 7-5
MultiViewer Assigment ..... Eng 12-29, Eng 13-3 Robotic Cameras
MultiViewer Layout .......... Eng 12-29, Eng 13-3 Registers ................................................ Eng 13-3
NV-RAM ............................................ Eng 12-28 Robotic System option ................................. Eng 6-13
Personality ......................... Eng 12-27, Eng 13-2 Roll Clip Mode, selecting .......................... Eng 11-13
Shot Box Pages .................. Eng 12-28, Eng 13-3 Roll Clip On-Air Only, selecting ............... Eng 11-13
Squeeze & Tease ................ Eng 12-28, Eng 13-3 Roll GPO ...................................................... Eng 7-24
Switcher .............................................. Eng 12-28 RossTalk
Related publications ....................................... Eng 1-6 ClearAllFB Custom Control ............... Eng 10-21
Relative Custom Controls .......................... Eng 10-11 ClearFB Custom Control . Eng 10-20, Eng 10-21
Remaining storage capacity ........................... Eng 6-8 Down Custom Control ........................ Eng 10-21
Remote audio mixer control Focus Custom Control ........................ Eng 10-21
setup channels and groups .................. Eng 12-21 GPI Custom Control ........................... Eng 10-21

Next Custom Control ..........................Eng 10-21 Seq Take Custom Control ..........................Eng 10-18
Read Custom Control ..........................Eng 10-21 SeqIn Custom Control ................................Eng 10-20
Resume Custom Control .....................Eng 10-21 SeqOut Custom Control .............................Eng 10-20
SeqIn Custom Control .........................Eng 10-20 Sequence Rate
SeqOut Custom Control ......................Eng 10-20 default ....................................................Eng 11-5
Take Custom Control ..........................Eng 10-20 Sequences
TypeInCmd Custom Control ...............Eng 10-21 Recalling individual ............................Eng 13-12
Up Custom Control .............................Eng 10-21 Storing individual ..................................Eng 13-7
Router Follow, Aux Bus ...............................Eng 12-3 Serial numbers, installation ...........Eng 3-2, Eng 6-11
Router option ................................................Eng 6-13 Serial numbers, installing ...............................Eng 6-9
Router, Input BNC Type ................................Eng 7-4 Serial Tally option ........................................Eng 6-13
Routing, video ..............................................Eng 2-20 SerialSwitch Extra Option ............................Eng 9-28
Rsync Failed ...................................................Eng 6-5 Service, customer ...........................................Eng 1-7
RU, definition .................................................Eng 1-5 Set AFV Level Custom Controls ................Eng 10-16
Run A-Z Custom Control Shortcut ............Eng 10-35 Set Folder (CG) Custom Control ................Eng 10-18
Run Custom Control event, insert ................Eng 10-3 Setting Mouse Sensitivity ...........................Eng 11-10
Run From Here Custom Control Command Eng 10-30 Setting Time/Date Automatically ...............Eng 12-38
Run Held Custom Control ..........................Eng 10-23 Setting Time/Date Manually ......................Eng 12-37
Run Held Custom Control Shortcut ...........Eng 10-34 Setting up Input GPI I/O Tallies .................Eng 12-14
Run Held Group Custom Control ...............Eng 10-23 Setting up Input GPI I/Os ...........................Eng 12-11
Run Held X Custom Control Shortcut .......Eng 10-34 Memory Recall event ..........................Eng 12-11
Run On-Air CC (OverDrive) Custom Control ..... Eng Run Custom Control ...........................Eng 12-13
10-19 Transition event ...................................Eng 12-12
Run Sequence Custom Control ..................Eng 10-24 Trigger Signal Priority ........................Eng 12-13
Run Single Custom Control Event .............Eng 10-30 Setting up Output GPI I/Os ........................Eng 12-15
Rundown (OverDrive) Custom Control .....Eng 10-19 Trigger Signal ......................................Eng 12-15
Settings
S Extra Options ........................................Eng 9-25
S.M.A.R.T. warnings ..................................Eng 17-12 Setup
Safe Title Custom Control ..........................Eng 10-23 auto key ...................................................Eng 7-8
Safe Title, Preview Overlay Naming .........Eng 12-34 BNC types ...............................................Eng 8-2
Safe Title, Preview Overlay Setup .............Eng 12-33 Center Preview Overlay ......................Eng 12-34
Satellite Panel communications ......................................Eng 9-1
reference description ...............................Eng 1-4 custom controls .....................................Eng 10-1
Scan Global-Store auto key .............................Eng 7-8
Interlaced ..............................Eng 2-31, Eng 2-32 GPI Outputs ...........................................Eng 7-24
Progressive ...........................Eng 2-31, Eng 2-32 MLE-Store auto key ................................Eng 7-8
Progressive Segmented Frames .............Eng 2-33 network ....................................................Eng 4-5
Scan Frequency ............................................Eng 2-33 Preview Overlay ..................................Eng 12-30
Scan Lines ....................................................Eng 2-31 Preview Overlay font color .................Eng 12-30
Scan, Frequency ...........................................Eng 2-33 Safe Title Preview Overlay .................Eng 12-33
Screen capture menu process .......................Eng 5-19 Source ID Preview Overlay ................Eng 12-32
SD DVE option ............................................Eng 6-13 tallies .....................................................Eng 7-22
SD, definition .................................................Eng 1-5 Time Clock Preview Overlay ..............Eng 12-35
SDI VTR Timecode Preview Overlay ........Eng 12-32
reference description ...............................Eng 1-4 Setup, completing .........................................Eng 12-1
Select Delay Extra Option ............................Eng 9-28 Setups
Select Memory Bank event, insert ...............Eng 10-3 reference description ...............................Eng 1-4
Selected Bttns User Color ..........................Eng 11-18 Shaped, alpha ..................................................Eng 7-7
Selected Xpt User Color .............................Eng 11-18 SHFT ............................................................Eng 7-14
Selecting Aux Buses .....................................Eng 12-2 Shift ..............................................................Eng 7-16
Selection Area ................................................Eng 5-6 Shift Locking Personality Setting .......Eng 11-13
Selection Area, menu .....................................Eng 5-6 Shift Locking
Selection knobs ...............................................Eng 5-3 Personality setting ...............................Eng 11-13
Send Tries Extra Option ...............................Eng 9-31 Shortcuts
Seq Next Custom Control ...........................Eng 10-18 custom controls ...................................Eng 10-34
Seq Previous Custom Control ....................Eng 10-18 Bank .............................................Eng 10-34

Pause/Hold ................................... Eng 10-34 MLEs in MD Mode ............................... Eng 6-12
Record .......................................... Eng 10-34 MLEs in SD mode ................................ Eng 6-12
Run A-Z ....................................... Eng 10-35 Monitor Wall ......................................... Eng 6-12
Run Held ...................................... Eng 10-34 MultiDSK .............................................. Eng 6-12
Run Held X .................................. Eng 10-34 MultiViewer .......................................... Eng 6-12
Stop CC ........................................ Eng 10-35 Peripheral Bus II ................................... Eng 6-12
Stop Held X ................................. Eng 10-35 Proc Amps ............................................. Eng 6-13
Shot Box RGB Color Corrector ............................ Eng 6-13
Shot Box Module ................. Eng 10-6, Eng 15-2 Robotic System ..................................... Eng 6-13
Soft Shot Box ........................................ Eng 10-5 Router .................................................... Eng 6-13
Shot Box Modules ........................................ Eng 15-1 SD DVE ................................................ Eng 6-13
pages ..................................................... Eng 15-3 Serial Tally ............................................ Eng 6-13
copying .......................................... Eng 15-4 Small Audio Mixer ............................... Eng 6-13
moving ........................................... Eng 15-4 SmartConversion .................................. Eng 6-13
naming ........................................... Eng 15-4 Still Store, external ............................... Eng 6-13
setup ...................................................... Eng 15-2 Video Server Control ............................ Eng 6-13
Shot Box Pages VTR Remote Control ............................ Eng 6-13
Defaulting ........................................... Eng 12-28 Software Ver Extra Option .......................... Eng 9-26
Recalling individual ............................ Eng 13-13 Software Version .......................................... Eng 17-2
Registers ................................................ Eng 13-3 Source ............................................................. Eng 7-3
Storing individual ................................. Eng 13-8 Names ..................................................... Eng 7-2
ShotOffset Extra Option ............................... Eng 9-29 Physical BNC .......................................... Eng 7-3
Show CC’s on Key Bus, Personality setting Eng 11-13 Setup
Show Last CC Pressed, Personality setting Eng 11-14 input types ........................................ Eng 7-4
Show Last Mem Recalled, Personality setting ..... Eng Tally ........................................................ Eng 7-3
11-14 Type ........................................................ Eng 7-3
Show on Preview Extra Option .................... Eng 9-26 Video Mode ............................................ Eng 7-3
Simulate GPI Custom Control ................... Eng 10-19 Source ID, Preview Overlay Setup ............ Eng 12-32
Skins ............................................................. Eng 5-12 Source Name Extra Option .......................... Eng 9-29
Slot 1 Extra Option ...................................... Eng 9-29 Special
Slot, System Information Page ....................... Eng 6-7 custom control Functions .................... Eng 10-15
Small Audio Mixer option ........................... Eng 6-13 custom control functions ....................... Eng 10-2
SmartConversion option .............................. Eng 6-13 Specifications ............................................... Eng 20-1
SmartConvertion .......................................... Eng 16-1 Button Insert Films ............................... Eng 3-17
Soft key labels ................................................ Eng 1-3 control panel dimensions ...................... Eng 20-6
Software frame dimensions .................................. Eng 20-6
options, installing .................................. Eng 6-11 general ................................................... Eng 20-3
reset ....................................................... Eng 4-25 LTC timecode ..................................... Eng 20-15
upgrade procedure ................................... Eng 6-3 operating environment .......................... Eng 20-5
Software Licenses power consumption
Apache License ..................................... Eng 22-8 control panel .................................. Eng 20-3
BSD License ......................................... Eng 22-7 frame .............................................. Eng 20-4
Expat License ...................................... Eng 22-10 power supplies
GNU General Public License ............... Eng 22-2 control panel .................................. Eng 20-3
Imlib2 .................................................. Eng 22-11 frame .............................................. Eng 20-4
Jiffy ..................................................... Eng 22-12 standard components ............................. Eng 20-2
Lesser GNU Public License .................. Eng 22-4 timing .................................................. Eng 20-15
Software Options video formats ...................................... Eng 20-14
Audio Server Control ............................ Eng 6-12 Video Input Signal .............................. Eng 20-15
AuxKeys ............................................... Eng 6-12 Video Input Signal Characteristics ..... Eng 20-16
Character Generator .............................. Eng 6-12 video processing ................................. Eng 20-14
DVE Send and Remote Control ............ Eng 6-12 Squeeze & Tease
Editor Interface ..................................... Eng 6-12 Defaulting ........................................... Eng 12-28
Extra Half MLE .................................... Eng 6-12 Mode, Personality setting ..................... Eng 12-6
Large Audio Mixer ............................... Eng 6-12 Registers ................................................ Eng 13-3
MD DVE ............................................... Eng 6-12 Squeeze & Tease Carrier .............................. Eng 2-13
Mix/DSK ............................................... Eng 6-12 Squeeze & Tease Carrier Board, overview . Eng 2-27,

Eng 2-28 Register Types .......................................Eng 13-4
Squeeze & Tease MD Carrier Board ............Eng 2-35 shot box pages .......................................Eng 13-5
Src & Dest Base Extra Option ......................Eng 9-29 squeeze & tease sequences ....................Eng 13-5
Standby Off Custom Control ......................Eng 10-22 VTR clips ..............................................Eng 13-5
Standby On Custom Control ......................Eng 10-22 Store Mode
Start Extra Option .........................................Eng 9-29 1-Time1-Time, Store Mode ................Eng 11-14
Static Discharge ..............................................Eng 3-2 Hold .....................................................Eng 11-14
Status Icons .................................................Eng 17-12 Personality setting ...............................Eng 11-14
Status Interval Extra Option .........................Eng 9-31 Store Pbus Custom Control ........................Eng 10-19
Status Menu Icons ......................................Eng 17-12 store variables ...............................................Eng 13-5
Status of FlexDevice Drivers .........................Eng 9-4 Store/Recall option codes .............................Eng 6-14
Obsolete ...................................................Eng 9-4 storing assignments to disk ...........................Eng 13-5
OK ...........................................................Eng 9-4 storing layouts to disk ...................................Eng 13-5
Unsupported ............................................Eng 9-4 storing to disk ...............................................Eng 13-5
Status Tries Extra Option .............................Eng 9-31 Structure, CPU ..............................................Eng 2-35
Status, Switcher ..........................................Eng 17-10 Support brackets, frame ..................................Eng 3-5
Status, System Information Page ....................Eng 6-8 Support, technical ...........................................Eng 1-7
Still Store (external), Input BNC Type ..........Eng 7-4 Swap Button ...................................................Eng 5-6
Still Store option, external ............................Eng 6-13 Swap Keyers Cut & Auto ...........................Eng 11-14
Stop Audio Server Custom Controls ..........Eng 10-17 Swap Program and Preset Buses ................Eng 11-14
Stop CC Custom Control Shortcut .............Eng 10-35 Swap Trans Cut & Auto, Personality .........Eng 11-15
Stop Custom Control .................Eng 10-4, Eng 10-22 Swapping Custom Controls ........................Eng 10-32
Stop DVE Custom Control .........................Eng 10-18 Switch on Field .............................................Eng 8-13
Stop Held X Custom Control Shortcut .......Eng 10-35 Switcher
Stop Held XCustom Control ......................Eng 10-23 Defaulting ............................................Eng 12-28
Stop Other CC Custom Control ..................Eng 10-24 reference description ...............................Eng 1-4
Stop Time Clock Custom Control ..............Eng 10-22 software upgrade .....................................Eng 6-3
Stopping FlexDevice Drivers .........................Eng 9-5 standard components .............................Eng 20-2
Storage Capacity Page ....................................Eng 6-8 Switcher Basics ..............................................Eng 2-1
current usage ...........................................Eng 6-8 Switcher Format ...........................................Eng 4-11
device ......................................................Eng 6-8 Switcher Logs .............................................Eng 17-38
percent used .............................................Eng 6-8 Switcher Personality .....................................Eng 11-2
remaining .................................................Eng 6-8 Assign MLE ..........................................Eng 11-3
total size ..................................................Eng 6-8 Audio Cut Only .....................................Eng 11-3
Storage Capacity, Web Interface ....................Eng 6-8 Audio Transition ...................................Eng 11-3
Storage Device Auto Follow
reference description ...............................Eng 1-4 Custom Controls ..........................Eng 12-40
Storage, files .................................................Eng 13-1 Editors ..........................................Eng 12-40
Store Panel .............................................Eng 12-40
all ...........................................................Eng 13-5 Auto Key Alpha ....................................Eng 11-3
bus maps ................................................Eng 13-5 Auto Recall ............................................Eng 11-3
cameras ..................................................Eng 13-5 Auto Remove Key .................................Eng 11-4
CC variables ..........................................Eng 13-5 Bank 0 Lit ..............................................Eng 11-4
cc/macro attachments ............................Eng 13-5 BKGD Double-Press .............................Eng 11-4
custom controls .....................................Eng 13-5 Camera Grab Time ................................Eng 11-4
individual Bus Maps .............................Eng 13-7 CC Global Recall ..................................Eng 11-5
individual custom control ......................Eng 13-7 CC/Macro Attachments .........................Eng 11-4
Individual Items ...................Eng 13-5, Eng 13-6 Clear Bus Hold ......................................Eng 11-5
individual memories ..............................Eng 13-6 Default MLE Map .................................Eng 12-5
individual MultiViewer Layouts ...........Eng 13-8 Default Trans Rate
individual S&T Sequences ....................Eng 13-7 Active .............................................Eng 11-5
individual Shot Box Pages ....................Eng 13-8 Eff Dissolve ...................................Eng 11-5
installation .............................................Eng 13-5 FTB ................................................Eng 11-5
memories ...............................................Eng 13-5 Keyer ..............................................Eng 11-5
multiviewer assignments .......................Eng 13-5 MLE ...............................................Eng 11-5
multiviewer layouts ...............................Eng 13-5 Sequence ........................................Eng 11-5
personality .............................................Eng 13-5 Double-Press Rate .................................Eng 11-6

DSK Auto Cut ....................................... Eng 11-6 reset ....................................................... Eng 4-24
Editor Pattern Codes ............................. Eng 11-7 turn on power .......................................... Eng 4-2
Editor Trans Rate .................................. Eng 11-7 System Architecture ....................................... Eng 2-1
Execute Camera Move on Trans ........... Eng 11-7 System Cards
FTB Display Mode .............. Eng 11-8, Eng 16-7 XFX Extra Effects ................................ Eng 2-29
Global Memory Number Entry ............. Eng 11-8 System Information Page ............................... Eng 6-7
Global-Store 4 Mode ............................ Eng 11-8 card .......................................................... Eng 6-7
Isolate MultiDSKs ................................ Eng 11-8 date .......................................................... Eng 6-8
Key Cut then Fade ................................ Eng 11-9 function ................................................... Eng 6-7
Keypad Clip IDs Entry ......................... Eng 11-9 slot ........................................................... Eng 6-7
Keypad DVE Num Entry ...................... Eng 11-9 status ....................................................... Eng 6-8
Keypad Still Num Entry ....................... Eng 11-9 version ..................................................... Eng 6-8
Keypad Wipe Num Entry ................... Eng 11-10 System Permissions ...................................... Eng 4-10
lock/unlock .......................................... Eng 11-25 System Power button ..................................... Eng 5-3
Matte Limit ......................................... Eng 11-10 System Time/Date
Memory Bank Cycle ........................... Eng 11-10 setting automatically ........................... Eng 12-38
Mouse Sensitivity ............................... Eng 11-10 setting manually .................................. Eng 12-37
Panel Sleep Time ................................ Eng 11-11
Pbus Memory ...................................... Eng 11-11 T
Quick Bank Select .............................. Eng 11-11 Take & Prepare (OverDrive) Custom Control ..... Eng
Recall Global-Store Memory Mode ... Eng 11-11 10-19
Recall MLE-Store Memory Mode ...... Eng 11-12 Take Custom Control ................................. Eng 10-20
Recall WhiteFlash ............................... Eng 11-12 Take Out (CG) Custom Control ................. Eng 10-18
Re-entry Depth .................................... Eng 11-12 Take XPT Custom Control ........................ Eng 10-21
Re-entry Loops ................................... Eng 11-12 Take, Custom Control ................................ Eng 10-18
Roll Clip Mode ................................... Eng 11-13 Tallies
Roll Clip On-Air Only ........................ Eng 11-13 GPI I/O Inputs ..................................... Eng 12-14
Shift Locking ...................................... Eng 11-13 Input BNC ............................................. Eng 7-22
Show CC’s on Key Bus ...................... Eng 11-13 MLE ...................................................... Eng 8-10
Show Last CC Pressed ........................ Eng 11-14 Ports ...................................................... Eng 2-18
Show Last Mem Recalled ................... Eng 11-14 Sources .................................................... Eng 7-3
Squeeze & Tease Mode ........................ Eng 12-6 TargetMachine Extra Option ....................... Eng 9-31
Store Mode .......................................... Eng 11-14 TD, definition ................................................. Eng 1-5
Swap Trans Cut & Auto ...................... Eng 11-15 Technical support ........................................... Eng 1-7
Time Clock Source ............................. Eng 11-15 Time Clock
Time Clock UMD Number ................. Eng 11-15 Count Direction ................................... Eng 12-36
UltraChrome custom control functions ....................... Eng 10-2
default color ................................. Eng 11-15 Position ............................................... Eng 12-35
default edge width ........................ Eng 11-15 Preview Overlay Setup ....................... Eng 12-35
default mode ................................ Eng 11-15 Reset on Transition ............................. Eng 12-35
Switcher Power Down ................................... Eng 4-3 Reset/Start Time ................................. Eng 12-36
Switcher Reference Setup ............................ Eng 4-11 Time Clock Source, Personality ................. Eng 11-15
Switcher Restart ........................................... Eng 4-24 Time Clock UMD Number, Personality .... Eng 11-15
Switcher Status ........................................... Eng 17-10 Time Code Input Overview .......................... Eng 2-16
Communication ................................... Eng 17-14 Time/Date
Status ........................................... Eng 17-14 setting automatically ........................... Eng 12-38
Complete Status .................................. Eng 17-10 setting manually .................................. Eng 12-37
Non-Sync ............................................ Eng 17-16 TimeOut Extra Option ................................. Eng 9-31
Version Information .............................. Eng 17-2 Timeout Extra Option .................................. Eng 9-26
Vision OS ........................................ Eng 6-9 Timing Specifications ................................ Eng 20-15
Warnings ............................................. Eng 17-11 Title, menu ..................................................... Eng 5-6
Switcher, hard restart ...................... Eng 6-3, Eng 6-6 Total storage capacity .................................... Eng 6-8
Switches Touchscreen
control panel configuration ................. Eng 20-25 lower display region ................................ Eng 5-3
frame configuration .............. Eng 20-8, Eng 20-9 power button ........................................... Eng 5-3
System upper display region ................................ Eng 5-3
functional check .................................... Eng 4-17 Touchscreen Calibration .............................. Eng 17-4

Touchscreen Display ......................................Eng 2-7 Using
adjusting ..................................................Eng 5-4 custom control, basics .........................Eng 10-10
Touchscreen Display port .............................Eng 2-15 Using Frame Rates .......................................Eng 2-33
Touchscreen installation .................................Eng 3-8
Touchscreen interface .....................................Eng 5-2 V
Transition (OverDrive) Custom Control ....Eng 10-19 Variabel Pause CC Custom Control .. Eng 10-24, Eng
Transition Keys Custom Control ................Eng 10-23 10-37
Transition Module ........................................Eng 2-11 VCR, definition ..............................................Eng 1-5
Auto Follow ........................................Eng 12-42 Verification of Inputs ...................................Eng 4-16
Transport Commands .................................Eng 10-36 Verification of Output BNCs .........................Eng 8-5
Trigger GPI Custom Control ......................Eng 10-19 Version Extra Option ....................................Eng 9-25
Trigger Pbus Custom Control .....................Eng 10-20 Version upgrade, software ..............................Eng 6-3
TxRx Errors ................................................Eng 17-14 Version, software ..........................................Eng 17-2
Type, Source ...................................................Eng 7-3 Version, System Information Page .................Eng 6-8
TypeInCmd Custom Control ......................Eng 10-21 Video Formats ............................................Eng 20-14
explained ...............................................Eng 2-31
U Input BNC ...............................................Eng 7-5
UltraChrome setting ....................................................Eng 4-11
Default Color, Personality ...................Eng 11-15 Video Input Board ........................................Eng 2-12
Default Edge Width, Personality .........Eng 11-15 10 input ..................................................Eng 2-12
Default Mode, Personality ..................Eng 11-15 16 input with crosspoint ........................Eng 2-12
Unlock Installation .....................................Eng 12-45 Video Input Connections ..............................Eng 3-13
Unlock Personality .....................................Eng 11-25 Video Input Signal Characteristics .... Eng 20-15, Eng
Unshaped, alpha .............................................Eng 7-6 20-16
Up Custom Control ....................................Eng 10-21 Video Input Worksheet ...............Eng 21-2, Eng 21-9
UP ONE button ..............................................Eng 5-2 Video Inputs
Up/Down Converters ....................................Eng 16-1 configuring types .....................................Eng 7-4
Bus Disabling ........................................Eng 16-5 naming .....................................................Eng 7-2
Conversion Loop ...................................Eng 16-2 Video Mode, Source .......................................Eng 7-3
activation ........................................Eng 16-2 Video Output Board .....................................Eng 2-12
delay ...............................................Eng 16-3 Video Output Connections ...........................Eng 3-15
setup ...............................................Eng 16-2 Video Processing Specifications ................Eng 20-14
video formats .................................Eng 16-3 Video Processor Board Eng 2-13, Eng 2-24, Eng 2-26
Locking Conversion Loops ...................Eng 16-6 functionality ..........................................Eng 2-35
Switcher Setup ......................................Eng 16-5 Video Routing ..............................................Eng 2-20
Upgrade procedure .........................................Eng 6-3 Crosspoint .............................................Eng 2-20
Upgrade Status Squeeze & Tease Carrier ......Eng 2-27, Eng 2-28
Done ........................................................Eng 6-8 Video Processor ...................Eng 2-24, Eng 2-26
Failed .......................................................Eng 6-8 Video Server Clip Setup .............................Eng 12-17
In Progress ...............................................Eng 6-8 Video Server Control option ........................Eng 6-13
No Status .................................................Eng 6-8 Video Server, Input Type, see VTR
Pending ....................................................Eng 6-8 Video Servers
Upgrading PMC .........................................Eng 18-23 clip timecode, grab ..............................Eng 12-20
Upper Display Region ....................................Eng 5-3 custom control functions .......................Eng 10-2
USB inpoint/outpoint ...................................Eng 12-18
cable (Touchscreen) ................................Eng 3-9 Video system
ports ......................................Eng 2-15, Eng 2-16 reference description ...............................Eng 1-4
software upgrade .....................................Eng 6-3 Video, Input BNC Type .................................Eng 7-5
Use Break Extra Option ...............................Eng 9-27 Vision 1
User control panel ............................................Eng 2-6
reference description ...............................Eng 1-4 Vision 1M
User Colors .................................................Eng 11-18 control panel ............................................Eng 2-5
Custom Control Buttons ......................Eng 11-18 Vision 2
Re-entry Buttons .................................Eng 11-18 control panel ............................................Eng 2-5
Selected Buttons ..................................Eng 11-18 Vision 2M
Selected Xpt ........................................Eng 11-18 control panel ............................................Eng 2-4
Xpt Colors ...........................................Eng 11-19 Vision 2X

control panel ........................................... Eng 2-3
Vision 3
Vision 3M
Vision 4
Vision OS Version ......................................... Eng 6-9
VNC Viewer .............................................. Eng 17-31
VTR Clip Setup .......................................... Eng 12-17
VTR POL On-air Display .......................... Eng 11-15
VTR POL Prep’d Display .......................... Eng 11-16
VTR Remote Control option ........................ Eng 6-13
VTR Timecode, Preview Overlay Setup .... Eng 12-32
VTR, definition .............................................. Eng 1-5
VTR, Input Source Type ................................ Eng 7-4
VTRs
custom control functions ....................... Eng 10-2
Custom Device ...................................... Eng 9-21
W
Wait nFields Extra Option ........................... Eng 9-32
Wake Up On Command ............ Eng 11-8, Eng 11-16
Warnings .................................................... Eng 17-11
Status Icons ......................................... Eng 17-12
Web Interface
Account, managing ................................. Eng 6-2
downloading to Frame ........................ Eng 13-15
Frame .................................................. Eng 13-15
storage capacity ....................................... Eng 6-8
system information page ......................... Eng 6-7
upgrading the switcher ............................ Eng 6-3
uploading to Frame ............................. Eng 13-15
Web Issues ..................................................... Eng 4-8
WhiteFlash
Memory Recall Mode, Personality ..... Eng 11-12
Worksheets ................................................... Eng 21-1
Bus Map ................................................ Eng 21-6
Communications ................................. Eng 21-11
Conversion Loop ................................. Eng 21-20
Custom Control ................................... Eng 21-18
Custom Device Protocol ..................... Eng 21-22
GPI I/Os
Aux Panel ..................................... Eng 21-15
Input ............................................. Eng 21-13
Output .......................................... Eng 21-14
Video Input .......................... Eng 21-2, Eng 21-9
X
XFX Extra Effects Card ............................... Eng 2-29
Xpts Extra Option ........................................ Eng 9-29
Z
Z Speed Extra Option ................................... Eng 9-29
Zoom Speed Extra Option ............................ Eng 9-29


Vision Engineering Manual (4800DR 401)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vision Engineering Manual (4800DR 401)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vision Engineering Manual (4800DR 401)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ross Video Limited

Software Issue: v18.0 MD

Send Us Your Comments

Important Safety Instructions

United States of America

General Handling Guidelines

A Word About Static Discharge

General Business Office: (+1) 613 • 652 • 4886

Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Contents • i

Physical Installation and Cabling 3

Initial Setup and Verification 4

ii • Contents Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Using the Menu System 5

Software Upgrades and Options 6

Input Source Configuration and Check 7

Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Contents • iii

Video Output Configuration and Check 8

Basic Communications Setup 9

iv • Contents Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Contents • v

File and Setup Storage 13

vi • Contents Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

SmartConversion and Up/Down Converters 16

Switcher Calibration and Diagnostics 17

Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Contents • vii

Appendix A. Menu Trees 19

viii • Contents Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Contents • ix

Appendix D. Software Licenses 22

Appendix E. Custom Device Protocols 23

x • Contents Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Introduction • Eng 1–1

Eng 1–2 • Introduction Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Introduction • Eng 1–3

Eng 1–4 • Introduction Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Table 1.1 Abbreviations used in this Manual

Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Introduction • Eng 1–5

Eng 1–6 • Introduction Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Introduction • Eng 1–7

Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD) Switcher Basics • Eng 2–1

Vision Control Panel

Vision 4 Control Panel

TRANSITION MEMORY SYSTEM KEYERS

CUT CUT CUT CUT

MEMORY SYSTEM TRANSITION KEYERS

CUT CUT CUT CUT

PREVIEW PREVIEW OVERLAY FADE TO BLACK FRAMES USB

11 MLE 1 MLE 2 MLE 3 MLE 4

TRANSITION KEYERS GLOBAL MEMORY POSITIONER

BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4

DISS WIPE DVE SEQ

Figure 2.1 Vision 4 Control Panel (4-Keyer Shown)

Vision 3 Control Panel

Eng 2–2 • Switcher Basics Vision Engineering Manual (v18.0 MD)

MEMORY SYSTEM TRANSITION KEYERS

CUT CUT CUT CUT

PREVIEW PREVIEW OVERLAY FADE TO BLACK FRAMES USB

11 MLE 1 MLE 2 MLE 3

TRANSITION KEYERS GLOBAL MEMORY POSITIONER